R&S R MLx
Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
System Manual
System Manual
Broadcasting
2501.0099.32
.
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&SMLx.
.
.
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Safety instructions
2 Design and Characteristics
2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 System description and architecture . . . . . .
2.2.1 N+0 configuration systems. . . . . . . .
2.2.1.1 Transmitter DVB-T/T2 . . . . .
2.2.1.2 Gap Filler . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1.3 Retransmitter DVB-T . . . . .
2.2.2 N+1 redundant configurantion systems.
2.2.2.1 Transmitter DVB-T/T2 . . . . .
2.2.2.2 Gap Filler . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2.3 Retransmitter DVB-T . . . . .
2.3 System limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
9
9
9
11
12
13
13
15
16
17
3 Installation
18
3.1 Unpacking and Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.1.1 Equipment Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.1.2 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.3 Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.3.1 Insert a module in subrack with back panel . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.3.2 Remove a module from subrack with back panel . . . . . 19
3.1.3.3 Insert a GPS Receiver Module into the GPS Basic Unit . . 20
3.1.3.4 Remove a GPS Receiver Module from the GPS Basic Unit 20
3.2 Connecting Cables / Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.2.1 Connecting cables for Digital TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.2.1.1 ASI Inputs of Transmitter DVB-T/T2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.2.1.2 TS over IP Inputs of Transmitter DVB-T/T2 . . . . . . . . . 20
3.2.1.3 Satellite Inputs of Transmitter DVB-T/T2 . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2.1.4 RF Inputs of Gap Filler / Retransmitter DVB-T . . . . . . . 21
3.2.1.5 Reference signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2.2 Connecting internal cables of N+0 systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.2.2.1 Transmitter DVB-T/T2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.2.2.2 Gap Filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2.2.3 Retransmitter DVB-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.3 Connecting internal cables for N+1 redundant systems. . . . . . . . 30
3.2.3.1 Transmitter DVB-T/T2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.2.3.2 Gap Filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.2.3.3 Retransmitter DVB-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.2.4 Connecting the antenna system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.2.5 Notes on the AC Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
1
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
3.3 Rack integration and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Commissioning
4.1 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Connecting user web interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Log on to the Management Module via web browser
4.4 Ethernet interface configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5 Operation
5.1 Web interface description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1.1 Menu Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1.2 Menu Configuration > System . . . .
5.1.1.3 Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1.4 Menu Summary . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1.5 Menu Configuration > Relay/alarms .
5.1.1.6 Menu Configuration > DVB-T Receiver
5.1.1.7 Menu Configuration > Modules . . . .
5.1.1.8 Menu Configuration > General config.
5.1.1.9 Menu Alarms > Alarms log . . . . . .
5.1.1.10 Menu Alarms > Status/Configuration .
5.1.1.11 Menu Alarms > General config. . . . .
5.1.2 MLx Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3 MLx Transmitter DVB-T2 . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.4 MLx Gap Filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.4.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.4.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.4.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.5 MLx Retransmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.5.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.5.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.5.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.6 MLx GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.6.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.6.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.6.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.7 MLx N+1 Switch Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.7.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.7.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.7.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.8 MLx IP-ASI Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.8.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.8.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.8.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.9 MLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.9.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.9.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
43
46
51
52
53
54
54
56
56
57
62
64
65
66
66
66
67
67
67
68
68
70
71
72
72
75
77
78
78
79
80
81
81
82
83
84
84
85
86
87
87
88
89
90
90
91
92
93
93
94
2
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
5.1.9.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 UMTS/3G-Modem interface configuration
5.2.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Monitoring and Control via SNMP . . . .
5.4 DVB-T Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 95
. 96
. 96
. 98
. 101
. 103
6 Maintenance
105
6.1 Firmware/Software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.1.1 Update of all modules of the system from a ZIP file (Browser-based) 107
6.1.2 Software update of Management (Browser-based) . . . . . . . . . 109
6.1.3 Broadcast Firmware update of modules (Browser-based) . . . . . . 110
6.1.4 Individually Firmware update of modules (Browser-based) . . . . . 112
6.2 Cleaning of modules and system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Hardware Reset . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 Software Reset . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 Management Reset . . . . . .
7.2.4 GPS Receiver Hardware Reset
114
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8 Service
8.1 Change of the output channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Substitution of spare modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 Power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2 Transmitter DVB-T/T2 / Retransmitter DVB-T / Gap Filler
8.2.3 Management Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.4 GPS Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.5 GPS Receiver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.6 N+1 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.7 IP-ASI Converter and DVB-S/S2 Receiver . . . . . . . .
8.2.8 RF Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 Increase / decrease modules in a system . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.1 Increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.2 Decrease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 Management battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5 Substitution spare fans of a module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6 Change of fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7 Saving and Restoring Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . .
8.8 Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
114
115
115
115
115
116
117
117
121
121
122
123
123
124
125
126
127
128
128
128
129
130
131
132
133
Appendix
136
Spare part lists
137
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
3
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Safety instructions
1 Safety instructions
INTRODUCTION
The equipment described in this manual is designed to be used by adequately trained
staff only. The adjustment, maintenance and repair of this equipment must be carried out
by suitably qualified personnel with detailed knowledge of it.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Terms of installation:
• Please read the manual before handling or connecting the equipment.
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose the unit to rain or humidity.
• Do not remove the lid of the power supply without disconnecting from the supply
network.
• Do not obstruct the ventilation slots of the equipment.
• Allow clearance around the equipment to provide adequate ventilation.
• The device should not be exposed to falling or splashing water. No objects or
containers filled with water should be near the equipment if there is not sufficient
protection.
• Do not place the equipment near sources of heat or high humidity environments.
• Do not put the equipment where it can be subject of strong vibrations or shocks.
• The device must be installed in a rack with a metal (ground) plate below the subrack
to avoid dripping in case of short circuit or fire.
• Air circulation below subrack must be free to avoid overheating.
– No operation as tabletop unit.
– 1HU free below subrack.
Operation Safe equipment:
• The supply voltage of this product is 196VAC - 264VAC at 50/60Hz .
• Do not connect power until installation is complete.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
4
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Safety instructions
• Connect the grounding of the power supply (located at the rear) to the ground
connection of the facility by a braided wire mesh.
• Operation allowed only under responsability of electrically qualified persons and
restricted access area.
Safety regulations for batteries:
• This equipement houses a battery containing harmful substances that must not be
disposed of as normal household waste.
• Replace the batteries only by the recommended type.
• Dispose of the used batteries in the proper containers.
LI-ION
Operating conditions, positions and locations:
The product should only be operated in the operating conditions, positions and locations
specified by the manufacturer such that ventilation is not obstructed. Non-observance of
the manufacturer specifications can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious or (under
certain circumstances) fatal injury. All work must be performed in compliance with the
local or country-specific safety and accident prevention regulations.
1. Unless otherwise agreed, the following points apply for Rohde & Schwarz products:
(a) Operating position: housing base at bottom
(b) IP degree of protection: 2X
(c) Pollution degree: 2
(d) For indoor use only
(e) Operation up to 2000 m above sea level
(f) Transport up to 4500 m above sea level
(g) Tolerance for nominal voltage: ± 15 %
(h) Tolerance for nominal frequency: ± 5 %
2. Do not stand the product on surfaces, vehicles, shelves or tables that are not suitable for weight or stability reasons. When mounting and securing the product on/to
objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves), always follow the installation instructions from the manufacturer. Persons can be injured or even killed if installation is
not performed in the way described in the product documentation.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
5
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Safety instructions
3. Do not place the product on appliances that generate heat (e.g. radiators and fan
heaters). The ambient temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature
specified in the product documentation or in the data sheet. Overheating of the
product can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious or (under certain circumstances) fatal injury.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
6
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Design and Characteristics
2 Design and Characteristics
2.1 Overview
The R&S MLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter system consists of a 5HU x 19"
rackmount chassis that provides slots for up to 8 different modules that are interconnected
via the system´s backplane. Each system can include one power supply unit (or two in
case of redundant power supply option), one or more transmitter modules (Gap Fillers,
DVB-T Transmitters, DVB-T2 Transmitters or DVB-T Retransmitters) and a management
module.
The transmitting modules on a system function independently of one another, but they
share the power supply and the management module.
An MLx system can optionally incorporate other elements like GPS units, RF splitter, N+1
switch unit, etc, which are implemented as separate 1HUx19"devices, and powered by
the same power supply modules included on the main 5HUx19 subrack.
MLx devices use broadband technology, which allows the frequency to be changed over
the entire UHF band.
MLx Transmitters can be operated in single frequency networks (SFN) or multiple frequency networks (MFN) and with modulation standards DVB-T and DVB-T2.
MLx DVB-T2 Transmitters are provided with a Non Linear Digital Predistorter (DPD).
MLx Gap Fillers can incorporate an echo canceller for easy installation in single frequency networks. There are two hardware options Standard Echo Cancellation and
Enhanced Echo Cancellation.
The input to the MLx Gap fillers can optionally come from an RF splitter that can distribute the signal from the receiving antenna into the Gap Filler modules input, slightly
amplifying it before entering the Gap fillers.
The input to the MLx Transmitters can optionally come from an IP-ASI Converter or from
a DVB-S/S2 Receiver in order to provide the system with TSoIP inputs or with satellite
inputs.
The nominal output powers of the devices are 1W, 5W and 10W.
GPS Basic Unit is responsible for generating and managing the switching of the synchronization signals (10MHz and 1PPS) from one of two redundant GPS receiver modules.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
7
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Design and Characteristics
Overview
This unit is also responsible for distributing the synchronization signals to the system.
Each individual transmitting module on the system can be managed (internal configuration and measures) both locally and remotely via Web Interface. Additionally an External
Programmer may be used locally for specific tasks. For remote management the Management Module, that provides several communication interfaces (SNMP control, UMTS
interface, etc), is used.
Redundant N+1 systems can be built adding to the system an optional N+1 Switch Unit.
About This Manual
This system manual describes a R&S MLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter system composed by the following devices, each one of them described in detail in its particular instrument manual:
• MLx Basic Unit.
• MLx Power Supply.
• MLx Transmitter DVB-T.
• MLx Transmitter DVB-T2.
• MLx Gap Filler.
• MLx Retransmitter DVB-T.
• MLx Management Module.
• MLx GPS Basic Unit.
• MLx GPS Receiver Module.
• MLx RF Splitter.
• MLx N+1 Switch Unit.
• MLx IP-ASI Converter.
• MLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver.
• MLx External Programmer.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
8
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Design and Characteristics
System description and architecture
2.2 System description and architecture
2.2.1 N+0 configuration systems.
The following sections show a representative number of frontal layouts that describe the
complete configuration per subrack of the MLx system without RF redundancy.
2.2.1.1 Transmitter DVB-T/T2
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
Figure 2.1: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 6 Transmitters
DVB-T/T2 and a GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver Modules.
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
POWER SUPPLY
500W
Figure 2.2: A MLx Basic Unit with 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 5 Transmit-
ters DVB-T/T2 and a GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver Modules.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
9
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Design and Characteristics
System description and architecture
MLx IP -ASI CONVERTER
TS 1 OUT
TS 2 OUT
TS 3 OUT
TS 4 OUT
TS 5 OUT
TS 6 OUT
TS 7 OUT
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
Figure 2.3: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 1 IP-ASI
Converter, 6 Transmitters DVB-T/T2 and a GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver Modules.
MLx DVB-S/S2 RECEIVER
TS 1 OUT
TS 2 OUT
TS 3 OUT
TS 4 OUT
TS 5 OUT
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TS 6 OUT
TS 7 OUT
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
Figure 2.4: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 1 DVB-S/S2
Receiver, 6 Transmitters DVB-T/T2 and a GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver Modules.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
10
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Design and Characteristics
System description and architecture
2.2.1.2 Gap Filler
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
Figure 2.5: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 6 Gap Fillers
and a RF Splitter.
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
POWER SUPPLY
500W
Figure 2.6: A MLx Basic Unit with 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 5 Gap Fillers
and a RF Splitter.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
11
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Design and Characteristics
System description and architecture
2.2.1.3 Retransmitter DVB-T
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
Figure 2.7: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 6 Retransmit-
ters DVB-T and a RF Splitter.
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
POWER SUPPLY
500W
Figure 2.8: A MLx Basic Unit with 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 5 Retrans-
mitters DVB-T and a RF Splitter.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
12
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Design and Characteristics
System description and architecture
2.2.2 N+1 redundant configurantion systems.
The following sections show a representative number of frontal layouts that describe the
complete configuration per subrack of the MLx system with RF redundancy.
2.2.2.1 Transmitter DVB-T/T2
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
Figure 2.9: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 5(+1 re-
serve) Transmitters DVB-T/T2, a 5+1 Switch and a GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver
Modules.
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
POWER SUPPLY
500W
Figure 2.10: A MLx Basic Unit with 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 4(+1
reserve) Transmitters DVB-T/T2, a 4+1 Switch and a GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver
Modules.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
13
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Design and Characteristics
System description and architecture
MLx IP -ASI CONVERTER
TS 1 OUT
TS 2 OUT
TS 3 OUT
TS 4 OUT
TS 5 OUT
TS 6 OUT
TS 7 OUT
75
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
Figure 2.11: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 1 IP-ASI
Converter, 5(+1 reserve) Transmitters DVB-T/T2, a 5+1 Switch and a GPS Basic Unit
with 2 GPS Receiver Modules.
MLx DVB-S/S2 RECEIVER
TS 1 OUT
TS 2 OUT
TS 3 OUT
TS 4 OUT
TS 5 OUT
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TS 6 OUT
TS 7 OUT
75
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
Figure 2.12: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 1 DVB-S/S2
Receiver, 5(+1 reserve) Transmitters DVB-T/T2, a 5+1 Switch and a GPS Basic Unit
with 2 GPS Receiver Modules.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
14
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Design and Characteristics
System description and architecture
2.2.2.2 Gap Filler
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
Figure 2.13: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 5(+1 reserve)
Gap Fillers and a 5+1 Switch.
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
POWER SUPPLY
500W
Figure 2.14: A MLx Basic Unit with 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 4(+1
reserve) Gap Fillers and a 4+1 Switch.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
15
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Design and Characteristics
System description and architecture
2.2.2.3 Retransmitter DVB-T
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
Figure 2.15: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 5(+1 reserve)
Retransmitters DVB-T and a 5+1 Switch.
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
POWER SUPPLY
500W
Figure 2.16: A MLx Basic Unit with 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 4(+1
reserve) Retransmitters DVB-T and a 4+1 Switch.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
16
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Design and Characteristics
System limitations
2.3 System limitations
An MLx subrack (5HUx19) includes 8 slots for up to 8 different modules, with or without
Power Supply redundancy, with or without Management module, so the high flexibility of
the MLx allows an MLx transmitter system to accomodate and combine many different
kind of modules in the same system.
In order to describe the system limitations, the following list shows some possible combinations of modules that can be included in an MLx system:
• Up to 7 devices of 1W/5W, 1 Power Supply, 1 RF Splitter and 1 GPS Basic Unit
with 2 GPS Receiver Modules or
• Up to 6 devices of 1W/5W, 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 1 RF Splitter,
1 GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver Modules and 1 N+1 Switch or
• Up to 5 devices of 1W/5W, 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 1 RF Splitter,
1 GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver Modules and 1 N+1 Switch or
• Up to 5 devices of 10W and 1 or 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 1 RF
Splitter, 1 GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver Modules and 1 N+1 Switch.
As listed above, a single MLx Power Supply in the basic subrack can (apart from
serving the transmitting and management modules of the subrack) also serve 1
IP-ASI Converter, 1 DVB-S/S2 Receiver, 1 RF Splitter, 1 GPS Basic Unit with 2
GPS Receiver Modules and 1 N+1 Switch, so just one Power Supply can serve all
necesary modules of the MLx system.
!
CAUTION
Due to DC power consumption limitations, it is not possible to install more than
5 devices of 10W in a subrack.
The overall power consumption of all devices built in or connected to one subrack
must not exceed 500 W.
System scalabilty is possible under certain limitations:
• Scalability of several subracks managed by the same Management module is possible.
• Scalability of IP-ASI Converter and DVB-S/S2 Receiver is possible.
• Scalability of RF Splitter is possible.
• Scalability of several GPS basic units is possible.
• Scalability of several N+1 (up to 6+1) Switch units in a system is possible in order
to conform a system with several N+1 subsystems under a single Management
module (including all options) .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
17
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
3 Installation
3.1 Unpacking and Setting Up
3.1.1 Equipment Supplied
The following list shows the module types that can be included on an MLx systems. An
MLx system, depending on the system configuration, will be formed by a combination of
some of the modules listed below:
Material number
Description
2501.0101.11
2501.0101.15
2501.0101.19
2501.0101.21
2501.0101.25
2501.0101.29
2501.0201.11
2501.0201.15
2501.0201.19
2501.0201.21
2501.0201.25
2501.0201.29
2501.0301.11
2501.0301.15
2501.0301.19
2501.0018.02
2501.0024.00
2501.0030.00
2501.0060.00
2501.0501.00
2501.0518.00
2501.0553.10
2501.0560.02
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Transmitter 1W DVB-T
Transmitter 5W DVB-T
Transmitter 10W DVB-T
Transmitter 1W DVB-T2
Transmitter 5W DVB-T2
Transmitter 10W DVB-T2
GapFiller 1W Std. EC
GapFiller 5W Std. EC
GapFiller 10W Std. EC
GapFiller 1W Enh. EC
GapFiller 5W Enh. EC
GapFiller 10W Enh. EC
ReTransmitter 1W DVB-T
ReTransmitter 5W DVB-T
ReTransmitter 10W DVB-T
Power Supply 500W
Management module
Management module with UMTS
Basic Unit
GPS Basic Unit
GPS Receiver Module
DVB-S/S2 Rx w/o Decrypt
IP-ASI-Converter
18
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Unpacking and Setting Up
2501.0701.11
2501.0701.12
2501.0701.13
2501.0701.14
2501.0701.15
2501.0701.16
2501.0701.21
2501.0701.22
2501.0701.23
2501.0701.24
2501.0701.25
2501.0701.26
2501.0718.00
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
1+1 Switch Transmitter
2+1 Switch Transmitter
3+1 Switch Transmitter
4+1 Switch Transmitter
5+1 Switch Transmitter
6+1 Switch Transmitter
1+1 Switch GapFiller
2+1 Switch GapFiller
3+1 Switch GapFiller
4+1 Switch GapFiller
5+1 Switch GapFiller
6+1 Switch GapFiller
RF Distributor
3.1.2 Unpacking
Carefully unpack the equipment and use the shipping documents to check that the shipment is complete.
3.1.3 Setting Up
The equipment can be installed in a 19" rack. Layout described in the "System description
and architecture" chapter must be taken as the installation guide.
3.1.3.1 Insert a module in subrack with back panel
i
The Mlx allows hot swapping of all modules into the back panel without interrupting the operation of other installed modules.
1. Insert the module into the subrack by using the two rails placed on the subrack and
push the module until plugging in the 30 pins connector of the module into the back
panel.
2. Tighten the screws on the top and bottom of the front of the module.
3. Connect the cables of the module (see "Connecting Cables / Wiring" chapter).
3.1.3.2 Remove a module from subrack with back panel
1. Disconnect the cables of the module (see "Connecting Cables / Wiring" chapter).
2. Remove the screws on the top and bottom of the front of the module.
3. Remove the module from the subrack pulling by the handle.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
19
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
3.1.3.3 Insert a GPS Receiver Module into the GPS Basic Unit
i
The MLx allows hot swapping of the GPS Receiver Modules into the GPS Basic
Unit without interrupting the operation of the other one.
1. Insert the GPS Receiver Module into the two rails until plugging in the pins connector into the basic unit.
2. Tighten the two screws on both sides of the front of the receiver.
3. Connect the cables of the GPS Receiver Module (see "Connecting Cables / Wiring"
chapter).
3.1.3.4 Remove a GPS Receiver Module from the GPS Basic Unit
1. Disconnect the cables of the GPS Receiver Module (see "Connecting Cables /
Wiring" chapter).
2. Remove the screws on both sides of the front of the GPS Receiver Module.
3. Remove the GPS Receiver Module from the basic unit pulling by the screws cover.
3.2 Connecting Cables / Wiring
3.2.1 Connecting cables for Digital TV
3.2.1.1 ASI Inputs of Transmitter DVB-T/T2
1. In systems without N+1 Switch:
(a) Connect the first transport stream to TS1 IN connector at front side of each
Transmitter DVB-T/T2 module.
(b) If signal standby is required, connect a second transport stream to TS2 IN
connector at front side of each Transmitter DVB-T/T2 module.
2. In systems with N+1 Switch:
(a) Connect the transport stream to TS1 IN..TS6 IN connectors at rear side of the
N+1 Switch TX module.
3.2.1.2 TS over IP Inputs of Transmitter DVB-T/T2
1. Connect the IP network to IP 1 connector at rear side of the IP-ASI Converter.
2. If an IP switch is desired (as loop-through output), connect the IP network also to
IP 2 connector at rear side of the IP-ASI Converter.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
20
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
3.2.1.3 Satellite Inputs of Transmitter DVB-T/T2
1. Connect the RF signal from satellite antenna to RF IN 1..RF IN 4 connector at rear
side of the DVB-S/S2 Receiver.
i
Any RF IN 1..RF IN 4 inputs at rear side of the DVB-S/S2 Receiver may be used
for connecting a redundant satellite signal.
3.2.1.4 RF Inputs of Gap Filler / Retransmitter DVB-T
1. In systems without N+1 Switch:
(a) If RF Splitter is installed, connect the RF signal from antenna to RF IN connector at rear side of the RF Splitter.
(b) If RF Splitter is not installed, connect the RF signal from antenna to RF IN
connector at front side of each Gap Filler / Retransmitter DVB-T module.
2. In systems with N+1 Switch:
(a) Connect the RF signal from antenna to ANT 1 IN connector at rear side of
the N+1 Switch GapFiller module. Alternatively, a second antenna can be
connected to ANT 2 IN connector at rear side of the N+1 Switch GF module.
3.2.1.5 Reference signals
1. To increase frequency accuracy, connect an external reference source (10MHz) to
10MHz connector at rear side of each Transmitter DVB-T/T2 / Gap Filler / Retransmitter DVB-T module.
2. For SFN operation, also connect a 1PPS signal for timing synchronization from
an external reference source to 1PPS connector at rear side of each Transmitter
DVB-T/T2.
i
The optional GPS unit can be used as a frequency and timing reference (in next
sections the internal cabling is described in detail) connecting the GPS antenna to
GPS ANTENNA connector at front side of each GPS receiver.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
21
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
3.2.2 Connecting internal cables of N+0 systems.
The following sections show a representative number of cabling diagrams that describe
the complete configuration per subrack of the MLx system without RF redundancy.
3.2.2.1 Transmitter DVB-T/T2
ASI INPUTS
ANT GPS2
ANT GPS1
1
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RF OUTPUTS
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
CE
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
Made in Spain
27 V
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made in Spain
CTRL.
CTRL.
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RELAYS
2
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
2
3
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
4
4
Figure 3.1: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 6 Transmitters
DVB-T/T2 and a GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver Modules.
No
Color
1
2
3
4
Violet
Yellow/Blue
Brown
Orange/Ligth Blue
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Mat. number
Description
Qty
2501.0524.00
2501.0824.03
2501.0824.04
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
2
12
1
2
Antenna GPS cable
10MHz-1pps cable
Power cable 27V
Reset/Control cable
22
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
ASI INPUTS
ANT GPS1
ANT GPS2
1
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
POWER SUPPLY
500W
RF OUTPUTS
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
CE
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
Made in Spain
27 V
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
RESET
CTRL.
CTRL.
RESET
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RELAYS
2
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
2
3
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
4
4
Figure 3.2: A MLx Basic Unit with 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 5 Transmit-
ters DVB-T/T2 and a GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver Modules.
No
Color
1
2
3
4
Violet
Yellow/Blue
Brown
Orange/Ligth Blue
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Mat. number
Description
Qty
2501.0524.00
2501.0824.03
2501.0824.04
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
2
10
1
2
Antenna GPS cable
10MHz-1pps cable
Power cable 27V
Reset/Control cable
23
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
5
MLx IP -ASI CONVERTER
TS 1 OUT
TS 2 OUT
TS 3 OUT
TS 4 OUT
TS 5 OUT
TS 6 OUT
ANT GPS2
TS 7 OUT
ANT GPS1
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
1
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RF OUTPUTS
IP 2
4
IP 1
4
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
3
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
CE
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
CTRL.
CTRL.
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
RELAYS
2
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
2
3
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE
T6.3H250V
4
4
Figure 3.3: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 1 IP-ASI
Converter, 6 Transmitters DVB-T/T2 and a GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver Modules.
No
Color
1
2
3
4
5
Violet
Yellow/Blue
Brown
Orange/Ligth Blue
Pink
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Mat. number
Description
Qty
2501.0524.00
2501.0824.03
2501.0824.04
2501.0824.12
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
2
12
2
4
6
Antenna GPS cable
10MHz-1pps cable
Power cable 27V
Reset/Control cable
ASI cable 9cm
24
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
5
MLx DVB-S/S2 RECEIVER
TS 1 OUT
TS 2 OUT
TS 3 OUT
TS 4 OUT
TS 5 OUT
TS 6 OUT
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
ANT GPS2
TS 7 OUT
ANT GPS1
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
1
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RF OUTPUTS
RF 4
RF OUT
RF 4
RF IN
RF 2
RF OUT
RF OUT
RF IN
4
4
RF 1
RF IN
RF OUT
RF IN
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
3
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
CE
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
CTRL.
CTRL.
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
RELAYS
2
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
2
3
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE
T6.3H250V
4
4
Figure 3.4: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 1 DVB-S/S2
Receiver, 6 Transmitters DVB-T/T2 and a GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver Modules.
No
Color
1
2
3
4
5
Violet
Yellow/Blue
Brown
Orange/Ligth Blue
Pink
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Mat. number
Description
Qty
2501.0524.00
2501.0824.03
2501.0824.04
2501.0824.12
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
2
12
2
4
6
Antenna GPS cable
10MHz-1pps cable
Power cable 27V
Reset/Control cable
ASI cable 9cm
25
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
3.2.2.2 Gap Filler
1
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
RF OUTPUTS
RF ANTENNA INPUT
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
2
IN
CE
Made in Spain
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
2
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
CE
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
RESET
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
CTRL.
RESET
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
CTRL.
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
RELAYS
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
Figure 3.5: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 6 Gap Fillers
and a RF Splitter.
No
Color
Mat. number
Description
Qty
1
2
Pink
Brown
2501.0724.00
2501.0824.03
MLx RF cable 9cm
MLx Power cable 27V
6
1
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
26
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
1
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
POWER SUPPLY
500W
RF OUTPUTS
RF ANTENNA INPUT
yyyyyyyy
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
IN
CE
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
Made in Spain
27 V
27 V
2
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
CE
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
RESET
CTRL.
RESET
CTRL.
RELAYS
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
Figure 3.6: A MLx Basic Unit with 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 5 Gap Fillers
and a RF Splitter.
No
Color
Mat. number
Description
Qty
1
2
Pink
Brown
2501.0724.00
2501.0824.03
MLx RF cable 9cm
MLx Power cable 27V
5
1
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
27
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
3.2.2.3 Retransmitter DVB-T
1
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RF OUTPUTS
RF ANTENNA INPUT
yyyyyyyy
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
IN
CE
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
Made in Spain
27 V
2
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
27 V
CE
10 Mhz
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
RESET
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made in Spain
CTRL.
CTRL.
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RELAYS
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
Figure 3.7: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 6 Retransmit-
ters DVB-T and a RF Splitter.
No
Color
Mat. number
Description
Qty
1
2
Pink
Brown
2501.0724.00
2501.0824.03
MLx RF cable 9cm
MLx Power cable 27V
6
1
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
28
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
1
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
POWER SUPPLY
500W
RF OUTPUTS
RF ANTENNA INPUT
yyyyyyyy
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
IN
CE
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
Made in Spain
27 V
2
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
27 V
CE
10 Mhz
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
RESET
CTRL.
RESET
CTRL.
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RELAYS
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
Figure 3.8: A MLx Basic Unit with 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 5 Retrans-
mitters DVB-T and a RF Splitter.
No
Color
Mat. number
Description
Qty
1
2
Pink
Brown
2501.0724.00
2501.0824.03
MLx RF cable 9cm
MLx Power cable 27V
5
1
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
29
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
3.2.3 Connecting internal cables for N+1 redundant systems.
The following sections show a representative number of cabling diagrams that describe
the complete configuration per subrack of the MLx system with RF redundancy.
i
SMA connections on N+1 switch have to be tightened with a torque of 0,45 Nm.
Recommended tools:
Huber & Suhner
SMA Torque Wrench 0,45 Nm
74Z-0-0-79
3.2.3.1 Transmitter DVB-T/T2
5
6
75
ANT GPS2
ANT GPS1
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
9
1
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
8
LOAD
ASI
INPUTS
7
4
4
RF OUTPUTS
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
CE
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
RESET
CTRL.
CTRL.
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RELAYS
2
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
2
3
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
4
4
Figure 3.9: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 5(+1 re-
serve) Transmitters DVB-T/T2, a 5+1 Switch and a GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver
Modules.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
30
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
No
Color
1
2
3
4
Violet
Yellow/Blue
Brown
Orange/Ligth
Blue
Pink
Pink
Black
Black
Red
5
6
7
8
9
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Mat. number
Description
Qty
2501.0524.00
2501.0824.03
2501.0824.04
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
2
12
2
4
2501.0824.14
2501.0824.12
2501.0824.72
2501.0824.76
2501.0824.73
2501.0824.74
MLx ASI cable 14cm
MLx ASI cable 9cm
MLx RF cable 12cm SMA-SMA
MLx RF cable 10cm SMA-N
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-BNC(1W,5W)
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-N(10W)
Antenna GPS cable
10MHz-1pps cable
Power cable 27V
Reset/Control cable
1
5
4
1
6
6
31
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
5
6
75
ANT GPS1
ANT GPS2
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
9
1
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
POWER SUPPLY
500W
8
LOAD
ASI
INPUTS
7
4
4
RF OUTPUTS
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
CE
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
RESET
CTRL.
CTRL.
RESET
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RELAYS
2
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
2
3
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
4
4
Figure 3.10: A MLx Basic Unit with 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 4(+1
reserve) Transmitters DVB-T/T2, a 4+1 Switch and a GPS Basic Unit with 2 GPS Receiver
Modules.
No
Color
1
2
3
4
Violet
Yellow/Blue
Brown
Orange/Ligth
Blue
Pink
Pink
Black
Black
Red
5
6
7
8
9
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Mat. number
Description
Qty
2501.0524.00
2501.0824.03
2501.0824.04
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
2
10
2
4
2501.0824.14
2501.0824.12
2501.0824.72
2501.0824.76
2501.0824.73
2501.0824.74
MLx ASI cable 14cm
MLx ASI cable 9cm
MLx RF cable 12cm SMA-SMA
MLx RF cable 10cm SMA-N
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-BNC(1W,5W)
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-N(10W)
Antenna GPS cable
10MHz-1pps cable
Power cable 27V
Reset/Control cable
1
4
3
1
5
5
32
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
10
MLx IP -ASI CONVERTER
TS 1 OUT
5
TS 2 OUT
TS 3 OUT
TS 4 OUT
TS 5 OUT
TS 6 OUT
TS 7 OUT
6
75
ANT GPS2
ANT GPS1
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
9
1
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
8
LOAD
IP 2
77
IP 1
4
RF OUTPUTS
4
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
CE
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
CTRL.
CTRL.
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
RELAYS
2
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
2
3
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE
T6.3H250V
Figure 3.11: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 1 IP-ASI
Converter, 5(+1 reserve) Transmitters DVB-T/T2, a 5+1 Switch and a GPS Basic Unit
with 2 GPS Receiver Modules.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
33
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
No
Color
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Violet
Yellow/Blue
Brown
Orange/Ligth
Blue
Pink
Pink
Violet
Violet
Red
10
Green
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Mat. number
Description
Qty
2501.0524.00
2501.0824.03
2501.0824.04
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
2
12
3
6
2501.0824.14
2501.0824.12
2501.0824.72
2501.0824.76
2501.0824.73
2501.0824.74
2501.057?.00
MLx ASI cable 14cm
MLx ASI cable 9cm
MLx RF cable 12cm SMA-SMA
MLx RF cable 10cm SMA-N
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-BNC(1W,5W)
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-N(10W)
MLx ASI CABLE 60CM BNC-BNC
Antenna GPS cable
10MHz-1pps cable
Power cable 27V
Reset/Control cable
1
5
4
1
6
6
5
34
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
10
MLx DVB-S/S2 RECEIVER
TS 1 OUT
5
TS 2 OUT
TS 3 OUT
TS 4 OUT
TS 5 OUT
TS 6 OUT
TS 7 OUT
6
75
ANT GPS2
ANT GPS1
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
9
1
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
8
LOAD
RF 4
RF OUT
RF 4
RF IN
RF OUT
RF 2
RF OUT
RF IN
7
RF 1
RF IN
RF OUT
RF IN
4
RF OUTPUTS
4
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
1PPs
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
CE
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain
CTRL.
CTRL.
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
RELAYS
2
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
2
3
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE
T6.3H250V
Figure 3.12: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 1 DVB-S/S2
Receiver, 5(+1 reserve) Transmitters DVB-T/T2, a 5+1 Switch and a GPS Basic Unit
with 2 GPS Receiver Modules.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
35
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
No
Color
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Violet
Yellow/Blue
Brown
Orange/Ligth
Blue
Pink
Pink
Violet
Violet
Red
10
Green
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Mat. number
Description
Qty
2501.0524.00
2501.0824.03
2501.0824.04
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
2
12
3
6
2501.0824.14
2501.0824.12
2501.0824.72
2501.0824.76
2501.0824.73
2501.0824.74
2501.057?.00
MLx ASI cable 14cm
MLx ASI cable 9cm
MLx RF cable 12cm SMA-SMA
MLx RF cable 10cm SMA-N
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-BNC(1W,5W)
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-N(10W)
MLx ASI CABLE 60CM BNC-BNC
Antenna GPS cable
10MHz-1pps cable
Power cable 27V
Reset/Control cable
1
5
4
1
6
6
5
36
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
3.2.3.2 Gap Filler
1
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
6
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
5
RF ANTENNA INPUT
LOAD
4
3
2
RF OUTPUTS
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
Made in Spain
RESET
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
CTRL.
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
BATT
RESET
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
CTRL.
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
CE
10 Mhz
3
RELAYS
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
Made in Spain
10 Mhz
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
Figure 3.13: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 5(+1 reserve)
Gap Fillers and a 5+1 Switch.
No
Color
Mat. number
Description
Qty
1
2
3
Pink
Brown
Orange/Ligth
Blue
Black
Black
Red
2501.0724.00
2501.0824.03
2501.0824.04
MLx RF cable 9cm
MLx Power cable 27V
MLx Reset/Control cable
6
1
2
2501.0824.72
2501.0824.76
2501.0824.73
2501.0824.74
MLx RF cable 12cm SMA-SMA
MLx RF cable 10cm SMA-N
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-BNC(1W,5W)
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-N(10W)
4
1
6
6
4
5
6
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
37
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
1
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
6
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
POWER SUPPLY
500W
5
RF ANTENNA INPUT
LOAD
4
3
2
RF OUTPUTS
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
RESET
CTRL.
RESET
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
BATT
RELAYS
CTRL.
CE
10 Mhz
3
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
Figure 3.14: A MLx Basic Unit with 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 4(+1
reserve) Gap Fillers and a 4+1 Switch.
No
Color
Mat. number
Description
Qty
1
2
3
Pink
Brown
Orange/Ligth
Blue
Black
Black
Red
2501.0724.00
2501.0824.03
2501.0824.04
MLx RF cable 9cm
MLx Power cable 27V
MLx Reset/Control cable
5
1
2
2501.0824.72
2501.0824.76
2501.0824.73
2501.0824.74
MLx RF cable 12cm SMA-SMA
MLx RF cable 10cm SMA-N
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-BNC(1W,5W)
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-N(10W)
3
1
5
5
4
5
6
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
38
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
3.2.3.3 Retransmitter DVB-T
1
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
6
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
5
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RF ANTENNA INPUT
LOAD
4
3
2
RF OUTPUTS
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
10 Mhz
3
10 Mhz
10 Mhz
CE
10 Mhz
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made in Spain
CTRL.
CTRL.
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
10 Mhz
RELAYS
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
10 Mhz
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
Figure 3.15: A MLx Basic Unit with 1 Power Supply, 1 Management Module, 5(+1 reserve)
Retransmitters DVB-T and a 5+1 Switch.
No
Color
Mat. number
Description
Qty
1
2
3
Pink
Brown
Orange/Ligth
Blue
Black
Black
Red
2501.0724.00
2501.0824.03
2501.0824.04
MLx RF cable 9cm
MLx Power cable 27V
MLx Reset/Control cable
6
1
2
2501.0824.72
2501.0824.76
2501.0824.73
2501.0824.74
MLx RF cable 12cm SMA-SMA
MLx RF cable 10cm SMA-N
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-BNC(1W,5W)
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-N(10W)
4
1
6
6
4
5
6
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
39
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
1
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
6
POWER SUPPLY
500W
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
5
POWER SUPPLY
500W
RF ANTENNA INPUT
LOAD
4
3
2
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
RF OUTPUTS
ETH
10 Mhz
3
10 Mhz
CE
10 Mhz
BATT
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
27 V
27 V
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
Made in Spain
NRP-Z11
1146.8001.02
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RESET
CTRL.
10 Mhz
RELAYS
CTRL.
10 Mhz
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
FUSE:T6
3AL250V
Figure 3.16: A MLx Basic Unit with 2 Power Supplies, 1 Management Module, 4(+1
reserve) Retransmitters DVB-T and a 4+1 Switch.
No
Color
Mat. number
Description
Qty
1
2
3
Pink
Brown
Orange/Ligth
Blue
Black
Black
Red
2501.0724.00
2501.0824.03
2501.0824.04
MLx RF cable 9cm
MLx Power cable 27V
MLx Reset/Control cable
5
1
2
2501.0824.72
2501.0824.76
2501.0824.73
2501.0824.74
MLx RF cable 12cm SMA-SMA
MLx RF cable 10cm SMA-N
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-BNC(1W,5W)
MLx RF cable 50cm SMA-N(10W)
3
1
5
5
4
5
6
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
40
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
3.2.4 Connecting the antenna system
!
CAUTION
Risk of RF burns
Before connecting the antenna cable, make sure that the module cannot produce any
RF at the output.
1. In systems without N+1 Switch, connect the antenna system to the RF OUT connector (RF power output) at front side of each Transmitter DVB-T/T2 / Gap Filler /
Retransmitter DVB-T module.
2. In systems with N+1 Switch, connect the antenna system to A1 RF OUT..A6 RF
OUT connectors (RF power outputs) at rear side of N+1 Switch module.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
41
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Connecting Cables / Wiring
3.2.5 Notes on the AC Power Connection
Prior to connect the AC power cable, please make sure that the AC power swith is in position OFF. You should therefore make sure that the connector is within reach and easily
accessible at all times (length of connecting cable approx. 2 m).
The AC power connector and the fuses slot (2 fuses are placed there) is located on the
rear panel of the power supply unit. The AC power switch is located on the front side of
the power supply unit.
Figure 3.17: AC power connector, fuses slot and AC switch.
Please heed the connection data found in the following table:
AC supply voltage:
Fuse:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
196V - 264V at 50/60Hz
6.3A / 250V
42
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Rack integration and cooling
3.3 Rack integration and cooling
General considerations
Temperature
Every transmitter module, as well as the power supply, is equipped with fans (one in case
of 1W modules and two for the 5W and 10W ones) to provide with suitable refrigeration.
Operating temperature range is 1o C to 45o C, whilst permissible temperature is -10o C to
60o C.
Maximum humidity is 95o C (non condensing).
Each transmitter module has to be supplied with a maximum air temperature of 45◦ C (if
more subracks are installed in a cabinet).
MLx must be operate in environments with a pollution degree up to 2 according with EN
60664-1. At least a filter class G1 from group coarse dust according to EN 779:2012 is
recommended for filtering the air.
It is under the installer responsibility to guarantee that the ambient temperature around
the MLx is below such a value.
Air flow
Air flow forced by fans goes from front to rear in case of power supply module and from
bottom to top in case of Transmitter, Gapfiller and Retransmitter modules.
Approximated maximum heat dissipation values for different modules:
21 W
1 Watt Transmitter / Gapfiller / Retransmitter Modules
53 W
5 Watt Transmitter / Gapfiller / Retransmitter Modules
76 W
10 Watt Transmitter / Gapfiller / Retransmitter Modules
100 W
Power Supply Unit
DVB-S2/ASI Converter
10 W (1 LNB connected) / 27W(with 4
LNB connected)
5W
GPS Receiver Module
3.6 W
IP/ASI Converter
Heat dissipation of Basic Unit, Management Modules, GPS Basic Unit, N+1 Switching
Units and RF Splitter can be neglected.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
43
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Rack integration and cooling
Fans
L10 value for fans (age at which 90% of the fans are expected to be operating) is 100000
hours at a temperature of 45o C and over 200000 hours at 30o C.
Fans are nor continuously operating, but only when the internal temperature of modules
if above a fixed value. The information on the number of hours the fans have been operating is provided by the modules.
After 100000 hours it is advisable to replace the fans since the failure rate is likely to
increase.
In any case, some considerations must be taken into account, especially if several subracks are to be built together.
Cooling considerations for horizontal placement of subracks in systems without (closed) rack cabinet
It is not mandatory to install the MLx subracks in a rack or cabinet. They can be fixed to
a wall or even put on a flat surface (for instance, on a table).
There are no restrictions in the maximum number of subracks that can be located one of
top of the other, but the following considerations must be taken into account:
• A minimum distance of 1U (4.445 cm) must be considered between the bottom of
the system and the floor or flat surface, regardless of the lowest element of the
system is a subrack or an additional horizontal module (active splitter, UCA N+1,
GPS receiver and splitter, etc).
If a closed 1HU unit (depth > 30cm) is located above the subrack, it is necessary
to keep a distance of 1HU between them.
• If several subracks are to be built together one of top of the other, then a minimum
distance of 5 cm must be kept between every two subracks. If a horizontal module
(active splitter, GPS splitter or UCA N+1,etc) is located between subracks, then no
additional space is required.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
44
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Installation
Rack integration and cooling
Cooling considerations for installation of subracks in rack cabinets
If the subracks are to be installed inside a rack cabinet, the following recommendations
must be taken into account:
• To facilitate the renewal and circulation of the air inside the rack, it is advisable to
place one extractor fan on the top of the rack. Such an extractor will force the fresh
air entering from the base of the cabinet, to circulate between the modules and be
expelled through the top of the cabinet.
It is also recommended to install a thermostat inside the rack in order to avoid the
extractor to be continuously working.
For this process to operate correctly, it is advisable not to open the side doors, as
this would cause the ventilators to extract the air from the outside rather than the
air inside the rack. It is also advisable not to place objects close to the rack that
may block the entry and exit openings for the air.
If the rack cabinet is not complete it is advisable to place the subracks from the top
downwards. Minimum available depth inside the closed cabinet is 400mm.
Minimum vertical distance between the upper subrack and the system blower must
be 3HU. This distance can be occupied with an additional MLx horizontal module
and/or the electrical distribution switchgear.
Minimum airflow recommended for the extractor fan is 250m3 /h.
• If the subracks are to be installed in rack cabinets without ventilation facilities, it is
advisable to place the rack completely open, in other words, do not use the side
doors.
It is also necessary that the rack cabinet includes a hole at the top to facilitate the
ventilation of the unit.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
45
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Commissioning
4 Commissioning
4.1 Putting into operation
Connecting to the AC Power Supply
The AC power connector is located on the rear panel of the power supply unit. The AC
power switch is located on the front side of the power supply unit.
Figure 4.1: AC power connector and AC switch.
Connect the equipment to the AC power supply, using the power cable that is
supplied with the equipment.
!
CAUTION
Risk of injuries
Prior to switching on the equipment, please make sure that the following conditions are met:
• The equipment is in place and tightly screwed on.
• Signal levels at the inputs are within specified limits.
• Output signals are correctly connected and not overloaded.
Any non–compliance of the described conditions may endanger people and may cause damage
to the equipment.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
46
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Commissioning
Putting into operation
i
Switching on the equipment
Press the AC power switch on the front panel into position ON.
The MLx system boots up. The booting procedure takes about 1 minute and is
indicated by a steady orange of the ALARM, DVB-T RX, BATT & MODEM LEDs
at the frontal of the Management Module.
Sample application
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment. For further measurement examples and background information, please refer
to the next chapters.
1. Log on to the Management Module via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
2. Check the system date and hour.
3. Check if all modules in the system are displayed at the web browser entry screen.
i
If some module are not displayed, check the telecontrol addresses and
RS485 bus connections and execute the command Generate new configuration file (see the instrument manuals for more information).
NOTICE
The next steps depend on the type of module.
Click on the shortcuts icons at the entry screen to access alarms, status or configure
page of each module.
4. TRANSMITTER DVB-T:
(a) Set the modulation parameters (parameters Network Mode, Constellation,
FEC, Guard interval, Bandwidth and FFT).
i
• In case of SFN function, Auto MIP parameter activation allows configuring the
modulation parameters automatically from the input TS.
• 10MHz and 1pps input must be connected in case of SFN function.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
47
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Commissioning
Putting into operation
(b) Check the selected input (parameter Selected ASI).
(c) Set the output frequency (parameters Output channel/offset).
(d) Check the output power (parameter Output power).
(e) Check that there are no alarms.
(f) Check that frontal STATUS LED keeps green.
(g) Connect the measurement instrument to the RF MONITOR connector at the
front pannel to check signal quality.
5. TRANSMITTER DVB-T2:
(a) Check the type of the modulator (DVB-T or DVB-T2) (parameter Type).
(b) Set the modulation (DVB-T or DVB-T2) parameters.
i
• For a more detailed description of the DVB-T/T2 modulation parameters, please
refer to Transmitter DVB-T/T2 instrument manual.
(c) Check the selected input (parameter Selected ASI).
(d) Set the output frequency (parameters Output channel/offset).
(e) Check the output power (parameter Output power).
(f) Check that there are no alarms.
(g) Check that frontal STATUS LED keeps green.
(h) Connect the measurement instrument to the RF MONITOR connector at the
front pannel to check signal quality.
6. GAP FILLER:
(a) Set the input frequency (parameters Input channel/offset).
(b) Set the output frequency (parameters Output channel/offset).
(c) Check the echo canceller configuration. In case of Std. EC option installed,
no configuration is needed. In case of Enh. EC option, the configuration
depends on the echo scenario.
i
With Enh. EC option, in case of using a DVB-T2 signal with extended carriers, the
parameter Extended BW must be enable. In case of input signals without extended
bandwidths this parameter must be disabled.
(d) Check the output power (parameter Output power).
(e) Check that there are no alarms.
(f) Check that frontal STATUS LED keeps green.
(g) Connect the measurement instrument to the RF MONITOR connector at the
front pannel to check signal quality.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
48
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Commissioning
Putting into operation
7. RETRANSMITTER:
(a) Set the input frequency (parameters Input channel/offset).
(b) Check if the demodulator is synchronized (parameter Demodulator).
(c) Set the modulation parameters (parameters Constellation, FEC, Bandwidth,
Guard interval and FFT).
i
Auto configuration parameter activation allows configuring the modulation parameters automatically from the input.
(d) Set the output frequency (parameters Output channel/offset).
(e) Check the output power (parameter Output power).
(f) Check that there are no alarms.
(g) Check that frontal STATUS LED keeps green.
(h) Connect the measurement instrument to the RF MONITOR connector at the
front pannel to check signal quality.
8. GPS:
(a) Connect the GPS Receiver Module x (with x = 1 or 2) antenna cable.
(b) After connecting GPS Receiver Module x anntena and waiting GPS start-up
time, check that GPS Receiver Module x status is locked (parameter Status
GPS Receiver Module x is locked).
i
• Cold start-up time < 20 minutes.
• Hot start-up time < 5 minutes.
(c) Check the output (parameter Active Output).
(d) Check that no alarms in GPS Receiver Module x.
(e) Check that frontal STATUS LED and GPS Receiver Module x STATUS LED
keeps green.
9. N+1 SWITCH:
i
The N+1 switch must be pre-configured, meaning that the assignment of RS485
addresses with physical relays and the backup device are pre-defined. In other case,
please check the N+1 instrument manual.
(a) Check the correct assignment of addresses with relays. Parameters Reserve,
Relay 1 .. Relay 6.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
49
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Commissioning
Putting into operation
(b) Check the status of the reserve device. The parameters #Verif / #Rest
/ Status / Verif must be 0 / 0 / Load / OK.
(c) Check the status of each relay. The parameters #Verif / #Rest / Status
/ Verif must be 0 / 0 / Antenna / OK.
(d) Check that the switching unit is in automatic mode (parameter Local/Remote
is Remote and parameter Manual/Automatic is Automatic).
10. IP-ASI Converter:
(a) Set the IP address of the Host (parameters Unicast IP).
(b) Configure the IP Sockets 1 to 7 (parameters Status, Multicast IP (if needed)
and Port).
(c) Configure the ASI Outputs 1 to 7 (parameter Status) and route each output
from a socket (parameter IP Socket).
(d) Go to Status menu and select the module.
(e) Check the data rate of the enabled inputs (parameter IP Socket-x) and the
enabled outputs (parameter ASI output-x) .
(f) Check that there are no alarms.
(g) Check that frontal ALARM LED and INPUT LED remain green.
11. DVB-S/S2 Receiver:
(a) Configure the RF inputs 1 to 4 (parameters Status, Frequency, LNB OL, DVB
Mode, Satellite, PLS and Symbol Rate).
(b) Configure the ASI Outputs 1 to 7 (parameter Status) and route each output
from an input (parameter RF/ISI).
(c) Go to Status menu and select the module.
(d) Check if the enabled inputs are locked (parameter RF input-x) and the data
rate of the enabled outputs (parameter ASI output-x) .
(e) Check that there are no alarms.
(f) Check that frontal ALARM LED and INPUT LED remain green.
12. In the Alarms Log menu, delete all entries using the Clean button.
13. Configure the settings of the desired interface to the remote communication (SNMP
agent, Ethernet or Modem) (see section 8 or the Management module instrument
manual for more information).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
50
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Commissioning
Connecting user web interface
4.2 Connecting user web interface
To allow the system to be put into operation more conveniently at the installation location, a PC/laptop can be connected to the Management module via the ethernet interface.
It is recommended the use of an RJ-45 cable which complies with the CAT 5 or CAT 6
specification.
Only one of the two RJ45 connectors must be connected at the same time.
1. Configure the network address of the PC as follows:
(a) IP address = 192.168.1.xxx with xxx 6= 0, 1, 255
(b) Subnet mask = 255.255.255.000
The PC and Management then belong to the same IP subnet (preset IP address at the Management = 192.168.1.1).
2. Connect the network interface of the PC to ethernet port (ETH) on the Management
(at front or rear side).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
51
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Commissioning
Log on to the Management Module via web
browser
4.3 Log on to the Management Module via web
browser
1. Log on to the Management Module using the previously connected PC (see the
chapter 4.2) and an up-to-date web browser entering the IP network address of the
Management (http://192.168.1.1 by default). The login dialog box appears.
2. Log in with the user name admin and the password (default: admin). The entry
screen of the Management appears in the browser:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
52
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Commissioning
Ethernet interface configuration
4.4 Ethernet interface configuration
The Management module is provided with an ethernet interface via two RJ45 connectors,
one of them located at the rear panel of the module and the other one at the front panel.
Only one of the two RJ45 connectors must be connected at the same time.
To allow the Management Module to communicate with a remote network client, the IP
address of the used Ethernet interface of the Management Module must be in the IP
subnet of the remote monitoring network.
This interface may be configured via the Web browser (explained below) or via the external programmer (see instrument manual).
Via Web browser settings are available at Ethernet table in menu Configuration >
System of Web Interface:
Settings
• IP. IP address.
• Netmask. Network mask.
• Gateway. Gateway. For access from an external network.
• DHCP. If this parameter is enabled the configuration of the ethernet interface is
done by a DHCP server.
• MAC. MAC address.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
53
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
5 Operation
5.1 Web interface description
The Browser-based control is a web application hosted on the Management module for
managing each system module and check their status, configure the interfaces of remote
communication and view the alarm history.
To access to the web application, it is needed to check the IP address of the ethernet
interface and log in via any Web browser. There are two types of accounts: admin (password admin by default), with all privilegies and user (password user by default), without
configuration privilegies. It is possible to change the password for these users.
It is possible to set up the refresh of the web site in Manual mode or in Authomatic mode
with a configurable time in seconds.
The web application can be configured in 3 different languages, English, Spanish and
French.
The web application framework is based on a tree of menus (table 5.1) that appears at
the left of all screens. Although the main nodes (1 and 2) from the menu will always be
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
54
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
the same, node structure 3 will vary depending on the items that exist in the system. The
description of the menus and tables depends on the type of item. Table 5.2 and figure
5.1 indicate the general notation used for all tables in the Browser.
node 1
Start
System
Summary ⊲
node 2
Configuration ⊲
Alarms ⊲
node 3
Alarms
Status
Alarms log
System
Relay/alarms
DVB-T Receiver
Modules ⊲
General config. ⊲
Alarms log
Status/Configuration ⊲
General config. ⊲
[Address] module [output channel][Power]
Transmitter DVB-T/T2
Gap Filler
Retransmitter DVB-T
GPS Splitter 10MHz/1PPS
N+1 Switch
IP/ASI and DVB-S2/ASI Converter
[Address] module [output channel][Power]
Transmitter DVB-T/T2
Gap Filler
Retransmitter DVB-T
GPS Splitter 10MHz/1PPS
N+1 Switch
IP/ASI and DVB-S2/ASI Converter
Table 5.1: Browser menus tree.
Symbol
−
?
Description
The parameter does not apply to this element or not yet available
The parameter is not available (RS485 communication problems)
Table 5.2: Notation.
Figure 5.1: Notation.
The following sections describe all the menus of web application.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
55
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.1 System
5.1.1.1 Menu Start
This is the home page of the web application.
Name
Version
Date
Temperature
Battery
DVB-T Receiver
Modem
Quantity of modules
System Name with up to 12 characters. Two icons with links
to the system status and configure menus are shown.
Software version of Management
System date and hour
Temperature at the Management module
Battery status. Possible messages are OK, Battery disconnected, Charging and Battery-powered: 14 minutes 59 seconds
(in this case appears a button to shut down the Management
before reaching the countdown finishing)
DVB-T monitor status. Two icons with links to DVB-T monitor
status and configure menus are shown.
Modem status
Number of modules detected on the system
The next table shows a summary of the alarm status of the modules and links to the
status and configure menus:
At the bottom right, it is posible to choose between the language of the web interface in
the actual session (Spanish, French and English).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
56
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.1.2 Menu Configuration > System
Allows the user to set up the system parameters.
COMMANDS
The following list shows a series of general action commands on the system (see Management instrument manual for more details):
Command
Hardware Reset to all modules
Command
Generate new configuration file
Restart application software
Reset Management
Reset (Default values)
Description
Launches the command in "execute" button
Description
Launches the command in "execute" button
Launches the command in "execute" button
Launches the command in "execute" button
Launches the command in "execute" button
SYSTEM INFORMATION
System Name
To set the system Name with up to 12 characters
Battery
Enable
To enable or disable the Battery operation
Hour and date
It allows to set up the system date and time manually or by an NTP server. This execute
the command Date and Hour in order to set the date and hour for all modules in the
system.
NTP:
NTP:
NTP:
NTP:
On
IP
GMT
Update
Manual
Enables or disables the NTP server
NTP server IP address
Offset on the GMT (-12 to +14)
Enables or disables the update time to refresh the NTP server
information d:hh:mm
To set date and hour manually. In the text box is displayed the
current time of PC
Change user passwords
It allows to change the passwords for user accounts available (admin or user).
There are two user accounts, one with all the permissions (admin) and other with limited
options (user). The default password is the same as the user.
Language
It allows to set up the system language. Spanish, English and French are available.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
57
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
Ethernet
Detailed in section 4.4.
Watchdog Ping
When this option is enabled, Management will ping a remote host for checking connection status. If the remote IP address does not respond to Ping, the device will either
reconnect or power reboot. Watchdog will execute 4 attempts (60 minutes) after first try.
The attempts counter is showed on system web page.
This option could be useful for testing un-wired connections (3G modem).
A test ping is able to be manually executed in order to check the connection status.
More details in Management instrument manual.
On
IP
To enable the Watchdog ping
To set the remote host for automatic ping
Test Ping
Allows to perform a ping manually over a remote host.
IP
To set the remote host for manual ping
DNS
Allows to add two DNS addresses manually. In case of DHCP enabled, DNS addresses
can be added automatically.
Manual
DNS1
DNS2
To enable DNS manual
To set DNS 1 address
To set DNS 2 address
Routing table
Allows to set up the routing options. More details in Management instrument manual.
Enabled
Destination
Netmask
Gateway
Interface
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
To enable a new entry
Could be a host or a network
It describes if destination is a host or a network
It is the address of the next station to wich the packet is to be
sent on the way to its final destination
Indicates what locally available interface is responsible for
reaching the gateway. Ethernet, GPRS(3G) or VPN are available
58
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
NAT
Allows to set up the NAT options. This technique is used for translating internal (local
area) network address to external IP.
i
It is necessary an external Switch Module for interconnecting more than one
devices with de Management via Ethernet communication.
For getting external access from an Ethernet module connected to the Management,
when this one is using GPRS/3G modem, it is necessary activate this NAT option.
More details in Management instrument manual.
Enabled
GPRS, VPN or GPRS,VPN options are available. - are displayed if
disabling
Virtual Server
Allows you to set up the Virtual Server options. A combined technique of NAT and routing
table is used to allow communications by external host with services provided within the
private local area network.
i
It is necessary an external Switch Module for interconnecting more than one
devices with the Management.
More details in Management instrument manual.
Enabled
Start Port
End Port
Internal IP
Protocol
Interface
To enable a new entry
Start Port
End Port. This parameter can be enabled or disabled.
Internal IP address and port
Transport protocol. TCP, UDP or TCP,UDP options are available
GPRS, VPN or GPRS,VPN options are available
Source email
Management has a SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) client embedded, so it is possible to send system/modules information by email.
For getting this, an email sender account is necessary. The SMTP server information
necessary is:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
59
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
• server(:port)
• user
• password
• identification options (StartTLS and/or TLS)
This menu allows to set up the source email options.
Enabled
Server
User
Password
Configuration
To enable the source email options
To set the address of the server. The format must be
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:port".
User
Password
To set the identification options (StartTLS and/or TLS)
Recipient emails
This menu allows to set up the recipient emails options.
Enabled
Account
Trigger
Data
Interval
To enable a new recipient email
To set the e-mail address
To set the trigger of the e-mail sent. Always, IP change, Event
or Alarm options are available
To set the data to sent in the e-mails body. Modem, System,
Modules or Log options are available
To set the interval time in minutes
Up to 4 recipient emails can be configured. The destination email addresses are the only
necessary information.
The trigger for sending an email could be (an email will be sent):
• Always. After Interval time.
• IP change. After Interval time, if the GPRS/3G modem IP has been changed.
• Event. After Interval time, if the log has a new event.
• Alarm. At least one monitored module has one or more activated alarm.
The data sending in the email could be:
• Modem. Summary modem information.
• System. Summary system information.
• Modules. Summary information from the modules.
• Log. alarms log entries from last Interval time.
WEB autorefresh
On
seconds
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
To enable autorefresh of the Web
To set the seconds of the automatic refresh of the Web.
60
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
MODEM
Detailed in section 5.3.
SNMP Agent activation
This option is only visible if the SNMP agent is disable. Detailed in section 5.3.
CONFIGURATION
Configuration
Allows to download (at link BACKUP) the settings contained in the last saved configuration file (identified by date of backup). The exported file is a packaged backup.bin with
all the system information. This file can be used later on to load back stored configuration
to a module of the system.
Status
Allows to download (at button Save) the current status of the system contained in a packaged file (with .bin extension).
UPGRADE
This section allows to perform the upgrade of the modules of the system in two possible
ways: All modules from a unique zip file; Individally for module type.
The two ways are detailed in section 6.1.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
61
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.1.3 Menu System
Displays the overall status of the system and its interfaces.
SYSTEM INFORMATION
Name
Version
Language
Quantity of modules
Kernel version
Date
Uptime
Battery
Temperature
Position
System Name with up to 12 characters.
Software version of Management
System language (Spanish, English or French)
Number of modules detected on the system
Management kernel version
System date and hour
Time since last system initialization
Battery status. Possible messages are OK, Battery disconnected Charging and Battery-powered: 14 minutes 59 seconds
(in this case appears a button to shut down the Management
before reaching the countdown finishing)
Temperature at Management module
Spatial coordinates determined by GPS
NTP Server
Status
IP
Offset
Update
NTP server status and time to next update
Disabled: Off the NTP server
Enabled (Updating): Updating information from server
Enabled (OK): Updated information from server
Enabled (NOK): Unable to reach the server
NTP server IP address
GMT time offset (-12 to +14)
Update time (d:hh:mm)
COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
Ethernet
Detailed in section 4.4.
Watchdog Ping
More details in the Management instrument manual.
Status
IP
Watchdog status (Enabled or Disabled)
Remote host for ping
DNS
Manual
DNS1
DNS2
DNS manual status (Enabled or Disabled)
Manual DNS 1 address
Manual DNS 2 address
NAT
Detailed in previous section.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
62
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
Virtual Server
Detailed in previous section.
Source email
Detailed in previous section.
Recipient emails
Enabled
Account
Trigger
Data
Interval
Last deliver
Detailed in previous section.
Detailed in previous section.
Detailed in previous section.
Detailed in previous section.
Detailed in previous section.
For the last delivery attempt it shows the date and the status
icon. A failed status icon indicate an error in the delivery.
WEB autorefresh
Status
Value
Displays the status of the automatic refresh of the Web. This
state may be Disabled or Enabled.
Displays (only in case of status Enabled) the seconds of the
automatic refresh of the Web.
MODEM
Detailed in section 5.3.
SNMP Agent
Detailed in section 5.3.
DOCUMENTS
At MIB document to local hard disk, MIB there is a link for downloading the file RSXX8000-MLX-MIB.mi2 with the MIB required for monitoring and controlling the system.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
63
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.1.4 Menu Summary
Summary > Alarms
Displays a summary of the the alarm status of all modules.
Summary > Status
Displays a summary of the status (settings and measurements) of all modules.
Summary > Alarm log
#
Modules
Code
Description
Set
Cleared
Log Entry number
Module description
Alarm/event code
Alarm/event description
Timestamp of Log Entry set
Timestamp of Log Entry cleared
Allows to access the Alarm log page which displays all entries in the log of alarms and
related options. From this page it is possible to export the log to a file named by default [system name].html. It is also possible to delete the entire log (See Management
instrument manual for more details).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
64
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.1.5 Menu Configuration > Relay/alarms
Allows to set up the relays parameters. See "Relays" section at Instrument Manual of
Management module for more details about relays interface.
Actuator configuration
Allows to set up the outputs.
Name
Description
Rest
Duration
The output to set
To rename the output
To set the stand-by status (open or close)
To set the pulse duration in seconds. In case of 0, the actuation is by level.
Name
Current status
Configure
The output to set
To check the current status of the output
To perform an action manually over the output
Input configuration
Allows to set up the inputs.
Name
Description
Current status
Pulse
Actuation
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
The input to set
To rename the input
To check the current status of the input
To set the pulse duration in seconds. In case of 0, the actuation is by level.
To set the output linked with this input
65
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.1.6 Menu Configuration > DVB-T Receiver
Detailed in section 5.4.
5.1.1.7 Menu Configuration > Modules
This menu is subdivided into as many submenus as modules exist in the system. It allows
to select the menu with the settings of a module. The tables in this menu vary depending
on the type of module considered and are detailed in the following sections.
5.1.1.8 Menu Configuration > General config.
Allows to configure several common parameters in several modules at the same time.
Menu Configuration > General config. > Transmitter DVB-T
Menu Configuration > General config. > Transmitter DVB-T/T2
Menu Configuration > General config. > Gap Filler
Menu Configuration > General config. > Retransmitter DVB-T
Menu Configuration > General config. > GPS Splitter 10MHz/1PPS
Menu Configuration > General config. > N+1 Switch
Enable
Module
To enable the module for general configuration
Module description
Enable
Parameter
Configure
To enable the parameter for general configuration
Parameter description
Parameter value
See web description of the different modules in following sections for more details about
parameters.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
66
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.1.9 Menu Alarms > Alarms log
#
Modules
Code
Description
Set
Cleared
Log Entry number
Module description
Alarm/event code
Alarm/event description
Timestamp of Log Entry set
Timestamp of Log Entry cleared
Allows to access the Alarm log page which displays all entries in the log of alarms and
related options. From this page you can export the log to a file named by default [system
name].html. You can also delete the entire log (See Management instrument manual for
more details).
5.1.1.10 Menu Alarms > Status/Configuration
This menu is subdivided into as many submenus as modules exist in the system. Allows
you to select the menu with the alarm settings of a module. The tables in this menu vary
depending on the type of module considered and are detailed in following sections.
5.1.1.11 Menu Alarms > General config.
Allows you to configure common alarm parameters in all modules of the same type at the
same time.
Menu Alarms > General config. > Transmitter DVB-T
Menu Alarms > General config. > Transmitter DVB-T/T2
Menu Alarms > General config. > Gap Filler
Menu Alarms > General config. > Retransmitter DVB-T
Menu Alarms > General config. > GPS Splitter 10MHz/1PPS
Menu Alarms > General config. > N+1 Switch
See web description of different modules in following sections for more details about
alarms.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
67
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.2 MLx Transmitter
In the web application an MLx Transmitter is identified by its output channel, output
power and control address. By accessing the menu of a transmitter at the top, the information about the output channel and output power and its control address and the status
of communication with the module are displayed. Within this menu, it is possible to select
various submenus: Status, Configuration and Alarms.
5.1.2.1 Status
Allows to check the configuration parameters status of the transmitter.
Parameter
Network mode
ASI switching mode
ASI input 1
ASI input 2
Selected ASI
Seamless
Constellation
FEC
Guard interval
Bandwidth
FFT
PPS edge
Auto MIP
MIP delay
Maximum network delay
Local delay
Tx ID
Cell ID Status
Cell ID
Active Mutes
GPS Mute Temporization
FPGA oscillator
Output channel/offset
Output Frequency
Output oscillator
AGC3 voltage
Mute RF
Temperature (Power stage /
FPGA)
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Description
MFN / SFN / MFN* (MFN* = SFN forced to MFN)
Manual: input1/input2 / Automatic: no priority/priority inpunt1
OK / ASI error
OK / ASI error
1/2
OK / QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 , 7/8
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32
6 MHz / 7 MHz / 8 MHz
8K / 2K
↑ (ris.) / ↓ (fall)
On / Off
-(2000.0µs) to +(2000.0µs)
-(2000.0µs) to +(2000.0µs)
0 to 65535
Enable / Disable
0 to 65535
No MIP, GPS, ASI, MPEG overflow, MPEG error
0 to 1999 minutes
Locked / Unlocked
14 to 78 / -4 to +4
470000000 to 862000000
1.5V to 24V Locked / Unlocked
1.0V to 5.0V
Enable / Disable
0o C to 75o C
68
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
Transistor current 1/2
Output Power
Reflected power
Precorrector
(Vcorr1/PC1/PC2)
Reflected power threshold
Temperature threshold (Power
stage)
10MHz
Channel resolution
Date
Alimentation
Fan/s activated time
Serial number
Micro firmware / Bootloader
vers
FPGA version
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
in mA
dBms / Watts
in Watts
000 to 3F0 / 0 or 1
-2 dB to -6 dB
0o C to 99o C
Extern. / Intern.
125KHz / 143KHz / 166 KHz
Year/Month/Day Hour
1.2V / 5V / 27V
in Hours
69
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.2.2 Configuration
Allows to set up the configuration parameters of the transmitter.
i
When performing a configuration change by pressing configure button, a warning
message appears with the text This action can cause a cut on watch of the
channel. Do you wish to continue? to confirm action.
Parameter
Network mode
ASI switching mode
Constellation
FEC
Guard interval
Bandwidth
FFT
PPS edge
Auto MIP
Local delay
Description
MFN / SFN
Manual: input1/input2 / Automatic: no priority/priority input1
QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM ( Read only if AutoMIP)
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 , 7/8 ( Read only if AutoMIP)
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32 ( Read only if AutoMIP)
6 MHz / 7 MHz / 8 MHz ( Read only if AutoMIP)
8K / 2K ( Read only if AutoMIP)
↑ (ris.) / ↓ (fall) (Disabled in MFN)
On / Off (Disabled in MFN)
-(2000.0µs) to +(2000.0µs). Disabled in MFN.
Resolution 100ns
Tx ID
Cell ID
Active Mutes
GPS Mute Temporization
Output channel
Output offset
Output Frequency
Output Power / Mute RF
Precorrector
(Vcorr1/PC1/PC2)
Reflected power threshold
Temperature threshold (Power
stage)
Channel resolution
0 to 65535
0 to 65535 / Enable or Disable
No MIP, GPS, ASI, MPEG overflow, MPEG error
0 to 1999 minutes (Only with Mute GPS)
14 to 78
-4 to +4 ( Offset steps = Channel resolution)
470000000 to 862000000
-5 to +5 (Resolution 0.1dB) / Enable / Disable
000 to 3F0 / 0 or 1. Resolution Vcorr1 010
-2 dB to -6 dB. Resolution 1dB
0o C to 99o C. Resolution 1o C
125KHz / 143KHz / 166 KHz
Software Reset Transmitter DVB-T
Allows to execute the command of software reset (see Management instrument manual
for more details about commands).
Fan/s counter Reset Transmitter DVB-T
Allows to reset fans’ counter (see section 8.5 for more details).
Load configuration
Allows to load a full configuration to the module, either from the last saved configuration
file in internal memory (it shows the date of the last configuration file stored in the
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
70
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
internal memory), or from a configuration file stored in a external memory using backup
(file with extension *.bin) (see Management instrument manual for more details about
commands).
Firmware upgrade summary
Allows to check the current versions and the last upgrade process date and result (this
information is not stored permanently, so it is not available when Management has been
restarted).
Firmware upgrade
Allows to perform a firmware upgrade (see section 6.1.4 for more details).
5.1.2.3 Alarms
This menu allows to set the alarm settings (see Management instrument manual for more
details about alarms).
Code
Code
Description
Status
Enable
Log
Hysteresis∗
Fault
Warning
Alarm
Alarm code
Alarm description
Current status of the alarm
To enable or disable the alarm
To perform the possibility to log or not the alarm
To set the hysteresis time in seconds from 0 to 255 seconds (0 seconds corresponds to no histeresis)
To add the alarm to the "FAULT" alarm sumatory
To add the alarm to the "WARNING" alarm sumatory
∗ The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm
to be considered as valid.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
71
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.3 MLx Transmitter DVB-T2
In the web application an MLx Transmitter T2 is identified by its output channel, output
power and control address. By accessing the menu of a transmitter at the top, the information about the output channel and output power and its control address and the status
of communication with the module are displayed. Within this menu, it is possible to select
various submenus: Status, Configuration and Alarms.
5.1.3.1 Status
Allows to check the configuration parameters status of the transmitter.
Parameter
Description
Modulator
Output Power
Reflected power
Mute RF
Transistors current 1/2
Temperature (Power stage /
FPGA)
DVB-T / DVB-T2
dBms / Watts
in Watts
Enable / Disable
in mA
0o C to 75o C
DVB-T
Input
ASI switching mode
Switching hysteresis
ASI input 1
ASI input 2
Selected ASI
Seamless
Manual: input1/input2 / Automatic: no priority input/priority input1
0 to 3 sec
OK / ASI error
OK / ASI error
1/2
OK / System
Network mode
Bandwidth
PPS edge
Auto MIP
MIP delay
Maximum network delay
Local delay
Local delay margin
Tx ID
Cell ID Status
Cell ID
MFN / SFN / MFN* (MFN* = SFN forced to MFN)
6 MHz / 7 MHz / 8 MHz ( Read only if AutoMIP)
↑ (ris.) / ↓ (fall) (Disabled in MFN)
On / Off (Only for DVB-T and MFN)
-(2000.0µs) to +(2000.0µs)
-(2000.0µs) to +(2000.0µs)
in µs
0 to 65535
Enable / Disable
0 to 65535
Constellation
FEC
Guard interval
FFT
QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM ( Read only if AutoMIP)
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 , 7/8 ( Read only if AutoMIP)
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32 ( Read only if AutoMIP)
8K / 2K ( Read only if AutoMIP)
Modulation
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
72
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
DVB-T2
Input
Type
Pid
ASI switching mode
Switching hysteresis
ASI input 1
ASI input 2
Selected ASI
PPS edge
Network mode
IA Time Offset
Time to transmit
Superframe latency
Local delay
Local delay margin
Bandwidth
Cell ID
Network ID
T2 System ID
T2 Version
RF Frequency
T2MI TimeStamping
Tx ID
TS / T2MI
32 to 8190
Manual: input1/input2 / Automatic: no priority input/priority input1
0 to 3 sec
OK / ASI error
OK / ASI error
1/2
System
↑ (ris.) / ↓ (fall) (Disabled in MFN)
MFN / SFN / MFN* (MFN* = SFN forced to MFN)
-(2000.0µs) to +(2000.0µs)
in µs
1.7 MHz (T2MI) / 5 MHz / 6 MHz / 7 MHz / 8 MHz
0 to 65535 / Enable or Disable
0 or 65535
0 or 65535
v 1.1.1 or v 1.2.1
NULL / REL. / ABS. (T2MI and SFN only)
0 to 65535
T2 Frame
L1 Modulation
Preamble
User MISO group
Extended Carrier
FFT
Guard interval
Papr
Pilot Pattern
T2 Frames
Symbols
Superframe duration
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
BPSK / QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM
SISO / MISO
1/2
ON / OFF
1K / 2K / 4K / 8K /16K /32K
1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 1/4, 1/128, 19/128, 19/1256
- / ACE / TR / ACE-TR (v1.1.1) or TR-P2 / ACE
/ TR / ACE-TR (v1.2.1)
PP1 / PP2 / PP3 / PP4 /PP5 /PP6 / PP7 / PP8
2 to 255
0 to 4095
73
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
Parameter
Index
PLPs
Id
Type
Mode
Group Id
Constelation
Rotated Constelation
FEC Type
Code Rate
N. Blocks
TI Type
TI Length
In-Band Signalling
Description
PLP
up to 8 (PLP info selection)
up to 8
0 to 255
Common / Data Type1 / Data Type2
Normal / High Efficiency
0 to 255
256QAM / 64QAM / 16QAM / QPSK / BPSK
ON / OFF
16K LDPC / 64K LDPC
1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6
0 or 65535
SINGLE / MULTI
0 to 255
- / B / A / A&B
Common
RF
Active Mutes
GPS Mute Temporization
FPGA oscillator
Output channel/offset
Output Frequency
Slope corrector
Output oscillator
AGC3 voltage
Reflected power threshold
Temperature threshold (Power
stage)
10MHz
Channel resolution
No MIP, GPS, ASI, MPEG overflow, MPEG error,
SFN error
0 to 1999 minutes
Locked / Unlocked
14 to 78 / -4 to +4
470000000 to 862000000
-4 to +4
1.5V to 24V Locked / Unlocked
1.0V to 5.0V
-2 dB to -6 dB
0o C to 75o C
Extern. / Intern.
125KHz / 143KHz / 166 KHz
Predistorter
Digital Precorrector
u0 Amp
alfa Amp
u0 Phase
alfa Phase
Analog
Precorrector
(Vcorr1/PC1/PC2)
Enabled / Disabled
0.00 to 0.50. Resolution 0.01
0.00 to 0.99. Resolution 0.01
0.00 to 0.50. Resolution 0.01
-45.0o to +45.0o . Resolution 0.5
000 to 3F0 / 0 or 1. Resolution Vcorr1 010. Only if
Digital Precorrector disabled.
Date
Alimentation
Fan/s activated time
Serial number
Microcontroller
firmware/bootloader version
FPGA version
Year/Month/Day Hour
1.2V / 5V / 27V
in Hours
Control
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
74
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.3.2 Configuration
Allows to set up the configuration parameters of the transmitter.
i
When performing a configuration change by pressing configure button, a warning
message appears with the text This action can cause a cut on watch of the
channel. Do you wish to continue? to confirm action.
Parameter
Description
Modulator
DVB-T / DVB-T2
Type
Pid
ASI switching mode
Switching hysteresis
TS / T2MI
0 to 8191
Manual: input1/input2 / Automatic: no priority input/priority input1
0 to 3 sec
Network mode
PPS edge
Auto MIP
Local delay
MFN / SFN
↑ (ris.) / ↓ (fall) (Disabled in MFN)
On / Off (Only for DVB-T and MFN)
-(2000.0µs) to +(2000.0µs). Disabled in MFN.
Input
System
Bandwidth
Cell ID
Network ID
T2 System ID
T2 Version
Tx ID
Modulation
Preamble
User MISO group
MISO group
Extended Carrier
FFT
Guard interval
Papr
Pilot Pattern
T2 Frames
Symbols
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Resolution 100ns
1.7 MHz (DVB-T2 and T2MI) / 5 MHz (DVB-T2)/6
MHz / 7 MHz / 8 MHz
0 to 65535 / Enable or Disable
0 or 65535
0 or 65535
v 1.1.1 or v 1.2.1
0 to 65535
T2 Frame (DVB-T2 and TS input)
BPSK / QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM
SISO / MISO
1/2
1/2/ON / OFF
1K / 2K / 4K / 8K /16K /32K
1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 1/4, 1/128, 19/128, 19/1256
- / ACE / TR / ACE-TR (v1.1.1) or TR-P2 / ACE
/ TR / ACE-TR (v1.2.1)
PP1 / PP2 / PP3 / PP4 /PP5 /PP6 / PP7 / PP8
2 to 255
0 to 4095
75
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
Id
Type
Mode
Group Id
Constelation
Rotated Constelation
FEC Type
Code Rate
N. Blocks
TI Type
TI Length
In-Band Signalling
PLP (DVB-T2 and TS input)
0 to 255
Common / Data Type1 / Data Type2
Normal / High Efficiency
0 to 255
Constellation
FEC
Guard interval
FFT
Active Mutes
GPS Mute Temporization
Output channel
Output offset
Output Frequency
Slope corrector
Output Power / Mute RF
Reflected power threshold
Temperature threshold (Power
stage)
Channel resolution
256QAM / 64QAM / 16QAM / QPSK / BPSK
ON / OFF
16K LDPC / 64K LDPC
1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6
0 or 65535
SINGLE / MULTI
0 to 255
- / B / A / A&B
Modulation (DVB-T)
QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM ( Read only if AutoMIP)
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 , 7/8 ( Read only if AutoMIP)
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32 ( Read only if AutoMIP)
8K / 2K ( Read only if AutoMIP)
RF
No MIP, GPS, ASI, MPEG overflow, MPEG error,
SFN error
0 to 1999 minutes (Only with Mute GPS)
14 to 78
-4 to +4 ( Offset steps = Channel resolution)
470000000 to 862000000
-4 to +4
-5 to +5 (Resolution 0.1dB) / Enable / Disable
-2 dB to -6 dB. Resolution 1dB
0o C to 99o C. Resolution 1o C
125KHz / 143KHz / 166 KHz
Predistorter
Digital Precorrector
u0 Amp
alfa Amp
u0 Phase
alfa Phase
Analog
Precorrector
(Vcorr1/PC1/PC2)
Enabled / Disabled
0.00 to 0.50. Resolution 0.01
0.00 to 0.99. Resolution 0.01
0.00 to 0.50. Resolution 0.01
-45.0o to +45.0o . Resolution 0.5
000 to 3F0 / 0 or 1. Resolution Vcorr1 010. Only if
Digital Precorrector disabled.
Enable DVB-T2
Allows to introduce the activation code for the DVB-T2 modulator software option (see
Transmitter DVB-T2 instrument manual for more details). This menu disappears once
activation process is complete.
Software Reset Transmitter DVB-T/T2
Allows to execute the command of software reset (see Management instrument manual
for more details about commands).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
76
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
Fan/s counter Reset Transmitter DVB-T/T2
Allows to reset fans’ counter (see section 8.5 for more details).
Load configuration
Allows to load a full configuration to the module, either from the last saved configuration
file in internal memory (it shows the date of the last configuration file stored in the
internal memory), or from a configuration file stored in a external memory using backup
(file with extension *.bin) (see Management instrument manual for more details about
commands).
Firmware upgrade summary
Allows to check the current versions and the last upgrade process date and result (this
information is not stored permanently, so it is not available when Management has been
restarted).
Firmware upgrade
Allows to perform a firmware upgrade (see section 6.1.4 for more details).
5.1.3.3 Alarms
This menu allows to set the alarm settings (see Management instrument manual for more
details about alarms).
Code
Code
Description
Status
Enable
Log
Hysteresis∗
Fault
Warning
Alarm
Alarm code
Alarm description
Current status of the alarm
To enable or disable the alarm
To perform the possibility to log or not the alarm
To set the hysteresis time in seconds from 0 to 255 seconds (0 seconds corresponds to no histeresis)
To add the alarm to the "FAULT" alarm sumatory
To add the alarm to the "WARNING" alarm sumatory
∗ The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm
to be considered as valid.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
77
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.4 MLx Gap Filler
In the web application an MLx Gap Filler is identified by its output channel, output power
and control address. By accessing the menu of a gap filler at the top, inforamtion about
the output channel and power, its control address and the status of communication with
the module is displayed. Within this menu, is is possible to select various submenus:
Status, Configuration and Alarms.
5.1.4.1 Status
Allows to check the configuration parameters status of the Gap Filler.
Parameter
Input channel/offset
Input Frequency
Input level
Input oscillator
AGC voltage 1/2
Echo canceller
Slope corrector
Extended BW
GM
Window
1
(Enable/Speed/Position)
Window 2 (Speed/Position)
Window
3
(Enable/Speed/Position)
Power adaptation (echo GM)
Attenuation (adaptive)
Output channel/offset
Output Frequency
Output oscillator
AGC3 voltage
Mute RF
Temperature (Power stage /
FPGA)
Transistor current 1/2
Output Power
Reflected power
Precorrector (Vcorr1/PC1/PC2)
Reflected power threshold
10MHz
Channel resolution
Date
Alimentation
Alimentation
Fan/s activated time
Serial number
Micro firmware / Bootloader vers
FPGA version
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Description
21 to 69 / -4 to +4
470000000 to 862000000
in dBm
Locked / Unlocked
3.0V to 9.0V / 1.3V to 4.0V
Enabled / Disabled
-3 to +3
Enabled / Disabled
Std. EC gain margin (Signal - Echo) in dB (>0 for
positive levels)
ON / OFF / S0 to S7 / 0.5µs to 31.6µs (Enh. EC)
S0 to S7 / 5µs to 6.8µs (Enh. EC)
ON / OFF / S0 to S7 / 0.5µs to 31.6µs (Enh. EC)
Power adaptation feature (Enabled / Disabled )
Output attenuation in dB
21 to 69 / -4 to +4
470000000 to 862000000
1.5V to 24V Locked / Unlocked
1.0V to 5.0V
Enable / Disable
0o C to 75o C
in mA
dBms / Watts
in Watts
000 to 3F0 / 0 or 1
-2 dB to -6 dB
Extern. / Intern.
125KHz / 143KHz / 166 KHz
Year/Month/Day Hour
1V / 5V / 27V (Disabled in Std. EC)
1.2V / 5V / 27V (Disabled in Enh. EC)
in Hours
78
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.4.2 Configuration
Allows to set up the configuration parameters of the Gap Filler.
i
When performing a configuration change by pressing configure button, a warning
message appears with the text This action can cause a cut on watch of the
channel. Do you wish to continue? to confirm action.
Parameter
Input channel
Input offset
Input Frequency
Echo canceller
Slope corrector
Extended BW
Power adaptation (echo GM)
Window
1
(Enable/Speed/Position)
Window 2 (Speed/Position)
Window
3
(Enable/Speed/Position)
Output channel
Output offset
Output Frequency
Output Power / Mute RF
Precorrector
(Vcorr1/PC1/PC2)
Reflected power threshold
Temperature threshold (Power
stage)
Channel resolution
Description
21 to 69
-4 to +4 ( Offset steps = Channel resolution)
470000000 to 862000000
Enable / Disable (Disabled in case of Enh. EC)
-3 to +3
Enabled / Disabled
Power adaptation feature activation (Enabled / Disabled )
ON / OFF / S0 to S7 / 0.5µs to 31.6µs (Disabled in
case of Std. EC)
S0 to S7 / 5µs to 6.8µs (Disabled in case of Std.
EC)
ON / OFF / S0 to S7 / 0.5µs to 31.6µs (Disabled in
case of Std. EC)
21 to 69
-4 to +4 ( Offset steps = Channel resolution)
470000000 to 862000000
-5 to +5 (Resolution 0.1dB) / Enable / Disable
000 to 3F0 / 0 or 1. Resolution Vcorr1 010
-2 dB to -6 dB. Resolution 1dB
0o C to 99o C. Resolution 1o C
125KHz / 143KHz / 166 KHz
Software Reset Gap Filler
Allows to execute the command of software reset (see Management instrument manual
for more details about commands).
Fan/s counter Reset Transmitter DVB-T
Allows to reset fans’ counter (see section 8.5 for more details).
Load configuration
Allows to load a full configuration to the module, either from the last saved configuration
file in internal memory (it shows the date of the last configuration file stored in internal
memory), or from a configuration file stored in a external memory using backup (file with
extension *.bin) (see Management instrument manual for more details about commands).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
79
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
Firmware upgrade summary
Allows to check the current versions and the last upgrade process date and result (this
information is not stored permanently, so it is not available when Management has been
restarted).
Firmware upgrade
Allows to perform a firmware upgrade (see section 6.1.4 for more details).
5.1.4.3 Alarms
This menu allows to set the alarm settings (see Management instrument manual for more
details about alarms).
Code
Code
Description
Status
Enable
Log
Hysteresis∗
Fault
Warning
Alarm
Alarm code
Alarm description
Current status of the alarm
To enable or disable the alarm
To perform the possibility to log or not the alarm
To set the hysteresis time in seconds from 0 to 255 seconds (0 seconds corresponds to no hysteresis)
To add the alarm to the "FAULT" alarm sumatory
To add the alarm to the "WARNING" alarm sumatory
∗ The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm
to be considered as valid.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
80
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.5 MLx Retransmitter
In the web application an MLx Retransmitter DVB-T is identified by its output channel,
output power and control address. By accessing the menu of a retransmitter at the top,
information about the output channel and power, its control address and the status of
communication with the module is displayed. Within this menu, it is possible to select
various submenus: Status, Configuration and Alarms.
5.1.5.1 Status
Allows to view the status of the Retransmitter configuration parameters.
Parameter
Input channel/offset
Input Frequency
Demodulator
CBER
VBER
Auto configuration
Constellation
FEC
Guard interval
Bandwidth
FFT
Cell ID Status
Cell ID
Active Mutes
Output channel/offset
Output Frequency
Output oscillator
AGC3 voltage
Mute RF
Temperature (Power stage)
Transistor current 1/2
Output Power
Reflected power
Precorrector
(Vcorr1/PC1/PC2)
Reflected power threshold
Temperature threshold (Power
stage)
10MHz
Channel resolution
Date
Alimentation
Fan/s activated time
Serial number
Micro firmware / Bootloader
vers
FPGA version
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Description
14 to 78 / -4 to +4
470000000 to 862000000
Synchonized / Not synchronized
Manual / Automatic
QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 , 7/8
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32
6 MHz / 7 MHz / 8 MHz
8K / 2K
Enable / Disable
0 to 65535
MPEG overflow, MPEG error
14 to 78 / -4 to +4
470000000 to 862000000
1.5V to 24V Locked / Unlocked
1.0V to 5.0V
Enable / Disable
0o C to 75o C
in mA
dBms / Watts
in Watts
000 to 3F0 / 0 or 1
-2 dB to -6 dB
0o C to 99o C
Extern. / Intern.
125KHz / 143KHz / 166 KHz
Year/Month/Day Hour
1.2V / 5V / 27V
in Hours
81
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.5.2 Configuration
Allows to set up the configuration parameters of the Retransmitter.
i
When performing a configuration change by pressing configure button, a warning
message appears with the text This action can cause a cut on watch of the
channel. Do you wish to continue? to confirm action.
Parameter
Input channel
Input offset
Input Frequency
Auto configuration
Constellation
FEC
Guard interval
Bandwidth
FFT
Cell ID
Active Mutes
Output channel
Output offset
Output Frequency
Output Power / Mute RF
Precorrector
(Vcorr1/PC1/PC2)
Reflected power threshold
Temperature threshold (Power
stage)
Channel resolution
Description
14 to 78
-4 to +4 (Offset steps = Channel resolution)
470000000 to 862000000
Manual / Automatic
QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM (Read only if AutoMIP)
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 , 7/8 ( Read only if AutoMIP)
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32 ( Read only if AutoMIP)
6 MHz / 7 MHz / 8 MHz
8K / 2K (Read only if AutoMIP)
0 to 65535 / Enable or Disable
MPEG overflow, MPEG error
14 to 78
-4 to +4 (Offset steps = Channel resolution)
470000000 to 862000000
-5 to +5 (Resolution 0.1dB) / Enable / Disable
000 to 3F0 / 0 or 1. Resolution Vcorr1 010
-2 dB to -6 dB. Resolution 1dB
0o C to 99o C. Resolution 1o C
125KHz / 143KHz / 166 KHz
Software Reset Retransmitter DVB-T
Allows to execute the command of software reset (see Management instrument manual
for more details about commands).
Fan/s counter Reset Transmitter DVB-T
Allows to reset fans’ counter (see section 8.5 for more details).
Load configuration
Allows to load a full configuration to the module, either from the last saved configuration
file in internal memory (it shows the date of the last configuration file stored in internal
memory), or from a configuration file stored in a external memory using backup (file with
extension *.bin) (see Management instrument manual for more details about commands).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
82
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
Firmware upgrade summary
Allows to check the current versions and the last upgrade process date and result (this
information is not stored permanently, so it is not available when Management has been
restarted).
Firmware upgrade
Allows to perform a firmware upgrade (see section 6.1.4 for more details).
5.1.5.3 Alarms
This menu allows to set up the alarm settings (see Management instrument manual for
more details about alarms).
Code
Code
Description
Status
Enable
Log
Hysteresis∗
Fault
Warning
Alarm
Alarm code
Alarm description
Current status of the alarm
To enable or disable the alarm
To perform the possibility to log or not the alarm
To set the hysteresis time in seconds from 0 to 255 seconds (0 seconds corresponds to no hysteresis)
To add the alarm to the "FAULT" alarm sumatory
To add the alarm to the "WARNING" alarm sumatory
∗ The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm
to be considered as valid.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
83
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.6 MLx GPS
In the web application the synchonization system (MLx GPS Basic Unit and MLx GPS
Receiver Module) is identified as GPS Splitter 10MHz/1pps. By accessing the menu of
a GPS splitter at the top, inforamtion about the control address and the status of communication with the module is displayed. Within this menu, it is possible to select various
submenus: Status, Configuration and Alarms.
5.1.6.1 Status
Allows to view the status of the GPS configuration parameters.
Parameter
Switching mode
Drift
Switching hysteresis
Enable external input
Mute
Active Output
Status GPS1
Holdover 1
Satellites GPS1
Position GPS1
Date GPS1
Version GPS1
Status GPS2
Holdover 2
Satellites GPS2
Position GPS2
Date GPS2
Version GPS2
Date
Alimentation
5VGPS1/5VGPS2/12V
Serial number
Microcontroller
firmware/bootloader version
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Description
Automatic / GPS1 / GPS2 / External input / AutoSync
in µs
in s
Enable / Disable
Enable / Not enable
GPS1 / GPS2 / Ext / None
Locked / Unlocked
GPS1 Holdover countdown (Initial –h–m)
Satellites status from 1 to 8 (Sat X: [Satellite No ]
[Locked/Unlocked])
-o N; -o E;- 0m (Latitude; Longitude; Altitude) / Link to
google maps
Date and hour from locked GPS1
FPGA firmware version of the GPS receiver 1 (S/N ≥
101888)
Internal GPS1 receiver model (S/N ≤ 101887)
Locked / Unlocked
GPS2 Holdover countdown (Initial –h–m)
Satellites status from 1 to 8 (Sat X: [Satellite No ]
[Locked/Unlocked])
-o N; -o E;- 0m (Latitude; Longitude; Altitude) / Link to
google maps
Date and hour from locked GPS2
FPGA firmware version of the GPS receiver 2 (S/N ≥
101888)
Internal GPS2 receiver model (S/N ≤ 101887)
Year/Month/Day Hour
5V / 5V 12V
Microcontroller firmware/bootloader version of the
GPS switcher unit
84
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.6.2 Configuration
Allows to set up the configuration parameters of the GPS.
i
When performing a configuration change by pressing configure button, a warning
message appears with the text This action can cause a cut on watch of the
channel. Do you wish to continue? to confirm action.
Parameter
Switching mode
Drift
Switching hysteresis∗
Enable external input
Mute
Description
Automatic / GPS1 / GPS2 / External input / AutoSync
in µs
in s
Enable / Disable
Enable / Not enable
∗ The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm
to be considered as valid and a switching cause.
Software Reset GPS Splitter 10MHz/1PPS
Allows to execute the command of software reset (see Management instrument manual
for more details about commands).
GPS1 Receiver HW Reset
Allows to perform a hardware reset to GPS1 receiver.
GPS2 Receiver HW Reset
Allows to perform a hardware reset to GPS2 receiver.
Load configuration
Allows to load a full configuration to the module, either from the last saved configuration
file in internal memory (it shows the date of the last configuration file stored in internal
memory), or from a configuration file stored in a external memory using backup (file with
extension *.bin) (see Management instrument manual for more details about commands).
Firmware upgrade summary
Allows to check the current versions and the last upgrade process date and result (this
information is not stored permanently, so it is not available when Management has been
restarted).
Firmware upgrade
Allows to perform a firmware upgrade (see section 6.1.4 for more details).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
85
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.6.3 Alarms
This menu allows to set the alarm settings (see Management instrument manual for more
details about alarms).
Code
Code
Description
Status
Enable
Log
Hysteresis∗
Fault
Warning
Alarm
Alarm code
Alarm description
Current status of the alarm
To enable or disable the alarm
To perform the possibility to log or not the alarm
To set the hysteresis time in seconds from 0 to 255 seconds (0 seconds corresponds to no histeresis)
To add the alarm to the "FAULT" alarm sumatory
To add the alarm to the "WARNING" alarm sumatory
∗ The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm
to be considered as valid.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
86
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.7 MLx N+1 Switch Unit
In the web application the N+1 units (MLx Switch Unit Transmitter and MLx Switch
Unit Gap Filler) is identified as N+1 Switch. By accessing the menu of a N+1 Switch
at the top, inforamtion about the switch unit type (Transmitter or Gap Filler), its control
address and the status of communication with the module is displayed. Within this menu,
it is possible to select various submenus: Status, Configuration and Alarms.
5.1.7.1 Status
Allows to view the status of the N+1 Switch Unit configuration parameters.
Parameter
Description
Local/Remote
Manual/Automatic
Antenna
Switched
Testing
TX reserve
Forced Mute RF (R1 to R6)
Local / Remote
Manual / Automatic
1 / 1&2.Only for Gap fillers / Retransmitters
Relay# / Relay# / Enable / Disable
R# Enable / Disable
Reserve
Configuration / # verifications / # restorations / Status
/ Verified
Configuration / # verifications / # restorations / Status
/ Verified
N+1 relay status
Relay #
Automatic
Duration
Test[Input] A
Test[Input] B
Test[Input] C
Retries
Time
No input signal(Test)
Automatic
Maximum (per day)
Priorities
Relay #
Verification
Automatic verification enabling. Enable or Disable.
Duration of the verification process. in –m –s
Mode A interval. in –m –s
Mode B fix time. in –m –s
Mode C events. Enable or Disable
0 to 99
Simple / Double / Triple
in –m –s
Restoration
Automatic restoration enabling. Enable / Disable
Maximum number of restoration per day. From 0 to 99
Priorities
Enable / Disable
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
Switching causes
[Alarm description]
Enable / Disable
Date
Alimentation
3.3V/5V/12.5V
Serial number
Microcontroller firmware /
bootloader version
Year / Month / Day Hour:minutes:seconds
5V / 5V 12V
Module information
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
87
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.7.2 Configuration
Allows to set the configuration parameters of the N+1 Switch Unit.
i
When performing a configuration change by pressing configure button, a warning
message appears with the text This action can cause a cut on watch of the
channel. Do you wish to continue? to confirm action.
Parameter
Description
Local/Remote
Manual/Automatic
Antenna
Local / Remote
Manual / Automatic
Switched
Testing
TX reserve
Forced Mute RF
Automatic
Duration
To select the antenna input (1 / 1&2). Only for Gap
fillers / Retransmitters
To perform a switch manually by selecting the relay to
swith from the dropdown list.
To perform a verification manually by selecting the relay to test from the dropdown list.
To set the stand-by status of the back-up module. Enable or Disable.
To perform a RF mute on R# (Enable / Disable)
Verification
Automatic verification enabling. Enable or Disable.
Duration of the verification process. From 01m 00s to
99m 59s
Test[Input] A
Test[Input] B
Test[Input] C
Retries
Time
Mode A interval. From 00m 01s to 99m 59s
Mode B fix time. From 00:00 to 23:59
Mode C events. Enable or Disable
Maximum number of retries. From 0 to 99
Time between fault and verification. Simple / Double /
No input signal(Test)
Duration of the No input signal test. From 00m 00s to
Triple
99m 59s
Automatic
Maximum (per day)
Priorities
Relay #
[Alarm description]
Restoration
Automatic restoration enabling. Enable / Disable
Maximum number of restoration per day. From 0 to 99
Priorities
Enable / Disable
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 (0 no switch, 1 maximum and 6
minimum)
Switching causes
Enable / Disable
Reset N+1 Switch Control
Allows to reset N+1 Switch Control: All relays on N+1 Switch to stand-by (A-modules go
to RF) and reset verifications and restorations counters.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
88
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
Software Reset N+1 Switch
Allows to execute the command of software reset (see Management Module instrument
manual for more details about commands).
Load configuration
Allows to load a full configuration to the module, either from the last saved configuration
file in internal memory (it shows the date of the last configuration file stored in internal
memory), or from a configuration file stored in a external memory using backup (file
with extension *.bin) (see Management Module instrument manual for more details about
commands).
Firmware upgrade summary
Allows to check the current versions and the last upgrade process date and result (this
information is not stored permanently, so it is not available when Management Module
has been restarted).
Firmware upgrade
Allows to perform a firmware upgrade (see section 6.1.4 for more details).
5.1.7.3 Alarms
This menu allows to set up the alarm settings (see Management Module instrument manual for more details about alarms).
Code
Code
Description
Status
Enable
Log
Hysteresis∗
Fault
Warning
Alarm
Alarm code
Alarm description
Current status of the alarm
To enable or disable the alarm
To perform the possibility to log or not the alarm
To set the hysteresis time in seconds from 0 to 255 seconds (0 seconds corresponds to no hysteresis)
To add the alarm to the "FAULT" alarm sumatory
To add the alarm to the "WARNING" alarm sumatory
∗ The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm
to be considered as valid.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
89
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.8 MLx IP-ASI Converter
In the web application the IP-ASI Converter is identified as IP-ASI Converter. By accessing the menu of an IP-ASI Converter at the top, information about the control address and
the status of communication with the module is displayed. Within this menu, it is possible
to select various submenus: Status, Configuration and Alarms.
5.1.8.1 Status
Allows to view the status of the IP-ASI Converter configuration parameters.
Parameter
IP Socket-x (x = 1..7)
ASI output-y (y = 1..7)
Input 1
Input 2
IGMP
DHCP
Unicast IP
Subnet Mask
Gateway
VLAN
MAC
Rx Mode
Port
Protocol
Buffer duration
Latency
ASI Mode
Description
<DataRate> Mbps / Disabled / Unlicensed
Socket IP-x <DataRate> Mbps / Disabled / Unlicensed
Ethernet
10/ 100 / 1000 Mbps and Half-Duplex / Full-Duplex
10/ 100 / 1000 Mbps and Half-Duplex / Full-Duplex
Version 2 / Version 3
Enabled / Disabled
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Enabled (ID=x) (x = 0..255) / Disabled
MAC address
IP Socket-x (x = 1..7)
Unicast / Multicast (IP: 0.0.0.0) (Source:0.0.0.0)
Port
UDP / RTP
<Buffer duration> ms
<Latency> ms
Byte / Packet
Control
Temperature
Date
Serial number
Microcontroller firmware
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
C
Year / Month / Day Hour:minutes:seconds
o
90
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.8.2 Configuration
Allows to set the configuration parameters of the IP-ASI Converter.
i
When performing a configuration change by pressing configure button, a warning
message appears with the text This action can cause a cut on watch of the
channel. Do you wish to continue? to confirm action.
Ethernet
IGMP
DHCP
Unicast IP
Subnet Mask
Gateway
VLAN: On
VLAN: ID
Status
Rx Mode
Rx Mode: IP
Rx Mode: Source
Port*
Protocol
Buffer duration
ASI Mode
Version 2 / Version 3
Enabled / Disabled
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Enabled / Disabled
0 to 255
IP Socket-x (x = 1..7)
Enabled / Disabled
Unicast / Multicast
Port
UDP / RTP
[ms]
Byte / Packet
ASI output-y (y = 1..7)
Status
IP socket
Enabled / Disabled
IP Socket-x (x = 1..7)
* RFC 3550 indicates that RTP should use an even UDP port number, with the corresponding RTCP stream using the next higher (odd) port number.
Enable ASIs
Allows to introduce the activation code for the ASI outputs software option (see IP-ASI
Converter instrument manual for more details). This menu disappears once activation
process of all the 7 outputs is complete.
Software Reset IP/ASI Converter
Allows to execute the command of software reset (see Management Module instrument
manual for more details about commands).
Load configuration
Allows to load a full configuration to the module, either from the last saved configuration
file in internal memory (it shows the date of the last configuration file stored in internal
memory), or from a configuration file stored in a external memory using backup (file
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
91
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
with extension *.bin) (see Management Module instrument manual for more details about
commands).
Firmware upgrade summary
Allows to check the current versions and the last upgrade process date and result (this
information is not stored permanently, so it is not available when Management Module
has been restarted).
Advanced upgrade: Firmware upgrade
Allows to perform a firmware upgrade (see section 6.1.4 for more details).
5.1.8.3 Alarms
This menu allows to set up the alarm settings (see Management Module instrument manual for more details about alarms).
Code
Code
Description
Status
Enable
Log
Hysteresis∗
Fault
Warning
Alarm
Alarm code
Alarm description
Current status of the alarm
To enable or disable the alarm
To perform the possibility to log or not the alarm
To set the hysteresis time in seconds from 0 to 255 seconds (0 seconds corresponds to no hysteresis)
To add the alarm to the "FAULT" alarm sumatory
To add the alarm to the "WARNING" alarm sumatory
∗ The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm
to be considered as valid.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
92
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.9 MLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
In the web application the DVB-S/S2 Receiver is identified as DVB-S/S2 Receiver. By
accessing the menu of an DVB-S/S2 Receiver at the top, information about the control
address and the status of communication with the module is displayed. Within this menu,
it is possible to select various submenus: Status, Configuration and Alarms.
5.1.9.1 Status
Allows to view the status of the DVB-S/S2 Receiver configuration parameters.
Parameter
RF input-x (x = 1..4)
ASI output-y (y = 1..7)
RF x (x = 1..4)
Hysteresis
Description
Locked / Unlocked / Disabled / Unlicensed
RFx (ISI:m) <DataRate> Mbps / Disabled / Unlicensed
Redundancy
Red.RFz (z = 1..4, z6=x) / Aux / -
minutes:seconds
RF input-x (x = 1..4)
Frequency
LNB
DVB Mode (Configured)
Standard (read)
Satellite
PLS
ISIs
Symbol Rate: Auto
Symbol Rate: Symbol Rate
IQ
Roll-Off
Pilots
Frame Length
Modulation
FEC
CBER(DVB-S)
/
LDPCBER(DVB-S2)
VBER(DVB-S)
/
PER(DVB-S2)
C/N
LinkMargin
Power
(LNB On/Off) <LNB Freq.> [MHz] V/H. <Band Freq.>
[MHz] (Low/High)
<OL Freq.> [MHz]. In dual mode: Dual and OL_Low:
<OL Freq.> [MHz], OL_High: <OL Freq.> [MHz]
Auto / DVB-S / DVB-S2
DVB-S / DVB-S2
A/B/C/D
0 to 262143
Up to 16 (from 0 to 255)
Enabled / Disabled
1000 to 45000 KS/s (Auto) (if auto symbol rate)
Normal / inverted
0.2 / 0.25 / 0.35
Yes / No
Long / Short
QPSK / 8PSK / 16APSK / 32APSK
All modes availables according to DVB-S and DVB-S2
dB
dB
dBm
Output Mode
ASI y (y = 1..7)
Byte / Packet
Temperature
Date
Serial number
Microcontroller firmware
C
Year / Month / Day Hour:minutes:seconds
Control
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
o
93
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
5.1.9.2 Configuration
Allows to set the configuration parameters of the DVB-S/S2 Receiver.
i
When performing a configuration change by pressing configure button, a warning
message appears with the text This action can cause a cut on watch of the
channel. Do you wish to continue? to confirm action.
Parameter
Redundancy RFx (x = 1..4)
Hysteresis
Description
Redundancy
RFz (z = 1..4, z6=x) / -
minutes:seconds
RF input-x (x = 1..4)
Status
Frequency: LNB
Frequency: LNB Freq.
Frequency: Pol
Frequency: Band Freq.
LNB OL: L (LO Frequency
Enabled / Disabled
Enabled / Disabled
MHz
V/H
MHz
MHz
for low band in dual mode)
LNB OL: Dual mode
LNB OL: H (High band LO
Enabled / Disabled
MHz
Frequency)
DVB Mode
Satellite
PLS
Symbol Rate: Auto
Symbol Rate: Symbol Rate
Auto / DVB-S / DVB-S2
A/B/C/D
0 to 262143
Enabled / Disabled
1000 to 45000 KS/s
Status
RF/ISI
Enabled / Disabled
RFx (x = 1..4) / ISI (Selected from a list of detected ISIs
ASI output-Y (y = 1..7)
or typed directly)
Mode
Byte / Packet
Enable RFs
Allows to introduce the activation code for the RF inputs software option (see DVB-S/S2
Receiver instrument manual for more details). This menu disappears once activation
process of all the 4 inputs is complete.
Enable ASIs
Allows to introduce the activation code for the ASI outputs software option (see DVB-S/S2
Receiver instrument manual for more details). This menu disappears once activation
process of all the 7 outputs is complete.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
94
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Web interface description
Software Reset DVB-S2/ASI Converter
Allows to execute the command of software reset (see Management Module instrument
manual for more details about commands).
Load configuration
Allows to load a full configuration to the module, either from the last saved configuration
file in internal memory (it shows the date of the last configuration file stored in internal
memory), or from a configuration file stored in a external memory using backup (file
with extension *.bin) (see Management Module instrument manual for more details about
commands).
Firmware upgrade summary
Allows to check the current versions and the last upgrade process date and result (this
information is not stored permanently, so it is not available when Management Module
has been restarted).
Advanced upgrade: Firmware upgrade
Allows to perform a firmware upgrade (see section 6.1.4 for more details).
5.1.9.3 Alarms
This menu allows to set up the alarm settings (see Management Module instrument manual for more details about alarms).
Code
Code
Description
Status
Enable
Log
Hysteresis∗
Fault
Warning
Alarm
Alarm code
Alarm description
Current status of the alarm
To enable or disable the alarm
To perform the possibility to log or not the alarm
To set the hysteresis time in seconds from 0 to 255 seconds (0 seconds corresponds to no hysteresis)
To add the alarm to the "FAULT" alarm sumatory
To add the alarm to the "WARNING" alarm sumatory
∗ The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm
to be considered as valid.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
95
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
UMTS/3G-Modem interface configuration
5.2 UMTS/3G-Modem interface configuration
The Management module enables the remote control and monitoring of the system through
a GSM, GPRS or UMTS networks, making the MLx transmitter operation independent of
wired IT infrastructures.
To configure the modem it is necessary to introduce a SIM card in the slot at the front
panel of the Management module and configure the connection parameters via the Web
browser.
SIM
5.2.1 Settings
Settings are available at MODEM table in menu Configuration > System of Web Interface.
• Modem:
– On/Off. Checked in order to activate the modem configuration.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
96
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
UMTS/3G-Modem interface configuration
– PIN or PUK for the SIM card.
– GSM Band. Selects the current network band in case of working in GPRS
mode (2G). The options are 900/1800, 900/1900, 850/1800 and Auto. In
case of knowing the band, it is better to choose the specific option since the
registration process maybe take much more time in Auto mode.
– Mode. Mobile Network mode. The options are Auto(2G/3G), GPRS(2G) or
UMTS(3G).
– CSCA (message server center). Needed only for SMS messages.
– SMS number. SMS Destination number needed only for SMS messages.
– SMS trigger. Events that trigger an SMS. The only configurable option is IP
change (i.e. when the mobile network IP address is changed to 80.27.32.113
a SMS message will be sent with the text: System Name MAC: XX.XX.XX.XX.XX.XX
Interface PPP0/PPP1 New IP address: 80.27.32.113). Needed only for SMS
messages.
Clicking in Show at Data row, Data settings are displayed:
• Data:
– Data enable. Checked if data transfer is desired.
– APN (Access point name). Defined by Network operator.
– IP Address. In case of a static IP. In other cases default value 0.0.0.0.
– DNS Auto. Checked if the use of the automatically assigned DNS addresses
from the APN is desired.
– MTU (Maximum Transmit Unit). Set the desired MTU value. It is applied
both to the data connection and to the VPN connection.
– Dialing. Dialing code to establish the connection.
– QoSMIN and QoSREQ. Minimum and required Quality of service. Common
values 1,0,0,0,0,0 and 1,0,0,3,0,0 by default.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
97
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
UMTS/3G-Modem interface configuration
– Authentication. Selection of the Authentication protocol. The options are
PAP (Password Authentication Protocol), CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) and Auto.
– User and Password. Defined by Network operator.
Clicking in Show at VPN row, VPN settings are displayed:
• VPN:
– VPN enable. Checked if VPN service is desired.
– IP (Server). VPN server IP address.
– DNS Auto. Checked if the use of the automatically assigned DNS addresses
from the server is desired.
– Authentication. Selection of the Authentication protocol. The options are
PAP (Password Authentication Protocol), CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) and Auto.
– User and Password. Username and password for connecting to the VPN
server.
– MPPE. Checked if the use of MPPE (Microsoft Point to Point Encryption) is
required.
5.2.2 Status
It is possible to check the process status through several parameters. These parameters
are available at MODEM table in menu System of Web Interface:
• Modem:
– Modem status. Modem status.
– Network status. Network status.
– Coverage. Coverage level in dBm and graphical.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
98
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
UMTS/3G-Modem interface configuration
• Data:
–
–
–
–
–
Data status. Data transfer status.
IP. IP address given by the Network operator.
Bytes Rx. Number of received bytes.
Bytes Tx. Number of transferred bytes.
Log. Show messages about the step by step communication process.
• VPN:
–
–
–
–
–
–
VPN status. VPN connection status.
IP. IP address given by the VPN server.
Bytes Rx. Number of received bytes through the VPN connection.
Bytes Tx. Number of transferred bytes through the VPN connection.
MPPE. Enabled/Disabled.
Log. Show messages about the step by step communication process.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
99
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
UMTS/3G-Modem interface configuration
Error control
Possible error messages at Modem status parameter:
• SIM not inserted. SIM card is not detected. The Management is continually retrying SIM detection.
• SIM PIN. The PIN code of the SIM card is wrong. With this message, pending
retries are shown.
• SIM PUK. The PUK code of the SIM card is wrong. With this message, pending
retries are shown.
• Not registered. The modem is not able to registered on any network. The Management is continually retrying the modem registration.
• Not registered on a suitable data network. The modem is register on a network,
but not on a desired network type (2G/3G). The Management is continually retrying
the modem registration.
• Data connection not working. Despite being registered on a network, the data
connection has failed. The Management is continually retrying the data connection.
• No response. The Management is not able to receive a response from the modem.
This message may be displayed intermittently during initializing process. If permanently displayed, it indicates an internal damage. The Management is continually
retrying the modem configuration.
• Communication error. The Management is not able to communicate with the modem. This message indicates an internal damage. The Management is continually
retrying the modem configuration
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
100
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Monitoring and Control via SNMP
5.3 Monitoring and Control via SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used for monitoring and controlling a
wide variety of different units in a network.
A description of the unit - the MIB (Management Information Base) - must be loaded in
the central unit (manager ) from where the transmitters are monitored.
The Management contains a program SNMP agent which can answer queries from the
manager and execute commands. Furthermore, the agent may of its own accord, generate a message and send it to the manager. In this way, the central unit can be informed
of a fault.
Management SNMP agent supports versions SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c detailed in the
RFC1901 to RFC1908. Through the SNMP agent you can:
• Check the state of system parameters.
• Set the system parameters.
• Receive automatic notifications (Traps / Informs) to a maximum of 4 destination IP
addresses. These four IP addresses are factory configured to default values and
can only be modified via SNMP.
The MIB required for monitoring and controlling the system is stored as RS-XX8000MLX-MIB.mi2 directly in the Management and can be downloaded from there using a
web browser in System menu at MIB document. All of the information required for configuration it is contained in the MIB file itself.
To be able to monitor and control a MLx system with SNMP, the MIB of the unit and a
program which can interpret the MIB must be available on the manager side.
To run the SNMP agent it is necessary to activate a software option in the Management
by introducing an activation code via the Web browser at Enable SNMP table in menu
Configuration > System (a string of 10-digit alpha-numeric type):
i
This code is only valid for the module for which it was generated and is not valid
for another different module. Once activated, it is not possible for the user to
desactivate the SNMP agent (it must be done at factory).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
101
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
Monitoring and Control via SNMP
In case of a correct activation, the table with SNMP agent settings appears at the System
menu:
• Version. Version of agent.
• Read community. By default Public.
• Write community. By default Private.
• Traps community. By default Public.
• Traps 1. Destination IP 1, by default 192.168.2.1 Disabled.
• Traps 2. Destination IP 2, by default 192.168.2.2 Disabled.
• Traps 3. Destination IP 3, by default 192.168.2.3 Disabled.
• Traps 4. Destination IP 4, by default 192.168.2.4 Disabled.
• Periodic trap. Periodic trap in order to get the communication alive. This parameter can be disabled (Off) or enabled (configuring a positive value of seconds). By
default Off.
• v2inform. Allows you to enable or disable v2inform for Traps. By default Off.
• v2inform Timeout. The time to retry the Trap in case of error. Only for v2inform
enabled. By default 600s.
• v2inform Retries. The maximum number of retries. Only for v2inform enabled.
By default 5.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
102
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
DVB-T Monitoring
5.4 DVB-T Monitoring
The system is able to monitor the DVB-T signal before transmitting it to the antenna. For
this, the monitor outputs of all RF channels must be mixed and connected to the MONITOR input at the front of the Management module.
The built in DVB-T receiver implements a tuner for all frequencies, so the DVB-T signals
are demodulated and are measured cyclically in order to monitor the system.
The DVB-T receiver is automatically configured with all the RF channels detected by the
Management. But, more channels can be added manually for monitoring external DVB-T
signals.
Configuration parameters of the DVB-T monitor are accessible via Web browser in menu
Configuration > DVB-T Receiver:
• On. Checked in order to activate the channel monitoring.
• Single channel mode. Checked in order to activate the single channel mode. Only
this channel will be monitored.
• Channel. To select the RF channel. This selection can be automatic, with the
system channels or manual, for the external channels. Following frequency parameters are only configurable for manual channel selection.
• Frequency parameters: Offset. To select the frequency offset (4 to -4), it means
the number of steps of channel resolution.
• Frequency parameters: Channel resolution. To select the channel resolution
(125KHz = 1/8 MHz, 143KHz = 1/7 MHz, 166KMHz = 1/6 MHz).
• Frequency parameters: Bandwidth. To select the signal bandwidth (6MHz /
7MHz / 8MHz).
• Sample time. To select the time of continuos monitoring in each cycle. This parameter must be configured from 7.0 to 11.9 seconds.
• Alarms. For each channel, 3 alarms are available:
– ARX01 - Unlocks. This alarm is set if the DVB-T receiver was not able to
synchronize with the incoming DVB-T signal. The Hysteresis is the minimum
number of unlocks in the Sample time to set this alarm. On parameter allows
enabling or disabling this alarm. Log parameter allows configuring if the alarm
is to be shown in the log.
– ARX02 - CBER. This alarm is set whether the measured BER before Viterbi is
out of one of the two Thresholds ( Critical and Non-critical). On parameter
allows enabling or disabling this alarm. Log parameter allows configuring if
the alarm is to be shown in the log.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
103
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Operation
DVB-T Monitoring
– ARX03 - VBER. This alarm is set whether the measured BER after Viterbi is
out of one of the two Thresholds ( Critical and Non-critical). On parameter
allows enabling or disabling this alarm. Log parameter allows configuring if
the alarm is to be shown in the log.
The configuration and measures can be reset (This also forces the receiver to delete the
manual channels and automatically search the RF channels detected by the Management) through the command Reset DVB-T Receiver:
The status of DVB-T monitor are accessible via Web browser in menu Configuration
> DVB-T Receiver:
• Channel. The enabled RF channel.
• Locked. This parameter indicates if the DVB-T receiver is able to synchronize with
the incoming DVB-T signal or not.
• Unlocks: ARX01. The alarm ARX01 - Unlocks status.
• Unlocks: Measure. The current number of unlocks in the Sample time.
• CBER: ARX02. The alarm ARX02 - CBER status.
• CBER: Measure. The current measure of BER before Viterbi.
• VBER: ARX03. The alarm ARX03 - VBER status.
• VBER: Measure. The current measure of BER after Viterbi.
• Constellation. Constellation of the incoming DVB-T signal.
• FEC. FEC of the incoming DVB-T signal.
• Guard interval. Guard interval of the incoming DVB-T signal.
• FFT. FFT of the incoming DVB-T signal.
• Time. Period of time in second since last monitoring cycle.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
104
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Maintenance
6 Maintenance
6.1 Firmware/Software update
Table 6.1 lists the firmware and software types for each device.
Device
Transmitter DVB-T
Transmitter DVB-T2
Gap Filler
Retransmitter
GPS Basic Unit
N+1 Switch
Management
IP-ASI Converter
DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Bootloader
µController
FPGA
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(∗)
µC / FPGA
Software
X
X
X
Table 6.1: Firmware/Software types.
Table 6.2 lists the file types of firmware and software versions.
Firmware/Software
Bootloader
µController
FPGA
µC / FPGA
Software
File type
*.trb
*.hex
*.tra
*.trp
*.trm
Table 6.2: File types.
(∗)
i
In the special case of the GPS Basic Unit the FPGA’s are placed within the
GPS receiver boards. FPGA firmware of a GPS receiver (MLx-B510) with S/N
≤ 101887 is not upgradeable (only for GPS receivers (MLx-B510) with S/N ≥
101888). In case that two GPS receiver boards are inserted into the GPS basic
unit, both of them will be upgraded.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
105
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Maintenance
Firmware/Software update
i
A device can only be upgraded with a right version file. To that end, µController,
FPGA and Software files are signed. For example, it is not possible to upgrade
the µController of a Transmitter with a file corresponding to a µController of a
Gap Filler. Bootloader file is the same for all devices, so it is not signed.
Software and firmware upgrading can be done by using the Management module via
Web Browser in two ways: All modules of the whole system in one single processs from
a unique zip file or individally for device type and from each software type.
i
It is possible to have versions from different software packages into the modules of
the same type in one subrack, but the version of Management Module must be
newest version of the software packages.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
106
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Maintenance
Firmware/Software update
6.1.1 Update of all modules of the system from a ZIP file (Browserbased)
This procedure performs the broadcast software and firmware upgrade of all modules
from all types connected to the Management from a unique zip file.
i
It is mandatory that the names of the files that are compressed in this zip file
contain the corresponding firmware code. For example, the name "Management_02270061_02_B04_1.trm" contains firmware code 02270061.
1. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the section 4.3).
2. Go to Configuration > System menu.
3. At Modules firmware upgrade (ZIP file):
4. Select the desired modules in Module and the desired firmware type in Upgrade
with the corresponding check boxes.
5. Select the zip file in ZIP file and click on Upgrade.
i
The uploading process of the zip file take several minutes depending on the file
size.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
107
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Maintenance
Firmware/Software update
6. If no problems with the file are detected, a success message is shown. In this
moment upgrading process starts. The modules will be upgraded first.
7. Check the status process at Modules firmware upgrade (ZIP file) summary
and Modules firmware upgrade summary:
i
The upgrading process of the modules is indicated by a flashing of the status
LED (orange/red for bootloader/microcontroller and green/orange/red for FGPA)
at the frontal of the Module.
8. if no errors are detected, system will show a countdown of 2 minutes and a message in order to continue with the Management module updating or to finish the
process.
i
The upgrading process takes a few minutes and is indicated by a sequentially
green/orange/red flashing of the ALARM, DVB-T RX, BATT & MODEM LEDs at
the frontal of the Management.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
108
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Maintenance
Firmware/Software update
6.1.2 Software update of Management (Browser-based)
1. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
2. Go to Configuration > System menu.
3. At Management software upgrade select version file in Browse... button and
press Upgrade.
4. If no problems with the file are detected, a success message is shown. In this
moment, the upgrading process starts.
i
The upgrading process takes a few minutes and is indicated by a sequentially
green/orange/red flashing of the ALARM, DVB-T RX, BATT & MODEM LEDs at
the frontal of the Management.
5. Once the upgrading process is completed, the commnad Generate new configuration file is executed automatically and the alarm log is also cleaned automatically.
6. Clean the cache memory of Web browser and check new version in entry screen.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
109
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Maintenance
Firmware/Software update
6.1.3 Broadcast Firmware update of modules (Browser-based)
This procedure performs the broadcast upgrade of all modules from the same type connected to the Management.
1. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
2. Go to Configuration > System menu.
3. At Modules broadcast firmware upgrade:
4. Select the module type in Module:
5. Select the firmware type in Upgrade:
6. Select the version file in File and click on Upgrade.
7. If no problems with the file a success message is shown. In this moment upgrading
process starts.
8. Check the status process at Modules firmware upgrade summary:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
110
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Maintenance
Firmware/Software update
i
The upgrading process is indicated by a flashing of the status LED (orange/red
for bootloader/microcontroller and green/orange/red for FGPA) at the frontal of
the Module.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
111
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Maintenance
Firmware/Software update
6.1.4 Individually Firmware update of modules (Browser-based)
This procedure performs the firmware upgrade of a module.
1. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
2. Go to Configuration > Modules menu and select the module to update.
3. At Firmware upgrade:
4. Select the firmware type:
5. Select the version file and click on Upgrade.
6. If no problems with file version a success message is shown. In this moment upgrading process starts.
7. Check the status process at Firmware upgrade summary:
i
The upgrading process is indicated by a flashing of the status LED (orange/red
for bootloader/microcontroller and green/orange/red for FGPA) at the frontal of
the Module.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
112
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Maintenance
Cleaning of modules and system
6.2 Cleaning of modules and system
Cleaning of equipment is essentially restricted to cleaning the fans. Make sure that all
fan openings are not obstructed and that the airflow holes are unobstructed, this helps to
prevent overheating condition.
Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it from the power supply completely.
Cleaning agents contain substances that can damage the appliance, i.e. cleaning agents
containing solvents can damage the front panel labeling or plastic parts. Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol, acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers. To clean
the outside of the device is sufficient to use a lint-free soft cloth.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
113
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Troubleshooting
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Information
Cabling
Check that the cables between all devices in the MLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter system have been connected in accordance with the schemas of "Connecting Cables
/ Wiring" (see section 3.2) and corresponding to the cables and connectors detailed in
the physical description of the instrument manual of each MLx device.
For each device, information on troubleshooting can be found on its instrument manual.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
114
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Troubleshooting
Reset
7.2 Reset
7.2.1 Hardware Reset
This procedure performs a hard reset of all modules connected to the reset pin of the
Management module. The reset pin interconnects the Management with the Transmitters,
Retransmitters, Gap Fillers, GPS and N+1 Switch units and allows to perform a power
supply reset of all these modules.
1. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
2. Go to Configuration > System menu.
3. At Hardware Reset to all modules select Execute button.
4. The message The request has been realized successfully will be shown as a result.
5. The STATUS LED of all modules will be OFF/ON. In case of no success, check the
reset cabling and connections (see chapter 3.2).
7.2.2 Software Reset
This procedure performs a soft reset of a module connected to the control bus.
1. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
2. Go to Configuration > Modules menu and select the module to reset.
3. At Software Reset [Module type] select Execute button.
4. If no errors, the message The request has been realized successfully will be shown
as a result.
5. If any error, the message It has happened an error in the request(error: 255) will be
shown as a result. In this case check the communication between the module and
Management module (see troubleshooting of Management module in its Instrument
Manual).
7.2.3 Management Reset
1. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
2. Go to Configuration > System menu.
3. At Resets Management select the desired option:
• Restart application software. Software restart of the Management application.
• Reset Management. Hardware reboot of the Management.
4. Select Execute button.
5. The message The request has been realized successfully will be shown as a result.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
115
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Troubleshooting
Reset
7.2.4 GPS Receiver Hardware Reset
This procedure performs a hard reset of a GPS receiver. This reset is performed by the
GPS Basic Unit and can be perform to GPS1 receiver and GPS2 receiver separately.
For example, the process to perform a reset on GPS 1 receiver is as follows:
1. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
2. Go to Configuration > Modules > GPS Splitter 10MHz/1PPS menu.
3. At GPS1 Receiver HW Reset select Execute button.
4. If no errors, the message The request has been realized successfully will be shown
as a result.
5. If any error, the message It has happened an error in the request(error: 255) will be
shown as a result. In this case check the communication between the GPS Basic
Unit and Management module (see troubleshooting of Management module in its
Instrument Manual) or between GPS Basic Unit and the GPS receiver module (see
troubleshooting of GPS in its Instrument Manual).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
116
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
8 Service
8.1 Change of the output channel
Every time the output channel is changed, it may be necessary to readjust its output
power, the reference value used to show the output power readings and the linearity
precorrector values.
This is because the response curve of the detectors and couplers used to measure the
output power is not perfectly flat over the whole UHF band, and also because the linearity
of the output stage LDMOS transistors is not constant with the frequency.
Generally, if the frequency variation is small (less than 24 MHz or three UHF channels)
there will be no need for any readjustment whatsoever.
In any case the procedure must be as follows:
1. Connect a spectrum analyzer or power meter to the device output and measure the
actual transmitted power.
2. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
3. Go to Configuration > Modules menu and select the desired module from the
list.
4. At parameter Output Channel selects the desired output channel from the list:
5. Click in Configure button for recording the new channel.
6. Check at the spectrum analyzer or power meter the actual transmitted power at the
device output.
The output power reading seen in the parameter Output power will be the same
as before the channel was changed, but the actually transmitted power may have
shifted even more than 1dB if the channel change has involved a significant frequency leap:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
117
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Change of the output channel
7. Readjust the device output power to the desired value by measuring it in the spectrum analyzer or power meter. At parameter Output power selects from the list
the increase or decrease in the output power (each step corresponds to 0.5dB
aproximately).
8. Click in Configure button for recording the new value.
NOTICE
To continue, it is necessary to use the external programmer for local operation (see
module instrument manual for more details).
9. Connect the external programmer to the PGRM connector at the front side of the
module.
10. Readjust the reference output power to the desired value. In the menú POWER:
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
i
Ref parameter shows --.-dBm instead of last recorded value
11. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Ref, enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the △ ▽ keys until it matches the value
read in the spectrum analyzer or the power meter (this means that if the spectrum
analyzer reads 31 dBm, the reference value must be readjusted until the external
programer shows 31.0 dBm).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
118
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Change of the output channel
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:31.0dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
12. Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds. Once the change
has taken place, the device’s output power level measurement (shown in the output
power menu) will be updated.
13. Verify that the shoulder attenuation is over 38 dB.
14. If this isn’t, by selecting the central frequency in the spectrum analyzer as the output frequency of the device and configuring a span that largely allows observing
the 8M Hz signal bandwidth (for example 20M Hz ), modify the precorrection parameters so the shoulders attenuation reaches the best possible value (always
higher than 38dB ).
NOTICE
For DVB-T2 transmitter a Digital predistorter (DPD) is available (see module
instrument manual for more details), so next step must be replace for the DPD
adjusting procedure.
15. For analog precorrection (parameters PC1, PC2 and Vcorr1) the procedure is as
follows:
(a) Configure the parameter Vcorr1 to 3F0 value and try the four combinations for
the parameters PC1 and PC2 in order to get the best combination for shoulder
attenuation (Click on Configure button for recording the new values after a
new change).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
PC1
PC2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
119
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Change of the output channel
(b) Then, modify the value of parameter Vcorr1 from 3F0 to 000 in steps of 16
units (3F0, 3E0, 3D0,...) in order to get the best possible values for shoulder
attenuation (Click on Configure button for recording the new values after a
new change).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
120
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Substitution of spare modules
8.2 Substitution of spare modules
8.2.1 Power supply unit
!
CAUTION
Risk of electric shock!
Before removal and installation of the module, always de-energize the entire power
supply unit (disconnect the power plug).
!
CAUTION
RF service maybe affected.
In case of no power supply redundancy, an RF service fault will be caused.
1. Switching off the equipment. Press the AC power switch on the front panel into
position OFF.
2. Remove the module from the subrack (see section 3.1.3.2).
i
Be sure that the AC power switch at the front panel of the new power supply keeps
into position OFF.
3. Insert the new module into the subrack (see section 3.1.3.1).
4. Follow the instructions detailed in section 4.1.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
121
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Substitution of spare modules
8.2.2 Transmitter DVB-T/T2 / Retransmitter DVB-T / Gap Filler
i
Does not affect to all other installed transmission modules of the system.
i
Before exchanging modules generate a backup file (see section 8.7).
1. Remove the module from the subrack (see section 3.1.3.2).
2. Insert the new module into the subrack (see section 3.1.3.1).
!
CAUTION
Risk of injuries
Output channel and power in spare module may different from the original one.
Output signals must be correctly connected and not overloaded.
NOTICE
To continue, it is necessary to use the external programmer for local operation (see
module instrument manual for more details).
3. Connect the external programmer to the PGRM connector at the front side of the
module.
4. Go to System > Configuration menu and set the same telecontrol address as
the replaced module had at the setting parameter CTRLadd.
5. Follow the instructions detailed in section 8.7 to restore the configuration settings
of the replaced module previously saved on Management module.
i
The configuration settings may be introduced manually one by one by the user (see
sections 4.1 and 5 for detailed information).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
122
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Substitution of spare modules
8.2.3 Management Module
i
Hot plugging of Management Module is allowed. Do not affect to the RF service
of the rest of the system. Only remote communication is affected.
1. Remove the module from the subrack (see section 3.1.3.2).
2. Insert the new module into the subrack (see section 3.1.3.1). Because of the hot
plugging, the Management module boots up. The booting procedure takes about
1 minute and is indicated by a steady orange of the ALARM, DVB-T RX, BATT &
MODEM LEDs at the frontal of the Management Module.
3. Log on to the Management Module via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
4. Go to the menu Configuration > System and execute the command Generate
new configuration file in Resets Management table (see the Management module
instrument manual for more information).
5. Check if all modules in the system are displayed at the web entry screen (menu
Start).
6. Check the system date and hour. If needed, set the hour and date at menu
Configuration > System (see section or the Management module instrument
manual for more information).
7. In the Alarms Log menu, delete all entries using the Clean button.
8. Configure the settings of the desired interface to the remote communication (SNMP
agent, Ethernet or Modem) (see section or the Management module instrument
manual for more information).
8.2.4 GPS Basic Unit
!
CAUTION
Synchronization signals affected.
Synchronization signals will be affected during the installation and the GPS receiver
start-up time.
1. Disconnect the cables of the module (see "Connecting Cables / Wiring" chapter).
2. Remove the module.
3. Install the new module.
4. Connect the cables of the module (see "Connecting Cables / Wiring" chapter).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
123
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Substitution of spare modules
NOTICE
To continue is needed the external programmer for local operation (see module
instrument manual for more details).
5. Connect the external programmer to the PGRM connector at the front side of the
module.
6. Go to System > Configuration menu and set the same telecontrol address as
the replaced module at parameter CTRLadd.
7. Follow the instructions detailed in section 8.7 to restore the configuration settings
of the replaced module previously saved on Management module.
i
The configuration settings may be introduced manually one by one by the user (see
sections 4.1 and 5 for detailed information).
8.2.5 GPS Receiver Module
!
CAUTION
Synchronization signals maybe affected.
In case of no redundancy in GPS receiver, synchronization signals will be affected during
the installation and the GPS receiver start-up time.
1. Remove the receiver from the basic unit (see chapter 3.1.3.4).
2. Insert the new receiver into the basic unit (see chapter 3.1.3.3).
3. Follow the instructions referred to the GPS receiver detailed in section 4.1.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
124
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Substitution of spare modules
8.2.6 N+1 Switch
!
CAUTION
RF service will be affected.
RF service will be affected during the installation and cabling process.
i
Switching off the equipment
Press the AC power switch on the front panel into position OFF.
1. Disconnect the cables of the module (see "Connecting Cables / Wiring" section).
2. Remove the module.
3. Install the new module.
4. Connect the cables of the module (see "Connecting Cables / Wiring" section).
i
Switching on the equipment
Press the AC power switch on the front panel into position ON.
NOTICE
To continue is needed the external programmer for local operation (see module
instrument manual for more details).
5. Connect the external programmer to the PGRM connector at the front side of the
module.
6. Go to System > Configuration menu and set the same telecontrol address as
the replaced module at parameter CTRLadd.
7. Follow the instructions detailed in section 8.7 to restore the configuration settings
of the replaced module previously saved on Management module.
i
The configuration settings may be introduced manually one by one by the user (see
sections 4.1 and 5 for detailed information).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
125
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Substitution of spare modules
8.2.7 IP-ASI Converter and DVB-S/S2 Receiver
!
CAUTION
ASI input signals will be affected.
ASI input signals will be affected during the installation and cabling process.
i
Before exchanging modules generate a backup file (see section 8.7).
1. Disconnect the cables of the module (see "Connecting Cables / Wiring" section).
2. Remove the module.
3. Install the new module.
4. Connect the cables of the module (see "Connecting Cables / Wiring" section).
NOTICE
To continue, it is necessary to use the external programmer for local operation (see
module instrument manual for more details).
5. Connect the external programmer to the PGRM connector at the front side of the
module.
6. Go to System > Configuration menu and set the same telecontrol address as
the replaced module had at the setting parameter CTRLadd.
7. Follow the instructions detailed in section 8.7 to restore the configuration settings
of the replaced module previously saved on Management module.
i
The configuration settings may be introduced manually one by one by the user (see
sections 4.1 and 5 for detailed information).
8. Check if no input alarms in the Transmitters.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
126
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Substitution of spare modules
8.2.8 RF Splitter
!
CAUTION
RF input signals will be affected.
RF input signals will be affected during the installation and cabling process.
1. Disconnect the cables of the module (see "Connecting Cables / Wiring" section).
2. Remove the module.
3. Install the new module.
4. Connect the cables of the module (see "Connecting Cables / Wiring" section).
5. Check if no input alarms in the Gap Fillers / Retransmitters.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
127
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Increase / decrease modules in a system
8.3 Increase / decrease modules in a system
If a new module is added or removed to the system, the following procedure into the
Management module must be taken into account.
8.3.1 Increase
1. Insert the added module into the subrack.
2. Connect the module cables (see "Installation" chapter).
NOTICE
To continue it is neecessary to use the external programmer for local operation
(see module instrument manual for more details).
3. Connect the external programmer to the PGRM connector at the front side of the
module.
4. Go to System > Configuration menu and set a telecontrol address at parameter
CTRLadd different from the rest of the addresses of the RS485 bus.
5. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
6. Go to System > Configuration menu.
7. At Resets Management select the option Generate new configuration file
and pressing Execute button.
8. If no errors, a success message is shown. In this moment, the process starts.
9. At the end of the process check if new module is present at the modules table of
the entry screen.
8.3.2 Decrease
1. Disconnect the cables of the module (see "Installation" chapter).
2. Remove the module from the subrack.
3. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
4. Go to System > Configuration menu.
5. At Resets Management select the option Generate new configuration file
and pressing Execute button.
6. If no errors, a success message is shown. In this moment, the process starts.
7. At the end of the process, check if the module is not present at the modules table
at the entry screen.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
128
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Management battery replacement
8.4 Management battery replacement
i
The battery (Material number 2501.0047.00) can be replaced while the instrument
is in operation.
1. Withdraw the connector (1) from its power socket at the rear side of the Management module. Press the locking lever (2) downward while doing so.
2. Remove the two screws (3) from battery slot at the rear side of the Management
module.
3. Remove the battery (4) from the slot.
4. Replace the new battery into the slot.
5. Tighten the two screws into the battery slot.
6. Connect the battery connector at the rear side of the Management module.
7. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
8. After a few seconds, check if OK message appears in the entry screen at parameter
Battery.
i
In case of the new battery was not fully-charged, Management will initialize a
charging process automatically and Charging message will be shown instead of
OK.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
129
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Substitution spare fans of a module
8.5 Substitution spare fans of a module
!
CAUTION
RF service will be affected.
To replace the fans (Material number 2501.0853.90), the module affected must
be removed from the subrack, so its RF service will be affected.
The scope of this procedure is the spare fans replacement of Transmitter DVB-T, Transmitter DVB-T2, Retransmitter DVB-T and Gap Filler devices. The devices of a nominal
output power of 1W are provided with one fan and the devices of 5W or 10W are provided
with two fans. But, all fans must be replaced even if only one of them has been damaged.
This is because of the fact that only one life counter per device is performed.
1. Remove the module from the subrack (see chapter 3.1.3.2).
2. Withdraw the connector (1) from its power socket by pulling strongly.
3. Remove the screws (2) from fans slots (and protection grid (3)) at the bottom side
of the module.
4. Insert the new fans so that the type plate faces the device and the power supply
cable points to the connector (1) and the protection grids into the slots with the
screws.
5. Plug the power connector (1) into the appropriate fan socket.
6. Insert the module into the subrack (see chapter 3.1.3.1).
7. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
8. Go to Configuration > Modules menu and select the module.
9. At Fan/s counter Reset [Module type] select Execute button.
10. If no errors, a success message is shown.
11. In Status tab it is possible to check the new fans life counter value at parameter
Fan/s activated time.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
130
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Change of fuse
8.6 Change of fuse
!
CAUTION
Only fuses of type T6.3H250V must be use. In case of no power supply redundancy,
an RF service fault will be caused.
1. Switching off the equipment. Press the AC power switch on the front panel of the
Power Supply Unit into position OFF.
2. Remove the power cable from the connector at the rear side of the Power Supply
Unit.
3. Retire the fuses slot (1) and open the cover (2) from the fuses slot (1) using a small
screwdriver (or similar).
4. Exchange the spare fuse (3) for a new one.
5. Close the fuses slot cover.
6. Insert the fuses slot.
7. Connect the power cable in the connector at the rear side of the Power Supply Unit.
8. Switching on the equipment. Press the AC power switch on the front panel of the
Power Supply Unit into position ON.
9. Check that status LED at the front of the Power Supply Unit keeps green.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
131
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Saving and Restoring Configuration Settings
8.7 Saving and Restoring Configuration Settings
i
To generate a file with a backup of the modules settings, it is necessary to execute
the Generate new configuration file command in the Management (see Management instrument manual for more details about commands). Any change in the
settings after this command will not be saved in the backup file.
Prior to replacing a module, all of the configuration settings can be saved on the PC.
These settings can be restored once the module has been exchanged.
1. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 4.3).
2. Go to System > Configuration menu.
3. At Configuration select the option Backup configuration to local hard disk
by entering in BACKUP link.
4. A file (default backup.bin) with the configuration settings of all modules in the system will be stored.
Once the module has been exchanged the way to restore configuration settings saved is:
1. Go to Configuration > Modules menu and select the new module.
2. At Load configuration select the option Saved on external memory by chosing the backup.bin file and pressing Restore button.
i
i
Management selects the right configuration settings by searching for the control
address into the backup.bin.
In case of selecting the option Saved on internal memory, the internal configuration backup file is used to restore the settings of the module.
3. If no errors, a success message is shown.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
132
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Customer Support
8.8 Customer Support
Technical support – where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support
and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation,
programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz equipment.
Up-to-date information and upgrades
To keep your instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center stating
your instrument and your wish. We will take care that you will get the right information.
Europe, Africa, Middle East Phone +49 89 4129 12345
customersupport@rohde-schwarz.com
North America Phone 1-888-TEST-RSA (1-888-837-8772)
customer.support@rsa.rohde-schwarz.com
Latin America Phone +1-410-910-7988
customersupport.la@rohde-schwarz.com
Asia/Pacific Phone +65 65 13 04 88
customersupport.asia@rohde-schwarz.com
China Phone +86-800-810-8228 / +86-400-650-5896
customersupport.china@rohde-schwarz.com
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
133
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Customer Support
DATA SHEET FOR SHIPPING TO REPAIR
GENERAL
CUSTOMER
DATE
CONTACT PERSON
MAIL
PHONE
ADDRESS (for
returning repaired
material)
SITE
LIST OF DAMAGED MODULES
TYPE / DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL NO. / REFERENCE
SERIAL NO.
DETAIL FAULT (FILL AS APPLICABLE)
GAP FILLER / TRANSMITTER / RETRANSMITTER
1 LED status indicators:
2 Is it possible to acces to External programmer menus?
3 List of alarms (in External programmer):
YES
NO
4 Is it a permanent or occasional failure? Indicate frequency
PERMANENT
OCCASIONAL
5 Does the fault solved with a replacement module?
6 Notes:
YES
NO
1 Is it possible to acces to External programmer menus?
YES
NO
2 Is it possible to acces to Web application?
YES
NO
3 Is there communication with modules monitored?
ALL
SOME
4 Is it a permanent or occasional failure? Indicate frequency
PERMANENT
OCCASIONAL
5 Problems of communication with the modem?
YES
NO
6 Does the fault solved with a replacement module?
7 Notes:
YES
NO
MANAGEMENT MODULE
F051-1
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
NONE
Page 1 of 2
134
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Service
Customer Support
DATA SHEET FOR SHIPPING TO REPAIR
GPS
1 LED status indicators:
2 Is it possible to acces to External programmer menus?
YES
NO
3 State of the switching signals of GPS (menu STATUS on External programmer or web application)
3a. EBO_OK
OK
NOK
3b. GPS_LOCK
OK
NOK
4 Number of satellites locked (menu SATELLITES on External programmer or web application):
5 List of alarms (in External programmer)
6 Is it a permanent or occasional failure? Indicate frequency
PERMANENT
OCCASIONAL
7 Does the fault solved with a replacement module?
8 Notes:
YES
NO
2 Have you ever been achieved coverage?
YES
NO
3 Have you ever been connected to the remote center?
YES
NO
4 Is it a permanent or occasional failure? Indicate frequency
PERMANENT
OCCASIONAL
5 Does the fault solved with a replacement module?
6 Notes:
YES
NO
2 Is it possible to acces to External programmer menus?
3 List of alarms (in External programmer)
YES
NO
4 Is it a permanent or occasional failure? Indicate frequency
PERMANENT
OCCASIONAL
5 Does the fault solved with a replacement module?
6 Notes:
YES
NO
UMTS-MODEM
1 LED status indicators:
OTHER MODULES
1 LED status indicators:
F051-1
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Page 2 of 2
135
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Appendix
Appendix
• MLx Basic Unit Instrument Manual.
• MLx Power Supply Unit Instrument Manual.
• MLx Transmitter DVB-T Instrument Manual.
• MLx Transmitter DVB-T2 Instrument Manual.
• MLx Gap Filler Instrument Manual.
• MLx Retransmitter DVB-T Instrument Manual.
• MLx Management Instrument Manual.
• MLx GPS Unit Instrument Manual.
• MLx RF Splitter Instrument Manual.
• MLx N+1 Switch Unit Instrument Manual.
• MLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver Instrument Manual.
• MLx IP-ASI Converter Instrument Manual.
• MLx External Programmer Instrument Manual.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
136
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Spare part lists
Spare part lists
• MLx Spare part lists
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
137
R&S R MLx
Basic Unit
Instrument Manual
The Instrument Manual describes the following R&S R MLx Basic Unit models and options:
• MLx-B015 MLx Basic Unit
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&SMLx.
R&SMLx Basic Unit
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Overview
2
2 Technical specifications
3
3 Physical description
3.1 MLx Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
4 Functional description
4.1 MLx Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
4
6
1
R&SMLx Basic Unit
Overview
1 Overview
MLx Basic Unit provides the necessary power supply and control interconections to conform a complete MLx System.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
2
R&SMLx Basic Unit
Technical specifications
2 Technical specifications
Modules connectors*:
External DC Power Supply connectors:
External Control connectors:
External Reset connectors:
Operating temperature:
Relative humidity:
Dimensions (back panel + chassis)(WxHxD):
Weight (back panel + chassis):
i
8 x DIN41612 30 pins female
2 x SMD power jack male (2.1mm
ID, 5.5mm OD)
Voltage: 27VDC
Maximum current: 3.1A
2 x SMD jack female (2.5mm)
2 x SMD jack female (2.5mm)
0 to 45o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
483x215x260 mm
3 Kg
*30 pins functions are detailed in physical description.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
3
R&SMLx Basic Unit
Physical description
3 Physical description
3.1 MLx Basic Unit
MLx Basic Unit is composed by a subrack and a chassis of 19" and 5 units of height.
The chassis is composed by 9 pair of rails (see figure 3.1) to insert up to 8 the modules:
• The rails #1 and #8 are reserved for Power supply Units.
• The rails #2,#3,#4,#5,#6,#7 and #9 are reserved for vertical modules (Management
/ Transmitter DVB-T / Gap Filler / Retransmitter DVB-T).
#1
(PS1)
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#9
#8
(PS 2)
Figure 3.1: Rails into the MLx Basic Unit.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
4
R&SMLx Basic Unit
Physical description
MLx Basic Unit
Figure 3.2 details the connectors on MLx Basic Unit:
• 30 pins connectors are reserved for vertical modules (Power supply Units /Management / Transmitter DVB-T / Gap Filler / Retransmitter DVB-T).
• 27V Power Jack connectors are reserved for supplying horizontal units (RF Splitter / GPS Basic Unit and N+1 Switch units)
• CONTROL BUS Jack 2.5mm connectors are reserved for connecting with horizontal units (GPS unit and N+1 switch units) and for extending the control bus to
another MLx Basic Unit.
• RESET Jack 2.5mm connectors are reserved for connecting with horizontal units
(GPS unit and N+1 switch units) and for extending the reset bus to another MLx
Basic Unit.
27Vdc Output (Power Jack male)
CONTROL BUS (Jack 2.5mm
27Vdc Output (Power Jack male)
CONTROL BUS (Jack 2.5mm
RESET (Jack 2.5mm female)
RESET (Jack 2.5mm female)
30 PINS CONNECTOR (female)
10
+27V
CTRL_A
RESET
Tª ALARM
CTRL_B
0V
1
Figure 3.2: Connectors on the MLx Basic Unit.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
5
R&SMLx Basic Unit
Functional description
4 Functional description
4.1 MLx Basic Unit
Figure 4.1 shows the block diagram describing the operation of the MLx Basic Unit.
27VDC 27VDC RESET
RESET CTRL CTRL
RESET
CTRL
27VDC
PS Tª ALARM
#1
(PS1)
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
(PS 2)
Figure 4.1: Block diagram of the MLx Basic Unit.
MLx Basic Unit is able to interconnect up to 8 modules allowing hot swapping connection of all modules without interrupting the operation of the rest of modules.
Telecontrol bus (RS485) and system reset lines allow the construction of the telecontrol and monitoring system interconnecting each module with the Management module.
The external reset and control connectors allow the scalability of the system with a single
Management module via cascaded subracks.
The external 27VDC connectors allow to supply the auxiliary horizontal modules. An
active current limiter is implemented for short circuit protection purposes. The maximum
current allowable for the 27VDC connectors is 3.1A. The output of the current limiter is
cut off (to 0 volts) every time the output current is above 3.1 A. If the output current
decreases below 3.1 A the output voltage does not inmediatly go back to 27V, but there
is an hysteresis, so that the output voltage takes 5 seconds to go back to 27VDC .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
6
R&S R MLx
Power Supply
Instrument Manual
The Instrument Manual describes the following R&S R MLx Power Supply models and options:
• MLx-B010 MLx Power Supply 500W
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&SMLx.
R&SMLx Power Supply
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Overview
2
2 Technical specifications
3
3 Physical description
3.1 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
4 Functional description
4.1 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
5 Troubleshooting
5.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
4
7
8
8
1
R&SMLx Power Supply
Overview
1 Overview
MLx AC Power Supply Unit provides the necessary DC voltages to operate a complete
MLx System.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
2
R&SMLx Power Supply
Technical specifications
2 Technical specifications
Input voltage:
Máximum current:
Output voltage:
DC Output connector*:
Power factor:
Fuse:
Operating temperature:
Relative humidity:
Cooling:
Fans type:
Dimensions (WxHxD):
Weight:
i
196 VAC - 264 VAC @ 50/60Hz
3.1 AAC
27 VDC / 19 A max.
DIN41612 30 pins male
0.99
2 x T6.3H250V
0 to 45o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
4 fans
KDE2405PHV1 SUNON
60x215x230 mm
2.5 Kg
*Not only power supply voltage but also a relay output. 30 pins functions are
detailed in physical description.
• Protection against voltage too high and too low.
• Protection against discharge.
• Protection against overtemperature (relay alarm).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
3
R&SMLx Power Supply
Physical description
3 Physical description
3.1 Power Supply Unit
R SUPPLY
xxx
POWE
Ref. xxxxxyyyyyy
yyyyyyyy
S.N
500W
Figure 3.1: Power Supply.
Figure 3.2 details frontal connectors and figure 3.3 details rear connectors of power supply unit.
LED
LED status
Off
Green
Orange
Description
Power supply OFF
Power supply ON
Temperature alarm
Table 3.1: Description of LED status.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
4
R&SMLx Power Supply
Physical description
Power Supply Unit
Status LED
Switch
POWER SUPPLY
500W
Figure 3.2: Front description of power supply.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
5
R&SMLx Power Supply
Physical description
Power Supply Unit
DC Connector
10
+27V
N.C.
N.C. A
N.C. B
AC Connector
Tª ALARM
0V
1
Fuse (x2)
FUSE
T6.3H250V
Ground
Figure 3.3: Rear description of power supply.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
6
R&SMLx Power Supply
Functional description
4 Functional description
4.1 Power Supply Unit
The input voltage is filtered through a network filter to meet conducted emission standards.
Figure 4.1 shows the block diagram describing the operation of the power supply.
Figure 4.1: Block diagram of the Power Supply Unit.
The network filter output is connected to a AC/DC converter (with typical power correction
factor of 0.99). A 500W DC/DC converter is used to generate the 27V voltage.
Power supply module includes protection against voltage too high or too low, protection
against discharge and protection against overtemperature.
The power supply module also includes a relay output (normally open) at the rear connector, that becomes active when the temperature is too high.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
7
R&SMLx Power Supply
Troubleshooting
5 Troubleshooting
5.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED
LED status
OFF
Green
Orange
Description
Check flowchart diagnosis (see section 5.2)
Check flowchart diagnosis (see section 5.2)
Overtemperature at power supply unit
5.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
NO power supply
The AC power switch is
in position ON?
NO
Press the AC power switch
into position ON
YES
Check the power plug and
fuse
YES
The Status
OFF?
LED
is
NO
The Power Supply Unit is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
8
R&S R MLx
Transmitter DVB-T
Instrument Manual
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
The Instrument Manual describes the following R&S R MLx Transmitter DVB-T models and options:
• MLx-B111 MLx Transmitter 1W DVB-T
• MLx-B115 MLx Transmitter 5W DVB-T
• MLx-B119 MLx Transmitter 10W DVB-T
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&SMLx.
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Overview
2
2 Putting into operation
3
3 Technical specifications
4
4 Physical description
4.1 MLx Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
5 Functional description
5.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
30
7 Local control
7.1 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.1 Alarms > State Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu .
7.1.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu . . .
7.1.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
7.1.2 Power Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 Modulator Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5 Mutes Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6 System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6.1 System > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . .
7.1.6.2 System > Language Menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6.3 System > Version Menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6.4 System > Serial number Menu . . . . . . . .
7.2 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
15
23
26
31
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
37
37
39
39
39
40
40
40
42
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED and alarm status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
9 Changing the output channel
48
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
44
45
1
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Overview
1 Overview
MLx Transmitter uses broadband technology, which allows the frequency to be changed
over the entire UHF band.
MLx Transmitter can be operated in single frequency networks (SFN) or multiple frequency networks (MFN).
The nominal output powers of the device are 1W, 5W and 10W.
The output of each MLx Transmitter can be connected to the input of an Filter Combiner
that allows multiple channels to be transmitted by the same transmitting antenna.
The internal control system of the device enables both internal configuration and measures. MLx Transmitter can be managed locally or remotely by connecting the Management Module. The equipment can also be managed locally by connecting an External
Programmer.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
2
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Putting into operation
2 Putting into operation
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment. For a further measurement examples and background information, please
refer to next chapters.
• Log on to the Management Module via web browser (see System Manual for more
detailed information).
• Go to Configuration > Modules menu and select the module.
• Set the modulation parameters (parameters Network Mode, Constellation, FEC,
Guard interval, Bandwidth and FFT).
i
– In case of SFN function, Auto MIP parameter activation allows configuring the
modulation parameters automatically from the input TS.
– 10MHz and 1pps input must be connected in case of SFN function.
• Check the selected input (parameter Selected ASI).
• Set the output frequency (parameters Output channel/offset).
• Check the output power (parameter Output power).
• Check that there are no alarms.
• Check that frontal STATUS LED keeps green.
• Connect the measurement instrument to the RF MONITOR connector at the front
pannel to check signal quality.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
3
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Technical specifications
3 Technical specifications
DVB-T modulation:
FFT:
Guard interval:
FEC:
Constellation:
Network type:
Bandwidth:
MFN adaptation rate:
Seamless:
MPEG input:
MPEG input connector:
MPEG input impedance:
2K, 8K
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM
MFN, SFN
6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
Yes. Jitter PCR Restamping ± 40 ns
Yes
2 ASI inputs (redundant)
BNC female
75 Ω
RF output:
Frequency range:
Nominal Output Power:
Maximum Output Power:
Distance to shoulder:
MER:
Power Stability:
Return loss:
Spurious emissions outside the channel:
Impedance:
Connector:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
1 UHF 6, 7 or 8MHz channel
1W, 5W or 10W as version
1.25W, 7W or 14W as version
> 38 dB
> 34 dB
≤ ± 0.5dB
> 20dB
< -60dBc
50 Ω
BNC female (1W, 5W); N female (10W)
4
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Technical specifications
RF monitoring output:
Coupling:
Impedance:
Connector:
27 ± 3 dB (1W) ; 38 ± 3 dB (5W, 10W)
50 Ω
BNC female
Local oscillators:
Phase noise:
Frequency steps:
Frequency stability with temperature (10o C to + 60o C):
Frequency stability for a year:
≥ 95 dBc/Hz @1KHz
± 1/6 MHz, ± 1/7 MHz, ± 1/8 MHz
± 1 ×10−6
±1 × 10−6
10MHz and 1PPS external reference inputs:
10MHz input level:
10MHz input connector:
10MHz input impedance:
1PPS input level:
1PPS input connector:
1PPS input trigger:
-20 dBm to +10 dBm
BNC female
50 Ω
0-5V
BNC female
Selected by rise-edge or fall-edge
Power supply:
DC Input voltage:
DC Input voltage connector*:
i
27 ±0.3VDC
DIN41612 30 pins male
*Not only power supply voltage but also control. 30 pins functions are detailed in
physical description.
DC Power Consumption:
1W module:
5W module:
10W module:
i
23W
65W
85W
DC power consumption is specified at the maximum transmitted output power for
every power range (1.25 W for 1W modules, 7W for 5W modules and 14W for
10W modules).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
5
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Technical specifications
Temperature and cooling:
Operating temperature:
Relative humidity:
Fans :
Fans type:
0 to 45o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
1 (1W) / 2 (5W, 10W)
KDE0504PFV1.11.MS.A.GN SUNON
Dimensions:
Module dimensions (WxHxD):
50x215x250 mm
Weight:
1W module:
5W module:
10W module:
1,5 Kg
2 Kg
2 Kg
Remote control and monitoring:
Connecting the system to the remote control and monitoring module (Management)
allows remote communication to the control centre. This communication can be made
using different interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, mobile communications, relays).
Local and remote parameters:
Settings
• Unit type.
• Network type (MFN / SFN).
• ASI mode.
• Constellation.
• FEC.
• Guard Interval.
• Bandwidth.
• FFT.
• Edge active 1PPS.
• Autoconfiguration from the MIP.
• Delay from the MIP.
• Local delay.
• ID transmitter.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
6
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Technical specifications
• Cell ID Enabled.
• Cell ID.
• Output channel.
• Output frequency offset.
• Offset step.
• Output power.
• Precorrector voltage (VCORR1, PC1, PC2).
• Control address.
• Output power level reference.
• Reflected power threshold.
• Amplifier stage temperature threshold.
• Modulator board temperature threshold.
• Mute GPS.
• Timing Mute GPS.
• Mute No MIP.
• Mute ASI.
• Mute MPEG Overflow.
• Mute MPEG Error.
• RF mute.
• Date and hour.
• Reset of fan(s) lifetime.
• Language.
Measurements
• Maximum SFN delay.
• Local delay margin.
• Selected ASI (1 / 2).
• ASI 1/2 status.
• Seamless status.
• Output power (dBm and Watts).
• Reflected power (Watts).
• LDMOS transistor 1 current (A).
• LDMOS transistor 2 current (A).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
7
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Technical specifications
• Output oscillator status.
• Output oscillator tuning voltage (V).
• Modulator oscillator tuning voltage (V).
• AGC 3 voltage (V).
• 1.2V line voltage (V).
• 5V line voltage (V).
• 27V line voltage (V).
• Local or external 10MHz reference.
• Amplifier stage temperature (o C).
• Modulator board temperature (o C).
• Fan(s) lifetime (h).
Alarms:
• ATX01 - ASI error 1.
• ATX10 - ASI error 2.
• ATX02 - MIP error.
• ATX03 - FPGA communication.
• ATX04 - No IF DVB-T signal.
• ATX05 - MPEG overflow .
• ATX06 - MPEG error 2.
• ATX11 - MPEG error 2.
• ATX07 - 10MHz error.
• ATX08 - 1pps error.
• ATX09 - FPGA oscillator.
• ART01 - Output oscillator.
• ART02 - Reflected power.
• ART03 - Temperature.
• ART04 - Output power.
• ART05 - Transistors current.
• ART06 - Power 3dB.
• AHW01 - Alimentation fault.
• AHW02 - HW error.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
8
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Physical description
4 Physical description
4.1 MLx Transmitter
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
Figure 4.1: Transmitter.
Figure 4.2 details frontal connectors module. Figure 4.3 details rear connectors module.
LED
LED status
Off
Green
Orange
Orange blinking
Red
Description
No power supply
No active alarms
Warning alarm
Reflected power alarm
Output power alarm
Table 4.1: Description of LED status.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
9
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Physical description
MLx Transmitter
ASI 1 input (BNC female)
ASI 2 input (BNC female)
Status LED
External programmer
connector (RJ45)
RF monitoring output (BNC female)
RF output
(BNC female 1W/5W)
(N female 10W)
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
Figure 4.2: Description of frontal panel.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
10
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Physical description
MLx Transmitter
10 MHz input (GPS) (BNC female)
1PPS input (GPS) (BNC female)
10 Mhz
Made in Spain
MLX-B111
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
1PPs
DC connector
10
+27V
CTRL_A
RESET
CTRL_B
Tª ALARM
0V
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
1
Figure 4.3: Description of rear panel.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
11
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
5 Functional description
MLx Transmitter internal composition is outlined in the block diagram of Figure 5.1.
Signal Processing board
UpConverter
IF stage
DVB-T Modulator
board
uC
Input stage
Output stage
Amplifier board
Power supply board
FAN
FAN
(only in 5W/10W)
Figure 5.1: Simplified block diagram of the MLx Transmitter.
Main stages at the MLx Transmitter:
Power supply
All necessary internal voltages to operate the equipment are generated through converters DC/DC in the power supply stage from the 27VDC input voltage.
The internal voltages are 1.2VDC , 5VDC , 9VDC and 27VDC . All of them are monitored
by the microcontroller.
Those voltages can be reset from an external pin.
Generating 10 MHz sync signal from the GPS signal
The GPS 10 MHz signal is first amplified and then compared (in a circuit phase comparator) with the signal of 10MHz TCXO. The comparator output phase, after passing through
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
12
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
a loop filter, is used to generate the corresponding voltage that controls the TCXO frequency so it is fully engaged in frequency to the 10 MHz signal from the GPS receiver.
Furthermore, the 10MHz signal is detected to generate a voltage to control the attenuation of the input to a PIN-diodes stage. The PIN-diodes stage controls the dynamic range
so that the input to the phase comparator is constant for any 10MHz signal level received.
The output signal of the TCXO is used as clock for the DVB-T modulator, and as a reference for generating the upconverter local oscillator, so that all signals are locked with the
reference signal from the GPS.
DVB-T modulator
The modulator receives as inputs the 10MHz frequency reference signal and the 1 pps
time reference signal to process all synchronization tasks in SFN mode.
It also receives the two redundant ASI input signals to deliver an output signal at intermediate frequency, compatible with EN 300.744 DVB-T.
IF
A sample of the IF signal, after being amplified, is used to detect and inform the microcontroller about the IF signal presence.
The IF signal is then amplified and introduced into a predistortion circuit or linearity correction. This circuit is governed by the voltages VCORR1, PC1 and PC2, all of them
generated from the microcontroller and configurable by the user (see chapter 7).
The predistortion output signal is amplified and filtered to adjust its level to the upconverter mixer, responsible for converting the IF signal to the desired output channel.
Upconverter
The IF signal is converted to the output channel with a mixer by a local oscillator.
Once the signal is converted to the output frequency, it passes through an UHF tracking
filter. The voltages controlling this filter are obtained during the equipment adjustment
process at the factory, and stored in an E2PROM memory.
Input amplifier
The Signal Processing Board output signal enters the Amplifier Board and is amplified
through the monolithic amplifier. After it there is a PIN diode stage controlled by the automatic gain control circuit (abbrebiated as AGC3 throughout this manual). The function
of this variable attenuation stage is to compensate the power stage response curve in
terms of frequency and gain variation with temperature, and to regulate the attenuation
according to the selected output power.
The control voltage of the AGC3 is obtained from the detection of a sample of the output
power through a directional coupler and a detector.
After the AGC3 circuit, there are two stages of amplification performed with monolithic
amplifiers.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
13
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Below there is an amplification stage based on the use of bipolar transistors.
All the input amplifier stages are polarized in class-A and very linear, so they do not
introduce any intermodulation effect to the output amplifier.
Output amplifier
The output amplifier is made by two LDMOS transistors polarized in class-AB and addedup by 3dB and 90◦ hybrid couplers. The transistors used are different depending on the
nominal output power. The polarization circuit of gate voltages are in the control circuit.
After the output amplifier, a directional coupler is placed with two purposes: detect the
signal to measure the transmitted power and get the AGC3 voltage; and detect the proportional signal to the reflected power to generate the corresponding alarm.
This is followed by another directional coupler which obtains the output test signal at the
front of the module.
Fans
1W device incorporates one fan at the bottom of the module, and two fans in the case of
a 5W and 10W devices. These fans start upon two conditions: when the temperature at
amplifier stage reaches 51o C, stopping when the temperature drops below 46◦ C, or when
the temperature at the Modulator board reaches 53o C, stopping when the temperature
drops below 49◦ C.
Control
The control module is based on the microcontroller circuit which performs the controlling functions necessary for the Signal Processing board, Amplifier board and Modulator
board. Among others functions, it generates a series of voltages to control the D/A and
A/D converters.
These voltages are generated through a D/A converter whose output is multiplexed into
a serie of operational amplifier circuits sample and hold. Some of the voltages are accessible by the user.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
14
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Settings
5.1 Settings
The equipment has a number of adjustable parameters detailed below and summarized
in Table 5.4. These parameters are accessible both locally and remotely.
Unit Type
It determines the type of power amplifier board that it is used for internal adjustment. This
parameter is set in factory and cannot be set by the user.
Possible types:
• 1W.
• 5W.
• 10W.
Network type
Selects the type of network in which the modulator will work. Possible values are SFN
(Single Frequency Network) and MFN (Multiple Frequency Network).
ASI mode
The modulator has two redundant ASI inputs. This parameter determines the behavior
of the ASI inputs. Possible values are automatic, automatic with ASI1 priority , manual
ASI1 or manual ASI2.
In automatic mode the device selects automatically the input ASI flow from one of the two
inputs without priority. In automatic with ASI1 priority mode the device selects automatically the input ASI flux from one of the two inputs prioritizing ASI1 (Return to ASI1 after 10
seconds). In manual ASI1 or manual ASI2 mode, only the selected input is considered.
Constellation
Selects the COFDM modulation constellation: QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM.
FEC
Selects the COFDM modulation encoding rate:1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 or 7/8.
Guard Interval
Selects the COFDM modulation guard interval:1/4, 1/8, 1/16 or 1/32.
Bandwidth
Selects the COFDM modulation bandwidth: 6MHz, 7MHz or 8MHz.
FFT
Selects the COFDM modulation FFT: 8K or 2K.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
15
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Settings
Edge of active 1PPS
Selects the reference edge of the 1PPS signal to synchronize: rising edge or falling edge.
It is responsibility of network operator to define this parameter.
Autoconfiguration from the MIP
If enabled, with the modulator in SFN mode, indicates that the modulation parameters
(constellation, FEC, guard interval, bandwidth of the signal and the FFT size) of the DVBT signal are obtained directly from the MIP . In this operation mode these parameters can
not be edited.
If disabled, with the modulator in SFN mode, the transmission parameters can be modified by the user. It is the responsibility of user to ensure that the selected parameters
match with those of the SFN (ie indicating the MIP).
Delay from the MIP
Delay configured remotely by the network operator through the MIP.
Local Delay
Local delay (with a 100ns resolution) assigned to the modulator by the user.
Transmitter identifier
Uniquely identifies the transmitter. With this identifier, the network operator is able to
configure optional parameters such as frequency offset, delay, power transmission, or
different cell ID for each of the transmitters of the network.
Cell identifier
It allows the user to set the cell ID where the transmitter is located. This parameter can
be disabled.
Output channel and frequency offset
Equipment central output frequency can be set by programming the channel and the offset. The offset step can be configured.
i
Chapter 9 describes in detail the considerations that must be taken into account
when making any changes in the output channel. Such considerations are related to
both the output power and the adjustment of the linnearity precorrection settings.
Offset step
This parameter allows you to configure the offset resolution in order to set the input or
output frecuency. There are three possible steps: 1/6M Hz , 1/7M Hz or 1/8M Hz .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
16
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Settings
Output power
Equipment allows to regulate the output level >10dB maintaining the quality parameters
outlined in the specifications. The 1W device is adjustable to ranges from 21dBm to
31dBm, the 5W device is adjustable to ranges from 28.5dBm to 38.5dBm and the 10W
device is adjustable to ranges from 31.5dBm to 41.5dBm. If the output power is varied
outside these margins, the quality parameters ot the transmitter output signal (distance
to shoulder, MER ,...) may not correspond to its technical features.
i
The device is factory adjusted at a given output power. This power corresponds to
a certain adjustment of the voltages of the linearity precorrector. These voltages
are not constant for different values of output power, or even for different output
channels, although they can be modified by the user as it will be explained further
ahead. This is the reason why it is recommended not to modify the output power
unless the apropiate measuring equipment (spectrum analyzer), that will allow to
readjust the linearity precorrector’s values, is available. (See chapter 9 of this
manual for further information).
Linearity precorrector voltages (VCORR1, PC1 and PC2)
It is used for varying the voltage that controls the predistortion (linearity correction) at the
IF stage of the DVB-T modulator module.
These are values adjusted by the manufacturer and should not be changed unless the
output channel or the transmitter output power are varied, in which case they shall be
amended so that the distance to the shoulders of the new channel are more than 38 dB.
To make this adjustment it is necessary to use a spectrum analyzer.
VCORR1 is an hexadecimal index whose value can vary from 000 to 3FF. Possible values
of the parameters PC1 and PC2 are 0 or 1.
Control address
This is a local parameter that allows you to change the telecontrol address of the module used by the Management module. See chapter 7 for more information about this
parameter.
Reference output power level
This is a local parameter that allows you to modify the internal value of reference level of
output power of the device. See chapter 7 for more information about this parameter.
Reflected power threshold
Reflected power threshold is used to activate the reflected power alarm. The threshold is
defined as the number of dB below the transmitted power to be achieved by the reflected
power to set the alarm. If the threshold is -4dB, which means that the alarm is activated
when the reflected power reaches a value equal to the transmitted power-4dB (ie, 26dBm
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
17
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Settings
for a transmitted power of 30dBm).
The equipment operation according to this threshold and the reflected power measured
at the power stage is summarized in Table 5.1. The equipment returns to its normal
operation when it is below the threshold rediscovered.
Reflected power
< Threshold
> Threshold
Unit Type
1W / 5W / 10W
1W / 5W
> Threshold
10W
Operation
normal
reduction between 3-4dB on output power
and alarm Reflected power
reduction between 5-6dB on output power
and alarm Reflected power
Table 5.1: Behavior-based on reflected power.
Amplifier temperature threshold
It is an adjustable threshold of temperature at the power amplifier stage. The default
threshold value is established at 65o C. Equipment operates according to this threshold value and the temperature measurement. The behaviour is summarized in Table
5.2. Equipment returns to its normal operation mode when temperature drops below the
threshold value.
Temperature
< Threshold
> Threshold
Unit type
1W / 5W / 10W
1W / 5W / 10W
Operation
normal
alarm Temperature
Table 5.2: Behavior-based on amplifier stage temperature.
Modulator temperature threshold
It is a non adjustable threshold of temperature at the Modulator board. The default threshold value is established at 70o C. The equipment operates according to this threshold
value and the temperature measurement. The behaviour is summarized in Table 5.3.
The equipment returns to its normal operation mode when temperature drops below the
threshold value.
Temperature
< Threshold
> Threshold
Unit type
1W / 5W / 10W
1W / 5W / 10W
Operation
normal
alarm Temperature
Table 5.3: Behavior-based on Modulator temperature.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
18
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Settings
Mutes
MLx transmitter has 6 different mutes, GPS, not MIP, ASI, MPEG Overflow, MPEG Error
and RF.
Mute GPS
• Mute GPS enabled: This mute is taked into account only in SFN mode. In SFN
mode two cases are considered:
At the start-up of the modulator: if the alarms 10MHz error or 1pps error are
active, transmission signal do not switch on.
After a synchronized state of the modulator: if the alarm 10MHz error is active,
transmission signal will switch off after a configuring time (configuration parameter
Timing Mute GPS). The alarm 1PPS error is not taken into account because 1PPS
signal is internally generated from 10MHz signal and is being compared to external
1PPS signal while GPS signal inputs are synchronyzed. Therefore, if 1PPS input
signal disappears, the modulator will keep SFN locked forever while the 10 MHz
signal will be from a synchronized GPS.
For the correct and consistent configuration of this parameter it should be take into
account the precision of the TCXO. The accuracy of the TCXO is 1 ppm. Therefore,
with this accuracy will drift 1µs for each second. It is the standard stability of the
signal of 10 MHz when the transmitter fails to receive the signal of 10 MHz from
GPS.
The synchronization condition is because the modulator output signal is within the
guard interval of the other signals that are in the same area of SFN coverage.
Assuming that the delay with the other modules of the network is 0, are presented
in a table the theoretical values and the wise (temporal drift of 50% of guard interval)
maintenance of synchronization:
FFT
Guard Interval
Length of guard interval
(µs)
Hold time for synchronization TCXO (s)
Time synchronization advised keeping with TCXO
(m)
8K
1/4
8K
1/8
8K
1/16
8K
1/32
2K
1/4
2K
1/8
2K
1/16
2K
1/32
224
112
56
28
56
28
14
7
224
112
56
28
56
28
14
7
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
• Mute GPS disabled: Configures the module in SFN, the modulator never switch
off the transmission signal despite of some shortcomings in synchronization with
the GPS. When the modulator is configured in SFN and the alarm 10MHz or 1PPS
is turned on, will pass automatically to forced MFN mode (identified as MFN*) to
continue sending signal.
Mute No MIP
• Mute not MIP active: The modulator will switch off transmission in case of it has
been configured to work in SFN and the alarm MIP error will turn on.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
19
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Settings
• Mute no MIP disabled: When the modulator is configured in SFN and the alarm
MIP error is turned on, will pass automatically to forced MFN mode (identified as
MFN*) to continue sending signal. When it detects again MIP signal at the entrance, the modulator will change again to SFN operation mode.
Mute ASI
• Mute ASI active: Only makes sense when working on MFN mode. With this MUTE
on, the modulator switches off the transmission if the alarm goes on ASI error in
the active ASI input.
• Mute ASI disabled: When the modulator is configured in MFN and the alarm ASI
error turns on in the active input, the modulator will transmit null packets with sync
so that there is not any switch off in the OFDM signal. This MUTE purpose is that
decoders do not lose the physical MPEG locked status.
Mute MPEG Overflow
• Mute MPEG Overflow active: The modulator will switch off the transmission if the
transmission buffer is filled due to a high rate of entry thus activating the alarm
MPEG overflow.
• Mute MPEG Overflow disabled: Whenever the maximum storage capacity of the
buffer is exceeded (alarm MPEG overflow active) the modulator clears the buffer
to start again.
Mute MPEG Error
MPEG error is activated when the ASI input has not MPEG data. In this case physical
synchronization at ASI level is correct but video/audio data is not present. So, the user
has the option to switch off the output in order to avoid transmitting useless information
when the MPEG data are incorrect.
• Mute MPEG Error active: The modulator will switch off the transmission if the
alarm MPEG error is activated in the active input.
• Mute MPEG Error disabled: The modulator will not switch off the transmission
although the alarm MPEG error is activated in the active input.
Mute RF
This parameter allows to manually mute the RF output of the device.
Date and hour
Those parameters are only configured by Management module.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
20
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Settings
Reset of fan(s) lifetime.
This parameter is used to reset the lifetime counter of fan(s). This reset must be done
after replacing a failed fan with a new one.
i
While in 5W / 10W devices two fans are supplied but in 1W devices only one fan
is supplied.
Language
Selects the menu language of external programmer. Selectable languages are English,
Spanish or French.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
21
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Settings
Parameter
Unit Type
Network type
ASI mode
Constellation
FEC
Guard Interval
Bandwidth
FFT
Edge active 1PPS (only SFN)
Autoconfiguration from the MIP (only SFN)
Delay from the MIP (only SFN) (configure network
operator)
Local delay (only SFN)
ID transmitter (only SFN)
Cell ID Enabled (only SFN)
Cell ID
Output Channel
Output offset frequency
Offset step
Output Power
Linearity correction (VCORR1)
Linearity correction (PC1 and PC2)
Control address
Output level Reference
reflected power threshold
Amplifier Ta threshold
Modulator Ta threshold
Mute GPS
Timing Mute GPS (only GPS Mute ON)
Mute No MIP
Mute ASI
Mute MPEG Overflow
Mute MPEG Error
Mute RF
Date and hour
Reset of fan(s) lifetime
Language
Range
1W / 5W / 10W
MFN / SFN
Auto / Auto Priority 1 / Manual 1
/ Manual 2
QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 or 7/8
1/4, 1/8, 1/16 or 1/32
6MHz, 7MHz or 8MHz
8K or 2K
Ascending or descending
ON / OFF
-(2000.0µ s) to +(2000.0µ s)
-(2000.0µ s) to +(2000.0µ s)
0 to 65535
ON / OFF
0 to 65535
21 to 69
-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3
1/6MHz, 1/7MHz or 1/8MHz
000 to 3F0
0 or 1
0 to 254
0dBm to 53dBm
-2dB to -6dB
0o C to 99o C
70o C
OFF / ON
0 to 1999 minutes
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
/
/
/
/
/
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
English, Spanish or French
Table 5.4: Settings.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
22
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Measurements
5.2 Measurements
The measurements offered by the equipment are detailed in Table 5.6. These measurements are accessible either locally and remotely.
SFN maximum delay
Value extracted from the MIP. The resolution is 100 nanoseconds.
Local delay margin
It is the time, displayed with a resolution of 100 nanoseconds, that a mega-frame is stored
in the module’s input buffer before being transmitted.
Selected ASI
Indicates which of the two redundant ASI inputs is active.
ASI 1/2 status
As for the ASI inputs, the possible statuses are:
• ASI signal not detected.
• ASI flow errors.
• MPEG-level errors.
• ASI signal detected and free of error.
Seamless
Indicates if seamless is available or not.
Output and reflected power
In the power amplifier there are two detectors, one for the transmitted power and another
for the reflected power. The equipment offers a measure of the transmitted power in
Watts and dBm, while measuring of the reflected power is shown in Watts. The minimum
reflected power that shows the equipment is 10% of the transmitted power. For example,
for 1W the lowest power displayed is 0.01 W.
LDMOS transistor currents of power amplifier
Indicate the consumption currents of the two LDMOS transistors at output stage of power
amplifier stage in amperes. As they are class AB polarization devices, the current depends on both the output power (is higher the greater the curve) and frequency.
The value of these currents determines the alarm ART05 - Transistors current. When
one of two currents are out of the thresholds (Table 5.5) this alarm is activated.
Output local oscillator status
It shows the state (locked or unlocked) of the output local oscillator.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
23
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Measurements
Unit type
1W
5W
10W
Lower threshold
10 mA
50 mA
50 mA
Upper threshold
300 mA
1200 mA
2400 mA
Table 5.5: Alarm Transistors current thresholds.
Tuning voltage for local oscillator
It shows the tunning voltage (in Volts) for local output oscillator.
Tuning voltage for local oscillator of Modulator board
It shows the tunning voltage (in Volts) for local oscillator of Modulator board (FPGA).
Automatic gain control voltage
Indicates (in V), the voltage of the circuit of automatic gain control of the Transmitter. The
automatic gain control circuit is at the power stage and you can configure its operation in
auto or manual mode.
1.2V, 5V and 27V lines voltage
The device is able to monitor the exact continuous voltages at the power supply stage.
The value of these voltages determines the alarm AHW01 - Alimentation fault.
Local or external 10MHz reference
A 10MHz signal is present at the external connector or not.
Amplifier stage temperature
Temperature (in o C) measured at the output stage of the power amplifier. The behaviorbased on temperature of the equipment has already been showed in Table 5.2.
Modulator temperature
Temperature (in o C) measured at the Modulator board. The behavior-based on temperature of the equipment has already been showed in Table 5.3.
Fan(s) lifetime
This parameter shows the life counter in hours of each of the fans.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
24
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Measurements
Parameter
Maximum SFN delay (SFN only)
Local delay margin (only SFN)
Selected ASI
Output power
Reflected power
Currents of LDMOS transistor 1 in power
amplifier
Currents of LDMOS transistor 2 in power
amplifier
Output local oscillator status
Output local oscillator tuning voltage
Modulator local oscillator tuning voltage
Automatic Gain Control voltage
1.2V line voltage
5V line voltage
27V line voltage
Local or external 10MHz reference
Amplifier stage temperature
Modulator temperature
Fan(s) lifetime
Usual Range
1/2
<10% Output power
100mA to 250mA (1W), 450mA to
1100mA (5W), 700mA to 1500mA
(10W)
100mA to 250mA (1W), 450mA to
1100mA (5W), 700mA to 1500mA
(10W)
Locked
1,5V to 24V
5V to 15V
1V to 5V
1.2V ± 0.1V
5V ± 0.2V
27V ± 0.3V
Local
Table 5.6: Measurements.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
25
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Alarms
5.3 Alarms
The device incorporates an alarm history log where last 10 alarm events are stored.
This log is erased any time the module is reset. Each alarm is able to be activated or
disactivated to be stored in the log.
Each alarm can be enable or disable. It is possible to configure an hysteresis time
in seconds individually for each alarm in order to allow an independent detection of the
device alarms. The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm to be considered as valid.
Transmitter specific alarms are summarized in Table 5.7:
ATX01 - ASI error 1
Indicates that the ASI frame from input 1 has errors.
ATX10 - ASI error 2
Indicates that the ASI frame from input 2 has errors.
ATX02 - MIP error
It is activated when it does not exist MIP signal at the input and the modulator is working
in SFN mode.
If the NO MIP mute is activated the modulator won’t transmit any signal to the IF stage,
so the No IF DVB-T signal alarm will be activated and, consecueltly, the Output power
alarm will be activated as well.
If the NO MIP mute or the ERROR MIP mute are deactivated, the modulator will change
to MFN mode and there won’t be transmission signal interruption.
ATX03 - FPGA communication
It is activated when there are internal communication errors between the modulator’s
microcontroller and the FPGA where the modulation process is done.
ATX04 - No IF signal
Indicates no modulator output signal in intermediate frequency. It maybe caused because
a bad modulator’s operation or errors in the ASI.
When this alarm is activated the Output power alarm is also activated.
ATX05 - MPEG Overflow
Indicates a buffer overflow in the modulator caused by a high data rate in the ASI input
for that DVB-T parameters (FFT, Guard interval, FEC, Constellation)
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
26
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Alarms
ATX06 - MPEG Error 1
Modulator detects an error in the input 1 data at MPEG level.
ATX11 - MPEG Error 2
Modulator detects an error in the input 2 data at MPEG level.
ATX07 - 10MHz error
It is activated when the synchronization signal (10MHz signal) from the GPS is missed at
the input. If the modulator is in MFN mode this alarm is not showed.
ATX08 - 1PPS error
Indicates the lack of 1pps synchronization signal. If the modulator is in MFN mode this
alarm is not showed.
ATX09 - FPGA oscillator
It is activated when the FPGA oscillator of the modulator board is unlocked.
ART01 - Output oscillator
It is activated when the output oscillator (which converts the intermediate frequency into
the output channel frequency) is unlocked.
ART02 - Reflected power
It is activated when the reflected power level exceeds the reflected power threshold level.
When this happen, the device decreases its output power level in 3-4dB. The device
recovers its power level when the reflected power level decreases under the threshold
level. This threshold value is user configurable.
ART03 - Temperature
It is activated when the temperature level at power amplifier stage exceeds its temperature’s threshold level or when the temperature level at FPGA stage exceeds its temperature’s threshold level.
ART04 - Output power
It is activated when the transmitted power level decreases 6dB or more from its power
level.
ART05 - Transistors current
The value of the two LDMOS transistors currents at amplifier stage determines the activation of this alarm. When one of two currents are out of the thresholds (Table 5.5) this
alarm is activated.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
27
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Alarms
ART06 - Power 3dB.
It is activated when the transmitted power level decreases betwenn 3dB and 6dB its
power level.
AHW01 - Alimentation fault
It is activated when any of the DC voltages in the power supply stage is out of this usual
range or when exist a general failure at the power supply.
This alarm is also activated when temperature alarm pin in DC connector is activated.
This pin is activated in the Power Supply Units.
i
Alimentation fault is also activated when temperature alarm pin in DC connector
at rear panel of the device is activated. This temperature alarm pin is activated by
the Power Supply Units.
AHW02 - HW error
It is activated when an internal hardware failure is detected.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
28
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Alarms
Table 5.7 shows the LED status of the modules based on the active alarm.
code
ATX01
ATX02
ATX03
ATX04
ATX05
ATX06
ATX07
ATX08
ATX09
ART01
ART02
ART03
ART04
ART05
ART06
AHW01
AHW02
ATX10
ATX11
Alarm
ASI error 1
MIP error
FPGA communication
No IF signal
MPEG overflow
MPEG error 1
10MHz error
1pps error
FPGA oscillator
Output oscillator
Reflected power
Temperature
Output power
Transistors current
Power 3dB
Alimentation fault
HW error
ASI error 2
MPEG error 2
Status LED
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange blinking
Orange
Red
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
External programmer LED
A
C
B
Table 5.7: LED Behavior-based on alarms.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
29
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Remote Control and Monitoring
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
The remote control and monitoring system is based on the use of the Management
module, which communicates with all the modules of the system via a RS485 bus in
back pannel unit.
The Management Module monitors the measures and alarms of all the system’s modules, allowing to change their settings.
Each module is assigned with a different remote control address that identifies it within
the shared communication bus.
The system enables remote management and communication with a remote monitoring
center. This communication can be of various types and using various interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, GSM/GPRS/UMTS).
For more details, please refer to the chapter "Operation" in System Manual.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
30
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Local control
7 Local control
Following is detailed the menus structure corresponding to the External Programmer
interface (see External Programmer instrument manual for more details).
7.1 Menu structure
The menus in this module are the tree structure:
Transmitter
DVB-T
1W
1.01
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.POWER
3.OUTPUT
4.MODULATOR
5.MUTE CONF
6.SYSTEM
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
..
Input level
Low Power!
LOG
02/04
ARE01
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
..
ATX01:
ATX02:
ATX03:
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ATX07:
ATX08:
ATX09:
ART01:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
..
ATX01:
ATX02:
ATX03:
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ATX07:
ATX08:
ATX09:
ART01:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
..
ATX01:
ATX02:
ATX03:
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ATX07:
ATX08:
ATX09:
ART01:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
..
Mode:
SFN
ASI:
Auto
Input ASI:1
Seamless: ASI1:
OK
ASI2:ErrASI
Const:64QAM
FEC:
2/3
Interv: 1/4
BW:
8MHz
FFT:
8K
Flan 1pps:
AutoMIP: ON
Tof:
0.0
MR:750000.0
RL:
0.0u
M: 360600.0
Tx_id:
0
Cell_id:OFF
Vtun: 11.9V
Vers: 1.00
Tem:+49.9ºC
..
GPS:
No MIP:
ASI:
MPEG ov:
MPEG er:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
..
CTRLadd:001
10MHz: ext
Offset: 166
Type:
1W
01:19:19
00/00/0000
1.2V:1.256V
5V: 4.963V
27V: 27.37V
Vnt:000001h
Language
selection
--------English
..
Transmitter
DVB-T
1W
Vers: 1.00
Des: 00003
Boot: 1.01
Legend
Short press square
..
Serial Num
050712452001
Long press square
Short press circle
Long press circle
Press up
Press down
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
31
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
When connecting the external programmer to the module, first of all the firmware version
of the External Programmer is displayed for a few seconds. After this, a welcome screen
showing the unit type and the firmware version is displayed:
Transmitter
DVB-T
1W
1.01
Start menu allows selecting one of the six main menus, Alarms, Power, Output, Modulator , Mute configuration and System:
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.POWER
3.OUTPUT
4.MODULATOR
5.MUTE CONF
6.SYSTEM
7.1.1 Alarms Menu
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: State, Log or Configuration.
7.1.1.1 Alarms > State Menu
..
No IFsignal
Low Power!
This menu shows the active alarms on the equipment. The list of possible alarms is
shown in the following table:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
32
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
Text alarm
ASI error 1
ASI error 2
MIP error
FPGA comm
No IFsignal
MPEG overfl
MPEG error 1
MPEG error 2
GPS (10MHz)
1pps error
Unlock OscI
Unlock OscO
Pow Ref!
Temperature
Pow LOW!
Curr Trts!
Pow 3dB!
Power failure
HW error
Alarm description
ATX01 ASI error 1
ATX10 ASI error 2
ATX02 MIP error
ATX03 FPGA communication
ATX04 No IF signal
ATX05 MPEG overflow
ATX06 MPEG error 1
ATX11 MPEG error 2
ATX07 10MHz error
ATX08 1pps error
ATX09 FPGA oscillator
ART01 Output oscillator
ART02 Reflected power
ART03 Temperature
ART04 Output power
ART05 Transistors current
ART06 Power 3dB
AHW01 Alimentation fault
AHW02 HW error
Remarks
7.1.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu
LOG
02/04
ARE01
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
This menu shows a log of the alarms on the equipment.
7.1.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Hysteresis, Enable or Log
ON/OFF.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
33
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu
..
ATX01: 001s
ATX02: 001s
ATX03: 001s
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ATX07:
ATX08:
ATX09:
ART01:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
AHW01:
AHW02:
ATX10:
ATX11:
001s
000s
001s
001s
This menu allows setting the alarms hysteresis (the minimum time that must remain active
- or deactive - an alarm to be considered as valid).
7.1.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu
..
ATX01:
ATX02:
ATX03:
ON
OFF
ON
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ATX07:
ATX08:
ATX09:
ART01:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
AHW01:
AHW02:
ATX10:
ATX11:
ON
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows enabling or disabling alarms.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
34
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
..
ATX01:
ATX02:
ATX03:
ON
OFF
ON
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ATX07:
ATX08:
ATX09:
ART01:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
AHW01:
AHW02:
ATX10:
ATX11:
ON
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows configuring which alarms are to be shown in the log.
7.1.2 Power Menu
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
35
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
Text
PC1
PC2
Vcag3
RF MUTE
Parameter
Output power in dBm
Output power in W
Reflected output power
LDMOS transistor 1 current of power
amplifier
LDMOS transistor 2 current of power
amplifier
Linearity
precorrector
voltage
(VCORR1)
Linearity precorrector voltage (PC1)
Linearity precorrector voltage (PC2)
Automatic Gain Control 3 Voltage
RF Mute
Ref
Reference output power level*
ThrPr
Reflected power threshold
Tem
ThrTem
Amplifier stage temperature
Amplifier stage temperature threshold
Pt
Pt
Pr
IdT1
IdT2
Vcorr1
Remarks
< 10%Pt [W]
000 to 3F0. Resolution 010
0 / 1
0 / 1
1.0V to 5.0V
ON / OFF
0dBm to 53dBm.
Resolution
0.1dB
-2dB to -6dB .
Resolution
1dB
Resolution 0.5o C
Resolution 1o C
*Reference output power level
This parameter allows you to modify the internal value of reference level of output power
of the device. These values are adjusted by the manufacturer and shall only be modified if a change in the output channel is done. Modifying these values is due to the
response curve of the detectors and couplers used is not perfectly flat across the UHF
band. In case you do not change the values it is possible to read not accurate output
power level when you make a channel change. It is the benchmark used by the transmitter for measuring output power level. If the output channel is changed without adjusting
the reference output power, the reading must be accurate to ±1dB .
i
i
When the equipment is muted the screen shows in both the first and the second
line, Pt: MUTED!.
The device is factory adjusted at a given output power. This power corresponds
to a certain adjustment of the voltages of linearity precorrector. These voltages
are not constant for different values of output power, or even for different output
channels, although they can be modified using the programmer as will be explained
further ahead. This is the reason why it is recommended not to modify the output
power unless the apropiate measuring equipment (spectrum analyzer), that will
allow to readjust the linearity precorrector’s values, is available. (See chapter 9 of
this manual for further information).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
36
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.3 Output Menu
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
Text
Parameter
Channel
Offset
Output channel
Output frequency offset
Normal
range
14 to 78
-3 to +3
Fre
Osc
Output frequency
Output local oscillator status
Output local oscillator
voltage
lock
unlock
1.5V to
24.0V
Vtun
i
Remarks
Step in system configuration
menu
MHz
/
Chapter 9 describes in full detail the considerations that must be taken into account
when making any changes in the output channel. Such considerations are related
to both the output power and the adjustment of the linearity precorrection settings.
7.1.4 Modulator Menu
..
Mode:
SFN
ASI:
Auto
Input ASI:1
Seamless: ASI1:
OK
ASI2:ErrASI
Const:64QAM
FEC:
2/3
Interv: 1/4
BW:
8MHz
FFT:
8K
Flan 1pps:
AutoMIP: ON
Tof:
0.0
MR:750000.0
RL:
0.0u
M: 360600.0
Tx_id:
0
Cell_id:OFF
Vtun: 11.9V
Vers: 1.00
Tem:+49.9ºC
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
37
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
Text
Parameter
Mode
Operation mode
ASI
Input ASI
ASI1
ASI2
ASI mode
ASI input selected
Seamless status (available or not)
ASI1 input status
ASI2 input status
Cons
Constellation
FEC
Coding rate
Interv
Guard Interval
BW
Bandwidth
FFT
Flan 1PPS
FFT
Edge of 1PPS active
Autoconfiguration from
the MIP
Seamless
AutoMIP
Tof
Delay from the MIP
MR
Network maximum delay
RL
Local delay
M
Tx_id
Local delay margin
Transmitter ID
Cell_ID
Cell ID
Vtun
Vers
Tem
Modulator OL voltage
Modulator FW version
Modulator board Ta
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Remarks
SFN / MFN /MFN* (MFN* = SFN forced to
MFN. See mutes section 5.1 for details)
Auto,AutoPr1, 1 or 2
1 or 2
OK or OK, -, ErrASI or ErrMPG
OK, -, ErrASI or ErrMPG
QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM (Readonly in
AutoMIP ON)
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 (Readonly
in AutoMIP ON)
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32 (Readonly in
AutoMIP ON)
6MHz / 7MHz / 8MHz (Readonly in AutoMIP ON)
2K / 8K (Readonly in AutoMIP ON)
↑ / ↓ (Only in SFN)
ON / OFF (Only in SFN)
-(2000.0) to +(2000.0)
(Only in
SFN. Resolution 100ns)
Only in SFN. Resolution 100 ns
-(2000.0u) to +(2000.0u)(Only in
SFN. Resolution 100 ns)
Only in SFN. Resolution 100 ns
0 to 65535
OFF / ON (When is ON the value can
be 0 to 65535)
1.5V to 24.0V
Resolution 0.5o C
38
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.5 Mutes Menu
..
GPS:
No MIP:
ASI:
MPEG ov:
MPEG er:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
..
GPS:
Temp:
No MIP:
ASI:
MPEG ov:
MPEG er:
Text
Parameter
GPS
GPS mute
Normal
range
ON / OFF
Temp
GPS mute temporisation
0m to 1999m
No MIP
ASI
MPEG ov
MPEG er
No MIP mute
ASI mute
MPEG overflow mute
MPEG error mute
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON
5m
ON
ON
ON
ON
Remarks
[Minutes] (only with mute
GPS)
7.1.6 System Menu
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Configuration, Language,
Version or Serial number.
7.1.6.1 System > Configuration Menu
..
CTRLadd:001
10MHz:Local
Offset: 166
Type:
1W
01:19:19
00/00/0000
1.2V:1.256V
5V: 4.963V
27V: 27.37V
Vnt:000001h
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
39
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
Normal
range
Text
Parameter
CTRLadd
Control address*
10MHz Input (local or external)
10MHz
Offset
Frequency offset step
Type
00:00:00
00/00/00000
1.2V
5V
27V
Unit type
Internal time
Internal date
1.2V voltage
5V voltage
27V voltage
Vnt
Fan(s) lifetime counter (h)
Remarks
0 to 254
Local/ ext
166/ 143 /
125
1W, 5W or 10W
166 = 1/6MHz; 143 =
1/7MHz; 125 = 1/8MHz
hh:mm:ss
dd/mm/YYYY
RESET for reset the lifetime counter
*Control address
This is a local parameter that allows you to change the telecontrol address of the module
used by the Management module. This address can be between 0 and 254.
7.1.6.2 System > Language Menu
Language
selection
--------English
This menu allows you to select the menu language for the external programmer. The
available languages are Spanish (Español) , English (English) or French (Français).
7.1.6.3 System > Version Menu
..
Transmitter
DVB-T
1W
Vers: 1.00
Des: 00003
Boot: 1.01
Text
Vers
Des
Boot
Parameter
Microcontroller version
Microcontroller developement version
Bootloader version
7.1.6.4 System > Serial number Menu
..
Serial Num
050712452001
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
40
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
This menu shows the internal serial number of the equipment.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
41
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Local control
Putting into operation
7.2 Putting into operation
Sample application
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment.
• Connect the External programmer to the RJ45 connector at the front pannel of
the device.
• Set the modulation parameters (parameters Mode, Conts, FEC, Interv, BW and
FFT).
..
Mode:
SFN
ASI:
Auto
Input ASI:1
Const:64QAM
FEC:
2/3
Interv: 1/4
BW:
8MHz
FFT:
8K
Flan 1pps:
AutoMIP: ON
Tof:
0.0
MR:750000.0
RL:
0.0u
M: 360600.0
Tx_id:
0
Cell_id:OFF
Vtun: 11.9V
Vers: 1.00
Tem:+49.9ºC
ThrTem:70ºC
i
– In case of SFN function,AutoMIP parameter activation allows configuring the
modulation parameters automatically from the input TS.
– 10MHz and 1pps input must be connected in case of SFN function.
• Set the output frequency (parameters Channel and Offset).
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
42
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Local control
Putting into operation
• Check the output power (parameter Pt).
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
• Check that no alarms in menu Alarms > Status.
..
There is
no alarm
• Check that frontal LED status keeps green.
• Connect the measurement instrument to the RF MONITOR connector at the front
pannel to check signal quality.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
43
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Troubleshooting
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED and alarm status
code
Alarm
Status
LED
Orange
Orange
Orange
ATX01
ATX02
ATX03
ATX04
ASI error 1
MIP error
FPGA communication
No IF signal
ATX05
ATX06
ATX07
ATX08
ATX09
ART01
ART02
MPEG overflow
MPEG error 1
10MHz error
1pps error
FPGA oscillator
Output oscillator
Reflected power
ART03
Temperature
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
blinking
Orange
ART04
Output power
Red
ART05
ART06
Transistors current
Power 3dB
Orange
Orange
Orange
AHW01 Alimentation fault
Orange
AHW02 HW error
ATX10 ASI error 2
ATX11 MPEG error 2
Orange
Orange
Orange
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Description
Check ASI 1 input signal cabling
No MIP detected in ASI input signal
The Transmitter is damaged
Check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2)
A high data rate in ASI input flux
Check ASI 1 input signal cabling
Check 10MHz cabling and GPS output
Check 1PPS cabling and GPS output
The Transmitter is damaged
The Transmitter is damaged
Check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2)
Overtemperature at amplifier or DVB-T
modulator stage
Check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2)
The Transmitter is damaged
In case of power reflected alarm is set,
check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2). By the opposite, the Transmitter is
damaged
Temperature alarm in a Power Supply
Unit is set or the Transmitter is damaged
The Transmitter is damaged
Check ASI 2 input signal cabling
Check ASI 2 input signal cabling
44
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
RF service failure
The Status LED of
Transmitter and Power
Supply Unit are ON?
YES
Go to "No output power"
flowchart.
NO
Check the Power Supply
Unit troubleshooting.
NO
Remove the TX from the subrack.
The Status LED of
Power Supply Unit is
ON?
YES
The Transmitter is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
45
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
No output power. Output power
alarm is set. Status LED: Red
Alimentation fault or
HW error alarm is set?
YES
The Transmitter is damaged
NO
No IF DVB-T signal
alarm is set?
NO
The Transmitter is damaged
YES
Any ASI error or MPEG
error alarm is set?
YES
Check ASI input signal cabling
NO
FPGA oscillator
or
FPGA communication
alarm is set?
YES
The Transmitter is damaged
NO
YES
MIP error alarm is set?
Check ASI input coding
NO
The Transmitter is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
46
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
Reflected power alarm is set.
Status LED: Orange blinking
Unplug the antenna cable and
connect a load to the output power
of the module.
Reflected power alarm
is still set?
NO
Check the antenna and
its cabling.
YES
The Transmitter is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
47
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Changing the output channel
9 Changing the output channel
Every time the output channel is changed, it may be necessary to readjust its output
power, the reference value used to show the output power readings and the linearity
precorrector values.
This is because the response curve of the detectors and couplers used to measure the
output power is not perfectly flat over the whole UHF band, and also because the linearity
of the output stage LDMOS transistors is not constant with the frequency.
Generally, if the frequency variation is small (less than 24 MHz or three UHF channels)
there will be no need for any readjustment whatsoever.
In any case the procedure must be as follows:
1. Connect the external programmer to the device and go to the OUTPUT menu:
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
2. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Channel in the external programmer screen,
enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the
△ ▽ keys until reaches the desired output channel.
3. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Offset in the external programmer screen,
enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the
△ ▽ keys until reaches the desired output frequency.
4. Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds.
5. Connect a spectrum analyzer or power meter to the device output and measure the
actual transmitted power.
The output power reading seen in the external programmer control will be the same
as before the channel was changed, but the actually transmitted power may have
shifted even more than 1dB if the channel change has involved a significant frequency leap.
6. Readjust the device output power to the desired value by measuring it in the spectrum analyzer or power meter. Go to the menu POWER:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
48
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Changing the output channel
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
7. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Pt in the external programmer screen, enter
in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the △ ▽
keys until reaches the desired output power.
8. Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds.
9. Readjust the reference output power to the desired value. In the menú POWER:
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
i
Ref parameter shows --.-dBm instead of last recorded value
10. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Ref, enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the △ ▽ keys until it matches the value
read in the spectrum analyzer or the power meter (this means that if the spectrum
analyzer reads 31 dBm, the reference value must be readjusted until the external
programer shows 31.0 dBm).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
49
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T
Changing the output channel
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:31.0dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
11. Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds. Once the change
has taken place, the device’s output power level measurement (shown in the output
power menu) will be updated.
12. Verify that the shoulder attenuation is over 38 dB.
13. If this isn’t, by selecting the central frequency in the spectrum analyzer as the output frequency of the device and configuring a span that largelly allows observing
the 8M Hz signal bandwidth (for example 20M Hz ), modify the precorrection voltages, parameters PC1, PC2 and Vcorr1 so the shoulders attenuation reaches
the best possible value (always higher than 38dB ) as follows:
(a) Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Vcorr1 in the external programmer
screen, enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value to
3F0 by pressing the △ ▽ keys. Record the new value by pressing the key
for a few seconds.
(b) Try the four combinations for the parameters PC1 and PC2 in order to get
the best combination for shoulder attenuation. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the
parameter PC1 / PC2 in the external programmer screen, enter in editing mode
by pressing the
key and modify its value to 0 or 1 by pressing the △ ▽ keys
(It is no necessary record the values for checking the shoulder attenuation).
PC1
PC2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
(c) With the best of the 4 combinations. Record the new values by pressing the
key for a few seconds.
(d) Then, modify with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Vcorr1 in the external programmer screen, enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value
from 3F0 to 000 by pressing the △ ▽ keys until it reaches the best possible
value of shoulders attenuation.
(e) Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
50
R&S R MLx
Transmitter DVB-T2
Instrument Manual
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T/T2
The Instrument Manual describes the following R&S R MLx Transmitter DVB-T2 models and options:
• MLx-B121 MLx Transmitter 1W DVB-T2
• MLx-B125 MLx Transmitter 5W DVB-T2
• MLx-B129 MLx Transmitter10W DVB-T2
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&SMLx.
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Overview
3
2 Putting into operation
4
3 Technical specifications
5
4 Physical description
4.1 MLx Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
5 Functional description
5.1 DVB-T2 software activation . . . . . .
5.2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 DVB-T2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1 T2 Frame . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2 PLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 DVB-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Non Linear Digital Predistorter (DPD)
5.6 Mutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
7 Local control
7.1 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.1 Alarms > State Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu .
7.1.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu . . .
7.1.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
7.1.2 Power Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 Modulator Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4.1 Modulator > Input Menu (DVB-T2) . . . . . .
7.1.4.2 Modulator > Input Menu (DVB-T) . . . . . . .
7.1.4.3 Modulator > system Menu (DVB-T2) . . . . .
7.1.4.4 Modulator > system Menu (DVB-T) . . . . . .
7.1.4.5 Modulator > T2 Frame Menu (DVB-T2) . . .
7.1.4.6 Modulator > PLP Menu (DVB-T2) . . . . . .
7.1.4.7 Modulator > Modulation Menu (DVB-T) . . .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
12
18
19
23
26
27
30
32
36
39
42
47
48
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
54
54
55
55
56
57
58
59
60
1
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
60
61
61
61
62
62
62
64
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED and alarm status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
9 Changing the output channel
70
7.1.4.8 Menu Modulator > Predistorter
7.1.5 Mutes Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6 System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6.1 System > Configuration Menu
7.1.6.2 System > Language Menu . .
7.1.6.3 System > Version Menu . . . .
7.1.6.4 System > Serial number Menu
7.2 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
66
67
2
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Overview
1 Overview
MLx Transmitter is provided with modulation standards DVB-T and DVB-T2 and uses
broadband technology, which allows the frequency to be changed over the entire UHF
band.
MLx Transmitter can be operated in single frequency networks (SFN) or multiple frequency networks (MFN).
The nominal output powers of the device are 1W, 5W and 10W.
MLx Transmitter is provided with a Non Linear Digital Predistorter (DPD).
The output of each MLx Transmitter can be connected to the input of an Filter Combiner
that allows multiple channels to be transmitted by the same transmitting antenna.
The internal control system of the device enables both internal configuration and measures. MLx Transmitter can be managed locally or remotely by connecting the Management Module. The equipment can also be managed locally by connecting an External
Programmer.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
3
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Putting into operation
2 Putting into operation
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment. For a further measurement examples and background information, please
refer to next chapters.
• Log on to the Management Module via web browser (see System Manual for more
detailed information).
• Go to Configuration > Modules menu and select the module.
• Check the type of the modulator (DVB-T or DVB-T2) (parameter Type).
• Set the modulation (DVB-T or DVB-T2) parameters.
i
– For a more detailed description of the DVB-T/T2 modulation parameters,
please refer to next chapters of this manual.
• Check the selected input (parameter Selected ASI).
• Set the output frequency (parameters Output channel/offset).
• Check the output power (parameter Output power).
• Check that there are no alarms.
• Check that frontal STATUS LED keeps green.
• Connect the measurement instrument to the RF MONITOR connector at the front
pannel to check signal quality.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
4
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Technical specifications
3 Technical specifications
DVB-T modulation:
FFT:
Guard interval:
FEC:
Constellation:
Network type:
Bandwidth:
MFN adaptation rate:
Seamless:
MPEG input:
MPEG input connector:
MPEG input impedance:
2K, 8K
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM
MFN, SFN
6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
Yes. Jitter PCR Restamping ± 40 ns
Yes
2 ASI inputs (redundant)
BNC female
75 Ω
DVB-T2 modulation:
FFT:
Guard interval:
FEC:
Constellation:
Network type:
Bandwidth:
Input modes:
PLPs:
Pilot patterns:
Efficiency mode:
Operation mode:
MFN adaptation rate:
MPEG input:
MPEG input connector:
MPEG input impedance:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K, 32K (normal or extended)
1/4, 19/256, 1/8, 19/128, 1/16, 1/32 1/128
1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6
QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM (normal or
rotated)
MFN, SFN
1.7 MHz (T2MI), 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
TS (SPLP) over ASI, T2MI (SPLP and MPLP)
over ASI
Up to 8 PLPs
PP1 to PP8
Normal or High
SISO and/or MISO
Yes. Jitter PCR Restamping ± 40 ns
2 ASI
BNC female
75 Ω
5
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Technical specifications
RF output:
Frequency range:
Nominal Output Power:
Maximum Output Power:
Distance to shoulder:
MER:
Precorrection:
Power Stability:
Return loss:
Spurious emissions outside the channel:
Impedance:
Connector:
1 UHF 6, 7 or 8MHz channel
1W, 5W or 10W as version
1.58W, 7.94W or 15.85W as version
> 38 dB
> 35 dB
Digital (linear and non-linear)
≤ ± 0.5dB
> 20dB
< -60dBc
50 Ω
BNC female (1W, 5W); N female (10W)
RF monitoring output:
Coupling:
Impedance:
Connector:
27 ± 3 dB (1W) ; 38 ± 3 dB (5W, 10W)
50 Ω
BNC female
Local oscillators:
Phase noise:
Frequency steps:
Frequency stability with temperature (10o C to + 60o C):
Frequency stability for a year:
≥ 95 dBc/Hz @1KHz
± 1/6 MHz, ± 1/7 MHz, ± 1/8 MHz
± 1 ×10−6
±1 × 10−6
10MHz and 1PPS external reference inputs:
10MHz input level:
10MHz input connector:
10MHz input impedance:
1PPS input level:
1PPS input connector:
1PPS input trigger:
-20 dBm to +10 dBm
BNC female
50 Ω
0-5V
BNC female
Selected by rise-edge or fall-edge
Power supply:
DC Input voltage:
DC Input voltage connector*:
i
27 ±0.3VDC
DIN41612 30 pins male
*Not only power supply voltage but also control. 30 pins functions are detailed in
physical description.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
6
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Technical specifications
DC Power Consumption:
1W module:
5W module:
10W module:
i
23W (DVB-T) / 26W (DVB-T2)
65W (DVB-T) / 68W (DVB-T2)
85W (DVB-T) / 88W (DVB-T2)
DC power consumption is specified at the maximum transmitted output power for
every power range (1.58W for 1W modules, 7.94W for 5W modules and 15.85W
for 10W modules).
Temperature and cooling:
Operating temperature:
Relative humidity:
Fans :
Fans type:
0 to 45o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
1 (1W) / 2 (5W, 10W)
KDE0504PFV1.11.MS.A.GN SUNON
Dimensions:
Module dimensions (WxHxD):
50x215x250 mm
Weight:
1W module:
5W module:
10W module:
1,5 Kg
2 Kg
2 Kg
Remote control and monitoring:
Connecting the system to the remote control and monitoring module (Management)
allows remote communication to the control centre. This communication can be made
using different interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, mobile communications, relays).
Local and remote parameters:
Settings
• Unit type.
• Modulator Type (DVB-T / DVB-T2).
• DVB-T2 parameters:
– ASI mode.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
7
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Technical specifications
– Hysteresis ASI.
– Input type (TS / T2MI).
– T2MI PID.
– Network type (SFN / MFN).
– Flank of active 1PPS.
– Individual Addressing Delay.
– Local Delay.
– Bandwidth.
– Cell identifier.
– Net identifier.
– T2 identifier.
– T2 version.
– T2 Output Frequency.
– T2MI Timestamp.
– Transmitter identifier.
– T2 frame:
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
L1 signalling modulation.
Preambles (SISO/MISO).
MISO group.
Extended carrier mode activation.
FFT.
Guard Interval.
PAPR reduction.
Pilot pattern.
T2 frame.
Number of T2 frames per superframe.
Data symbol.
– PLP:
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
PLP index.
PLP identifier.
PLP type (Common / Data 1 / Data 2).
PLP mode (NM / HEM).
PLP Group identifier.
PLP Constellation.
Rotate Constellation.
FEC type.
Code Rate.
Number of FEC blocks.
Type of time-interleaving.
Lenght of time-interleaving.
IB sign.
• DVB-T parameters:
– ASI mode.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
8
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Technical specifications
– Hysteresis ASI.
– Network type.
– Flank of active 1PPS.
– Autoconfiguration from the MIP.
– Delay from the MIP.
– Local Delay.
– Bandwidth.
– Cell identifier.
– Transmitter identifier.
– Constellation.
– FEC.
– Guard Interval.
– FFT.
• Digital predistorter (DPD) parameters:
– DPD activation.
– µ0 Amplitude.
– α Amplitude.
– µ0 Phase.
– α Phase.
• Output channel.
• Output frequency offset.
• Offset step.
• Output power.
• Equalizer slope.
• Precorrector voltage (VCORR1, PC1, PC2).
• Control address.
• Output power level reference.
• Reflected power threshold.
• Amplifier stage temperature threshold.
• Modulator board temperature threshold.
• Mute GPS.
• Timing Mute GPS.
• Mute No MIP.
• Mute ASI.
• Mute MPEG Overflow.
• Mute MPEG Error.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
9
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Technical specifications
• Mute SFN.
• RF mute.
• Date and hour.
• Reset of fan(s) lifetime.
• Language.
Measurements
• Maximum SFN delay (DVB-T).
• Local delay margin.
• Time to Tx (DVB-T2).
• Latency (DVB-T2).
• T2 Super Frame duration (DVB-T2).
• Selected ASI (1 / 2).
• ASI 1/ ASI 2 status.
• Seamless status (DVB-T).
• Output power (dBm and Watts).
• Reflected power (Watts).
• LDMOS transistor 1 current (A).
• LDMOS transistor 2 current (A).
• Output oscillator status.
• Output oscillator tuning voltage (V).
• Modulator oscillator tuning voltage (V).
• AGC 3 voltage (V).
• 1.2V line voltage (V).
• 5V line voltage (V).
• 27V line voltage (V).
• Local or external 10MHz reference.
• Amplifier stage temperature (o C).
• Modulator board temperature (o C).
• Fan(s) lifetime (h).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
10
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Technical specifications
Alarms:
• ATX01 - ASI error 1.
• ATX10 - ASI error 2.
• ATX02 - MIP error.
• ATX03 - FPGA communication.
• ATX04 - No IF DVB-T signal.
• ATX05 - MPEG overflow .
• ATX06 - MPEG error 2.
• ATX11 - MPEG error 2.
• ATX07 - 10MHz error.
• ATX08 - 1pps error.
• ATX09 - FPGA oscillator.
• ART01 - Output oscillator.
• ART02 - Reflected power.
• ART03 - Temperature.
• ART04 - Output power.
• ART05 - Transistors current.
• ART06 - Power 3dB.
• AHW01 - Alimentation fault.
• AHW02 - HW error.
• ATX12 - TS error.
• ATX13 - T2MI error.
• ATX14 - SFN error.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
11
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Physical description
4 Physical description
4.1 MLx Transmitter
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T/T2
Figure 4.1: Transmitter.
Figure 4.2 details frontal connectors module. Figure 4.3 details rear connectors module.
LED
LED status
Off
Green
Orange
Orange blinking
Red
Description
No power supply
No active alarms
Warning alarm
Reflected power alarm
Output power alarm
Table 4.1: Description of LED status.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
12
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Physical description
MLx Transmitter
ASI 1 input (BNC female)
ASI 2 input (BNC female)
Status LED
External programmer
connector (RJ45)
RF monitoring output (BNC female)
RF output
(BNC female 1W/5W)
(N female 10W)
TRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T/T2
Figure 4.2: Description of frontal panel.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
13
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Physical description
MLx Transmitter
10 MHz input (GPS) (BNC female)
1PPS input (GPS) (BNC female)
10 Mhz
Made in Spain
MLX-B121
NRP-Z11
2501.0101.21
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
1PPs
DC connector
10
+27V
CTRL_A
RESET
CTRL_B
Tª ALARM
0V
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
1
Figure 4.3: Description of rear panel.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
14
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
5 Functional description
MLx Transmitter internal composition is outlined in the block diagram of Figure 5.1.
DVB-T/T2 Modulator
board
Figure 5.1: Simplified block diagram of the MLx Transmitter.
Main stages at the MLx Transmitter:
Power supply
All necessary internal voltages to operate the equipment are generated through converters DC/DC in the power supply stage from the 27VDC input voltage.
The internal voltages are 1.2VDC , 5VDC , 9VDC and 27VDC . All of them are monitored
by the microcontroller.
Those voltages can be reset from an external pin.
Generating 10 MHz sync signal from the GPS signal
The GPS 10 MHz signal is first amplified and then compared (in a circuit phase comparator) with the signal of 10MHz TCXO. The comparator output phase, after passing through
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
15
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
a loop filter, is used to generate the corresponding voltage that controls the TCXO frequency so it is fully engaged in frequency to the 10 MHz signal from the GPS receiver.
Furthermore, the 10MHz signal is detected to generate a voltage to control the attenuation of the input to a PIN-diodes stage. The PIN-diodes stage controls the dynamic range
so that the input to the phase comparator is constant for any 10MHz signal level received.
The output signal of the TCXO is used as clock for the DVB-T modulator, and as a reference for generating the upconverter local oscillator, so that all signals are locked with the
reference signal from the GPS.
DVB-T/T2 modulator
The modulator receives as inputs the 10MHz frequency reference signal and the 1 pps
time reference signal to process all synchronization tasks in SFN mode.
It also receives the two redundant ASI input signals to deliver an output signal at intermediate frequency, compatible with EN 300744 DVB-T and EN 302755 DVB-T2.
The signal is introduced into a Non Linear Digital Predistorter (DPD). The DPD is controlled by means of four parameters, all of them configurable by the user (see section 5.5).
IF
A sample of the IF signal, after being amplified, is used to detect and inform the microcontroller about the IF signal presence.
The IF signal is then amplified and introduced into an analog predistortion circuit or linearity correction. This circuit is governed by the voltages VCORR1, PC1 and PC2, all of
them generated from the microcontroller and configurable by the user (see chapter 7).
The predistortion output signal is amplified and filtered to adjust its level to the upconverter mixer, responsible for converting the IF signal to the desired output channel.
Upconverter
The IF signal is converted to the output channel with a mixer by a local oscillator.
Once the signal is converted to the output frequency, it passes through an UHF tracking
filter. The voltages controlling this filter are obtained during the equipment adjustment
process at the factory, and stored in an E2PROM memory.
Input amplifier
The Signal Processing Board output signal enters the Amplifier Board and is amplified
through the monolithic amplifier. After it there is a PIN diode stage controlled by the automatic gain control circuit (abbreviated as AGC3 throughout this manual). The function
of this variable attenuation stage is to compensate the power stage response curve in
terms of frequency and gain variation with temperature, and to regulate the attenuation
according to the selected output power.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
16
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
The control voltage of the AGC3 is obtained from the detection of a sample of the output
power through a directional coupler and a detector.
After the AGC3 circuit, there are two stages of amplification performed with monolithic
amplifiers.
Below there is an amplification stage based on the use of bipolar transistors.
All the input amplifier stages are polarized in class-A and very linear, so they do not
introduce any intermodulation effect to the output amplifier.
Output amplifier
The output amplifier is made by two LDMOS transistors polarized in class-AB and addedup by 3dB and 90◦ hybrid couplers. The transistors used are different depending on the
nominal output power. The polarization circuit of gate voltages are in the control circuit.
After the output amplifier, a directional coupler is placed with two purposes: detect the
signal to measure the transmitted power and get the AGC3 voltage; and detect the proportional signal to the reflected power to generate the corresponding alarm.
This is followed by another directional coupler which obtains the output test signal at the
front of the module.
Fans
1W device incorporates one fan at the bottom of the module, and two fans in the case of
a 5W and 10W devices. These fans start upon two conditions: when the temperature at
amplifier stage reaches 51o C, stopping when the temperature drops below 46◦ C, or when
the temperature at the Modulator board reaches 53o C, stopping when the temperature
drops below 49◦ C.
Control
The control module is based on the microcontroller circuit which performs the controlling functions necessary for the Signal Processing board, Amplifier board and Modulator
board. Among others functions, it generates a series of voltages to control the D/A and
A/D converters.
These voltages are generated through a D/A converter whose output is multiplexed into
a serie of operational amplifier circuits sample and hold. Some of the voltages are accessible by the user.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
17
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
DVB-T2 software activation
5.1 DVB-T2 software activation
The hardware is ready to DVB-T or DVB-T2 modulation, but only DVB-T performance is
implemented by default. DVB-T2 is a software option.
To activate the DVB-T2 modulator is necessary to activate a software option in the module
through an activation code, a string of 8-digit alpha-numeric type:
B1AF5C59
i
This code is only valid for the module for which it was generated and is not
valid for another different module. Once activated, the DVB-T2 modulator is
not able to be desactivated by user.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
18
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Settings
5.2 Settings
The equipment has a number of adjustable parameters detailed below. These parameters are accessible both locally and remotely.
Unit Type
It determines the type of power amplifier board that it is used for internal adjustment. This
parameter is set in factory and cannot be set by the user.
Possible types:
• 1W.
• 5W.
• 10W.
Modulator Type
Select the type of modulator between DVB-T and DVB-T2.
The modulation parameters that are explained below are related to the type of modulator
selected here. Some of them make sense on both DVB-T and DVB-T2 standards, others
will be exclusive to DVB-T2 or DVB-T.
i
DVB-T2 software option must be actived to allow select the DVB-T2 type.
DVB-T2 parameters
See section 5.3 for a detailed description.
DVB-T parameters
See section 5.4 for a detailed description.
Digital predistorter parameters
See section 5.5 for a detailed description.
Output channel and frequency offset
Equipment central output frequency can be set by programming the channel and the offset. The offset step can be configured.
i
Chapter 9 describes in detail the considerations that must be taken into account
when making any changes in the output channel. Such considerations are related to
both the output power and the adjustment of the linnearity precorrection settings.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
19
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Settings
Offset step
This parameter allows you to configure the offset resolution in order to set the input or
output frecuency. There are three possible steps: 1/6M Hz , 1/7M Hz or 1/8M Hz .
Equalizer slope
Allows you to regulate the slope inside the channel to equalize the output spectrum. It is
possible to set up to 8 steps from -4 to 4 (from a negative slope of 4dB to a positive pente
of 4dB referenced to level at central frecuency).
Output power
Equipment allows to regulate the output level >12dB maintaining the quality parameters
outlined in the specifications. The 1W device is adjustable to ranges from 20dBm to
32dBm, the 5W device is adjustable to ranges from 27dBm to 39dBm and the 10W device is adjustable to ranges from 30dBm to 42dBm. If the output power is varied outside
these margins, the quality parameters ot the transmitter output signal (distance to shoulder, MER ,...) may not correspond to its technical specifications.
i
The device is factory adjusted at a given output power. This power corresponds to
a certain adjustment of the voltages of the linearity precorrector. These voltages
are not constant for different values of output power, or even for different output
channels, although they can be modified by the user as it will be explained further
ahead. This is the reason why it is recommended not to modify the output power
unless the apropiate measuring equipment (spectrum analyzer), that will allow to
readjust the linearity precorrector’s values, is available. (See chapter 9 of this
manual for further information).
Linearity precorrector voltages (VCORR1, PC1 and PC2)
It is used for varying the voltage that controls the analog predistortion (linearity correction) at the IF stage of the modulator module.
These are values adjusted by the manufacturer and should not be changed unless the
output channel or the transmitter output power are varied, in which case they shall be
amended so that the distance to the shoulders of the new channel are more than 38 dB.
To make this adjustment it is necessary to use a spectrum analyzer.
VCORR1 is an hexadecimal index whose value can vary from 000 to 3FF. Possible values
of the parameters PC1 and PC2 are 0 or 1.
Control address
This is a local parameter that allows you to change the control address of the module used
by the Management module. See chapter 7 for more information about this parameter.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
20
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Settings
Reference output power level
This is a local parameter that allows you to modify the internal value of reference level of
output power of the device. See chapter 7 for more information about this parameter.
Reflected power threshold
Reflected power threshold is used to activate the reflected power alarm. The threshold is
defined as the number of dB below the transmitted power to be achieved by the reflected
power to set the alarm. If the threshold is -4dB, which means that the alarm is activated
when the reflected power reaches a value equal to the transmitted power-4dB (ie, 26dBm
for a transmitted power of 30dBm).
The equipment operation according to this threshold and the reflected power measured
at the power stage is summarized in Table 5.1. The equipment returns to its normal
operation when it is below the threshold rediscovered.
Reflected power
< Threshold
> Threshold
Unit Type
1W / 5W / 10W
1W / 5W
> Threshold
10W
Operation
normal
reduction between 3-4dB on output power
and alarm Reflected power
reduction between 5-6dB on output power
and alarm Reflected power
Table 5.1: Behavior-based on reflected power.
Amplifier temperature threshold
It is an adjustable threshold of temperature at the power amplifier stage. The default
threshold value is established at 65o C. Equipment operates according to this threshold value and the temperature measurement. The behaviour is summarized in Table
5.2. Equipment returns to its normal operation mode when temperature drops below the
threshold value.
Temperature
< Threshold
> Threshold
Unit type
1W / 5W / 10W
1W / 5W / 10W
Operation
normal
alarm Temperature
Table 5.2: Behavior-based on amplifier stage temperature.
Modulator temperature threshold
It is a non adjustable threshold of temperature at the Modulator board. The default threshold value is established at 75o C. The equipment operates according to this threshold
value and the temperature measurement. The behaviour is summarized in Table 5.3.
The equipment returns to its normal operation mode when temperature drops below the
threshold value.
Mutes
See section 5.6 for a detailed description.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
21
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Settings
Temperature
< Threshold
> Threshold
Unit type
1W / 5W / 10W
1W / 5W / 10W
Operation
normal
alarm Temperature
Table 5.3: Behavior-based on Modulator temperature.
Date and hour
Those parameters are only configured by Management module.
Reset of fan(s) lifetime.
This parameter is used to reset the lifetime counter of fan(s). This reset must be done
after replacing a failed fan with a new one.
i
While in 5W / 10W devices two fans are supplied only one fan is supplied in 1W
devices.
Language
Selects the menu language of external programmer. Selectable languages are English,
Spanish or French.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
22
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
DVB-T2
5.3 DVB-T2
ASI mode
The modulator has two redundant ASI inputs. This parameter determines the behavior
of the ASI inputs. Possible values are automatic, automatic with ASI1 priority , manual
ASI1 or manual ASI2.
In automatic mode the device selects automatically the input ASI flow from one of the two
inputs without priority. In automatic with ASI1 priority mode the device selects automatically the input ASI flux from one of the two inputs prioritizing ASI1 (Return to ASI1 after 10
seconds). In manual ASI1 or manual ASI2 mode, only the selected input is considered.
Hysteresis ASI
Switching between the two ASI signal inputs has a hysteresis time. That is, the switching
from ASI2 to ASI1 (or ASI1 to ASI2) is performed after a hysteresis time. This time is
configurable from 0 to 3 seconds.
Input type
The DVB-T2 modulator can work with two types of inputs: TS or T2MI.
TS (TRANSPORT STREAM)
This communication protocol encapsules video, audio and data services according to the
MPEG-2 specifications. Taking in account that this kind of stream does not contain modulation information, user must set up the different parameters on the trasnmitter equipment
(bandwidth, FFT size, code rate, etc). The modulator introduces that incoming information into one PLP and transmits it over a RF T2 signal.
The transmitter admits TS input streams up to 40Mbps. However, this capacity depends
on the chosen configuration parameters (bigger or smaller bandwidths, more or less
dense constellations, more or less redundant codes, etc).
While this mode can not exploit the full potential of DVB-T2, the main advantage is that
it allows the user to have an RF T2 signal without any additional equipment other than a
TS source.
Even more, the modulator introduces null packets (and makes a timely PCR restamping)
if the input bitrate is less than the nominal one for the selected configuration. Thus, the
modulator allows TS input configured to generate RF output signal even without an input.
DVB-T2 modulation has a large number of signaling parameters and not all the possible combinations of them are valid. Thus, when a configuration is applied a validation
process is performed. If the set of parameters entered is valid, those parameters are
recorded. Otherwise a message indicates that the configuration is not valid and an error
code is provided for the user to know which is the conflicting parameter or combination of
parameters.
The possible error codes are the following:
• 0A: The number of frames per T2 superframe must be greater than or equal to 2.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
23
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
DVB-T2
• 0B: Extended carrier mode can only be used with FFT size 8K, 16K or 32K.
• 0C: The constellation rotation and the ACE for PAPR reduction are incompatible.
• 0D: The number of symbols for a FFT size of 32K can not be odd.
• 0E: The combination of guard interval, FFT size and pilot carriers pattern selected
is inconsistent. [ETSI EN 302 755, Table 52.53]
• 0F: The number of OFDM symbols for the FFT size and guard interval is incorrect.
[ETSI EN 302 755, Table 40]
T2MI (T2 MODULATION INTERFACE)
This input type transports audio, video and data in accordance with the TS MPEG-2
specifications. This information is encapsulated in turn grouped into one or more PLPs
(distinguishing operation thus Single and Multiple PLP). Besides this digital content, this
signal includes all the configuration information needed by the modulator therefore it’s
not necessary to manually enter it into the equipment. It also contains information on the
broadcast time allowing SFN (Single Frequency Network) operation.
The maximum input bitrate that it’s supported by the modulator for a T2MI input is 72Mbps.
The PLPs data is processed and encapsulated in a more or less complex way into T2
frames. These frames also contain basic signaling (L1) containing detailed modulation
settings so that receivers are able to decode the data. T2 frames are grouped into T2
super frames and finally sent over RF.
Regardless of the type of input selected, the input information is supplied to the modulator
encapsulated through ASI. The T2 modulator automatically resets on any change of the
modulation parameters that are received through T2MI.
T2MI PID
T2MI information is inserted into the payload of MPEG-2 TS packets (and transmitted
over ASI as explained before). This parameter defines the PID used to identify the T2MI
data. The parameter PID is configurable from 0 to 8191.
Network type
Determines the frequency network operation. Possible values are SFN (Single Frequency
Network) and MFN (Multiple Frequency Network).
In T2MI case, in order to enable SFN, a valid PPS and 10MHz reference signals must be
connected to the modulator. The emission information is received through the T2MI and
may use relative or absolute timing.
i
The T2 Modulator does only support relative timestamps.
In TS case, the modulator cannot operate in SFN without the timing information that it’s
only delivered by T2MI.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
24
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
DVB-T2
Flank of active 1PPS
Selects the reference edge of the 1PPS signal to synchronize: rising edge or falling edge.
It is responsibility of network operator to define this parameter.
Individual Addressing Delay
The IA Delay is configured remotely by the network operator through the T2MI input.
Local Delay
Local delay (with a 100ns resolution) assigned to the modulator by the user.
Bandwidth
When working with a TS input type, it sets the bandwidth of the OFDM signal. In case of
T2MI input type, it reads the timestamp field sent in the T2MI flow.
The possible values are: 1.7 MHz (T2MI), 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz and 8 MHz.
Cell identifier
It allows the user to set the cell ID where the transmitter is located. This parameter cannot
be disabled.
Net identifier
Uniquely identifies the DVB network.
T2 identifier
DVB-T2 System identifier. Uniquely identifies a T2 system within the DVB network.
T2 version
T2 Version comppliance according with ETSI EN 305 755 (1_1_1 or 1_2_1).
Output Frequency
When input type is TS, this field is automatically initialized to the modulator output frequency. With T2MI input type, it indicates the output frequency registered in the T2MI
flow.
T2MI Timestamp
The T2MI Timestamp is a T2MI packet type which is always present in T2MI flow: It indicates the OFDM signal bandwidth and provides a time reference needed for the transmission of the signal in SFN mode. The possible values for this parameter are:
• NULL: Null Timestamp (no time reference included).
• REL.: Relative Timestamp (includes a time reference relating to the 1PPS signal).
• abs.: Absolute Timestamp whatsoever (includes an absolute time reference).
The DVB-T/T2 modulator can only work in SFN with a relative time reference, since it has
non absolute time information to determine the transmission time.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
25
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
DVB-T2
Transmitter identifier
Allows uniquely identify the transmitter. With this identifier, network operator has the ability to configure optional parameters such as frequency offset, delay, power transmission,
or different cell ID for each of the transmitters of the network.
Each modulator needs an univocal ID in order to receive exclusive modulation parameters from the T2MI source through IA (Individual Addressing) packets wich are also sent
through the input signal.
5.3.1 T2 Frame
L1 signalling modulation
Defines the L1 constellation. Increasing the constellation depth reduces the number of
symbols needed to define the L1 signalling but also loses robustness at reception when
decoding that information. The possible values are: BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM and 64QAM.
Preambles (SISO/MISO)
MISO processing allows the initial frequency domain coefficients to be processed by a
modified Alamouti encoding, wich allows the T2 signal to be split between two gropus of
transmitters on the same frequency in such a way that the two groups will not interfere
with each other.
MISO group
When working with a TS input type, this parameter allows user to set the MISO group.
When working with a T2MI input type, it reads the MISO group field sent in the T2MI flow.
In case of no MISO group detected in input flow, user must set the MISO group.
The possible values are: 1 or 2.
Extended carrier mode activation
The extended-carrier option has the benefit of increasing the data capacity.
FFT
Defines the OFDM output signal carrier number (1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K or 2K). Increasing
the FFT size will give a greater delay tolerance for the same fractional guard interval,
allowing larger Single Frequency Networks (SFNs) to be constructed.
Alternatively, larger FFTs allow the same delay tolerance to be achieved with a smaller
overhead due to the guard interval. On the other hand, the larger FFT sizes have a
greater vulnerability to fast time-varying channels, i.e. have lower Doppler performance
Guard Interval
Selects the guard interval: 1/4, 19/256, 1/8, 19/128, 1/16, 1/32 1/128. The simplest view
is to treat the guard interval as a hard limit to the channel extent that can be tolerated by
the system.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
26
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
DVB-T2
The greatest capacity is given by selecting the minimum value but there are other constraints like the choice of FFT, concerning the degree of Doppler effects to be expected
in the scenario of interest.
PAPR reduction
Peak Average Power Ratio. Selects among the reduction techniques. The reduction in
crest factor results in a system that can either trasmit more bits per second with the same
hardware, or transmit the same bits per second with lower output power.
The meaning of PAPR reduction options depends on the DVB-T2 version.
In version 1_1_1:
• -: No PAPR used.
• ACE: Only ACE-PAPR used.
• TR: Only TR-PAPR used.
• ACE-TR: Both ACE and TR used.
In version 1_2_1:
• TR-P2: L1-ACE used and TR only in P2 symbols.
• ACE: Only L1-ACE and ACE used.
• TR: Only L1-ACE and TR used.
• ACE-TR: L1-ACE, ACE and TR used.
Pilot pattern
Defines the pattern of the pilot carriers. Several pilot patterns are available, named PP1 to
PP8, with the intention of providing efficient options for different channel scenarios. Each
pattern can support time and frequency variations up to corresponding Nyquist limits.
T2 frame
Number of T2 frames per superframe.
Data symbol
Defines the number of OFDM symbols per T2 frame.
5.3.2 PLP
PLP index
Selects the PLP whose data we want to display at the rest of parameters.
PLP identifier
A unique PLP identifier in the DVB-T2 system.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
27
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
DVB-T2
PLP type
PLP type: Common, Data 1 or Data 2. Type of the associated PLP. In TS mode, this
parameter is always set to Data 1.
PLP mode
Indicates whether Normal Mode (NM) or High Efficiency Mode (HEM) is used for the
current PLP.
PLP Group identifier
Indentifies with which PLP group within the T2 system the current PLP is associated.
PLP Constellation
Indicates the modulation used by the associated PLP: 256QAM, 64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK
or BPSK.
Rotate Constellation
Indicates whether constellation rotation is in use or not by the associated PLP.
FEC type
Indicates the FEC type used by the associated PLP: 64K or 16K.
Code Rate
Indicates the code rate used by the associated PLP: 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5 or 5/6.
Number of FEC blocks
Indicates the number of FEC blocks contained in the current Interleaving Frame for the
current PLP.
When a TS entry type is used, the value of the parameter number of FEC blocks (per interleave frame for a particular PLP) is calculated based on: the OFDM signal bandwidth ,
the FFT size, the guard interval, the pilot carriers pattern and the constellation, according
to [ETSI TS 102 831 V1.1.1, page 55]. The table below shows some configurations of
this parameter as an example:
• BW = 8MHz
• Data symbol = 40
• Type of time-interleaving = 0
• Lenght of time-interleaving = 2
• PLP mode = Normal
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
28
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
DVB-T2
Guard
Interval
Pilot
patern
FFT
Const.
1/128
PP7
32K
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM
16K
8K
1/32
PP4
32K
16K
8K
N. blocks
67
100
134
33
49
66
16
24
32
65
97
130
32
48
64
15
23
31
Type of time-interleaving
Indicates the type of time-interleaving.
Lenght of time-interleaving
Indicates the number of T2-frames to which every Interleaving Frame is mapped or the
number of TI-blocks per Interleaving Frame depending on the time-interleaving type.
IB sign
Indicates whether the current PLP carries in-band signalling A and/or B (A -, A B, - B, -). In TS mode this parameter is always set to - - (Non in-band signallling).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
29
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
DVB-T
5.4 DVB-T
ASI mode
The same as ASI mode in DVB-T2.
Hysteresis ASI
The same as Hysteresis ASI in DVB-T2.
Network type
The same as Network type in DVB-T2.
Flank of active 1PPS
Selects the reference edge of the 1PPS signal to synchronize: rising edge or falling edge.
It is responsibility of network operator to define this parameter.
Autoconfiguration from the MIP
If enabled, with the modulator in SFN mode, indicates that the modulation parameters
(constellation, FEC, guard interval, bandwidth of the signal and the FFT size) of the DVBT signal are obtained directly from the MIP . In this operation mode these parameters can
not be edited. If disabled, with the modulator in SFN mode, the transmission parameters
can be modified by the user. It is the responsibility of user to ensure that the selected
parameters match with those of the SFN (ie indicating the MIP).
Delay from the MIP
Delay configured remotely by the network operator through the MIP.
Local Delay
Local delay (with a 100ns resolution) assigned to the modulator by the user.
Bandwidth
Selects the COFDM modulation bandwidth: 6MHz, 7MHz or 8MHz.
Cell identifier
It allows the user to set the cell ID where the transmitter is located. This parameter can
be disabled.
Transmitter identifier
Uniquely identifies the transmitter. With this identifier, the network operator is able to
configure optional parameters such as frequency offset, delay, power transmission, or
different cell ID for each of the transmitters of the network.
Constellation
Selects the COFDM modulation constellation: QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
30
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
DVB-T
FEC
Selects the COFDM modulation encoding rate:1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 or 7/8.
Guard Interval
Selects the COFDM modulation guard interval:1/4, 1/8, 1/16 or 1/32.
FFT
Selects the COFDM modulation FFT: 8K or 2K.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
31
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Non Linear Digital Predistorter (DPD)
5.5 Non Linear Digital Predistorter (DPD)
The manual Non Linear Digital Predistorter (DPD) is controlled by means of four parameters that can be accessed to by user:
• Parameters µ0 Amplitude and α Amplitude control the AM/AM curve (amplitude
predistortion parameters).
• Parameters µ0 Phase and α Phase control the AM/PM curve (phase predistortion
parameters).
The DPD can be enabled or disabled by the user. In case of activation of the DPD, the
analog precorrection is automatically disabled.
Amplitude predistortion parameters.
µ0 Amplitude controls the drive level. It ranges from 0.00 to 0.50.
α Amplitude controls the gain as a function of the relative amplitude. It ranges from 0.00
to 0.99.
Whatever the value of µ0 Amplitude is, a value α Amplitude = 0.56 corresponds to a
flat response of the predistorter, this is, to a value for which no amplitude predistortion is
being generated. Values of α Amplitude between 0.00 and 0.56 correspond to negative
values of amplitude predistortion, whilst values between 0.57 and 0.99 correspond to
positive values of amplitude predistortion.
Phase predistortion parameters.
µ0 Phase controls the relative amplitude and it ranges from 0.00 to 0.50.
α Phase controls the phase as a function of the relative amplitude and it ranges from -45
(equivalent to -45o ) to +45 (equivalent to +45o ).
A value of µ0 Phase = 0.44 and α Phase = 0.00 corresponds to a flat response of the
predistorter, this is, to a value for which no phase predistortion is being generated. Values
of α Phase between 0.00 and -45.0 correspond to negative values of phase predistorion,
whilst values between 0.00 and +45.0 correspond to positive values of phase predistortion.
DPD Adjusting: typical values for DPD parameters.
Tables below show typical values for the predistorter parameters in different frequencies
and for three values of output power (maximum output power, maximum output power
minus 1dB, 2dB and 3dB).
These values only intend to be used as a guide. Slightly variations around them are expected for different amplifiers.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
32
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Non Linear Digital Predistorter (DPD)
1W DEVICES:
i
Output power of 32dBm (1.6W)
α Amplitude
µ0 Phase
0.82
0.20
0.98
0.20
0.81
0.20
0.89
0.20
0.82
0.20
0.85
0.20
Frequency
474 MHz
546 MHz
626 MHz
706 MHz
786 MHz
858 MHz
µ0 Amplitude
α Phase
0.44
0.41
0.41
0.41
0.41
0.41
13.5
10
9.5
9
10
13.5
Frequency
474 MHz
546 MHz
626 MHz
706 MHz
786 MHz
858 MHz
µ0 Amplitude
α Phase
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
10.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
9
10.5
Frequency
474 MHz
546 MHz
626 MHz
706 MHz
786 MHz
858 MHz
µ0 Amplitude
α Phase
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
6
6
5.5
7.5
7
7.5
Output power of 31dBm (1.26W)
α Amplitude
µ0 Phase
0.63
0.20
0.65
0.20
0.65
0.20
0.65
0.20
0.64
0.20
0.65
0.20
Output power of 30dBm (1W)
α Amplitude
µ0 Phase
0.58
0.20
0.59
0.20
0.59
0.20
0.59
0.20
0.59
0.20
0.59
0.20
For output power values ≤ 29dBm is not necessary the digital predistorter to get
the signal quality as indicated at the technical specifications. So the values of the
predistorter parameters must keep: µ0 Amplitude = 0.25, α Amplitude = 0.58, µ0
Phase = 0.20, α Phase = 5.5. This means DPD = OFF.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
33
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Non Linear Digital Predistorter (DPD)
5W DEVICES:
Output power of 39dBm (7.9W)
α Amplitude
µ0 Phase
0.53
0.20
0.53
0.20
0.95
0.20
0.95
0.20
0.85
0.20
0.82
0.20
Frequency
474 MHz
546 MHz
626 MHz
706 MHz
786 MHz
858 MHz
µ0 Amplitude
α Phase
0.20
0.25
0.41
0.33
0.35
0.40
9
7.5
18
15
11.5
19
Frequency
474 MHz
546 MHz
626 MHz
706 MHz
786 MHz
858 MHz
µ0 Amplitude
α Phase
0.20
0.20
0.41
0.33
0.35
0.40
6.5
6.5
13
13.5
9.5
14
Frequency
474 MHz
546 MHz
626 MHz
706 MHz
786 MHz
858 MHz
µ0 Amplitude
α Phase
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.30
0.20
0.20
5
3.5
9.5
9.5
9
11.5
Frequency
474 MHz
546 MHz
626 MHz
706 MHz
786 MHz
858 MHz
µ0 Amplitude
α Phase
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
3.5
2
6
7
6.5
8.5
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Output power of 38dBm (6.3W)
α Amplitude
µ0 Phase
0.53
0.20
0.53
0.20
0.70
0.20
0.76
0.20
0.68
0.20
0.61
0.20
Output power of 37dBm (5W)
α Amplitude
µ0 Phase
0.52
0.20
0.53
0.20
0.58
0.20
0.64
0.20
0.57
0.20
0.55
0.20
Output power of 36dBm (4W)
α Amplitude
µ0 Phase
0.52
0.20
0.53
0.20
0.58
0.20
0.59
0.20
0.56
0.20
0.55
0.20
34
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Non Linear Digital Predistorter (DPD)
10W DEVICES:
Output power of 41.5dBm (14W)
α Amplitude
µ0 Phase
0.92
0.20
0.68
0.20
0.96
0.20
0.96
0.20
0.96
0.20
0.96
0.20
Frequency
474 MHz
546 MHz
626 MHz
706 MHz
786 MHz
858 MHz
µ0 Amplitude
α Phase
0.45
0.41
0.38
0.35
0.41
0.47
13
7
14.5
9.5
15
13
Frequency
474 MHz
546 MHz
626 MHz
706 MHz
786 MHz
858 MHz
µ0 Amplitude
α Phase
0.44
0.44
0.40
0.40
0.44
0.44
8.5
5.5
11.5
9.5
11
8.5
Frequency
474 MHz
546 MHz
626 MHz
706 MHz
786 MHz
858 MHz
µ0 Amplitude
α Phase
0.25
0.25
0.44
0.44
0.25
0.25
9.5
2.5
8.5
8
9.5
6
Frequency
474 MHz
546 MHz
626 MHz
706 MHz
786 MHz
858 MHz
µ0 Amplitude
α Phase
0.20
0.20
0.44
0.44
0.25
0.25
8.5
1.5
7
7
6
4
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Output power of 40.5dBm (11.2W)
α Amplitude
µ0 Phase
0.63
0.20
0.57
0.20
0.74
0.20
0.90
0.20
0.73
0.20
0.62
0.20
Output power of 39.5dBm (8.9W)
α Amplitude
µ0 Phase
0.54
0.20
0.54
0.20
0.65
0.20
0.71
0.20
0.53
0.20
0.53
0.20
Output power of 38.5dBm (7W)
α Amplitude
µ0 Phase
0.53
0.20
0.53
0.20
0.59
0.20
0.62
0.20
0.53
0.20
0.53
0.20
35
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Mutes
5.6 Mutes
MLx Transmitter has 7 different mutes, GPS, not MIP, ASI, MPEG Overflow, MPEG Error,
SFN and RF.
i
Mutes Not MIP and MPEG Overflow are only available in DVB-T mode.
Mute GPS
• Mute GPS enabled: This mute is taken into account only in SFN mode. In SFN
mode two cases are considered:
At the start-up of the modulator: if the alarms 10MHz error or 1pps error are
active, transmission signal do not switch on.
After a synchronized state of the modulator: if the alarm 10MHz error is active,
transmission signal will switch off after a configuring time (configuration parameter
Timing Mute GPS). The alarm 1PPS error is not taken into account because 1PPS
signal is internally generated from 10MHz signal and is being compared to external
1PPS signal while GPS signal inputs are synchronyzed. Therefore, if 1PPS input
signal disappears, the modulator will keep SFN locked forever while the 10 MHz
signal will be from a synchronized GPS.
For the correct and consistent configuration of this parameter it should be taken into
account the precision of the TCXO. The accuracy of the TCXO is 1 ppm. Therefore,
with this accuracy will drift 1µs for each second. It is the standard stability of the
signal of 10 MHz when the transmitter fails to receive the signal of 10 MHz from
GPS.
The synchronization condition is because the modulator output signal is within the
guard interval of the other signals that are in the same area of SFN coverage.
Assuming that the delay with the other modules of the network is 0, are presented
in a table the theoretical values and the wise (temporal drift of 50% of guard interval)
maintenance of synchronization:
FFT
Guard Interval
Length of guard interval
(µs)
Hold time for synchronization TCXO (s)
Time synchronization advised keeping with TCXO
(m)
8K
1/4
8K
1/8
8K
1/16
8K
1/32
2K
1/4
2K
1/8
2K
1/16
2K
1/32
224
112
56
28
56
28
14
7
224
112
56
28
56
28
14
7
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
• Mute GPS disabled: Configures the module in SFN, the modulator never switch
off the transmission signal despite of some shortcomings in synchronization with
the GPS. When the modulator is configured in SFN and the alarm 10MHz or 1PPS
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
36
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Mutes
is turned on, will pass automatically to forced MFN mode (identified as MFN*) to
continue sending signal.
Mute No MIP
• Mute not MIP active: The modulator will switch off transmission in case of it has
been configured to work in SFN and the alarm MIP error will turn on.
• Mute no MIP disabled: When the modulator is configured in SFN and the alarm
MIP error is turned on, will pass automatically to forced MFN mode (identified as
MFN*) to continue sending signal. When it detects MIP signal again at the entrance, the modulator will change again to SFN operation mode.
Mute ASI
• Mute ASI active: Only makes sense when working on MFN mode. With this mute
ON, the modulator switches off the transmission if the alarm goes on ASI error in
the active ASI input.
• Mute ASI disabled: When the modulator is configured in MFN and the alarm ASI
error turns on in the active input, the modulator will transmit null packets with sync
so that there is not any switch off in the OFDM signal. This mute purpose is that
decoders do not lose the physical MPEG locked status.
Mute MPEG Overflow
• Mute MPEG Overflow active: The modulator will switch off the transmission if the
transmission buffer is filled due to a high rate of entry thus activating the alarm
MPEG overflow.
• Mute MPEG Overflow disabled: Whenever the maximum storage capacity of the
buffer is exceeded (alarm MPEG overflow active) the modulator clears the buffer
to start again.
Mute MPEG Error
MPEG error is activated when the ASI input has not MPEG data. In this case physical
synchronization at ASI level is correct but video/audio data is not present. So, the user
has the option to switch off the output in order to avoid transmitting useless information
when the MPEG data are incorrect.
• Mute MPEG Error active: The modulator will switch off the transmission if the
alarm MPEG error is activated in the active input.
• Mute MPEG Error disabled: The modulator will not switch off the transmission
although the alarm MPEG error is activated in the active input.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
37
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Mutes
Mute SFN
• Mute SFN active: The modulator will switch off the transmission if the alarm SFN
error is activated.
• Mute SFN disabled: The modulator will not switch off the transmission although
the alarm SFN error is activated.
Mute RF
This parameter allows to manually mute the RF output of the device.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
38
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Measurements
5.7 Measurements
The measurements offered by the equipment are detailed in Table 5.5. These measurements are accessible either locally and remotely.
Selected ASI
Indicates which of the two redundant ASI inputs is active.
Seamless
Indicates the status of the seameles (available or not). Only in DVB-T modulation type.
ASI 1/2 status
As for the ASI inputs, the possible statuses are:
• ASI signal not detected.
• ASI flow errors.
• MPEG-level errors.
• ASI signal detected and free of error.
SFN maximum delay
Value extracted from the MIP. The resolution is 100 nanoseconds. Only in DVB-T modulation type.
Local delay margin
It is the time, displayed with a resolution of 100 nanoseconds, that a mega-frame is stored
in the module’s input buffer before being transmitted.
Time to Tx
Time disponible for transmitting a T2 Super Frame. The resolution is 100 nanoseconds.
Only in DVB-T2 modulation type.
Latency
The total time that a T2 Super Frame is maintained in the modulator before being transmitted. In SFN performance, Time to Tx and Latency should be almost identical. The
resolution is 100 nanoseconds. Only in DVB-T2 modulation type.
T2 Super Frame duration
The duration of a T2 Super Frame. The resolution is 100 nanoseconds. Only in DVB-T2
modulation type.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
39
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Measurements
Output and reflected power
In the power amplifier there are two detectors, one for the transmitted power and another
for the reflected power. The equipment offers a measure of the transmitted power in
Watts and dBm, while measuring of the reflected power is shown in Watts. The minimum
reflected power that shows the equipment is 10% of the transmitted power. For example,
for 1W the lowest power displayed is 0.01 W.
LDMOS transistor currents of power amplifier
Indicate the consumption currents of the two LDMOS transistors at output stage of power
amplifier stage in amperes. As they are class AB polarization devices, the current depends on both the output power (is higher the greater the curve) and frequency.
The value of these currents determines the alarm ART05 - Transistors current. When
one of two currents are out of the thresholds (Table 5.4) this alarm is activated.
Unit type
1W
5W
10W
Lower threshold
10 mA
50 mA
50 mA
Upper threshold
300 mA
1200 mA
2400 mA
Table 5.4: Alarm Transistors current thresholds.
Output local oscillator status
It shows the state (locked or unlocked) of the output local oscillator.
Tuning voltage for local oscillator
It shows the tunning voltage (in Volts) for local output oscillator.
Tuning voltage for local oscillator of Modulator board
It shows the tunning voltage (in Volts) for local oscillator of Modulator board (FPGA).
Automatic gain control voltage
Indicates (in V), the voltage of the circuit of automatic gain control of the Transmitter. The
automatic gain control circuit is at the power stage and you can configure its operation in
auto or manual mode.
1.2V, 5V and 27V lines voltage
The device is able to monitor the exact continuous voltages at the power supply stage.
The value of these voltages determines the alarm AHW01 - Alimentation fault.
Local or external 10MHz reference
Indicates if a 10MHz signal is present at the external connector or not.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
40
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Measurements
Amplifier stage temperature
Temperature (in o C) measured at the output stage of the power amplifier. The behaviorbased on temperature of the equipment has already been showed in Table 5.2.
Modulator temperature
Temperature (in o C) measured at the modulator board. The behavior-based on temperature of the equipment has already been showed in Table 5.3.
Fan(s) lifetime
This parameter shows the life counter in hours of each of the fans.
Parameter
Selected ASI
Seamless (DVB-T only)
ASI 1/2 status
Maximum SFN delay (DVB-T only)
Local delay margin (SFN only)
Time to Tx (DVB-T2 only)
Latency (DVB-T2 only)
T2 Super Frame duration (DVB-T2 only)
Output power
Reflected power
Currents of LDMOS transistor 1 in power
amplifier
Currents of LDMOS transistor 2 in power
amplifier
Output local oscillator status
Output local oscillator tuning voltage
Modulator local oscillator tuning voltage
Automatic Gain Control voltage
1.2V line voltage
5V line voltage
27V line voltage
Local or external 10MHz reference
Amplifier stage temperature
Modulator temperature
Fan(s) lifetime
Usual Range
1/2
OK 7 not available
OK / Error ASI / Error MPEG / -
<10% Output power
100mA to 250mA (1W), 450mA to
1100mA (5W), 700mA to 1500mA
(10W)
100mA to 250mA (1W), 450mA to
1100mA (5W), 700mA to 1500mA
(10W)
Locked
1,5V to 24V
5V to 15V
1V to 5V
1.2V ± 0.1V
5V ± 0.2V
27V ± 0.3V
Local
Table 5.5: Measurements.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
41
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Alarms
5.8 Alarms
The device incorporates an alarm history log where last 10 alarm events are stored.
This log is erased any time the module is reset. Each alarm is able to be activated or
disactivated to be stored in the log.
Each alarm can be enable or disable. It is possible to configure an hysteresis time
in seconds individually for each alarm in order to allow an independent detection of the
device alarms. The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm to be considered as valid.
Transmitter specific alarms are summarized in Table 5.6:
ATX01 - ASI error 1
Indicates that the ASI frame from input 1 has errors.
ATX10 - ASI error 2
Indicates that the ASI frame from input 2 has errors.
ATX02 - MIP error
It is activated when it does not exist MIP signal at the input and the modulator is working
in SFN mode.
If the NO MIP mute is activated the modulator won’t transmit any signal to the IF stage,
so the No IF DVB-T signal alarm will be activated and, consecueltly, the Output power
alarm will be activated as well.
If the NO MIP mute or the ERROR MIP mute are deactivated, the modulator will change
to MFN mode and there won’t be transmission signal interruption.
ATX03 - FPGA communication
It is activated when there are internal communication errors between the modulator’s
microcontroller and the FPGA where the modulation process is done.
ATX04 - No IF signal
Indicates no modulator output signal in intermediate frequency. It maybe caused because
a bad modulator’s operation or errors in the ASI.
When this alarm is activated the Output power alarm is also activated.
ATX05 - MPEG Overflow
Indicates a buffer overflow in the modulator caused by a high data rate in the ASI input
for that DVB-T parameters (FFT, Guard interval, FEC, Constellation)
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
42
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Alarms
ATX06 - MPEG Error 1
Modulator detects an error in the input 1 data at MPEG level.
ATX11 - MPEG Error 2
Modulator detects an error in the input 2 data at MPEG level.
ATX12 - TS Error
Problem detected on the Transport Stream input. This alarm only appers when selecting
TS as modulator input type and may be caused by the following events:
• Synchronization errors on the TS stream.
• Restamping errors caused by a TS input bitrate higher than expected.
ATX13 - T2MI Error
Problem detected on the T2MI input stream. This alarm only appears when choosing
T2MI as modulator input type and may be triggered by the following events:
• Synchronization and/or continuity errors on the TS stream that encapsulates the
T2MI.
• T2MI timeout error if a T2MI packet with the expected T2MI PID is not received for
5 seconds.
• Synchronization and/or continuity errors and/or CRC errors on the T2MI stream.
• T2MI timestamp has not been received yet.
• The number of received PLPs exceed the maximum allowed.
ATX14 - SFN Error
Problems detected on SFN function. The activation of this alarm is determined by SFN
parameters. It may be triggered by the following events:
DVB-T mode:
• Local delay margin > SFN maximum delay. The activation of this alarm means that
the transmission is performed in the next PPS edge from the correct one.
DVB-T2 mode:
• Time to Tx < Latency.
• Time to Tx > 1 second.
Mute SFN performance is based on this alarm.
ATX07 - 10MHz error
It is activated when the synchronization signal (10MHz signal) from the GPS is missed at
the input. If the modulator is in MFN mode this alarm is not showed.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
43
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Alarms
ATX08 - 1PPS error
Indicates the lack of 1pps synchronization signal. If the modulator is in MFN mode this
alarm is not showed.
ATX09 - FPGA oscillator
It is activated when the FPGA oscillator of the modulator board is unlocked.
ART01 - Output oscillator
It is activated when the output oscillator (which converts the intermediate frequency into
the output channel frequency) is unlocked.
ART02 - Reflected power
It is activated when the reflected power level exceeds the reflected power threshold level.
When this happen, the device decreases its output power level in 3-4dB. The device
recovers its power level when the reflected power level decreases under the threshold
level. This threshold value is user configurable.
ART03 - Temperature
It is activated when the temperature level at power amplifier stage exceeds its temperature’s threshold level or when the temperature level at FPGA stage exceeds its temperature’s threshold level.
ART04 - Output power
It is activated when the transmitted power level decreases 6dB or more from its power
level.
ART05 - Transistors current
The value of the two LDMOS transistors currents at amplifier stage determines the activation of this alarm. When one of two currents are out of the thresholds (Table 5.4) this
alarm is activated.
ART06 - Power 3dB.
It is activated when the transmitted power level decreases betwenn 3dB and 6dB its
power level.
AHW01 - Alimentation fault
It is activated when any of the DC voltages in the power supply stage is out of this usual
range or when exist a general failure at the power supply.
This alarm is also activated when temperature alarm pin in DC connector is activated.
This pin is activated in the Power Supply Units.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
44
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Alarms
i
Alimentation fault is also activated when temperature alarm pin in DC connector
at rear panel of the device is activated. This temperature alarm pin is activated by
the Power Supply Units.
AHW02 - HW error
It is activated when an internal hardware failure is detected.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
45
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Functional description
Alarms
Table 5.6 shows the LED status of the modules based on the active alarm.
code
ATX01
ATX02
ATX03
ATX04
ATX05
ATX06
ATX07
ATX08
ATX09
ART01
ART02
ART03
ART04
ART05
ART06
AHW01
AHW02
ATX10
ATX11
ATX12
ATX13
ATX14
Alarm
ASI error 1
MIP error
FPGA communication
No IF signal
MPEG overflow
MPEG error 1
10MHz error
1pps error
FPGA oscillator
Output oscillator
Reflected power
Temperature
Output power
Transistors current
Power 3dB
Alimentation fault
HW error
ASI error 2
MPEG error 2
TS error
T2MI error
SFN error
Status LED
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange blinking
Orange
Red
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
External programmer LED
A
C
B
Table 5.6: LED Behavior-based on alarms.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
46
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Remote Control and Monitoring
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
The remote control and monitoring system is based on the use of the Management
module, which communicates with all the modules of the system via a RS485 bus in
back pannel unit.
The Management Module monitors the measures and alarms of all the system’s modules, allowing to change their settings.
Each module is assigned with a different remote control address that identifies it within
the shared communication bus.
The system enables remote management and communication with a remote monitoring
center. This communication can be of various types and using various interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, GSM/GPRS/UMTS).
For more details, please refer to the chapter "Operation" in System Manual.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
47
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
7 Local control
Following is detailed the menus structure corresponding to the External Programmer
interface (see External Programmer instrument manual for more details).
7.1 Menu structure
The menus in this module are the tree structure:
Transmitter
DVB-T/T2 1W
2.01
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.POWER
3.OUTPUT
4.MODULATOR
5.MUTE CONF
6.SYSTEM
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
..
Input level
Low Power!
LOG
02/04
ARE01
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
EQ slope:+1
..
INPUT
SYSTEM
MODULATION
PREDISTORT
PLP
PREDISTORT
..
ASI:
Auto
Hysteres:0s
ASI selec:1
Seamless: ASI1:
OK
ASI2:
-
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
..
ATX01: 001s
ATX02: 001s
ATX03: 001s
..
ATX01:
ATX02:
ATX03:
ON
OFF
ON
..
ATX01:
ATX02:
ATX03:
ON
OFF
ON
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ATX07:
ATX08:
ATX09:
ART01:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ATX07:
ATX08:
ATX09:
ART01:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ATX07:
ATX08:
ATX09:
ART01:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
AHW01:
AHW02:
ATX10:
ATX11:
ATX12:
ATX13:
ATX14:
001s
000s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
AHW01:
AHW02:
ATX10:
ATX11:
ON
ON
ON
ON
AHW01:
AHW02:
ATX10:
ATX11:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ATX12:
ATX13:
ATX14:
ON
ON
ON
ATX12:
ATX13:
ATX14:
ON
ON
ON
..
Mode:
SFN
Edge 1PPS:
AutoMIP: ON
Tof:
0.0
MD:75000000
LD:
0.0u
M: 360600.0
BW:
8MHz
Cell_id: ON
C_id:
0
Tx_id:
0
Vtun:11.9V
Vers: 1.00
Tem:+49.9ºC
..
Mode:
SFN
Edge 1PPS:
Tof:
0.0
T: 498750.8
L: 498715.2
LD:
0.0u
M: 360600.0
BW:
8MHz
C_id:
0
Netid:
0
T2_id:
0
T2ver:1_1_1
F:706000000
TimeSt:NULL
Vtun:11.9V
Vers: 1.01
Tem:+49.9ºC
Tx_id:
0
..
Type:DVB-T2
CTRLadd:001
10MHz: ext
Offset: 166
Power:
1W
01:19:19
00/00/0000
1.2V:1.256V
5V: 4.963V
27V: 27.37V
Vnt:000001h
..
Type: T2MI
Pid:
0
ASI:
Auto
Hysteres:0s
ASI selec:1
ASI1:
ASI2:
..
L1mod:64QAM
Preamb:SISO
MISO Gr.U:1
Language
selection
--------English
MISO Gr.M:ExtCarr: ON
FFT:
32K
Inte: 1/128
Papr:
Pilot Pat:7
T2 Fram: 2
Symb:
39
D: 54589.4
..
Transmitter
DVBT/T2 1W
Vers: 1.01
Des: 00001
Boot: 1.03
..
Serial Num
050712452001
Mode:
HEM
GroupID: 1
Cons:256QAM
8K
..
Predist:OFF
u0 Amp:0.44
alfa A:0.56
u0 Ph: 0.00
alfph: 00.0
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
..
Index: 1/8
Id:
1
Type:Data 1
..
Cons: 64QAM
FEC:
2/3
Inte:
1/4
FFT:
..
GPS:
ON
Temp:
5m
ASI:
ON
MPEG er: ON
SFN err:OFF
..
INPUT
SYSTEM
T2 FRAME
..
Predist:OFF
u0 Amp:0.44
alfa A:0.56
u0 Ph: 0.00
alfph: 00.0
Rot.Con: ON
FEC typ:64K
C.rate: 5/6
N.blo: 134
TI Typ:
0
TI Leng: 2
IB Sing: 0
Legend
Short press square
Long press square
Short press circle
Long press circle
Press up
Press down
DVB-T
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
DVB-T2
48
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
When connecting the external programmer to the module, first of all the firmware version
of the External Programmer is displayed for a few seconds. After this, a welcome screen
showing the unit type and the firmware version is displayed:
Transmitter
DVB-T/T2 1W
1.01
Start menu allows selecting one of the six main menus, Alarms, Power, Output, Modulator , Mute configuration and System:
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.POWER
3.OUTPUT
4.MODULATOR
5.MUTE CONF
6.SYSTEM
7.1.1 Alarms Menu
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: State, Log or Configuration.
7.1.1.1 Alarms > State Menu
..
No IFsignal
Low Power!
This menu shows the active alarms on the equipment. The list of possible alarms is
shown in the following table:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
49
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
Text alarm
ASI error 1
ASI error 2
MIP error
FPGA comm
No IFsignal
MPEG overfl
MPEG error 1
MPEG error 2
TS error
T2MI error
SFN error
GPS (10MHz)
1pps error
Unlock OscI
Unlock OscO
Pow Ref!
Temperature
Pow LOW!
Curr Trts!
Pow 3dB!
Power failure
HW error
Alarm description
ATX01 ASI error 1
ATX10 ASI error 2
ATX02 MIP error
ATX03 FPGA communication
ATX04 No IF signal
ATX05 MPEG overflow
ATX06 MPEG error 1
ATX11 MPEG error 2
ATX12 TS error
ATX13 T2MI error
ATX14 SFN error
ATX07 10MHz error
ATX08 1pps error
ATX09 FPGA oscillator
ART01 Output oscillator
ART02 Reflected power
ART03 Temperature
ART04 Output power
ART05 Transistors current
ART06 Power 3dB
AHW01 Alimentation fault
AHW02 HW error
Remarks
7.1.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu
LOG
02/04
ARE01
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
This menu shows a log of the alarms on the equipment.
7.1.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Hysteresis, Enable or Log
ON/OFF.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
50
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu
..
ATX01: 001s
ATX02: 001s
ATX03: 001s
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ATX07:
ATX08:
ATX09:
ART01:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
AHW01:
AHW02:
ATX10:
ATX11:
ATX12:
ATX13:
ATX14:
001s
000s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
This menu allows setting the alarms hysteresis (the minimum time that must remain active
- or deactive - an alarm to be considered as valid).
7.1.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu
..
ATX01:
ATX02:
ATX03:
ON
OFF
ON
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ATX07:
ATX08:
ATX09:
ART01:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
AHW01:
AHW02:
ATX10:
ATX11:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ATX12:
ATX13:
ATX14:
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows enabling or disabling alarms.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
51
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
..
ATX01:
ATX02:
ATX03:
ON
OFF
ON
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ATX07:
ATX08:
ATX09:
ART01:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
AHW01:
AHW02:
ATX10:
ATX11:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ATX12:
ATX13:
ATX14:
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows configuring which alarms are to be shown in the log.
7.1.2 Power Menu
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
52
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
Text
Pt
Pt
Pr
IdT1
IdT2
Parameter
Output power in dBm
Output power in W
Reflected output power
LDMOS transistor 1 current of power amplifier
LDMOS transistor 2 current of power amplifier
Vcorr1
Linearity precorrector voltage (VCORR1)
PC1
PC2
Vcag3
RF MUTE
Linearity precorrector voltage (PC1)
Linearity precorrector voltage (PC2)
Automatic Gain Control 3 Voltage
RF Mute
Ref
Reference output power level*
ThrPr
Reflected power threshold
Tem
ThrTem
Amplifier stage temperature
Amplifier stage temperature threshold
Remarks
< 10%Pt [W]
000 to 3F0. Resolution 010.
Only with DPD off.
0 / 1. Only with DPD off.
0 / 1. Only with DPD off.
1.0V to 5.0V
ON / OFF
0dBm to 53dBm.
Resolution
0.1dB
-2dB to -6dB .
Resolution
1dB
Resolution 0.5o C
Resolution 1o C
*Reference output power level
This parameter allows you to modify the internal value of reference level of output power
of the device. These values are adjusted by the manufacturer and shall only be modified
if a change in the output channel is done. Modifying these values is due to the response
curve of the detectors and couplers used which it is not perfectly flat across the UHF
band. In case you do not change the values it is possible to read a not accurate output
power level after a channel change. It is the benchmark used by the transmitter for
measuring output power level. If the output channel is changed without adjusting the
reference output power, the reading must be accurate to ±1dB .
i
i
When the equipment is muted the screen shows in both the first and the second
line, Pt: MUTED!.
The device is factory adjusted at a given output power. This power corresponds
to a certain adjustment of the voltages of linearity precorrector. These voltages
are not constant for different values of output power, or even for different output
channels, although they can be modified using the programmer as will be explained
further ahead. This is the reason why it is recommended not to modify the output
power unless the apropiate measuring equipment (spectrum analyzer), that will
allow to readjust the linearity precorrector’s values, is available. (See chapter 9 of
this manual for further information).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
53
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.3 Output Menu
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
EQ slope:+1
Text
i
Channel
Parameter
Output channel
Offset
Output frequency offset
Fre
Osc
Vtun
EQ slope
Output frequency
Output local oscillator status
Output local oscillator voltage
Equalizer slope
Remarks
14 to 78
-4 to +4. Step in system configuration menu
MHz
lock / unlock
1.5V to 24.0V
-4 to 4
Chapter 9 describes in detail the considerations that must be taken into account
when making any changes at the output channel. Such considerations are related
to both the output power and the adjustment of the linearity precorrection settings.
7.1.4 Modulator Menu
..
INPUT
SYSTEM
T2 FRAME
PLP
PREDISTORT
..
INPUT
SYSTEM
MODULATION
PREDISTORT
The apareance of this menu depends on the modulation type selected:
• For DVB-T2 this menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Input,
System, T2 Frame, PLP or Predistorter.
• For DVB-T this menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Input, System, Modulation or Predistorter.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
54
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.4.1 Modulator > Input Menu (DVB-T2)
..
Type: T2MI
Pid:
0
ASI:
Auto
Hysteres:0s
ASI selec:1
ASI1:
ASI2:
-
Text
Type
Pid
ASI
Hysteres
ASI selec
ASI1
ASI2
Parameter
Input type
Pid
ASI mode
Hysteresis time
ASI input selected
ASI 1 status
ASI 2 status
Remarks
TS / T2MI
32 to 8190
Manual 1 / Manual 2 / Auto / AutoPri1
0 to 3 sec
1/2
- / OK / Er ASI / ErMPEG
- / OK / Er ASI / ErMPEG
7.1.4.2 Modulator > Input Menu (DVB-T)
..
ASI:
Auto
Hysteres:0s
ASI selec:1
Seamless: ASI1:
OK
ASI2:
Text
ASI
Hysteres
ASI selec
Seamless
ASI1
ASI2
Parameter
ASI mode
Hysteresis time
ASI input selected
Seamless status
ASI 1 status
ASI 2 status
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Remarks
Manual 1 / Manual 2 / Auto / AutoPri1
0 to 3 sec
1/2
OK (available) / - (not available)
- / OK / Er ASI / ErMPEG
- / OK / Er ASI / ErMPEG
55
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.4.3 Modulator > system Menu (DVB-T2)
..
Mode:
SFN
Edge 1PPS:
Tof:
0.0
T: 498750.8
L: 498715.2
LD:
0.0u
M: 360600.0
BW:
8MHz
C_id:
0
Netid:
0
T2_id:
0
T2ver:1_1_1
F:706000000
TimeSt:NULL
Vtun:11.9V
Vers: 1.01
Tem:+49.9ºC
Tx_id:
0
Text
Parameter
Mode
Network type
Edge 1PPS
Edge of 1PPS active
Tof
Delay from the MIP
T
L
Time to Tx
Latency
LD
Local delay
M
F
Local delay margin
Bandwith of the OFDM
signal
Identifier of the geographic cell in the
DVB-T/T2 network
Identifier of the DVB-T2
network
Identifier of the system in
the DVB-T2 network
Version of the DVB-T2
norm
Output frecuency
TimeSt
T2MI Timestamp
BW
C_id
NetId
T2_id
T2ver
Vtun
Vers
Tem
Tx_id
Tune voltage of the modulator local oscillator
FPGA
Modulator
firmware version
Modulator Temperature
Transmitter identifier
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Remarks
SFN / MFN /MFN* (MFN* = SFN forced to
MFN. See mutes section 5.2 for details)
↑ / ↓ (Only in SFN)
-(2000.0) to +(2000.0) (Only in
SFN. Resolution 100ns)
(Only in SFN. Resolution 100 ns)
(Only in SFN. Resolution 100 ns)
-(2000.0u) to +(2000.0u)(Only in
SFN. Resolution 100 ns)
Only in SFN. Resolution 100 ns
1.7MHz (DVB-T2 and T2MI), 5MHz
(DVB-T2), 6MHz, 7MHz, 8MHz
0 to 65535
0 to 65535
1_1_1 / 1_2_1
NULL / REL. / ABS. (T2MI, SFN and
DVB-T2 only)
1.5V to 24.0V
0.5o C resolution
0 to 65535. 100 ns resolution
56
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.4.4 Modulator > system Menu (DVB-T)
..
Mode:
SFN
Edge 1PPS:
AutoMIP: ON
Tof:
0.0
MD:75000000
LD:
0.0u
M: 360600.0
BW:
8MHz
Cell_id: ON
C_id:
0
Tx_id:
0
Vtun:11.9V
Vers: 1.00
Tem:+49.9ºC
Text
Parameter
Mode
Network type
Edge 1PPS
Edge of 1PPS active
Tof
Delay from the MIP
MD
Network maximum delay
LD
Local delay
M
Local delay margin
BW
Bandwidth
Cell_ID
Cell ID
C_id
Tx_id
Vtun
Vers
Tem
Identifier of the geographic cell in the DVBT/T2 network
Transmitter identifier
Tune voltage of the modulator local oscillator
FPGA
Modulator
firmware version
Modulator Temperature
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Remarks
SFN / MFN /MFN* (MFN* = SFN forced to
MFN. See mutes section 5.2 for details)
↑ / ↓ (Only in SFN)
-(2000.0) to +(2000.0) (Only in
SFN. Resolution 100ns)
DVB-T and SFN only. 100 ns resolution
-(2000.0u) to +(2000.0u)(Only in
SFN. Resolution 100 ns)
Only in SFN. Resolution 100 ns
6MHz / 7MHz / 8MHz (Readonly in AutoMIP ON)
OFF / ON (When is ON the value can
be 0 to 65535)
0 to 65535. 100 ns resolution
1.5V to 24.0V
0.5o C resolution
57
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.4.5 Modulator > T2 Frame Menu (DVB-T2)
..
L1mod:64QAM
Preamb:SISO
MISO Gr.U:1
MISO Gr.M:ExtCarr: ON
FFT:
32K
Inte: 1/128
Papr:
Pilot Pat:7
T2 Fram: 2
Symb:
39
D: 54589.4
This subsection defines the core modulation parameters, common for all the input PLPs:
Text
FFT
Parameter
L1 signaling modulation
SISO/MISO format
MISO group (User configurable)
MISO group (applied)
Extended mode or Extended Carriers
FFT size
Inte
Guard interval
Papr
PAPR reduction (options
change according to the
DVB-T2 version)
- / ACE / TR / ACE-TR
(v1_1_1)
TR-P2 / ACE / TR / ACE-TR (v1_2_1)
Pilot Pat
Pilot carriers pattern
PP1 / PP2 / PP3 / PP4 /PP5 /PP6 /
PP7 / PP8
L1mod
Preamb
MISO Gr.U
MISO Gr.M
ExtCarr
T2 Fram
Symb
D
Number of T2 frames
per superframe
Number of data symbols
per T2 frame
T2 Super Frame duration
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Remarks
BPSK / QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM
SISO / MISO
1 / 2
1 / 2 / OFF / ON
1K / 2K / 4K / 8K /16K /32K
1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 1/4, 1/128,
19/128, 19/1256
2 to 255
0 to 4095
Resolution 100 ns
58
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.4.6 Modulator > PLP Menu (DVB-T2)
..
Index: 1/8
Id:
1
Type:Data 1
Mode:
HEM
GroupID: 1
Cons:256QAM
Rot.Con: ON
FEC typ:64K
C.rate: 5/6
N.blo: 134
TI Typ:
0
TI Leng: 2
IB Sing: 0
This subsection defines the core modulation parameters, common for all the input PLPs:
Text
Index
Id
Type
Parameter
Selects the PLP whose data we want
to display at the rest of parameters
and shows the number of PLPs of the
DVB-T2 modulated signal
PLP identifier (unique PLP identifier in
the DVB-T2 system)
PLP type (Common, Data PLP Type1,
Data PLP Type2)
Remarks
0 to 255
Common / Data 1 / Data 2
Mode
PLP mode
HEM (High efficiency mode)
/ NM (Normal mode)
GroupID
Group of PLPs where the PLP is included
0 to 255
Cons
Constellation used
Rot.Con
FEC typ
Rotation of the constellation
FEC used for coding
C.rate
Code rate used
N.blo
TI TYPE
TI LENGTH
Number of FEC blocks in a TI stream
Type of time interleave used
Lenght of the time interleave used
Indicator of additional signaling information in the PLP A and/or B (A -, A
B, - B, - -)
IB sign
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
256QAM / 64QAM /
16QAM / QPSK / BPSK
ON / OFF
64K / 16K
1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4,
4/5, 5/6
0 to 65535
0 to 255
59
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.4.7 Modulator > Modulation Menu (DVB-T)
..
Mode:
SFN
Edge 1PPS:
AutoMIP: ON
Tof:
0.0
MD:75000000
LD:
0.0u
M: 360600.0
BW:
8MHz
Cell_id: ON
C_id:
0
Tx_id:
0
Vtun:11.9V
Vers: 1.00
Tem:+49.9ºC
Text
Parameter
Cons
Constellation
FEC
Coding rate
Interv
Guard Interval
FFT
FFT
Remarks
QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM (Readonly in
AutoMIP ON)
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 (Readonly
in AutoMIP ON)
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32 (Readonly in
AutoMIP ON)
2K / 8K (Readonly in AutoMIP ON)
7.1.4.8 Menu Modulator > Predistorter
..
Predist:OFF
u0 Amp:0.44
alfa A:0.56
u0 Ph: 0.00
alfph: 00.0
This subsection allows to set the digital predistorsion parameters:
Text
Predist
u0 Amp
alfa A
u0 Ph
alfPh
Parameter
Digital Predistorter activation
u0 amplitude
Alpha Amplitude
u0 phase
Alpha phase
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Remarks
ON(Digital predis.)/ OFF(Analog predis.)
0.00 to 0.50 (0.01 resolution)
0.00 to 0.99 (0.01 resolution)
0.00 to 0.50 (0.01 resolution)
-45.0 to +45.0 (0.5 resolution)
60
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.5 Mutes Menu
..
GPS:
OFF
No MIP: ON
ASI:
ON
MPEG ov: ON
MPEG er: ON
SFN err:OFF
Text
GPS
Parameter
GPS mute
Temp
GPS mute temporisation
No MIP
ASI
MPEG ov
MPEG er
SFN err
No MIP mute
ASI mute
MPEG overflow mute
MPEG error mute
SFN error mute
..
GPS:
ON
Temp:
5m
No MIP: ON
ASI:
ON
MPEG ov: ON
MPEG er: ON
SFN err:OFF
Remarks
ON / OFF
0m to 1999m [Minutes] (only with
mute GPS)
ON / OFF. Only in DVB-T mode.
ON / OFF
ON / OFF. Only in DVB-T mode.
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
7.1.6 System Menu
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Configuration, Language,
Version or Serial number.
7.1.6.1 System > Configuration Menu
..
T2:00000000
Type:DVB-T2
CTRLadd:001
10MHz: ext
Offset: 166
Power:
1W
01:19:19
00/00/0000
1.2V:1.256V
5V: 4.963V
27V: 27.37V
Vnt:000001h
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
61
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
Text
Type
CTRLadd
10MHz
Parameter
Activation code of DVB-T2 software option
Modulator type
Control address*
10MHz Input (local or external)
Offset
Frequency offset step
Power
00:00:00
00/00/00000
1.2V
5V
27V
Unit type
Internal time
Internal date
1.2V voltage
5V voltage
27V voltage
Vnt
Fan(s) lifetime counter (h)
T2
Remarks
Only visible if the DVB-T2 software option is not active
DVB-T or DVB-T2
0 to 254
Local/ ext
166/ 143 / 125 (166 = 1/6MHz;
143 = 1/7MHz; 125 = 1/8MHz)
1W, 5W or 10W
hh:mm:ss
dd/mm/YYYY
RESET for reset the lifetime
counter
*Control address
This is a local parameter that allows you to change the control address of the module
used by the Management module. This address can be between 0 and 254.
7.1.6.2 System > Language Menu
Language
selection
--------English
This menu allows you to select the menu language for the external programmer. The
available languages are Spanish (Español) , English (English) or French (Français).
7.1.6.3 System > Version Menu
..
Transmitter
DVBT/T2 1W
Vers: 1.01
Des: 00001
Boot: 1.03
Text
Vers
Des
Boot
Parameter
Microcontroller version
Microcontroller developement version
Bootloader version
7.1.6.4 System > Serial number Menu
..
Serial Num
050712452001
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
62
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Menu structure
This menu shows the internal serial number of the equipment.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
63
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Putting into operation
7.2 Putting into operation
Sample application
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment.
• Connect the External programmer to the RJ45 connector at the front pannel of
the device.
• Check the type of the modulator (DVB-T or DVB-T2) (parameter Type).
..
Type:DVB-T2
CTRLadd:001
10MHz: ext
Offset: 166
Power:
1W
01:19:19
00/00/0000
1.2V:1.256V
5V: 4.963V
27V: 27.37V
Vnt:000001h
• Set the modulation parameters (submenu Modulator).
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.POWER
3.OUTPUT
4.MODULATOR
5.MUTE CONF
6.SYSTEM
i
– For a more detailed description of the DVB-T /T2 modulation parameters,
please refer to previous chapters of this manual.
• Check the selected input (parameter ASI selec and parameters ASI1 and/or ASI2).
..
Type: T2MI
Pid:
0
ASI:
Auto
Hysteres:0s
ASI selec:1
ASI1:
ASI2:
-
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
..
ASI:
Auto
Hysteres:0s
ASI selec:1
Seamless: ASI1:
OK
ASI2:
-
64
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Local control
Putting into operation
• Set the output frequency (parameters Channel and Offset).
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
EQ slope:+1
• Check the output power (parameter Pt).
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
• Check that no alarms in menu Alarms > Status.
..
There is
no alarm
• Check that frontal LED status keeps green.
• Connect the measurement instrument to the RF MONITOR connector at the front
pannel to check signal quality.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
65
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Troubleshooting
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED and alarm status
code
Alarm
Status
LED
Orange
Orange
Orange
ATX01
ATX02
ATX03
ATX04
ASI error 1
MIP error
FPGA communication
No IF signal
ATX05
ATX06
ATX07
ATX08
ATX09
ART01
ART02
MPEG overflow
MPEG error 1
10MHz error
1pps error
FPGA oscillator
Output oscillator
Reflected power
ART03
Temperature
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
blinking
Orange
ART04
Output power
Red
ART05
ART06
Transistors current
Power 3dB
Orange
Orange
Orange
AHW01 Alimentation fault
Orange
AHW02
ATX10
ATX11
ATX12
HW error
ASI error 2
MPEG error 2
TS error
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
ATX13
ATX14
T2MI error
SFN error
Orange
Orange
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Description
Check ASI 1 input signal cabling
No MIP detected in ASI input signal
The Transmitter is damaged
Check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2)
A high data rate in ASI input flux
Check ASI 1 input signal cabling
Check 10MHz cabling and GPS output
Check 1PPS cabling and GPS output
The Transmitter is damaged
The Transmitter is damaged
Check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2)
Overtemperature at amplifier or modulator stage
Check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2)
The Transmitter is damaged
In case of power reflected alarm is set,
check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2). If not, the Transmitter is damaged
Temperature alarm in a Power Supply
Unit is set or the Transmitter is damaged
The Transmitter is damaged
Check ASI 2 input signal cabling
Check ASI 2 input signal cabling
Problems on the Transport Stream at
the input
Problems on the T2MI input stream
Problems on the SFN configuration
66
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
RF service failure
The Status LED of
Transmitter and Power
Supply Unit are ON?
YES
Go to "No output power"
flowchart.
NO
Check the Power Supply
Unit troubleshooting.
NO
Remove the TX from the subrack.
The Status LED of
Power Supply Unit is
ON?
YES
The Transmitter is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
67
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
No output power. Output power
alarm is set. Status LED: Red
Alimentation fault or
HW error alarm is set?
YES
The Transmitter is damaged
NO
No IF signal alarm is
set?
NO
The Transmitter is damaged
YES
Any ASI error or MPEG
error alarm is set?
YES
Check ASI input signal cabling
NO
FPGA oscillator
or
FPGA communication
alarm is set?
YES
The Transmitter is damaged
NO
MIP error alarm is set?
or TS error alarm is
set?
or T2MI error
alarm is set?
YES
Check ASI input coding
NO
The Transmitter is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
68
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
Reflected power alarm is set.
Status LED: Orange blinking
Unplug the antenna cable and
connect a load to the output power
of the module.
Reflected power alarm
is still set?
NO
Check the antenna and
its cabling.
YES
The Transmitter is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
69
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Changing the output channel
9 Changing the output channel
Every time the output channel is changed, it may be necessary to readjust its output
power, the reference value used to show the output power readings and the linearity
precorrector values.
This is because the response curve of the detectors and couplers used to measure the
output power is not perfectly flat over the whole UHF band, and also because the linearity
of the output stage LDMOS transistors is not constant with the frequency.
Generally, if the frequency variation is small (less than 24 MHz or three UHF channels)
there will be no need for any readjustment whatsoever.
In any case the procedure must be as follows:
1. Connect the external programmer to the device and go to the OUTPUT menu:
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
2. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Channel in the external programmer screen,
enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the
△ ▽ keys until reaches the desired output channel.
3. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Offset in the external programmer screen,
enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the
△ ▽ keys until reaches the desired output frequency.
4. Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds.
5. Connect a spectrum analyzer or power meter to the device output and measure the
actual transmitted power.
The output power reading seen in the external programmer control will be the same
as before the channel was changed, but current transmitted power may have shifted
even more than 1dB if the channel change has involved a significant frequency leap.
6. Readjust the device output power to the desired value by measuring it in the spectrum analyzer or power meter. Go to the menu POWER:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
70
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Changing the output channel
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
7. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Pt in the external programmer screen, enter
in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the △ ▽
keys until reaches the desired output power.
8. Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds.
9. Readjust the reference output power to the desired value. In the menu POWER:
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
i
Ref parameter shows --.-dBm instead of last recorded value
10. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Ref, enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the △ ▽ keys until it matches the value
read in the spectrum analyzer or the power meter (this means that if the spectrum
analyzer reads 31 dBm, the reference value must be readjusted until the external
programer shows 31.0 dBm).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
71
R&SMLx Transmitter DVB-T2
Changing the output channel
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:31.0dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
11. Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds. Once the change
has taken place, the device’s output power level measurement (shown in the output
power menu) will be updated.
12. Verify that the shoulder attenuation is over 38 dB.
13. If this isn’t, by selecting the central frequency in the spectrum analyzer as the output frequency of the device and configuring a span that largelly allows observing
the 8M Hz signal bandwidth (for example 20M Hz ), adjust the Digital Predistorter
(DPD) (see 5.5 for more details) so the shoulders attenuation reaches the best
possible value (always higher than 38dB ).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
72
R&S R MLx
Gap Filler
Instrument Manual
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
The Instrument Manual describes the following R&S R MLx Gap Filler models and options:
• MLx-B211 MLx GapFiller 1W Std. EC
• MLX-B215 MLx GapFiller 5W Std. EC
• MLX-B219 MLx GapFiller 10W Std. EC
• MLX-B221 MLx GapFiller 1W Enh. EC
• MLX-B225 MLx GapFiller 5W Enh. EC
• MLX-B229 MLx GapFiller 10W Enh. EC
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&SMLx.
R&SMLx Gap Filler
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Overview
2
2 Putting into operation
3
3 Technical specifications
4
4 Physical description
4.1 Gap Filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
5 Functional description
5.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 Enhanced Echo Canceller (Enh. EC) configuration
5.2 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
7 Local control
7.1 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.1 Alarms > State Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu .
7.1.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu . . .
7.1.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
7.1.2 Power Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Input Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5 Echo Canceller Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6 System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6.1 System > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . .
7.1.6.2 System > Language Menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6.3 System > Version Menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6.4 System > Serial number Menu . . . . . . . .
7.2 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
22
25
28
31
32
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
32
33
33
34
34
34
34
35
36
37
38
38
40
40
40
41
41
42
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED and alarm status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
9 Changing the output channel
48
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
45
46
1
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Overview
1 Overview
MLx Gap Filler can operate in single frequency networks (SFN), in which case the input
and output channel are the same, or multiple frequency networks (MFN) with different
input and output channels.
MLx Gap Filler uses broadband technology, which allows the frequency to be changed
over the entire UHF band.
MLx Gap Filler can incorporate an echo canceller for easy installation in single frequency
networks. There are two hardware options:
• Standard Echo Canceller (Std. EC).
• Enhanced Echo Canceller (Enh. EC).
The nominal output powers of the equipment are 1W, 5W and 10W.
The input to each MLx Gap filler can optionally come from a RF Splitter that can distribute
the signal from the receiving antenna, slightly amplifying it before entering the equipment.
The output of each MLx Gap filler needs to be connected to the input of a Filter Combiner to allow multiple channels to be transmitted by the same transmitting antenna.
The internal control system of the device enables both internal configuration and measures. MLx Gap Filler can be managed locally or remotely by the Management Module.
The equipment can also be managed locally by connecting an External Programmer.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
2
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Putting into operation
2 Putting into operation
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment. For a further measurement examples and background information, please
refer to next chapters.
• Log on to the Management Module via web browser (see System Manual for more
detailed information).
• Go to Configuration > Modules menu and select the module.
• Set the input frequency (parameters Input channel/offset).
• Set the output frequency (parameters Output channel/offset).
• Check the echo canceller configuration. In case of Std. EC option installed, no
configuration is needed. In case of Enh. EC option, the configuration depends on
the echo scenario.
i
With Enh. EC option, in case of using a DVB-T2 signal with extended carriers, the
parameter Extended BW must be enable. In case of input signals without extended
bandwidths this parameter must be disabled.
• Check the output power (parameter Output power).
• Check that there are no alarms.
• Check that frontal STATUS LED keeps green.
• Connect the measurement instrument to the RF MONITOR connector at the front
pannel to check signal quality.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
3
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Technical specifications
3 Technical specifications
RF input:
Frequency range:
Input signal range:
Noise figure:
Return losses:
Frequency image rejection:
Adjacent channel rejection:
Impedance:
Connector:
1 UHF 8MHz channel
-70 dBm to -20 dBm
≤ 8 dB
≥ 15 dB
≥ 65 dB
≥ 80 dB
50 Ω
BNC female
RF output:
Frequency range:
Nominal Output Power:
Maximum Output Power:
Distance to shoulder:
Power Stability:
Return loss:
Spurious emissions outside the channel:
Impedance:
Connector:
1 UHF 8MHz channel
1W, 5W or 10W as version
1.25W, 7W or 14W as version
> 38 dB
≤ ± 0.5dB
> 20dB
< -60dBc
50 Ω
BNC female (1W, 5W); N female (10W)
RF monitoring output:
Coupling:
Impedance:
Connector:
27 ± 3 dB (1W) ; 38 ± 3 dB (5W, 10W)
50 Ω
BNC female
Local oscillators:
Phase noise:
Frequency steps:
Frequency stability with temperature (10o C to + 60o C):
Frequency stability for a year:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
≥ 95 dBc/Hz @1KHz
± 1/6 MHz, ± 1/8 MHz
± 1 ×10−6
±1 × 10−6
4
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Technical specifications
10MHz external reference input:
Frequency:
Input level range:
Connector:
10 MHz
-20 dBm to +10 dBm
BNC female
Power supply:
DC Input voltage:
DC Input voltage connector*:
i
27 ±0.3VDC
DIN41612 30 pins male
*Not only power supply voltage but also control. 30 pins functions are detailed in
physical description.
DC Power Consumption:
1W module:
5W module:
10W module:
i
23W
65W
85W
DC power consumption is specified at the maximum transmitted output power for
every power range (1.25 W for 1W modules, 7W for 5W modules and 14W for
10W modules).
Temperature and cooling:
Operating temperature:
Relative humidity:
Fans :
Fans type:
0 to 45o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
1 (1W) / 2 (5W, 10W)
KDE0504PFV1.11.MS.A.GN SUNON
Dimensions:
Module dimensions (WxHxD):
50x215x250 mm
Weight:
1W module:
5W module:
10W module:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
1,5 Kg
2 Kg
2 Kg
5
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Technical specifications
Echo Cancellation Options:
Standard Echo Cancellation (Std. EC)
Temporal cancellation:
Delay (Gap Filler + EC):
Maximum coupling :
Output power adaptive regulation:
One window from 0 µ s to 8.1 µ s
4.6 µ s
Margin = -10 dB (echo 10 dB higher than
input signal)
Yes
Enhanced Echo Cancellation (Enh. EC)
Temporal cancellation:
Three mobile windows of 6 µ s each from
0.5 µ s to 37.6 µ s
Delay (Gap Filler + EC):
7.8µs
Maximum coupling :
Margin = -24 dB (echo 24 dB higher than
input signal)
Doppler cancellation:
Yes
Remote control and monitoring:
Connecting the system to the remote control and monitoring module (Management)
allows remote communication to the control centre. This communication can be made
using different interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, mobile communications, relays).
Local and remote parameters:
Settings
• Unit type.
• Input channel.
• Input frequency offset.
• Output channel.
• Output frequency offset.
• Offset step.
• Output power.
• Echo Canceller activation (ON/OFF).
• Slope correction.
• Enh.EC window 1 activation (ON/OFF).
• Enh.EC window 3 activation (ON/OFF).
• Speed of the Enh.EC windows 1, 2 and 3.
• Start of the Enh.EC windows 1, 2 and 3.
• Enh.EC extended bandwitdth activation (ON/OFF).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
6
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Technical specifications
• Std. EC output power adaptive regulation (ON/OFF).
• Precorrector voltage (VCORR1, PC1, PC2).
• Control address.
• Input power level reference.
• Output power level reference.
• Reflected power threshold.
• Amplifier stage temperature threshold.
• Echo Canceller board temperature threshold.
• RF mute.
• Date and hour.
• Reset of fan(s) lifetime.
• Language.
Measurements
• Output power (dBm and Watts).
• Reflected power (Watts).
• LDMOS transistor 1 current (A).
• LDMOS transistor 2 current (A).
• Input oscillator status.
• Output oscillator status.
• Input oscillator tuning voltage (V).
• Output oscillator tuning voltage (V).
• AGC 1 voltage (V).
• AGC 2 voltage (V).
• AGC 3 voltage (V).
• Input signal level (dBm).
• 1.2V (1V in DEEC) line voltage (V).
• 5V line voltage (V).
• 27V line voltage (V).
• Local or external 10MHz reference.
• Amplifier stage temperature (o C).
• Echo Canceller board temperature (o C).
• Std.EC Echo gain margin.
• Std.EC output power adaptive attenuation (dB).
• Fan(s) lifetime (h).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
7
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Technical specifications
Alarms:
• ARE01 - Input level.
• ART01 - Output oscillator.
• ARE02 - Input oscillator.
• ART02 - Reflected power.
• ART03 - Temperature.
• ART04 - Output power.
• ART05 - Transistors current.
• ART06 - Power 3dB.
• AHW01 - Alimentation fault.
• AHW02 - HW error.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
8
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Physical description
4 Physical description
4.1 Gap Filler
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
Figure 4.1: Gap Filler.
Figure 4.2 details frontal connectors module. Figure 4.3 details rear connectors module.
LED
LED status
Off
Green
Orange
Orange blinking
Red
Description
No power supply
No active alarms
Warning alarm
Reflected power alarm
Output power alarm
Table 4.1: Description of LED status.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
9
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Physical description
Gap Filler
RF input (BNC female)
Status LED
External programmer
connector (RJ45)
RF monitoring test (BNC female)
RF output
(BNC female 1W/5W)
(N female 10W)
GAP FILLER
1W Enh. EC
Figure 4.2: Description of frontal panel.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
10
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Physical description
Gap Filler
10 Mhz
Made in Spain
MLX-B211
NRP-Z11
2501.0201.11
Ser.108580
1146.8001.02
Rohde & Schwarz
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
10
+27V
CTRL_A
RESET
CTRL_B
Tª ALARM
0V
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
1
Figure 4.3: Description of rear panel.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
11
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
5 Functional description
Internal composition of MLx Gap filler is outlined in the block diagram of Figure 5.1.
Std. EC or Enh.EC
Figure 5.1: Simplified block diagram of MLx Gap filler.
The main stages at MLx Gap filler are:
Power supply
All necessary internal voltages to operate the equipment are generated through DC/DC
converters in the power supply stage from the 27VDC input voltage.
The internal voltages are 1.2VDC (1VDC in case of Enh. EC board), 5VDC , 9VDC and
27VDC . All of them are monitoring by the microcontroller.
Those voltages can be reset from an external pin.
Downconverter
The signal from the receiving antenna enters the module and then passes through a
tracking filter. The tracking filter frequency shift is governed by pre-recorded voltages
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
12
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
provided by the internal control system, so you do not need any adjustment for a frequency change. In the output stages of the tracking filter a variable gain amplifier is
used. This is controlled by the first automatic gain control circuit (abbrebiated as AGC1
throughout this manual).
Then the signal is converted to intermediate frequency in a mixer with a local oscillator. In
case MLx Gap filler works on a single frequency network (SFN) configuration (same input
and output channel), the oscillator input is disabled through a microcontroller port. Thus,
IF conversion in the downconverter and the subsequent conversion to the output channel
in the upconverter are conducted with the same oscillator, so that there is no deviation in
frequency between input and output of the gap filler. In addition, there is a phase noise
cancellation between the two conversions, so the gap filler is transparent regarding this
parameter.
IF
The signal at the output of the mixer is detected and the generated voltage is used to
generate the tension of the first automatic gain control (AGC1) circuit. This prevents the
signal at the mixer input from exceeding a certain fixed level.
The first surface wave filter (SAW) of the module is located at the mixer output. It is
responsible for both the spectrum shape and the suppression of all the products of the
mixture.
Then there is a variable PIN diode attenuator, which is controlled by the second voltage
of the automatic gain control circuit (abbrebiated as AGC2 throughout this manual). It
sets the IF signal level to be introduced later on in the echo canceller circuit and the
predistortion circuit (correcting linearity).
The signal is then amplified and directed to the switching circuits using PIN diodes that
allow the signal passage through the Echo Canceller Board (Standard Echo Canceller
(Std. EC) or Enhanced Echo Canceller (Enh. EC)). A sample of the output signal is
amplified and detected to generate the AGC2 tension.
After passing through the echo canceller, the signal passes through a second SAW filter.
Then the signal is amplified before entering to a predistortion circuit or linearity corrector.
This circuit is governed by the tensions VCORR1, PC1 and PC2, all generated from the
microcontroller and accessible by the user (see chapter 7).
The predistortion circuit output signal is attenuated and filtered to adapt its level to the
upconverter mixer, responsible for converting the IF signal to the desired output channel.
Echo Canceller board
There are two hardware options for the echo canceller:
Standard Echo Canceller (Std. EC)
The echo canceller allows installation of the gap filler in SFN networks with limited isolation between the receiving and transmitting antennas. In particular, it makes possible
installation in locations where the isolation between antennas is up to 10 dB below the
gain of the gap filler. In addition to canceling the echo produced by the coupling between
the transmitting and receiving antenna, the Std. EC is able to cancel any echo of the
input signal whose delay with the main beam is between 0 and 8.1µs. Thus, the echo
canceller circuit allows to correct the gap filler input signal amplitude distortions when
they are caused by multipath propagation, in the case of rays that are within the cancellation window.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
13
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
The standard echo canceller is provided with an optional feature of adaptive regulation
of the output power according to the feedback echo gain margin level. For high levels
of feedback echo (gain margin > 11dB) the device reduces the output power in order to
keep an stable feedback echo level of 11dB. Maximun attenuation of the output power is
limited by the minimun level of the output regulation of the device.
Enhanced Echo Canceller (Enh. EC)
Enh. EC bases its operation on the use of a LMS adaptive filter that makes it capable of
modeling the transmission channel, identify possible feedback echoes and echoes from
the SFN network, and totally or partially eliminate them at the output.
Using the LMS algorithm, the Enh. EC has a filter that models the channel between the
transmitting and receiving antenna, ie. it determines the position and amplitude of the
echoes existing in a given scenario. This filter is calculated by successive estimations
using correlation methods between input signal and a reference signal. The reference
signal used to determine the filter may be external or internal, as shown in figure 5.2.
Figure 5.2: Details of the channel estimation algorithm. (1) External reference. (2) Internal
reference.
Using the external reference, higher levels of cancellation can be achieved, as it provides
extra information from the channel than the internal reference: it provides the amplitude
and phase distortion introduced by the power amplifier output signal .
This iterative algorithm converges to a solution at the output where the feedback echo
and the echoes from the SFN are totally or partially eliminated.
The adaptive filter that models the transmission channel covers a certain time range
so that the echoes whose delay with respect to the main received signal is within its
boundaries will be detected and canceled. This interval is commonly called cancellation
window.
Specifically, the Enh. EC has three (3) adaptive filters that make three independent
cancellation windows. Each of these windows is approximately 6µs which together
provide a cancellation window of 18µs.
Unlike the echoes from the SFN network, the feedback echo can have a very high level
at the input signal. To achieve a more efficient suppression of this feedback echo, its
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
14
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Main signal
Cancellation
echoes
Not
cancelled
echoes
Temporal delay
Cancellation
window
Figure 5.3: Cancellation window.
corresponding cancellation window uses the external reference. This cancellation window should always be active because, with high levels of power and feedback, the signal
emitted by the equipment could damage the receiving equipment. Therefore, depending
on the scenario, the Enh. EC can work with 1, 2 or 3 cancellation windows enabled.
Each of these windows can be shifted independently to capture the main echoes within
the boundaries of any of the windows. Since the echoes at the input of the equipment
may have a frequency or amplitude shift, the Enh. EC allows to act on the the behavior of each of these three cancellation windows so that they are faster or more slow in
modelling the changeable channel. This feature makes them able to remove echoes with
frequency shift DOPPLER, RICE channels, etc.
Upconverter
The IF signal is converted to the output channel with a mixer by a local oscillator.
Once the signal is converted to the output frequency, it passes through an UHF tracking
filter similar to the input stage. The tensions controlling this filter are obtained during the
equipment adjustment process at the factory, and stored in an E2PROM memory.
Input amplifier
The Signal Processing Board output signal enters the Amplifier Board and is amplified
through the monolithic amplifier. After it there is a PIN diode stage controlled by the automatic gain control circuit (abbrebiated as AGC3 throughout this manual). The function
of this variable attenuation stage is to compensate the power stage response curve in
terms of frequency and gain variation with temperature, and to regulate the attenuation
according to the selected output power.
The control voltage of the AGC3 is obtained from the detection of a sample of the output
power through a directional coupler and a detector.
After the AGC3 circuit, there are two stages of amplification performed with monolithic
amplifiers.
Below there is an amplification stage based on the use of bipolar transistors.
All the input amplifier stages are polarized in class-A and very linear, so they do not
introduce any intermodulation effect to the output amplifier.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
15
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Output amplifier
The output amplifier is made by two LDMOS transistors polarized in class-AB and addedup by 3dB and 90◦ hybrid couplers. The transistors used are different depending on the
nominal output power. The polarization circuit of gate voltages are in the control circuit.
After the output amplifier, a directional coupler is placed with two purposes: detect the
signal to measure the transmitted power and get the AGC3 voltage; and detect the proportional signal to the reflected power to generate the corresponding alarm.
This is followed by another directional coupler which obtains the output test signal at the
front of the module.
Fans
1W device incorporates one fan at the bottom of the module, and two fans in the case
of a 5W and 10W devices. These fans start upon two conditions: when the temperature
at amplifier stage reaches 51o C, stopping when the temperature drops below 46◦ C, or
when the temperature at the Echo Canceller board reaches 53o C, stopping when the
temperature drops below 49◦ C.
Control
The control module is based on the microcontroller circuit which performs the controlling functions necessary for the Signal Processing board, Amplifier board and Modulator
board. Among others functions, it generates a series of voltages to control the D/A and
A/D converters.
These voltages are generated through a D/A converter whose output is multiplexed into
a serie of operational amplifier circuits sample and hold. Some of the voltages are accessible by the user.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
16
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Settings
5.1 Settings
The equipment has a number of adjustable parameters detailed below and summarized
in Table 5.4. These parameters are accessible both locally and remotely.
Unit Type
It determines the type of power amplifier board that it is used for internal adjustment. This
parameter is set in factory and cannot be set by the user.
Possible types:
• 1W.
• 5W.
• 10W.
Input channel and frequency offset
Equipment central input frequency can be set by programming the channel and the offset. The offset step can be configured.
Output channel and frequency offset
Equipment central output frequency can be set by programming the channel and the offset. The offset step can be configured.
i
Chapter 9 describes in detail the considerations that must be taken into account
when making any changes in the output channel. Such considerations are related to
both the output power and the adjustment of the linnearity precorrection settings.
Offset step
This parameter allows you to configure the offset resolution in order to set the input or
output frecuency. There are two possible steps: 1/6M Hz or 1/8M Hz .
Output power
Equipment allows to regulate the output level >10dB maintaining the quality parameters
outlined in the specifications. The 1W device is adjustable to ranges from 21dBm to
31dBm, the 5W device is adjustable to ranges from 28.5dBm to 38.5dBm and the 10W
device is adjustable to ranges from 31.5dBm to 41.5dBm. If the output power is varied
outside these margins, the quality parameters ot the gap filler output signal (distance to
shoulder, MER ,...) may not correspond to its technical features.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
17
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Settings
i
The device is factory adjusted at a given output power. This power corresponds to a
certain adjustment of the voltages of the channel processor linnearity precorrector.
These voltages are not constant for different values of output power, or even for
different output channels, although they can be modified using the programmer as
it will be explained further ahead. This is the reason why it is recommended not
to modify the output power unless the apropiate measuring equipment (spectrum
analyzer), that will allow to readjust the linearity precorrector’s values, is available.
(See chapter 9 of this manual for further information)
Linearity precorrector voltages (VCORR1, PC1 and PC2)
It is used for varying the voltage that controls the predistortion (linearity correction) at the
IF stage of the DVB-T modulator module.
These are values adjusted by the manufacturer and should not be changed unless the
output channel or the output power are varied, in which case they shall be amended so
that the distance to the shoulders of the new channel are more than 38 dB. To make this
adjustment it is necessary to use a spectrum analyzer.
VCORR1 is an hexadecimal index whose value can vary from 000 to 3FF. Possible values
of the parameters PC1 and PC2 are 0 or 1.
Echo canceller activation
The echo canceller activation parameter lets you enable or disable the switching signal
and the supply of the echo canceller board.
i
In case of Enh. EC this parameter is set to ON in factory and it is not able to set
to OFF by user.
Slope correction
The slope corrector parameter allows to adjust the flatness of the channel in a range of
±3dB . Positive values indicate that the slope response curve of the transposer is such
that the upper side (higher frequency) of the channel is attenuated with respect to the
bottom, while negative values indicate that the amplitude of the bottom is smaller.
i
In case of Std. EC the variation of the slope has no effect, because the own
canceller adequates the response curve.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
18
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Settings
Enh.EC window 1 / window 3 activation
Allows you to enable or disable the window 1 / window 3 of the Enhanced Echo Canceller.
See section 5.1.1 for a detailed description.
Speed of the Enh.EC windows 1, 2 and 3
Allows you to set the speed of the windows 1, 2 and 3 of the Enhanced Echo Canceller.
See section 5.1.1 for a detailed description.
Start of the Enh.EC windows 1, 2 and 3
Allows you to set the start point of the windows 1, 2 and 3 of the Enhanced Echo Canceller. See section 5.1.1 for a detailed description.
Enh.EC extended bandwitdth activation
Allows you to enable or disable the extended bandwidth correction of the Enhanced Echo
Canceller. See section 5.1.1 for a detailed description.
i
In case of using DVB-T2 signals with extended bandwidth this parameter must be
enable. In case of using DVB-T2 signals withot extended bandwidth or DVB-T
signals this parameter must be disable.
Std. EC output power adaptive regulation
Allows you to enable or disable the output power adaptive regulation feature of the Standard Echo Canceller.
Control address
This is a local parameter that allows you to change the telecontrol address of the module used by the Management module. See chapter 7 for more information about this
parameter.
Reference input and output power level
These are local parameters that allows you to modify the internal value of reference level
of input and output power of the device. See chapter 7 for more information about These
parameters.
Reflected power threshold
Reflected power threshold is used to activate the reflected power alarm. The threshold is
defined as the number of dB below the transmitted power to be achieved by the reflected
power to set the alarm. If the threshold is -4dB, which means that the alarm is activated
when the reflected power reaches a value equal to the transmitted power-4dB (ie, 26dBm
for a transmitted power of 30dBm).
The equipment operation according to this threshold and the reflected power measured
at the power stage is summarized in Table 5.1. The equipment returns to its normal
operation when it is below the threshold rediscovered.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
19
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Settings
Reflected power
< Threshold
> Threshold
Unit Type
1W / 5W / 10W
1W / 5W
> Threshold
10W
Operation
normal
reduction between 3-4dB on output power
and alarm Reflected power
reduction between 5-6dB on output power
and alarm Reflected power
Table 5.1: Behavior-based on reflected power.
Amplifier temperature threshold
It is an adjustable threshold of temperature at the power amplifier stage. The default
threshold value is established at 65o C. Equipment operates according to this threshold value and the temperature measurement. The behaviour is summarized in Table
5.2. Equipment returns to its normal operation mode when temperature drops below the
threshold value.
Temperature
< Threshold
> Threshold
Unit type
1W / 5W / 10W
1W / 5W / 10W
Operation
normal
alarm Temperature
Table 5.2: Behavior-based on amplifier stage temperature.
Echo Canceller temperature threshold
It is a non adjustable threshold of temperature at the Echo Canceller board. The default
threshold value is established at 70o C for Standard EC and 75o C for Enhanced EC. The
equipment operates according to this threshold value and the temperature measurement.
The behaviour is summarized in Table 5.3. The equipment returns to its normal operation
mode when temperature drops below the threshold value.
Temperature
Unit type
Operation
< Threshold
> Threshold
1W / 5W / 10W
1W / 5W / 10W
normal
alarm Temperature
Table 5.3: Behavior-based on Echo Canceller temperature.
Mute RF
This parameter allows to manually mute the RF output of the device.
i
Input signal is not able to monitor when mute RF is activated.
Date and hour
Those parameters are only configured by Management module.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
20
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Settings
Reset of fan(s) lifetime.
This parameter is used to reset the lifetime counter of fan(s). This reset must be done
after replacing a failed fan with a new one.
i
While in 5W / 10W devices two fans are supplied but in 1W devices only one fan
is supplied.
Language
Selects the menu language of external programmer. Selectable languages are English,
Spanish or French.
Parameter
Range
Unit Type
Input Channel
Input offset frequency
Output Channel
Output offset frequency
Offset step
Echo canceller activation
Slope corrector
Enh.EC window 1 activation
Enh.EC window 3 activation
Enh.EC window 1 start
Enh.EC window 2 start
Enh.EC window 3 start
Enh.EC window 1 speed
Enh.EC window 2 speed
Enh.EC window 3 speed
Enh.EC extended bandwitdth activation
Std. EC output power adaptive regulation
Output Power
Linearity correction voltage (VCORR1)
Linearity correction voltage (PC1 and PC2)
Control address
Input level Reference
Output level Reference
Reflected power threshold
Amplifier Ta threshold
Echo Canceller Ta threshold
Mute RF
Date and hour
Reset of fan(s) lifetime
Language
1W / 5W / 10W
21 to 69
-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3
21 to 69
-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3
1/6MHz or 1/8MHz
ON or OFF
-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
0.5 µ s to 31.6 µ s
5 µ s to 6.8 µ s
0.5 µ s to 31.6 µ s
S0 to S7
S0 to S7
S0 to S7
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
000 to 3F0
0 or 1
0 to 254
-70dBm to -20dBm
0dBm to 53dBm
-2dB to -6dB
0o C to 99o C
70o C (Std EC); 75o C (Enh EC)
ON / OFF
English, Spanish or French
Table 5.4: Settings.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
21
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Settings
5.1.1 Enhanced Echo Canceller (Enh. EC) configuration
Settings
The following are the user-configurable parameters for the canceller:
• Extended bandwitdth: Allows you to enable or disable the extended bandwidth
correction of the Enhanced Echo Canceller.
In case of using DVB-T2 signals with extended bandwidth this parameter must be enable. In case of using DVB-T2 signals withot extended bandwidth or DVB-T signals this
parameter must be disable.
• Window1 (Speed): Sets the cancellation speed of window no 1. Possible values:
S0-S7. Default value: S0.
• Window2 (Speed): Sets the cancellation speed of window no 2. Possible values:
S0-S7. Default value: S0.
• Window3 (Speed): Sets the cancellation speed of window no 3. Possible values:
S0-S7. Default value: S0.
The cancellation speed is directly related to the ability to track and correct echoes with
fast frequency and/or amplitude changes as present on Doppler, Rice or Rayleigh channels. However, increasing the speed of a cancellation window produces a penalization
on the output signal MER. As explained on the Set up procedure, users shoud test the
different speeds in order to find a compromise between cancellation performance and
output signal MER.
• Window1 (Enable). Activates/desactivates the cancellation window no 1.
• Window3 (Enable). Activates/desactivates the cancellation window no 3.
Window 1 and Window 3 are designed to cancel SFN echoes. These kind of echoes may
not appear/be relevant in every cancellation scenario so these windows can be switched
off to improve the output signal MER as explained above. However, Window 2 is designed
to cope up with feedback echoes (which can be higher than the main input signal) so it
must be always activated in order to avoid feedback amplification that may damage the
equipment.
• Window1 (Position): Defines the cancellation starting point of the window no 1.
Possible values: 0.5µs - 31.6µs. Default value: 12.0µs.
• Window2 (Position): Defines the cancellation starting point of the window no 2.
The possible values for setting up Window 2 position are: 5.0µs - 36.1µs. Default
value: 6.0µs.
• Window3 (Position): Defines the cancellation starting point of the window no 3.
Possible values: 0.5µs - 31.6µs. Default value: 18.0µs.
Each of these windows has a time duration of almost 6µs in a 8MHz bandwidth operation.
Activating a cancellation window defines a time region where the echo canceller is able to
equalize and remove partial/entirely the delayed echoes that may appear inside that time
slot. It should be pointed out that windows must not be overlapped and that cancellation
performance is penalized on the window edges as the algorythm is not able to remove
partially seen echoes.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
22
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Settings
When selecting different input and output RF channels, the Enh. EC uses an alternative cancellation algorythm on Window 2 allowing to move this cancellation window even
closer. The possible values for setting up Window 2 in MFN operation are: 3.0µs - 34.1µs.
Default value: 4.0µs. This can be done as it’s not longer neccesary dealing with high
feedback echoes.
The EEC module latency is 7.8µs in SFN mode. In real operation there is an additional
delay caused by the cable and antenna feedback. Apart from research purposes, Window
2 should never be placed beyond feedback echo in SFN operation.
Setup Procedure
Given the number of parameters to be set up and the variety of possible scenarios in
which the Enhanced EC can work, are set out below a series of steps in the implementation of this canceller:
1. In case of using DVB-T2 signals with extended bandwidth, set Extended bandwitdth = ON. Otherwise, keep Extended bandwitdth = OFF.
2. Using the impulse response of the scenario, determine the minimum necessary
number of cancellation windows and enable or disable them as appropriate (Window1,
Window2 (Enable)) taking into account that each window takes 6µs.
Figure 5.4: Example of impulse response at the input of Gap Filler.
3. Place the cancellation windows in the desired position by changing the settings of
window’s position (Window1, Window2, Window3 (Position)).
i
Windows must not be overlapped.
4. In case of the window no 2, if echoes within this window have frequency or amplitude
shift (DOPPLER, RICE, etc.) increase the speed of the window until you find the
best compromise between echo cancellation and output MER.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
23
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Settings
5. Otherwise, keep Window2 (Speed) = S0.
6. If the window no 1 is on:
(a) If echoes within this window have frequency or amplitude shift (DOPPLER,
RICE, etc.) increase the speed of the window until you find the best compromise between echo cancellation and output MER.
(b) Otherwise, keep Window1 (Speed) = S0.
7. If the window no 3 is on:
(a) If echoes within this window have frequency or amplitude shift (DOPPLER,
RICE, etc.) increase the speed of the window until you find the best compromise between echo cancellation and output MER.
(b) Otherwise, keep Window3 (Speed) = S0.
Possible cancellation scenarios
The figure 5.5 show the most commonly used EEC window positioning configurations
that cover a wide range of cancellation scenarios.
Figure 5.5: Possible cancellation scenarios.
If there is an SFN echo that it’s closer to the main input signal than the starting cancellation point of Window 2, Window 1 can be placed in the first place (avoiding window
overlapping). However, this configuration must be used with extreme caution because,
in some unusual scenarios, where there is a strong SFN post echo that it’s very close to
the main input signal (closer than 1.5µs aproximately), placing Window 1 below Window
2 in order to deal with this kind of echoes may lead to an unstable situation (the cancellation window is not able to remove it entirely due to the cancellation performance on the
window edges).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
24
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Measurements
5.2 Measurements
The measurements offered by the equipment are detailed in Table 5.6. These measurements are accessible either locally and remotely.
Output and reflected power
In the power amplifier there are two detectors, one for the transmitted power and another
for the reflected power. The equipment offers a measure of the transmitted power in
Watts and dBm, while measuring of the reflected power is shown in Watts. The minimum
reflected power that shows the equipment is 10% of the transmitted power. For example,
for 1W the lowest power displayed is 0.01 W.
LDMOS transistor currents of power amplifier
Indicate the consumption currents of the two LDMOS transistors at output stage of power
amplifier stage in amperes. As they are class AB polarization devices, the current depends on both the output power (is higher the greater the curve) and frequency.
The value of these currents determines the alarm ART05 - Transistors current. When
one of two currents are out of the thresholds (Table 5.5) this alarm is activated.
Unit type
1W
5W
10W
Lower threshold
10 mA
50 mA
50 mA
Upper threshold
300 mA
1200 mA
2400 mA
Table 5.5: Alarm Transistors current thresholds.
Input and output local oscillator status
In SFN operation mode the input local oscillator is disable and the output local one is
used for both, input and output stages.
Tuning voltages for local oscillators
It shows the tunning voltages (in Volts) for local oscillators.
Automatic gain control voltages
Indicate (in V), the voltages of the circuits of automatic gain control of the Gap Filler.
The automatic gain control 1 and 2 are in the signal processing board, and they are not
configurable. However, the third automatic gain control circuit is at the power stage and
you can configure its operation in auto or manual mode.
Input level
It is the signal level in dBm at the input connector of the Gap Filler. The Gap Filler input
level is accurate to ±2dB .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
25
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Measurements
1.2V, 5V and 27V lines voltage
The Gap filler is able to monitor the exact continuous voltages at the power supply stage.
In case of Enh. EC board 1.2V line is converted to 1V line.
The value of these voltages determines the alarm AHW01 - Alimentation fault.
Local or external 10MHz reference
A 10MHz signal is present at the external connector or not.
Amplifier stage temperature
Temperature (in o C) measured at the output stage of the power amplifier. The behaviorbased on temperature of the equipment has already been showed in Table 5.2.
Echo Canceller temperature
Temperature (in o C) measured at the Echo Canceller board. The behavior-based on
temperature of the equipment has already been showed in Table 5.3.
Std. EC Gain Margin (Signal-Echo)
The Std. EC performs an instantaneous measure of the Gain Margin , defined as the
difference between the level of input signal and the level of echo feedback. Thus, a value
of, for example,-10dB indicates that the value of the echo is 10 dB above the level of entry.
The canceller only performs measurements of Gain Margin (GM) when this is negative, ie
when the echo is greater than the received signal. In all other cases the measure indicate
>0dB.
Fan(s) lifetime
This parameter shows the life counter in hours of each of the fans.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
26
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Measurements
Parameter
Output power
Reflected power
Currents of LDMOS transistor 1 in power amplifier
Currents of LDMOS transistor 2 in power amplifier
Input local oscillator status (MFN mode only)
Output local oscillator status
Input local oscillator tuning voltage (MFN mode
only)
Output local oscillator tuning voltage
Automatic Gain Control 1 voltage
Automatic Gain Control 2 voltage
Automatic Gain Control 3 voltage
Input level
1.2V (1V in Enh.EC) line voltage
5V line voltage
27V line voltage
Local or external 10MHz reference
Amplifier stage temperature
Echo Canceller temperature
Std.EC gain margin (Signal-Echo)
Fan(s) lifetime
Usual Range
<variable>
<10% Output power
100mA to 250mA (1W), 450mA to
1100mA (5W), 700mA to 1500mA
(10W)
100mA to 250mA (1W), 450mA to
1100mA (5W), 700mA to 1500mA
(10W)
Locked
Locked
1,5V to 24V
1,5V to 24V
3V to 9V
1.3V to 4V
1V to 5V
-70dBm to -20dBm
1.2V ± 0.1V (1V ± 0.1V in
Enh.EC)
5V ± 0.2V
27V ± 0.3V
Local
Table 5.6: Measurements.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
27
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Alarms
5.3 Alarms
The device incorporates an alarm history log where last 10 alarm events are stored.
This log is erased any time the module is reset. Each alarm is able to be activated or
disactivated to be stored in the log.
Each alarm can be enable or disable. It is possible to configure an hysteresis time
in seconds individually for each alarm in order to allow an independent detection of the
device alarms. The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm to be considered as valid.
Gap filler specific alarms are summarized in Table 5.7:
ARE01 - Input level
It is activated when the input signal level is lower than a minimun level which guarantee
a right Gap Filler’s working state (around -70dBm).
ARE02 - Input oscillator
This alarm is activated when the oscillator from the downconverter (which convert the
input DVB-T signal’s frequency into the intermediate frequency (IF)) is unlocked.
NOTE: In the case that the Gap Filler works on a single frequency network SFN
(same input and output channel) this alarm is not enable.
ART01 - Output oscillator
It is activated when the output oscillator (which converts the intermediate frequency into
the output channel frequency) is unlocked.
ART02 - Reflected power
It is activated when the reflected power level exceeds the reflected power threshold level.
When this happen, the device decreases its output power level in 3-4dB. The device
recovers its power level when the reflected power level decreases under the threshold
level. This threshold value is user configurable.
ART03 - Temperature
It is activated when the temperature level at power amplifier stage exceeds its temperature’s threshold level or when the temperature level at FPGA stage exceeds its temperature’s threshold level.
ART04 - Output power
It is activated when the transmitted power level decreases 6dB or more from its power
level.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
28
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Alarms
ART05 - Transistors current
The value of the two LDMOS transistors currents at amplifier stage determines the activation of this alarm. When one of two currents are out of the thresholds (Table 5.5) this
alarm is activated.
ART06 - Power 3dB.
It is activated when the transmitted power level decreases betwenn 3dB and 6dB its
power level.
AHW01 - Alimentation fault
It is activated when any of the DC voltages in the power supply stage is out of this usual
range or when exist a general failure at the power supply.
This alarm is also activated when temperature alarm pin in DC connector is activated.
This pin is activated in the Power Supply Units.
i
Alimentation fault is also activated when temperature alarm pin in DC connector
at rear panel of the device is activated. This temperature alarm pin is activated by
the Power Supply Units.
AHW02 - HW error
It is activated when an internal hardware failure is detected.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
29
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Functional description
Alarms
Table 5.7 shows the LED status of the modules based on the active alarm.
code
ARE01
ART01
ARE02
ART02
ART03
ART04
ART05
ART06
AHW01
AHW02
Alarm
Input level
Output oscillator
Input oscillator
Reflected power
Temperature
Output power
Transistors current
Power 3dB
Alimentation fault
HW error
Status LED
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange blinking
Orange
Red
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
External programmer LED
A
C
B
Table 5.7: LED Behavior-based on alarms.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
30
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Remote Control and Monitoring
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
The remote control and monitoring system is based on the use of the Management
module, which communicates with all the modules of the system via a RS485 bus in
back pannel unit.
The Management Module monitors the measures and alarms of all the system’s modules, allowing to change their settings.
Each module is assigned with a different remote control address that identifies it within
the shared communication bus.
The system enables remote management and communication with a remote monitoring
center. This communication can be of various types and using various interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, GSM/GPRS/UMTS).
For more details, please refer to the chapter "Operation" in System Manual.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
31
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Local control
7 Local control
Following is detailed the menus structure corresponding to the External Programmer
interface (see External Programmer instrument manual for more details).
7.1 Menu structure
The menus in this module follow the tree structure shown below:
Relay
DVB-T
1.01
1W
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.POWER
3.INPUT
4.OUTPUT
5.ECHO CANC
6.SYSTEM
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+38.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
..
Input level
Low Power!
LOG
02/04
ARE01
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Lev: -50dBm
Ref: -40dBm
Osc: Lock
Vtun: 2.6V
Vcag1:7.89V
Vcag2:1.89V
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
..
Cancel: OFF
State: OFF
Slope:
-1
..
Cancel: DAE
State:
ON
Adaptat: ON
GM:
-8 dB
Atten: 0dB
Vers: 1.03
Tem:+48.5ºC
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
..
ARE01:
ART01:
ARE02:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
..
ARE01:
ART01:
ARE02:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
..
ARE01:
ART01:
ARE02:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
..
Cancel:DEEC
State:
ON
Slope:
-1
Speed1: OFF
Speed2:
1
Speed3: OFF
START1:11.0
START2: 5.0
START3:17.0
W1:
OFF
W2:
OFF
Vers: 1.09
Tem:+50.5ºC
Ext BW: OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Legend
Short press square
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
..
CTRLadd:001
10MHz: ext
Offset: 166
Type:
1W
01:19:19
00/00/0000
1.2V:1.256V
5V: 4.963V
27V: 27.37V
Vnt:000001h
Language
selection
--------English
..
Relay
DVB-T
1W
Vers: 1.00
Des: 00001
Boot: 1.01
..
Serial Num
050712452001
Long press square
Short press circle
Long press circle
Press up
Press down
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
32
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Local control
Menu structure
When connecting the external programmer to the module, first of all the firmware version
of the External Programmer is displayed for a few seconds. After this, a welcome screen
showing the unit type and firmware version is displayed:
Relay
DVB-T
1.01
1W
Start menu allows selecting one of the six main menus, Alarms, Power, Input, Output,
Echo canceller and System:
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.POWER
3.INPUT
4.OUTPUT
5.ECHO CANC
6.SYSTEM
7.1.1 Alarms Menu
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: State, Log or Configuration.
7.1.1.1 Alarms > State Menu
..
Input level
Low Power!
This menu shows the active alarms on the equipment. The list of possible alarms is
shown in the following table:
Text alarm
Input level
Unlock OscI
Unlock OscO
Pow Ref!
Temperature
Low Pow!
Curr Trts!
Pow 3dB!
Power failure
HW error
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Alarm description
ARE01 Input level
ARE02 Input oscillator
ART01 Output oscillator
ART02 Reflected power
ART03 Temperature
ART04 Output power
ART05 Transistors current
ART06 Power 3dB
AHW01 Alimentation fault
AHW02 HW error
Remarks
Only MFN
33
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu
LOG
02/04
ARE01
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
This menu shows a log of the alarms on the equipment.
7.1.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Hysteresis, Enable or Log
ON/OFF.
7.1.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu
..
ARE01:
ART01:
ARE02:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
This menu allows setting the alarms hysteresis.
7.1.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu
..
ARE01:
ART01:
ARE02:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows enabling or disabling alarms.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
34
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
..
ARE01:
ART01:
ARE02:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows configuring which alarms are to be shown in the log.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
35
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.2 Power Menu
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+38.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
Text
Pt
Pt
Pr
IdT1
IdT2
Vcorr1
PC1
PC2
Vcag3
RF MUTE
Parameter
Output power in dBm
Output power in W
Reflected output power
LDMOS transistor 1 current of power amplifier
LDMOS transistor 2 current of power amplifier
Linearity precorrector voltage (VCORR1)
Linearity precorrector voltage (PC1)
Linearity precorrector voltage (PC2)
Automatic Gain Control 3 Voltage
RF Mute
Ref
Reference output power level*
ThrPr
Reflected power threshold
Tem
ThrTem
Amplifier stage temperature
Amplifier stage temperature threshold
Remarks
< 10%Pt [W]
000 to 3F0. 010 resol.
0 / 1
0 / 1
1.0V to 5.0V
ON / OFF
0dBm to 53dBm. 0.1dB
resol.
-2dB to -6dB .
1dB
resol.
Resolution 0.5o C
Resolution 1o C
*Reference output power level
This parameter allows you to modify the internal value of reference level of output power
of the device. These values are adjusted by the manufacturer and shall only be modified if a change in the output channel is done. Modifying these values is due to the
response curve of the detectors and couplers used is not perfectly flat across the UHF
band. In case you do not change the values it is possible to read not accurate output
power level when you make a channel change. It is the benchmark used by the transmitter for measuring output power level. If the output channel is changed without adjusting
the reference output power, the reading must be accurate to ±1dB .
i
When the equipment is muted the screen shows in both the first and the second
line, Pt: MUTED!.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
36
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Local control
Menu structure
i
The device is factory adjusted at a given output power. This power corresponds
to a certain adjustment of the voltages of linearity precorrector. These voltages
are not constant for different values of output power, or even for different output
channels, although they can be modified using the programmer as will be explained
further ahead. This is the reason why it is recommended not to modify the output
power unless the apropiate measuring equipment (spectrum analyzer), that will
allow to readjust the linearity precorrector’s values, is available. (See chapter 9 of
this manual for further information).
7.1.3 Input Menu
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Lev: -50dBm
Ref: -40dBm
Osc: Lock
Vtun: 2.6V
Vcag1:7.89V
Vcag2:1.89V
Text
Channel
Offset
Fre
Lev
Ref
Osc
Vtun
Vcag1
Vcag2
Parameter
Input channel
Input frequency offset
Normal range
21 to 69
-3 to +3
Input frequency
Input level
Reference input level*
Input local oscillator state
Input local oscillator voltage
Automatic Gain Control 1 Voltage
Automatic Gain Control 2 Voltage
lock / unlock
1.5V to 24.0V
3V to 9V
Remarks
Step in system
configuration menu
MHz
dBm
dBm
Only visible in MFN
1.3V to 4.0V
Reference input level
Allows you to modify the internal values of reference level of input level of the Gap Filler.
This value is adjusted by the manufacturer and shall only be modified if a change in the
input channel is done. Modifying this value is due to the response curve of the detectors
and couplers used is not perfectly flat across the UHF band. If the input channel is
changed without adjusting the reference input power the reading of the entry level must
be accurate to ±3dB .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
37
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.4 Output Menu
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
Text
i
Channel
Offset
Parameter
Output channel
Output frequency offset
Normal range
21 to 69
-3 to +3
Fre
Osc
Vtun
Output frequency
Output local oscillator state
Output local oscillator voltage
lock / unlock
1.5V to 24.0V
Remarks
Step in system
configuration menu
MHz
Chapter 9 describes in full detail the considerations that must be taken into account
when making any changes in the output channel. Such considerations are related
to both the output power and the adjustment of the linearity precorrection settings.
7.1.5 Echo Canceller Menu
This menu depends on the echo canceller hardware:
..
Cancel: OFF
State: OFF
Slope:
-1
Text
Cancel
State
Slope
Parameter
Echo canceller description
Normal range
Echo canceller board activation
Slope corrector
OFF
OFF
Remarks
No echo canceller
hardware
-3, -2, -1, 0,
+1, +2, +3
Standard Echo Cancellation option
..
Cancel: DAE
State:
ON
Adaptat: ON
GM:
-8 dB
Atten: 0dB
Vers: 1.03
Tem:+48.5ºC
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
38
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Local control
Menu structure
Text
Cancel
State
Adaptat
GM
Atten
Vers
Tem
Parameter
Echo canceller description
Echo canceller board activation
Std. EC output power adaptive
regulation
Gain Margin (Signal-Echo)
Normal range
Std.EC output power adaptive
attenuation
Std. EC firmware version
Std. EC board temperature
≥ 0dB
DAE
ON
Remarks
Std. EC
ON / OFF
>0dB for positive
values.
Only available with
Adaptat:ON
Resolution 0.5o C
Enhanced Echo Cancellation option
..
Cancel:DEEC
State:
ON
Slope:
-1
Speed1: OFF
Speed2:
1
Speed3: OFF
START1:11.0
START2: 5.0
START3:17.0
W1:
OFF
W2:
OFF
Vers: 1.09
Tem:+50.5ºC
Ext BW: OFF
Text
Cancel
State
Slope
Speed1
Speed2
Speed3
START1
START2
START3
W1
W3
Vers
Tem
Ext BW
Parameter
Echo canceller description
Echo canceller board activation
Slope corrector
Enh. EC Window 1 Speed
Enh. EC Window 2 Speed
Enh. EC Window 3 Speed
Enh. EC Window 1 start
Enh. EC Window 2 start
Enh. EC Window 3 start
Enh. EC Window 1 activation
Enh. EC Window 3 activation
Enh. EC firmware version
Enh. EC board temperature
Enh.EC extended bandwitdth
activation
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Normal range
DEEC
ON
-3, -2, -1, 0,
+1, +2, +3
OFF / 1 to 7
OFF / 1 to 7
OFF / 1 to 7
11.0 to 31.6
05.0 to 7.0
11.0 to 31.6
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
Remarks
Enh. EC
µs
µs
µs
Resolution 0.5o C
ON / OFF
39
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.6 System Menu
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Configuration, Language,
Version or Serial number.
7.1.6.1 System > Configuration Menu
..
CTRLadd:001
10MHz: ext
Offset: 166
Type:
1W
01:19:19
00/00/0000
1.2V:1.256V
5V: 4.963V
27V: 27.37V
Vnt:000001h
Normal
range
Text
Parameter
CTRLadd
Control address*
10MHz Input (local or external)
1 to 254
Offset
Frequency offset step
166 / 125
Type
00:00:00
00/00/00000
1.2V
5V
27V
Unit type
Internal time
Internal date
1.2V voltage
5V voltage
27V voltage
1W, 5W or 10W
Vnt
Fan(s) lifetime counter (h)
10MHz
Remarks
Local/ ext
166 = 1/6MHz; 125 =
1/8MHz
hh:mm:ss
dd/mm/YYYY
1V with DEEC
RESET for reset the lifetime counter
*Control address
This is a local parameter that allows you to change the telecontrol address of the module
used by the Management module. This address can be between 0 and 254.
7.1.6.2 System > Language Menu
Language
selection
--------English
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
40
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Local control
Menu structure
This menu allows you to select the menu language for the external programmer. The
available languages are Spanish (Español) , English (English) or French (Français).
7.1.6.3 System > Version Menu
..
Regenerativ
DVB-T
1W
Vers: 1.00
Des: 00001
Boot: 1.01
Text
Vers
Des
Boot
Parameter
Microcontroller version
Microcontroller developement version
Bootloader version
Remarks
7.1.6.4 System > Serial number Menu
..
Serial Num
050712452001
This menu shows the internal serial number of the equipment.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
41
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Local control
Putting into operation
7.2 Putting into operation
Sample application
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment.
• Connect the External programmer to the RJ45 connector at the front pannel of
the equipment.
• Set the input frequency (parameters Channel and Offset).
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Lev: -50dBm
Ref: -40dBm
Osc: Lock
Vtun: 2.6V
Vcag1:7.89V
Vcag2:1.89V
• Set the output frequency (parameters Channel and Offset).
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
42
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Local control
Putting into operation
• Check the output power (parameter Pt).
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+38.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
• Check the Echo Canceller configuration.
In case of no echo canceller hardware installed or Std. EC board installed no configuration is needed:
..
Cancel: OFF
State: OFF
Slope:
-1
..
Cancel: DAE
State:
ON
Adaptat: ON
GM:
-8 dB
Atten: 0dB
Vers: 1.03
Tem:+48.5ºC
In the case of Enh. EC the configuration depends on the cancellation scenario.
..
Cancel:DEEC
State:
ON
Slope:
-1
Speed1: OFF
Speed2:
1
Speed3: OFF
START1:11.0
START2: 5.0
START3:17.0
W1:
OFF
W2:
OFF
Vers: 1.09
Tem:+50.5ºC
Ext BW: OFF
i
With Enh. EC option, in case of using a DVB-T2 signal with extended carriers, the
parameter Extended BW must be enable. In case of input signals without extended
bandwidths this parameter must be disabled.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
43
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Local control
Putting into operation
• Check that no alarms in menu Alarms > Status.
..
There is
no alarm
• Check that frontal LED status keeps green.
• Connect the measurement instrument to the RF MONITOR connector at the front
pannel.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
44
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Troubleshooting
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED and alarm status
code
Alarm
ARE01
ART01
ARE02
ART02
Input level
Output oscillator
Input oscillator
Reflected power
ART03
Temperature
Status
LED
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
blinking
Orange
ART04
Output power
Red
ART05
ART06
Transistors current
Power 3dB
Orange
Orange
AHW01 Alimentation fault
Orange
AHW02 HW error
Orange
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Description
Check RF input signal cabling
The Gap Filler is damaged
The Gap Filler is damaged
Check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2)
Overtemperature at amplifier or echo
canceller stage
Check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2)
The Gap Filler is damaged
In case of power reflected alarm is set,
check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2). By the opposite, the Gap Filler is
damaged
Temperature alarm in a Power Supply
Unit is set or the Gap Filler is damaged
The Gap Filler is damaged
45
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
RF service failure
The Status LED of Gap
Filler and Power Supply
Unit are ON?
YES
Go to "No output power"
flowchart.
NO
Remove the Gap Filler from the subrack.
The Status LED of
Power Supply Unit is
ON?
NO
Check the Power Supply
Unit troubleshooting.
YES
The Gap Filler is damaged
No output power. Output power
alarm is set. Status LED: Red
Alimentation fault or
HW error alarm is set?
YES
The Gap Filler is damaged
NO
YES
Input level alarm is set?
Check RF input signal cabling
NO
The Gap Filler is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
46
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
Reflected power alarm is set.
Status LED: Orange blinking
Unplug the antenna cable and
connect a load to the output power
of the module.
Reflected power alarm
is still set?
NO
Check the antenna and
its cabling.
YES
The Gap Filler is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
47
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Changing the output channel
9 Changing the output channel
Every time the output channel is changed, it may be necessary to readjust its output
power, the reference value used to show the output power readings and the linearity
precorrector values.
This is because the response curve of the detectors and couplers used to measure the
output power is not perfectly flat over the whole UHF band, and also because the linearity
of the output stage LDMOS transistors is not constant with the frequency.
Generally, if the frequency variation is small (less than 24 MHz or three UHF channels)
there will be no need for any readjustment whatsoever.
In any case the procedure must be as follows:
1. Connect the external programmer to the device and go to the OUTPUT menu:
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
2. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Channel in the external programmer screen,
enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the
△ ▽ keys until reaches the desired output channel.
3. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Offset in the external programmer screen,
enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the
△ ▽ keys until reaches the desired output frequency.
4. Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds.
5. Connect a spectrum analyzer or power meter to the device output and measure the
actual transmitted power.
The output power reading seen in the external programmer control will be the same
as before the channel was changed, but the actually transmitted power may have
shifted even more than 1dB if the channel change has involved a significant frequency leap.
6. Readjust the device output power to the desired value by measuring it in the spectrum analyzer or power meter. Go to the menu POWER:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
48
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Changing the output channel
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
7. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Pt in the external programmer screen, enter
in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the △ ▽
keys until reaches the desired output power.
8. Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds.
9. Readjust the reference output power to the desired value. In the menú POWER:
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
i
Ref parameter shows --.-dBm instead of last recorded value
10. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Ref, enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the △ ▽ keys until it matches the value
read in the spectrum analyzer or the power meter (this means that if the spectrum
analyzer reads 31 dBm, the reference value must be readjusted until the external
programer shows 31.0 dBm).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
49
R&SMLx Gap Filler
Changing the output channel
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:31.0dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
11. Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds. Once the change
has taken place, the device’s output power level measurement (shown in the output
power menu) will be updated.
12. Verify that the shoulder attenuation is over 38 dB.
13. If this isn’t, by selecting the central frequency in the spectrum analyzer as the output frequency of the device and configuring a span that largelly allows observing
the 8M Hz signal bandwidth (for example 20M Hz ), modify the precorrection voltages, parameters PC1, PC2 and Vcorr1 so the shoulders attenuation reaches
the best possible value (always higher than 38dB ) as follows:
(a) Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Vcorr1 in the external programmer
screen, enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value to
3F0 by pressing the △ ▽ keys. Record the new value by pressing the key
for a few seconds.
(b) Try the four combinations for the parameters PC1 and PC2 in order to get
the best combination for shoulder attenuation. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the
parameter PC1 / PC2 in the external programmer screen, enter in editing mode
by pressing the
key and modify its value to 0 or 1 by pressing the △ ▽ keys
(It is no necessary record the values for checking the shoulder attenuation).
PC1
PC2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
(c) With the best of the 4 combinations. Record the new values by pressing the
key for a few seconds.
(d) Then, modify with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Vcorr1 in the external programmer screen, enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value
from 3F0 to 000 by pressing the △ ▽ keys until it reaches the best possible
value of shoulders attenuation.
(e) Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
50
R&S R MLx
Retransmitter DVB-T
Instrument Manual
Ref. xxxxxxxx
RETRANSMITTER
S.N yyyyyyyyyyyyyy
1W DVB-T
The Instrument Manual describes the following R&S R MLx Retransmitter DVB-T models and options:
• MLX-B311 MLx ReTx 1W DVB-T
• MLX-B315 MLx ReTx 5W DVB-T
• MLX-B319 MLx ReTx 10W DVB-T
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&S MLx.
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Overview
2
2 Putting into operation
3
3 Technical specifications
4
4 Physical description
4.1 MLx Retransmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
5 Functional description
5.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
25
7 Local control
7.1 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.1 Alarms > State Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu .
7.1.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu . . .
7.1.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
7.1.2 Power Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Input Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5 Modulator Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6 Mutes Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7 System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7.1 System > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . .
7.1.7.2 System > Language Menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7.3 System > Version Menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7.4 System > Serial number Menu . . . . . . . .
7.2 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
15
20
22
26
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
26
27
27
28
28
28
29
29
29
31
31
32
33
33
33
34
34
34
35
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED and alarm status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
9 Changing the output channel
40
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
37
38
1
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Overview
1 Overview
MLx Retransmitter uses broadband technology, which allows the frequency to be changed
over the entire UHF band.
The nominal output powers of the device are 1W, 5W and 10W.
The input to each MLx Retransmitter can optionally come from a RF Splitter that can
distribute the signal from the receiving antenna, slightly amplifying it before entering the
equipment.
The output of each MLx Retransmitter needs to be connected to the input of an Filter
Combiner to allow multiple channels to be transmitted by the same transmitting antenna.
The internal control system of the device enables both internal configuration and measures, and can be managed both locally and remotely. MLx Transmitter can be locally
managed by connecting an External Programmer to the equipment. The equipment can
be also managed, either locally or remotely, by connecting the equipment to the Management Module, that provides all necessary communication interfaces.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
2
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Putting into operation
2 Putting into operation
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment. For a further measurement examples and background information, please
refer to next chapters.
• Log on to the Management Module via web browser (see System Manual for more
detailed information).
• Go to Configuration > Modules menu and select the module.
• Set the input frequency (parameters Input channel/offset).
• Check if the demodulator is synchronized (parameter Demodulator).
• Set the modulation parameters (parameters Constellation, FEC, Bandwidth,
Guard interval and FFT).
i
Auto configuration parameter activation allows configuring the modulation parameters automatically from the input.
• Set the output frequency (parameters Output channel/offset).
• Check the output power (parameter Output power).
• Check that there are no alarms.
• Check that frontal STATUS LED keeps green.
• Connect the measurement instrument to the RF MONITOR connector at the front
pannel to check signal quality.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
3
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Technical specifications
3 Technical specifications
RF input:
Frequency range:
Input signal range:
Noise figure:
Return losses:
Image rejection:
Impedance:
Connector:
One UHF 6, 7 or 8MHz channel
-80 dBm to -20 dBm
≤6 dB
≥ 15 dB
≥ 55 dB
50 Ω
BNC female
DVB-T modulation:
FFT:
Guard interval:
FEC:
Constellation:
Bandwidth:
MFN adaptation rate:
2K, 8K
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM
6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
Yes. Jitter PCR Restamping ± 40 ns
RF output:
Frequency range:
Nominal Output Power:
Maximum Output Power:
Distance to shoulder:
MER:
Power Stability:
Return loss:
Spurious emissions outside the channel:
Impedance:
Connector:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
One UHF 6, 7 or 8MHz channel
1W, 5W or 10W as version
1.25W, 7W or 14W as version
> 38 dB
> 34 dB
≤ ± 0.5dB
> 20dB
< -60dBc
50 Ω
BNC female (1W, 5W); N female (10W)
4
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Technical specifications
RF monitoring output:
Coupling:
Impedance:
Connector:
27 ± 3 dB (1W) ; 38 ± 3 dB (5W, 10W)
50 Ω
BNC female
Local oscillators:
Phase noise:
Frequency steps:
Frequency stability with temperature (10o C to + 60o C):
Frequency stability for a year:
≥ 95 dBc/Hz @1KHz
± 1/6 MHz, ± 1/7 MHz, ± 1/8 MHz
± 1 ×10−6
±1 × 10−6
10MHz external reference input:
Frequency:
Input level range:
Connector:
10 MHz
-20 dBm to +10 dBm
BNC female
Power supply:
DC Input voltage:
DC Input voltage connector*:
i
27 ±0.3VDC
DIN41612 30 pins male
*Not only power supply voltage but also control. 30 pins functions are detailed in
physical description.
DC Power Consumption:
1W module:
5W module:
10W module:
i
23W
65W
85W
DC power consumption is specified at the maximum transmitted output power for
every power range (1.25 W for 1W modules, 7W for 5W modules and 14W for
10W modules).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
5
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Technical specifications
Temperature and cooling:
Operating temperature:
Relative humidity:
Fans :
Fans type:
0 to 45o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
1 (1W) / 2 (5W, 10W)
KDE0504PFV1.11.MS.A.GN SUNON
Dimensions:
Module dimensions (WxHxD):
50x215x250 mm
Weight:
1W module:
5W module:
10W module:
1,5 Kg
2 Kg
2 Kg
Remote control and monitoring:
Connecting the system to the remote control and monitoring module (Management)
allows remote communication to the control centre. This communication can be made
using different interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, mobile communications, relays).
Local and remote parameters:
Settings
• Unit type.
• Input channel.
• Input frequency offset.
• Auto configuration.
• Constellation.
• FEC.
• Guard Interval.
• Bandwidth.
• FFT.
• Cell ID Enabled.
• Cell ID.
• Output channel.
• Output frequency offset.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
6
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Technical specifications
• Offset step.
• Output power.
• Precorrector voltage (VCORR1, PC1, PC2).
• Control address.
• Output power level reference.
• Reflected power threshold.
• Amplifier stage temperature threshold.
• Mute MPEG Overflow.
• Mute MPEG Error.
• RF mute.
• Date and hour.
• Reset of fan(s) lifetime.
• Language.
Measurements
• Demodulator synchronized status.
• Input BER pre-Viterbi and post-Viterbi.
• Output power (dBm and Watts).
• Reflected power (Watts).
• LDMOS transistor 1 current (A).
• LDMOS transistor 2 current (A).
• Output oscillator status.
• Output oscillator tuning voltage (V).
• AGC 3 voltage (V).
• 1.2V line voltage (V).
• 5V line voltage (V).
• 27V line voltage (V).
• Local or external 10MHz reference.
• Amplifier stage temperature (o C).
• Fan(s) lifetime (h).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
7
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Technical specifications
Alarms:
• ATX03 - FPGA communication.
• ATX04 - No IF DVB-T signal.
• ATX05 - MPEG overflow .
• ATX06 - MPEG error.
• ART01 - Output oscillator.
• ART02 - Reflected power.
• ART03 - Temperature.
• ART04 - Output power.
• ART05 - Transistors current.
• ART06 - Power 3dB.
• AHW01 - Alimentation fault.
• AHW02 - HW error.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
8
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Physical description
4 Physical description
4.1 MLx Retransmitter
Ref. xxxxxxxx
RETRANSMITTER
S.N yyyyyyyyyyyyyy
1W DVB-T
Figure 4.1: MLx Retransmitter.
Figure 4.2 details frontal connectors of the module. Figure 4.3 details rear connectors of
the module.
LED
LED status
Off
Green
Orange
Orange blinking
Red
Description
No power supply
No active alarms
Warning alarm
Reflected power alarm
Output power alarm
Table 4.1: Description of LED status.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
9
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Physical description
MLx Retransmitter
RF input (BNC female)
Status LED
External programmer
connector (RJ45)
RF monitoring test (BNC female)
RF output
(BNC female 1W/5W)
(N female 10W)
RETRANSMITTER
1W DVB-T
Figure 4.2: Description of frontal panel.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
10
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Physical description
MLx Retransmitter
MLX-B311
2501.0301.11
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
10 Mhz
10
+27V
CTRL_A
RESET
CTRL_B
Tª ALARM
0V
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
1
Figure 4.3: Description of rear panel.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
11
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Functional description
5 Functional description
MLx Retransmitter internal composition is outlined in the block diagram of Figure 5.1.
Signal Processing board
UpConverter
IF stage
DVB-T
Modulator
stage
DVB-T
Receiver
stage
uC
Input stage
Output stage
Amplifier board
Power supply board
FAN
FAN
(only in 5W / 10W)
Figure 5.1: Simplified block diagram of the MLx Retransmitter.
Main stages at the MLx Retransmitter:
Power supply
All necessary internal voltages to operate the equipment are generated through converters DC/DC in the power supply stage from the 27VDC input voltage.
The internal voltages are 1.2VDC , 5VDC , 9VDC and 27VDC . All of them are monitored
by the microcontroller.
Those voltages can be reset from an external pin.
DVB-T receiver
DVB-T input signal are introduced to the tuner. Then the signal is converted to intermediate frequency (4MHz). The IF signal is demodulated and coverted into a MPEG-2
Transport Stream. Finally FPGA converts the signal in a ASI stream.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
12
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Functional description
DVB-T modulator
The modulator receives ASI input signal to deliver an output signal at intermediate frequency, compatible with EN 300.744 DVB-T.
IF
A sample of the IF signal, after being amplified, is used to detect and inform the microcontroller about the IF signal presence.
The IF signal is then amplified and introduced into a predistortion circuit or linearity correction. This circuit is governed by the voltages VCORR1, PC1 and PC2, all of them
generated from the microcontroller and configurable by the user (see chapter 7).
The predistortion output signal is amplified and filtered to adjust its level to the upconverter mixer, responsible for converting the IF signal to the desired output channel.
Upconverter
The IF signal is converted to the output channel with a mixer by a local oscillator.
Once the signal is converted to the output frequency, it passes through an UHF tracking
filter. The voltages controlling this filter are obtained during the equipment adjustment
process at the factory, and stored in an E2PROM memory.
Input amplifier
The Signal Processing Board output signal enters the Amplifier Board and is amplified
through the monolithic amplifier. After it there is a PIN diode stage controlled by the automatic gain control circuit (abbrebiated as AGC3 throughout this manual). The function
of this variable attenuation stage is to compensate the power stage response curve in
terms of frequency and gain variation with temperature, and to regulate the attenuation
according to the selected output power.
The control voltage of the AGC3 is obtained from the detection of a sample of the output
power through a directional coupler and a detector.
After the AGC3 circuit, there are two stages of amplification performed with monolithic
amplifiers.
Below there is an amplification stage based on the use of bipolar transistors.
All the input amplifier stages are polarized in class-A and very linear, so they do not
introduce any intermodulation effect to the output amplifier.
Output amplifier
The output amplifier is made by two LDMOS transistors polarized in class-AB and addedup by 3dB and 90◦ hybrid couplers. The transistors used are different depending on the
nominal output power. The polarization circuit of gate voltages are in the control circuit.
After the output amplifier, a directional coupler is placed with two purposes: detect the
signal to measure the transmitted power and get the AGC3 voltage; and detect the proportional signal to the reflected power to generate the corresponding alarm.
This is followed by another directional coupler which obtains the output test signal at the
front of the module.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
13
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Fans
1W device incorporates one fan at the bottom of the module, and two fans in the case of
a 5W and 10W devices. These fans start upon two conditions: when the temperature at
amplifier stage reaches 51o C, stopping when the temperature drops below 46◦ C, or when
the temperature at the Modulator board reaches 53o C, stopping when the temperature
drops below 49◦ C.
Control
The control module is based on the microcontroller circuit which performs the controlling functions necessary for the Signal Processing board, Amplifier board and Modulator
board. Among others functions, it generates a series of voltages to control the D/A and
A/D converters.
These voltages are generated through a D/A converter whose output is multiplexed into
a serie of operational amplifier circuits sample and hold. Some of the voltages are accessible by the user.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
14
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Settings
5.1 Settings
The equipment has a number of adjustable parameters detailed below and summarized
in Table 5.3. These parameters are accessible both locally and remotely.
Unit Type
It determines the type of power amplifier board that it is used for internal adjustment. This
parameter is set in factory and cannot be set by the user.
Possible types:
• 1W.
• 5W.
• 10W.
Input channel and frequency offset
Equipment central input frequency can be set by programming the channel and the offset.
The offset step can be configured.
Auto configuration
If enabled, indicates that the modulation parameters (constellation, FEC, guard interval
and the FFT size) of the DVB-T signal are obtained directly from the input. In automatic
operation mode these parameters can not be modified.
Constellation
Selects the COFDM modulation constellation: QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM.
FEC
Selects the COFDM modulation encoding rate:1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 or 7/8.
Guard Interval
Selects the COFDM modulation guard interval:1/4, 1/8, 1/16 or 1/32.
Bandwidth
Selects the COFDM modulation bandwidth: 6MHz, 7MHz or 8MHz.
FFT
Selects the COFDM modulation FFT: 8K or 2K.
Cell identifier
It allows the user to set the cell ID where the transmitter is located. This parameter can
be disabled.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
15
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Settings
Output channel and frequency offset
Equipment central output frequency can be set by programming the channel and the offset. The offset step can be configured.
i
Chapter 9 describes in detail the considerations that must be taken into account
when making any changes in the output channel. Such considerations are related to
both the output power and the adjustment of the linnearity precorrection settings.
Offset step
This parameter allows you to configure the offset resolution in order to set the input or
output frecuency. There are three possible steps: 1/6M Hz , 1/7M Hz or 1/8M Hz .
Output power
Equipment allows to regulate the output level >10dB maintaining the quality parameters
outlined in the specifications. The 1W device is adjustable to a range from 31dBm to
21dBm, the 5W device is adjustable to a range from 38.5dBm to 28.5dBm and the 10W
device is adjustable to a range from 41.5dBm to 31.5dBm. If the output power is varied
outside these margins, the quality parameters ot the transmitter output signal (distance
to shoulder, MER ,...) may not correspond to its technical features.
i
The device is factory adjusted at a given output power. This power corresponds to
a certain adjustment of the voltages of the linearity precorrector. These voltages
are not constant for different values of output power, or even for different output
channels, although they can be modified by the user as it will be explained further
ahead. This is the reason why it is recommended not to modify the output power
unless the apropiate measuring equipment (spectrum analyzer), that will allow to
readjust the linearity precorrector’s values, is available. (See chapter 9 of this
manual for further information).
Linearity precorrector voltages (VCORR1, PC1 and PC2)
It is used for varying the voltage that controls the predistortion (linearity correction) at the
IF stage of the DVB-T modulator module.
These are values adjusted by the manufacturer and should not be changed unless the
output channel or the transmitter output power are varied, in which case they shall be
amended so that the distance to the shoulders of the new channel are higher than 38 dB.
To make this adjustment it is necessary to use a spectrum analyzer.
VCORR1 is an hexadecimal index whose value can vary from 000 to 3FF. Possible values
of the parameters PC1 and PC2 are 0 or 1.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
16
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Settings
Control address
This is a local parameter that allows you to change the telecontrol address of the module used by the Management module. See chapter 7 for more information about this
parameter.
Reference output power level
This is a local parameter that allows you to modify the internal value of reference level of
output power of the device. See chapter 7 for more information about this parameter.
Reflected power threshold
Reflected power threshold is used to activate the reflected power alarm. The threshold is
defined as the number of dB below the transmitted power to be achieved by the reflected
power to set the alarm. If the threshold is -4dB, which means that the alarm is activated
when the reflected power reaches a value equal to the transmitted power-4dB (ie, 26dBm
for a transmitted power of 30dBm).
The equipment operation according to this threshold and the reflected power measured
at the power stage is summarized in Table 5.1. The equipment returns to its normal
operation when it is below the threshold.
Reflected power
< Threshold
> Threshold
Unit Type
1W / 5W / 10W
1W / 5W
> Threshold
10W
Operation
normal
reduction between 3-4dB on output power
and alarm Reflected power
reduction between 5-6dB on output power
and alarm Reflected power
Table 5.1: Behavior-based on reflected power.
Amplifier temperature threshold
It is an adjustable threshold of temperature at the power amplifier stage. The default
threshold value is established at 65o C. Equipment operates according to this threshold value and the temperature measurement. The behaviour is summarized in Table
5.2. Equipment returns to its normal operation mode when temperature drops below the
threshold value.
Temperature
< Threshold
> Threshold
Unit type
1W / 5W / 10W
1W / 5W / 10W
Operation
normal
alarm Temperature
Table 5.2: Behavior-based on amplifier stage temperature.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
17
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Settings
Mutes
The device has 3 different mutes, MPEG Overflow, MPEG Error and RF.
Mute MPEG Overflow
• Mute MPEG Overflow active: The modulator will switch off the transmission if the
transmission buffer is filled due to a high rate of entry thus activating the alarm
MPEG overflow.
• Mute MPEG Overflow disabled: Whenever the maximum storage capacity of the
buffer is transferred (alarm MPEG overflow active) the modulator clears the buffer
to start again.
Mute MPEG Error
The MPEG error is activated when the ASI input has not MPEG data. In this case physical
synchronization at ASI level is correct but video/audio data is not present. So, the user
has the option to switch off the output in order to avoid transmitting useless information
when the MPEG data are incorrect.
• Mute MPEG Error active: The modulator will switch off the transmission if the
alarm MPEG error is activated.
• Mute MPEG Error disabled: The modulator will not switch off the transmission
although the alarm MPEG error is activated.
Mute RF
This parameter allows to manually mute the RF output of the device.
Date and hour
Those parameters are only configured by Management module.
Reset of fan(s) lifetime.
This parameter is used to reset the lifetime counter of fan(s). This reset must be done
after replacing a failed fan with a new one.
i
While in 5W / 10W devices two fans are supplied only one fan is supplied in 1W
ones.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
18
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Settings
Language
Selects the menu language of external programmer. Selectable languages are English,
Spanish or French.
Parameter
Unit Type
Input Channel
Input offset frequency
Auto configuration
Constellation
FEC
Guard Interval
Bandwidth
FFT
Cell ID Enabled (only SFN)
Cell ID
Output Channel
Output offset frequency
Offset step
Output Power
Linearity correction (VCORR1)
Linearity correction (PC1 and PC2)
Control address
Output level Reference
reflected power threshold
Amplifier Ta threshold
Mute MPEG Overflow
Mute MPEG Error
Mute RF
Date and hour
Reset of fan(s) lifetime
Language
Range
1W / 5W / 10W
21 to 69
-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3
Manual or automatic
QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 or 7/8
1/4, 1/8, 1/16 or 1/32
6MHz, 7MHz or 8MHz
8K or 2K
ON / OFF
0 to 65535
21 to 69
-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3
1/6MHz, 1/7MHz or 1/8MHz
000 to 3F0
0 or 1
0 to 254
0dBm to 53dBm
-2dB to -6dB
0o C to 99o C
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
English, Spanish or French
Table 5.3: Settings.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
19
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Measurements
5.2 Measurements
The measurements offered by the equipment are detailed in Table 5.5. These measurements are accessible either locally and remotely.
Demodulator synchronized
Indicates if demodulator is synchronized.
BER pre-Viterbi and post-Viterbi
Indicates the bit error ratio before and after Viterbi decoder at the input of the demodulator.
Output and reflected power
In the power amplifier there are two detectors, one for the transmitted power and another
for the reflected power. The equipment offers a measure of the transmitted power in
Watts and dBm, while measuring of the reflected power is shown in Watts. The minimum
reflected power that shows the equipment is 10% of the transmitted power. For example,
for 1W the lowest power displayed is 0.01 W.
LDMOS transistor currents of power amplifier
Indicate the consumption currents of the two LDMOS transistors at output stage of power
amplifier stage in amperes. As they are class AB polarization devices, the current depends on both the output power (is higher the greater the curve) and frequency.
The value of these currents determines the alarm ART05 - Transistors current. When
one of two currents are out of the thresholds (Table 5.4) this alarm is activated.
Unit type
1W
5W
10W
Lower threshold
10 mA
50 mA
50 mA
Upper threshold
300 mA
1200 mA
2400 mA
Table 5.4: Alarm Transistors current thresholds.
Output local oscillator status
It shows the state (locked or unlocked) of the output local oscillator.
Tuning voltage for local oscillator
It shows the tunning voltage (in Volts) for local output oscillator.
Automatic gain control voltage
Indicates (in V), the voltage of the circuit of automatic gain control of the equipment. The
automatic gain control circuit is at the power stage and you can configure its operation in
auto or manual mode.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
20
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Measurements
1.2V, 5V and 27V lines voltage
The device is able to monitor the exact continuous voltages at the power supply stage.
The value of these voltages determines the alarm AHW01 - Alimentation fault.
Local or external 10MHz reference
Indicates if a 10MHz signal is present at the external connector or not.
Amplifier stage temperature
Temperature (in o C) measured at the output stage of the power amplifier. The behaviorbased on temperature of the equipment has already been showed in Table 5.2.
Fan(s) lifetime
This parameter shows the life counter in hours of each of the fans.
Parameter
Demodulator synchronized
BER pre-Viterbi
BER post-Viterbi
Output power
Reflected power
Currents of LDMOS transistor 1 in power
amplifier
Currents of LDMOS transistor 2 in power
amplifier
Output local oscillator status
Output local oscillator tuning voltage
Automatic Gain Control voltage
1.2V line voltage
5V line voltage
27V line voltage
Local or external 10MHz reference
Amplifier stage temperature
Fan(s) lifetime
Usual Range
<10% Output power
100mA to 250mA (1W), 450mA to
1100mA (5W), 700mA to 1500mA
(10W)
100mA to 250mA (1W), 450mA to
1100mA (5W), 700mA to 1500mA
(10W)
Locked
1,5V to 24V
1V to 5V
1.2V ± 0.1V
5V ± 0.2V
27V ± 0.3V
Local
Table 5.5: Measurements.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
21
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Alarms
5.3 Alarms
The device incorporates an alarm history log where last 10 alarm events are stored.
This log is erased any time the module is reset. Each alarm is able to be activated or
disactivated to be stored in the log.
Each alarm can be enable or disable. It is possible to configure an hysteresis time
in seconds individually for each alarm in order to allow an independent detection of the
device alarms. The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm to be considered as valid.
Specific alarms are summarized in Table 5.6:
ATX03 - FPGA communication
It is activated when there are internal communication errors between the modulator’s
microcontroller and the FPGA where the modulation process is done.
ATX04 - No IF signal
Indicates no modulator output signal in intermediate frequency. It maybe caused because
a bad modulator’s operation or errors in the ASI.
When this alarm is activated the Output power alarm is also activated.
ATX05 - MPEG Overflow
Indicates a buffer overflow in the modulator caused by a high data rate in the ASI input
for that DVB-T parameters (FFT, Guard interval, FEC, Constellation)
ATX06 - MPEG Error
Modulator detects an error in the input data at MPEG level.
ART01 - Output oscillator
It is activated when the output oscillator (which converts the intermediate frequency into
the output channel frequency) is unlocked.
ART02 - Reflected power
It is activated when the reflected power level exceeds the reflected power threshold level.
When this happen, the device decreases its output power level in 3-4dB. The device
recovers its power level when the reflected power level decreases under the threshold
level. This threshold value is user configurable.
ART03 - Temperature
It is activated when the temperature level at power amplifier stage exceeds its temperature’s threshold level or when the temperature level at FPGA stage exceeds its temperature’s threshold level.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
22
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Alarms
ART04 - Output power
It is activated when the transmitted power level decreases 6dB or more from its power
level.
ART05 - Transistors current
The value of the two LDMOS transistors currents at amplifier stage determines the activation of this alarm. When one of two currents are out of the thresholds (Table 5.4) this
alarm is activated.
ART06 - Power 3dB.
It is activated when the transmitted power level decreases betwenn 3dB and 6dB its
power level.
AHW01 - Alimentation fault
It is activated when any of the DC voltages in the power supply stage is out of this usual
range or when exist a general failure at the power supply.
This alarm is also activated when temperature alarm pin in DC connector is activated.
This pin is activated in the Power Supply Units.
i
Alimentation fault is also activated when temperature alarm pin in DC connector
at rear panel of the device is activated. This temperature alarm pin is activated by
the Power Supply Units.
AHW02 - HW error
It is activated when an internal hardware failure is detected.
Table 5.6 shows the LED status of the modules based on the active alarm.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
23
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Functional description
Alarms
code
ATX03
ATX04
ATX05
ATX06
ART01
ART02
ART03
ART04
ART05
ART06
AHW01
AHW02
Alarm
FPGA communication
No IF DVB-T signal
MPEG overflow
MPEG error
Output oscillator
Reflected power
Temperature
Output power
Transistors current
Power 3dB
Alimentation fault
HW error
Status LED
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange blinking
Orange
Red
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
External programmer LED
A
C
B
Table 5.6: LED Behavior-based on alarms.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
24
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Remote Control and Monitoring
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
The remote control and monitoring system is based on the use of the Management
module, which communicates with all the modules of the system via a RS485 bus in
back pannel unit.
The Management Module monitors the measures and alarms of all the system’s modules, allowing to change their settings.
Each module is assigned with a different remote control address that identifies it within
the shared communication bus.
The system enables remote management and communication with a remote monitoring
center. This communication can be of various types and using various interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, GSM/GPRS/UMTS).
For more details, please refer to the chapter "Operation" in System Manual.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
25
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Local control
7 Local control
Following is detailed the menus structure corresponding to the External Programmer
interface (see External Programmer instrument manual for more details).
7.1 Menu structure
The menus in this module are the tree structure:
Regenerative
DVB-T
1W
1.01
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.POWER
3.INPUT
4.OUTPUT
5.MODULATOR
6.MUTE CONF
7.SYSTEM
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
..
MPEG error
Low Power!
LOG
02/04
ARE01
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Dem sinc: 1
CB: 3.3e-6
VB: <1.0e-6
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
..
MPEG ov: ON
MPEG er: ON
..
Conf: AUTO
Const:64QAM
FEC:
3/4
Interv: 1/8
BW:
8MHz
FFT:
8K
Cell_id: ON
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
C_id:
Vers:
0
1.02
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
..
CTRLadd:001
10MHz: ext
Offset: 166
Type:
1W
01:19:19
00/00/0000
1.2V:1.256V
5V: 4.963V
27V: 27.37V
Vnt:000001h
Language
selection
--------English
..
ATX03:
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
..
ATX03:
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
..
ATX03:
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
001s
001s
000s
000s
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
ON
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Legend
Short press square
..
Regenerativ
DVB-T
1W
Vers: 1.01
Des: 00005
Boot: 1.03
Long press square
Short press circle
Long press circle
Press up
Press down
..
Serial Num
050712452001
26
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
When connecting the external programmer to the module, first of all the firmware version
of the External Programmer is displayed for a few seconds. After this, a welcome screen
showing the unit type and the firmware version is displayed:
Transmitter
DVB-T
1W
1.01
Start menu allows selecting one of the six main menus, Alarms, Power, Input, Output,
Modulator , Mute configuration and System:
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.POWER
3.INPUT
4.OUTPUT
5.MODULATOR
6.MUTE CONF
7.SYSTEM
7.1.1 Alarms Menu
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: State, Log or Configuration.
7.1.1.1 Alarms > State Menu
..
MPEG error
Low Power!
This menu shows the active alarms on the equipment. The list of possible alarms is
shown in the following table:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
27
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
Text alarm
FPGA comm
Modul. OFF
MPEG overfl
MPEG error
Unlock OscO
Pow Ref!
Temperature
Pow LOW!
Curr Trts!
Pow 3dB!
Power failure
HW error
Alarm description
ATX03 FPGA communication
ATX04 No IF DVB-T signal
ATX05 MPEG overflow
ATX06 MPEG error
ART01 Output oscillator
ART02 Reflected power
ART03 Temperature
ART04 Output power
ART05 Transistors current
ART06 Power 3dB
AHW01 Alimentation fault
AHW02 HW error
Remarks
7.1.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu
LOG
02/04
ARE01
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
This menu shows a log of the alarms on the equipment.
7.1.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Hysteresis, Enable or Log
ON/OFF.
7.1.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu
..
ATX03:
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
001s
001s
000s
000s
This menu allows setting the alarms hysteresis (the minimum time that must remain active
- or deactive - an alarm to be considered as valid).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
28
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu
..
ATX03:
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows enabling or disabling alarms.
7.1.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
..
ATX03:
ATX04:
ATX05:
ATX06:
ART02:
ART03:
ART04:
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ART05:
ART06:
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows configuring which alarms are to be shown in the log.
7.1.2 Power Menu
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
29
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
Text
PC1
PC2
Vcag3
RF MUTE
Parameter
Output power in dBm
Output power in W
Reflected output power
LDMOS transistor 1 current of power
amplifier
LDMOS transistor 2 current of power
amplifier
Linearity
precorrector
voltage
(VCORR1)
Linearity precorrector voltage (PC1)
Linearity precorrector voltage (PC2)
Automatic Gain Control 3 Voltage
RF Mute
Ref
Reference output power level*
ThrPr
Reflected power threshold
Tem
ThrTem
Amplifier stage temperature
Amplifier stage temperature threshold
Pt
Pt
Pr
IdT1
IdT2
Vcorr1
Remarks
< 10%Pt [W]
000 to 3F0. Resolution 010
0 / 1
0 / 1
1.0V to 5.0V
ON / OFF
0dBm to 53dBm.
Resolution
0.1dB
-2dB to -6dB .
Resolution
1dB
Resolution 0.5o C
Resolution 1o C
*Reference output power level
This parameter allows you to modify the internal value of reference level of output power
of the device. These values are adjusted by the manufacturer and shall only be modified if a change in the output channel is done. Modifying these values is due to the
response curve of the detectors and couplers used is not perfectly flat across the UHF
band. In case you do not change the values it is possible to read not accurate output
power level when you make a channel change. It is the benchmark used by the transmitter for measuring output power level. If the output channel is changed without adjusting
the reference output power, the reading must be accurate to ±1dB .
i
i
When the equipment is muted the screen shows in both the first and the second
line, Pt: MUTED!.
The device is factory adjusted at a given output power. This power corresponds
to a certain adjustment of the voltages of linearity precorrector. These voltages
are not constant for different values of output power, or even for different output
channels, although they can be modified using the programmer as will be explained
further ahead. This is the reason why it is recommended not to modify the output
power unless the apropiate measuring equipment (spectrum analyzer), that will
allow to readjust the linearity precorrector’s values, is available. (See chapter 9 of
this manual for further information).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
30
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.3 Input Menu
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Dem sinc: 1
CB: 3.3e-6
VB: <1.0e-6
Text
Parameter
Channel
Offset
Input channel
Input frequency offset
Fre
Dem sinc
Input frequency
Demodulator
synchronized status
CB
Normal
range
14 to 78
-4 to +4
Remarks
Step in system configuration menu
MHz
0 = not synchronized /
1 = synchronized
BER pre-Viterbi of Input
signal
BER post-Viterbi of Input
signal
VB
7.1.4 Output Menu
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
Text
Parameter
Channel
Offset
Output channel
Output frequency offset
Normal
range
14 to 78
-4 to +4
Fre
Osc
Output frequency
Output local oscillator status
Output local oscillator
voltage
lock
unlock
1.5V to
24.0V
Vtun
i
Remarks
Step in system configuration menu
MHz
/
Chapter 9 describes in full detail the considerations that must be taken into account
when making any changes in the output channel. Such considerations are related
to both the output power and the adjustment of the linearity precorrection settings.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
31
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.5 Modulator Menu
..
Conf: AUTO
Const:64QAM
FEC:
3/4
Interv: 1/8
BW:
8MHz
FFT:
8K
Cell_id: ON
C_id:
Vers:
Text
Conf
Input ASI
Parameter
Auto configuration mode
ASI input selected
Const
Constellation
FEC
Coding rate
Interv
Guard Interval
BW
FFT
Bandwidth
FFT
Cell_ID
Cell ID
Vers
FPGA FW version
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
0
1.02
Remarks
MANUAL or AUTO
1 or 2
QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM (Readonly in
AutoMIP ON)
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 (Readonly
in AutoMIP ON)
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32 (Readonly in
AutoMIP ON)
6MHz / 7MHz / 8MHz
2K / 8K (Readonly in AutoMIP ON)
OFF / ON (When is ON the value can
be 0 to 65535)
32
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.6 Mutes Menu
..
MPEG ov: ON
MPEG er: ON
Text
Parameter
MPEG ov
MPEG er
MPEG overflow mute
MPEG error mute
Normal
range
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
Remarks
7.1.7 System Menu
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Configuration, Language,
Version or Serial number.
7.1.7.1 System > Configuration Menu
..
CTRLadd:001
10MHz:Local
Offset: 166
Type:
1W
01:19:19
00/00/0000
1.2V:1.256V
5V: 4.963V
27V: 27.37V
Vnt:000001h
Text
Parameter
CTRLadd
Control address*
10MHz Input (local or external)
10MHz
Offset
Frequency offset step
Type
00:00:00
00/00/00000
1.2V
5V
27V
Unit type
Internal time
Internal date
1.2V voltage
5V voltage
27V voltage
Vnt
Fan(s) lifetime counter (h)
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Normal
range
Remarks
0 to 254
Local/ ext
166/ 143 /
125
1W, 5W or 10W
166 = 1/6MHz; 143 =
1/7MHz; 125 = 1/8MHz
hh:mm:ss
dd/mm/YYYY
RESET for reset the lifetime counter
33
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Local control
Menu structure
*Control address
This is a local parameter that allows you to change the telecontrol address of the module
used by the Management module. This address can be between 0 and 254.
7.1.7.2 System > Language Menu
Language
selection
--------English
This menu allows you to select the menu language for the external programmer. The
available languages are Spanish (Español) , English (English) or French (Français).
7.1.7.3 System > Version Menu
..
Regenerativ
DVB-T
1W
Vers: 1.00
Des: 00001
Boot: 1.01
Text
Vers
Des
Boot
Parameter
Microcontroller version
Microcontroller developement version
Bootloader version
7.1.7.4 System > Serial number Menu
..
Serial Num
050712452001
This menu shows the internal serial number of the equipment.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
34
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Local control
Putting into operation
7.2 Putting into operation
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment.
• Connect the External programmer to the RJ45 connector at the front pannel of
the device.
• Set the input frequency (parameters Channel and Offset).
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Dem sinc: 1
CB: 3.3e-6
VB: <1.0e-6
• Set the modulation parameters (parameters Mode, Conts, FEC, Interv, BW and
FFT).
..
Conf: AUTO
Const:64QAM
FEC:
3/4
Interv: 1/8
BW:
8MHz
FFT:
8K
Cell_id: ON
C_id:
Vers:
i
0
1.02
Auto Configuration parameter activation allows configuring the modulation parameters automatically from the input signal.
• Set the output frequency (parameters Channel and Offset).
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
• Check the output power (parameter Pt).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
35
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Local control
Putting into operation
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
• Check that there are no alarms in menu Alarms > Status.
..
There is
no alarm
• Check that frontal LED status keeps green.
• Connect the measurement instrument to the RF MONITOR connector at the front
pannel.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
36
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Troubleshooting
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED and alarm status
code
Alarm
Status
LED
Orange
Description
ATX03
ATX04
FPGA communication
No IF DVB-T signal
Orange
Check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2)
A high data rate in input flux
Check RF input signal cabling
The Retransmitter is damaged
Check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2)
Overtemperature at amplifier stage
Check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2)
The Retransmitter is damaged
In case of power reflected alarm is set,
check flowchart diagnosis (see section
8.2). By the opposite, the Retransmitter
is damaged
Temperature alarm in a Power Supply
Unit is set or the Retransmitter is damaged
The Retransmitter is damaged
ATX05
ATX06
ART01
ART02
MPEG overflow
MPEG error
Output oscillator
Reflected power
ART03
ART04
Temperature
Output power
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
blinking
Orange
Red
ART05
ART06
Transistors current
Power 3dB
Orange
Orange
AHW01 Alimentation fault
Orange
AHW02 HW error
Orange
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
The Retransmitter is damaged
37
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
RF service failure
The Status LED of Retransmitter and Power
Supply Unit are ON?
YES
Go to "No output power"
flowchart.
NO
Check the Power Supply
Unit troubleshooting.
NO
Remove the TX from the subrack.
The Status LED of
Power Supply Unit is
ON?
YES
The Retransmitter is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
38
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
No output power. Output power
alarm is set. Status LED: Red
Alimentation fault or
HW error alarm is set?
YES
The Retransmitter is damaged
NO
No IF DVB-T signal
alarm is set?
NO
The Retransmitter is damaged
YES
MPEG error alarm is
set?
YES
Check RF input signal cabling
NO
The Retransmitter is damaged
Reflected power alarm is set.
Status LED: Orange blinking
Unplug the antenna cable and
connect a load to the output power
of the module.
Reflected power alarm
is still set?
NO
Check the antenna and
its cabling.
YES
The Retransmitter is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
39
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Changing the output channel
9 Changing the output channel
Every time the output channel is changed, it may be necessary to readjust its output
power, the reference value used to show the output power readings and the linearity
precorrector values.
This is because the response curve of the detectors and couplers used to measure the
output power is not perfectly flat over the whole UHF band, and also because the linearity
of the output stage LDMOS transistors is not constant with the frequency.
Generally, if the frequency variation is small (less than 24 MHz or three UHF channels)
there will be no need for any readjustment whatsoever.
In any case the procedure must be as follows:
1. Connect the external programmer to the device and go to the OUTPUT menu:
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Osc:
Lock
Vtun: 7.9V
2. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Channel in the external programmer screen,
enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the
△ ▽ keys until reaches the desired output channel.
3. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Offset in the external programmer screen,
enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the
△ ▽ keys until reaches the desired output frequency.
4. Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds.
5. Connect a spectrum analyzer or power meter to the device output and measure the
actual transmitted power.
The output power reading seen in the external programmer control will be the same
as before the channel was changed, but the actually transmitted power may have
shifted even more than 1dB if the channel change has involved a significant frequency leap.
6. Readjust the device output power to the desired value by measuring it in the spectrum analyzer or power meter. Go to the menu POWER:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
40
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Changing the output channel
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
7. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Pt in the external programmer screen, enter
in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the △ ▽
keys until reaches the desired output power.
8. Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds.
9. Readjust the reference output power to the desired value. In the menú POWER:
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:--.-dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
i
Ref parameter shows --.-dBm instead of last recorded value
10. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Ref, enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value by pressing the △ ▽ keys until it matches the value
read in the spectrum analyzer or the power meter (this means that if the spectrum
analyzer reads 31 dBm, the reference value must be readjusted until the external
programer shows 31.0 dBm).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
41
R&S MLx Retransmitter DVB-T
Changing the output channel
..
Pt: 31.0dBm
Pt: 1.25 W
Pr:< 0.12 W
IdT1: 130mA
IdT2: 134mA
Vcorr1: 1E0
PC1:
0
PC2:
1
Vcag3: 1.1V
MUTE RF:OFF
Ref:31.0dBm
ThrPr: -4dB
Tem:+42.5ºC
ThrTem:65ºC
11. Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds. Once the change
has taken place, the device’s output power level measurement (shown in the output
power menu) will be updated.
12. Verify that the shoulder attenuation is over 38 dB.
13. If this isn’t, by selecting the central frequency in the spectrum analyzer as the output frequency of the device and configuring a span that largelly allows observing
the 8M Hz signal bandwidth (for example 20M Hz ), modify the precorrection voltages, parameters PC1, PC2 and Vcorr1 so the shoulders attenuation reaches
the best possible value (always higher than 38dB ) as follows:
(a) Select, with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Vcorr1 in the external programmer
screen, enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value to
3F0 by pressing the △ ▽ keys. Record the new value by pressing the key
for a few seconds.
(b) Try the four combinations for the parameters PC1 and PC2 in order to get
the best combination for shoulder attenuation. Select, with △ ▽ keys, the
parameter PC1 / PC2 in the external programmer screen, enter in editing mode
by pressing the
key and modify its value to 0 or 1 by pressing the △ ▽ keys
(It is no necessary record the values for checking the shoulder attenuation).
PC1
PC2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
(c) With the best of the 4 combinations. Record the new values by pressing the
key for a few seconds.
(d) Then, modify with △ ▽ keys, the parameter Vcorr1 in the external programmer screen, enter in editing mode by pressing the
key and modify its value
from 3F0 to 000 by pressing the △ ▽ keys until it reaches the best possible
value of shoulders attenuation.
(e) Record the new value by pressing the key for a few seconds.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
42
R&S R MLx
Management Module
Instrument Manual
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
The Instrument Manual describes the following R&S R MLx Management Module models and options:
• MLx-B011 MLx Management Module
• MLx-B012 MLx Mgmt. Module w/ UMTS
• MLx-B013 MLx Mgmt Module Battery
• MLx-K2 MLx SNMP
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&SMLx.
R&SMLx Management Module
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Overview
3
2 Putting into operation
4
3 Technical specifications of MLx Management Module
6
4 Physical description of MLx Management Module
8
5 Functional description
5.1 System description . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Control bus RS485 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 SNMP agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8 GSM/GPRS/UMTS modem . . . . . . . . .
5.9 DVB-T Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10 Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11 Advanced Network Options . . . . . . . . .
5.11.1 Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2 NAT – Network Address Translation
5.11.3 Virtual Server (Port Forwarding) . .
5.11.4 Watchdog Ping . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12 Email System notifications . . . . . . . . .
12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6 Management of a MLx System via Web Interface
7 Local control
7.1 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.1 Log > File Menu . . . . . . .
7.1.1.2 Log > Log-Total Menu . . . .
7.1.1.3 Log > Log-Date Menu . . . .
7.1.2 System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2.1 System > Commands Menu
7.1.2.2 System > Date-Time Menu .
7.1.2.3 System > Name Menu . . .
7.1.2.4 System > Language Menu .
7.1.2.5 System > Ethernet Menu . .
7.1.2.6 System > Webserver Menu .
7.1.3 Modules Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
12
14
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
26
26
26
27
28
29
30
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
34
1
R&SMLx Management Module
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
34
34
35
35
36
37
37
37
37
38
38
38
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.1.6
7.1.7
7.1.3.1 Modules > Status Menu . . . . . . .
7.1.3.2 Modules > Reset HW Menu . . . .
7.1.3.3 Modules > Load configuration Menu
Relays Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4.1 Relays > Inputs Menu . . . . . . . .
7.1.4.2 Relays > Outputs Menu . . . . . . .
Battery Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5.1 Battery > Status Menu . . . . . . .
7.1.5.2 Battery > Activate Menu . . . . . .
USB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6.1 USB > USB to Local Menu . . . . .
7.1.6.2 USB > Local to USB Menu . . . . .
Receiver Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
39
40
2
R&SMLx Management Module
Overview
1 Overview
The remote control and monitoring system is based on the use of the MLx Management
Module, which communicates with all modules through a serial bus RS485. The MLx
Management of the can monitor all measures and alarms of system modules, plus the
ability to change their configuration parameters.
The system enables communication with a remote monitoring center. This communication can be of various types and various interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, relays).
MLx Management Module hosts a web application for managing each system module,
checking the system status, configuring the interfaces of remote communication and controlling alarm history.
Figure 1.1 shows the simplified operation of the remote control and monitoring system.
REMOTE CENTER
EXTERNAL
SIGNALS
EXTERNAL
ALARM
ETH / MODEM
RELAY
MANAGEMENT
RELAY
RS485
ALARMS
SETTINGS
RESET
MEASURES
RS485
RELAY
MODULES
Figure 1.1: General block diagram of remote control and monitoring system.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
3
R&SMLx Management Module
Putting into operation
2 Putting into operation
Configuration of IP address
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment. For further measurement examples and background information, please refer
to next chapters.
• Connect the External programmer to the RJ45 connector at the front pannel of
the device.
• Select the menu System > Ethernet > IP and check the IP address (192.168.2.150
for example).
..
COMMANDS
DATE-TIME
NAME
..
IP
MASK
GATEWAY
DHCP
LANGUAGE
ETHERNET
WEBSERVER
»
»
..
IP:
192.168.
002.150
• Configure the network address of the PC as follows:
– IP address = 192.168.2.xxx with xxx 6= 150, 0, 1, 255
– Subnet mask = 255.255.255.000
PC and Management then belong to the same IP subnet.
• Connect the network interface of the PC to ethernet port on the Management (at
front or rear side).
• Log on to the Management using the previously connected PC and a web browser
entering the network address of the MLx Management Module. The login screen
appears.
• Log in with the user name admin and the password (default: admin). The entry
screen of the Management appears in the browser:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
4
R&SMLx Management Module
Putting into operation
• Check the system date and hour.
• Check if all modules in the system are present at the entry screen and no alarms
are active.
i
If some module are not present, check the telecontrol addresses and bus
485 connections and execute the command Generate new configuration file.
• Check that frontal status LED signals keep green or switch off (depending on the
options activated).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
5
R&SMLx Management Module
Technical specifications of MLx Management Module
3 Technical specifications of MLx Management Module
Management
Protocols:
Network port:
USB port:
Serial Ports:
Operating system:
File system:
IPv4, DHCP, NTP, FTP, http, SNMP v1/v2c, +ppp support
Ethernet 10/100 Mbps
USB 2.0 compatible
Port 1: External programmer
Port 2: RS485 (control bus)
Linux kernel
JFFS2, EXT2/3, VFAT/FAT, NFS support
Relays
Inputs:
Input-Output isolation:
Response:
Outputs:
5 Optocouplers
5000V
5µs
5 Free potencial contact relays
Battery:
Battery type:
Battery connector:
Rechargeable LI-ION 7.2V 2A
MOLEX 43025-0600
DVB-T Monitor:
Frequency range:
Noise figure:
Lock margin:
Freq image rejection:
Input range:
Standard:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
1 UHF 6, 7 or 8MHz channel
≤6dB
±500KHz
≥ 65dB
-40dBm to +15dBm
ETS300744
6
R&SMLx Management Module
Technical specifications of MLx Management Module
UMTS-Modem:
Frequency bands:
Output Power:
Sensitivity:
Antenna’s nominal impedance:
Antenna Gain:
Antenna Radiation pattern:
Antenna Polarization:
EGSM 850/900/1800/1900MHz
UMTS 2100MHz
Class 4 (2W, 33dBm) @ GSM 850/900
Class 1 (1W, 30dBm) @ GSM 1800/1900
Class 3 (0,25W, 24dBm) @ UMTS
Class E2 (0,5W, 27dBm) @ EDGE 850/900
Class E2 (0,4W, 26dBm) @ EDGE 1800/1900
-108.2 dBm @ WCDMA 2100 MHz
-107 dBm @ GSM 850/900 MHz
-106 dBm @ DCS1800/PCS1900 MHz
50 mΩ
0 dBi
Omnidirectional
Vertical
Power supply:
DC Input voltage:
DC Input voltage connector*:
i
27 ±0.3VDC
DIN41612 30 pins male
Not only power supply voltage but also control. 30 pins functions are detailed in
physical description.
DC Power Consumption:
Management:
Management + Modem (@worst network conditions):
Management + Charging battery (maximum):
2.7W
5.5W
13.5W
Temperature:
Operating temperature:
Relative humidity:
0 to 45o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
Dimensions and Weight:
Dimensions (WxHxD):
Weight:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
50x215x250 mm
1.5 Kg
7
R&SMLx Management Module
Physical description of MLx Management Module
4 Physical description of MLx Management
Module
POWER
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
Figure 4.1: MLx Management.
Table 4.1 details possible LED status. Figure 4.2 details frontal connectors module. Figure 4.3 details rear connectors module.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
8
R&SMLx Management Module
Physical description of MLx Management Module
UMTS/GSM Antenna
SIM card slot
USB port
External programmer connector
(RJ45)
DVB-T receiver input (BNC female)
POWER
Power supply
Alarm
Status LED's DVB-T Receiver
Battery
Modem
Ethernet
BATTERY
UMTS/GSM
Ethernet port (RJ45)
MANAGEMENT
MODULE
Figure 4.2: Description of frontal panel.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
9
R&SMLx Management Module
Physical description of MLx Management Module
Battery Slot
Ethernet port (RJ45)
Battery connector
MAC:XX:XX:
XX:XX:XX:XX
ETH
Relays
CE
BATT
MLX-B011
2501.0024.00
Ser.108580
Rohde & Schwarz
RELAYS
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 5
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
DC connector
10
+27V
yyyyyyyy
SN
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
CTRL_A
RESET
CTRL_B
Tª ALARM
0V
1
Figure 4.3: Description of rear panel.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
10
R&SMLx Management Module
Physical description of MLx Management Module
LED
LED status
Off
Green
Green
Orange
Green
Orange
Red
Off
Green
Red
Orange
Red blinking
Green blinking
Off
Green
Orange
Red
Off
Green
Description
POWER LED (Power supply)
No power supply
No active alarms
ALARM LED (communication alarm)
No communication alarms in the system
Any communication alarm in the system
DVB-T RX LED (DVB-T receiver)
OK or not configured
Warning
Fault
BATTERY LED (Battery)
No battery driver enabled
Charged battery
Not detected or discharged battery
Charging or detecting battery
System battery-powered nearly discharged battery
System battery-powered charged battery
UMTS/GSM LED (Modem)
No modem supplied
OK or not configured
Initializing
Error
ETHERNET LED (Ethernet)
No ethernet cable detected
Ethernet data transfer
Table 4.1: Description of LED status.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
11
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
5 Functional description
5.1 System description
Operation is based on the periodic survey of all modules connected to the control bus
from the MLx Management. In each polling cycle each module informs the Management of their status. Information shared by the management and the modules can be of
three types: measures, configuration and alarms.
The diagram of Figure 5.1 explains the flow of information between the system modules,
the Management and the remote center.
REMOTE CENTER
EXTERNAL
SIGNALS
EXTERNAL
ALARM
ETH / MODEM
RELAY
MANAGEMENT
RELAY
RS485
ALARMS
SETTINGS
RESET
MEASURES
RS485
RELAY
MODULES
Figure 5.1: Scheme with the flow of information.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
12
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
System description
A 12 characters Name can be set in order to identify the system.
MLx Management has a log with all status changes of alarms called Alarm Log with a
capacity of up to 999 entries.
MLx Management can communicate with a remote control center through various interfaces.
MLx Management keeps date and hour about 2 weeks approximately unplugged from
power supply. It is possible to set manually the data and hour or synchronize it automatically from a NTP server. It is possible to configure GMT offset for setting the offset for
the correspondent time zone.
Control over the MLx Management module can be done by the External programmer
and from a web application hosted on it.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
13
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
Commands
5.2 Commands
MLx Management has several commands to perform a serie of actions on the system.
These commands can be applied over Web interface (see chapter "Operation" in system
manual) or over the External Programmer interface (see chapter 7 in this manual). Some
of these commands take effect only on the Management system and other affects on the
modules:
• Generate new configuration file
Cleans the Management configuration file and build a new one checking the modules connected to the RS485 bus.
Do not affect to the RF service.
• Restart application software
Software restart of the Management application.
Do not affect to the RF service.
• Reset Management
Hardware reboot of the Management.
Do not affect to the RF service.
• Reset (Default values)
Hardware reboot of the Management setting the default values only in the Management module.
Do not affect to the RF service.
• BackUp
Exports the configuration file.
Do not affect to the RF service.
• System Status File
Exports the system status file.
Do not affect to the RF service.
• Management software upgrade
Upgrade the software version of the Management. Generate new configuration
file command is executed automatically at the end of this command.
Do not affect to the RF service.
• Module firmware upgrade
Upgrade the microcontroller, FPGA or bootloader firmware version of a module.
Microcontroller and bootloader upgrade causes a fault in the RF service of the device affected during upgrading process. FPGA upgrade causes only a short-time
fault in the RF service at the end of the process.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
14
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
Commands
• Modules Broadcast firmware upgrade
Upgrade the microcontroller, FPGA or bootloader firmware version of all Modules
with the same type in the system.
Microcontroller and bootloader upgrade causes a fault in the RF service of the devices affected during upgrading process. FPGA upgrade causes only a short-time
fault in the RF service at the end of the process.
• Erase alarm log
Clean all entries in the alarms log.
Do not affect to the RF service.
• Save log file to PC
Exports alarms log to a file.
Do not affect to the RF service.
• Hardware Reset to all modules
Hardware power supply reset on all the modules of the system connected to the
reset pin.
Causes a short-time fault in the RF service of all the devices.
• Software Reset Module
Software reset on a module.
Causes a short-time fault in the RF service of the device affected.
This command cannot be applied over the External Programmer interface.
• Load configuration
Load configuration from the Management configuration file to a module.
May cause a RF service fault in the device affected if the configuration is not properly.
• Language
Change the language of all modules in the system.
Do not affect to the RF service.
• Date and Hour
Change the date and hour of all modules in the system.
Do not affect to the RF service.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
15
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
Control bus RS485
5.3 Control bus RS485
Control bus uses a serial RS485 protocol. This bus is build connecting all subrack’s modules to the Management through the Back Panel Unit (see details in back panel unit
documentation). Back Panel Units of various subracks can be interconnected through a
minijack wire in order to built a bus for a higher system.
A module or a back panel don’t need to be switched on to offer connection continuity on
the control bus.
All modules connected to the control bus need to be identified with different control addresses. Possible control addresses are from 1 to 254. These control addresses are
used to identify module’s frames arriving to the management module. Special control address 0 is reserved to insert a new module in the system. When a 0 address is detected,
the Management changes this special address to next free address.
i
The control address can only be configured locally using the external programmer.
If two modules are configured with the same control address, the management module
will receive frames with the same identifier from different units. This will cause a lost of
communication with both units.
The init file system construction is initiated by an user command (Generate new configuration file) that execute an initial polling cycle (30 seconds duration aproximately)
that poll all possible addresses and incorporates all found. After that the polling cycle
is performed continuously and cyclical and lasts aproximately one second of duration for
the whole system. In each turn of each poll the modules send to Management a frame
with their status.
When a module does not respond, the Management will activate a communication failure
alarm with that module:
Code
ACOMM
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Name
Communication lost
16
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
Alarms
5.4 Alarms
Table 5.1 gathers all possible alarms of every element in the system.
A special alarm can be set as a result of the summatory of various alarms. This special
alarm has two levels of importance, FAULT or WARNING.
Code
FAULT
WARNI
ACOMM
AHW01
AHW02
ARE01
ARE02
ATX01
ATX10
ATX02
ATX03
ATX04
ATX05
ATX06
ATX11
ATX07
ATX08
ATX09
ATX12
ATX13
ART01
ART02
ART03
ART04
ART05
ART06
AG101
AG102
AG103
AG104
AG105
AG106
AG201
AG202
AG203
AG204
AG205
AG206
Description
Fault alarm
Warning alarm
Communication lost
Alimentation fault
HW error
Input level
Input oscillator
ASI error 1
ASI error 2
MIP error
FPGA communication
No IF DVB-T signal
MPEG overflow
MPEG error 1
MPEG error 2
10MHz error
1pps error
FPGA oscillator
TS error
T2MI error
Output oscillator
Reflected power
Temperature
Output power
Transistors current
Power 3dB
Communication GPS1
EBO HW error GPS1
Receptor error GPS1
Phase-frequency GPS1
Antenna GPS1
Unlocked GPS1
Communication GPS2
EBO HW error GPS2
Receptor error GPS2
Phase-frequency GPS2
Antenna GPS2
Unlocked GPS2
Element
all
all
all
all
all
Gapfiller
Gapfiller
Transmitter T/T2
Transmitter T/T2
Transmitter T/T2
Transmitter T/T2
Transmitter T/T2
Transmitter T/T2
Transmitter T/T2
Transmitter T/T2
Transmitter T/T2
Transmitter T/T2
Transmitter T/T2
Transmitter T2
Transmitter T2
Gapfiller / Transmitter
Gapfiller / Transmitter
Gapfiller / Transmitter
Gapfiller / Transmitter
Gapfiller / Transmitter
Gapfiller / Transmitter
GPS Switcher
GPS Switcher
GPS Switcher
GPS Switcher
GPS Switcher
GPS Switcher
GPS Switcher
GPS Switcher
GPS Switcher
GPS Switcher
GPS Switcher
GPS Switcher
T/T2
T/T2
T/T2
T/T2
T/T2
T/T2
Table 5.1: Alarms.
MLx management module collects the internal logs from the modules in a general Alarm
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
17
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
Alarms
Log with a maximun of 999 entries. As well as the alarm status’ changes, the Alarm Log
registers some system events summarized in table 5.2.
Code
INIT_
GENER
LOG_I
RSTHW
RSTSW
START
ARL01
ARL02
ARL03
ARL04
ARL05
ABT02
ABT03
ABT04
ABT05
ARX01
ARX02
ARX02
ARX03
ARX03
AUN01
AUN02
AUN03
AUN04
DATA_
VPN__
RGPS1
RGPS2
Description
System init or system command of reset
System Command of new configuration file generated
Alarm Log cleaned
Hardware Reset to all modules
Modules Software Reset
Software module start
Relay input 1 activated
Relay input 2 activated
Relay input 3 activated
Relay input 4 activated
Relay input 5 activated
Battery fully-charged
Battery-powered system
Battery not detected
Charging battery
Channel unlocked
CBER critical threshold
CBER non-critical threshold
VBER critical threshold
VBER non-critical threshold
Reset UCA N+1 Control
Commutation Relay X
Decommutation Relay X
Commutation (testing input) Relay X
Modem Data connection
VPN connection
GPS1 Hardware Reset
GPS2 Hardware Reset
Table 5.2: Log events.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
18
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
Battery
5.5 Battery
Management holds an auxilary power supply system (battery) that can be used in power
supply faulty situations. This system is based on a battery placed in an independent but
integrated slot (for an easy replacement) at the rear side of the Management module.
Battery functionality can be enabled or disabled by software.
When the faulty situation happens in Management’s power supply, the battery starts supplying the Management module during a maximum time of 15 minutes.
Each event relationship with the battery is logged to the alarms log.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
19
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
Ethernet
5.6 Ethernet
Management module provides an ethernet interface via two RJ45 connectors, one of
them located at the rear panel of the module and the other one at the front panel.
Only one of the two RJ45 connectors must be connected at the same time.
The IP for Ethernet interface can be configured manually (IP / Netmask / Gateway / DNS)
or via DHCP server.
By default the Ethernet interface has the IP address of a local network (192.168.1.1) with
its corresponding netmask (255.255.255.0) and no Gateway.
With this interface, the system can be monitored using the SNMP protocol or by the web
application hosted in the management module.
Check the "Commissioning" chapter in system Manual for more information.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
20
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
SNMP agent
5.7 SNMP agent
Management system enables remote monitoring via SNMP over an Ethernet network or
a modem through a SNMP agent (version v2c) according to the MIB specification MIB
SNMPv2, detailed in the RFC1901 to RFC1908.
To activate the SNMP agent is necessary to activate a software option in the Management
through an activation code, a string of 10-digit alpha-numeric type:
b2af5b994c
i
This code is only valid for the module for which it was generated and is not
valid for another different module. Once activated, the SNMP agent is not
able to be desactivated by user.
Through the SNMP agent can:
• Check the state of system parameters.
• Set the system parameters.
• Receive automatic notifications (Traps) to a maximum of 4 destination IP addresses.
These four IP addresses are factory configured to default values and can only be
modified via SNMP.
RS-XX8000-MLX-MIB.mi2 structures the information by different branches.
Check the "Monitoring and Control via SNMP" section in system Manual for more information.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
21
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
GSM/GPRS/UMTS modem
5.8 GSM/GPRS/UMTS modem
Management enables remote monitoring system on a GSM, GPRS or UMTS network.
To configure the modem is necessary to introduce a SIM card in the slot at the front
pannel of the Management module and configure the connection parameters in the web
application of the Management.
Check the "Modem interface configuration" section in system Manual for more information.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
22
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
DVB-T Monitoring
5.9 DVB-T Monitoring
The system is able to monitor the DVB-T signal before transmitting to the antenna. For
this, the monitor outputs of all RF channels must be mixed and connected to the MONITOR input at the front of the Management module.
The DVB-T receiver implements a tuner for all frequencies, so the DVB-T signals are demodulated and are measured cyclically in order to monitor the system.
The DVB-T receiver is automatically configured with all the RF channels detected by the
Management. But, more channels can be added manually for monitoring external DVB-T
signals.
Configuration parameters of the DVB-T monitor are accessible via External Programmer and via Web browser:
• On. Checked in order to activate the channel monitoring.
• Single channel mode. Checked in order to activate the single channel mode. Only
this channel will be monitored.
• Channel. To select the RF channel. This selection can be automatic, with the
system channels or manual, for the external channels. Following frequency parameters are only configurable for manual channel selection.
• Frequency parameters: Offset. To select the frequency offset (4 to -4), it means
the number of steps of channel resolution.
• Frequency parameters: Channel resolution. To select the channel resolution
(125KHz = 1/8 MHz, 143KHz = 1/7 MHz, 166KMHz = 1/6 MHz).
• Frequency parameters: Bandwidth. To select the signal bandwidth (6MHz /
7MHz / 8MHz).
• Sample time. To select the time of continuos monitoring in each cycle. This parameter must be configured from 7.0 to 11.9 seconds.
• Alarms. For each channel, 3 alarms are available:
– ARX01 - Unlocks. This alarm is set whether the DVB-T receiver was not able
to synchronize with the incoming DVB-T signal. The Hysteresis is the minimum number of unlocks in the Sample time to set this alarm. On parameter
allows enabling or disabling this alarm. Log parameter allows configuring if
the alarm is to be shown in the log.
– ARX02 - CBER. This alarm is set whether the measured BER before Viterbi is
out of one of the two Thresholds ( Critical and Non-critical). On parameter
allows enabling or disabling this alarm. Log parameter allows configuring if
the alarm is to be shown in the log.
– ARX03 - VBER. This alarm is set whether the measured BER after Viterbi is
out of one of the two Thresholds ( Critical and Non-critical). On parameter
allows enabling or disabling this alarm. Log parameter allows configuring if
the alarm is to be shown in the log.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
23
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
DVB-T Monitoring
The configuration and measures can be reset (This also forced the receiver to delete the
manual channels ans automatically search the RF channels detected by the Management) through the command Reset DVB-T Receiver.
The status of DVB-T monitor:
• Channel. The enabled RF channel.
• Locked. This parameter indicates if the DVB-T receiver is able to synchronize with
the incoming DVB-T signal or not.
• Unlocks: ARX01. The alarm ARX01 - Unlocks status.
• Unlocks: Measure. The current number of unlocks in the Sample time.
• CBER: ARX02. The alarm ARX02 - CBER status.
• CBER: Measure. The current measure of BER before Viterbi.
• VBER: ARX03. The alarm ARX03 - VBER status.
• VBER: Measure. The current measure of BER after Viterbi.
• Constellation. Constellation of the incoming DVB-T signal.
• FEC. FEC of the incoming DVB-T signal.
• Guard interval. Guard interval of the incoming DVB-T signal.
• FFT. FFT of the incoming DVB-T signal.
• Time. Period of time in second since last monitoring cycle.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
24
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
Relays
5.10 Relays
The interface is based in a serie of 5 isolated inputs through optocouplers and 5 free
electrical relay outputs distributed in the connector at the rear panel according to Figure
5.2. Management is monitoring the inputs status and is able to set the outputs status.
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 5
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
Figure 5.2: Relays connector.
The inputs can be configured to act directly on the outputs, in which case you can configure a pulse time in seconds at the entrance or just move the status of the entrance to
the exit (pulse 0s). It can also be configured to monitor its condition (without acting on
the outputs).
Regarding outputs, they can act on level (0s) or pulse in seconds. You can also configure
the resting status of the output relay as open or closed.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
25
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
Advanced Network Options
5.11 Advanced Network Options
Several advanced network options can be configured.
5.11.1 Routing
It is possible to configure 4 different routing rules to particular network destinations. The
parameters for configuring are:
1. Destination. Could be a host or a network.
2. Netmask. It describes if destination is a host or a network.
3. Gateway or next hop. It is the address of the next station to wich the packet is to
be sent on the way to its final destination.
4. Interface. Indicates what locally available interface is responsible for reaching the
gateway. There are 3 possibilities:
• Ethernet, is the wired connection.
• GPRS(3G), is for modem interface.
• VPN, for private VPN Interface.
For example, if you want to reach a host on the network 10.16.16.128/23 (direction between 10.16.16.128 and 10.16.16.254) through the ethernet network must generate the
input to the routing table:
Destination
10.16.16.128
Netmask
255.255.255.240
Gateway
Interface
Ethernet
The configuration of the routing table can only take place through the web application.
5.11.2 NAT – Network Address Translation
This technique is used for translating internal (local area) network address to external IP.
i
It is necessary an external Switch Module for interconnecting more than one
devices with de Management via Ethernet communication.
For getting external access from an Ethernet module connected to the Management,
when this one is using GPRS/3G modem, it is necessary activate this NAT option.
5.11.3 Virtual Server (Port Forwarding)
A combined technique of NAT and routing table is used to allow communications by
external host with services provided within the private local area network.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
26
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
Advanced Network Options
i
It is necessary an external Switch Module for interconnecting more than one
devices with the Management.
5.11.4 Watchdog Ping
When this option is enabled, Management will ping a remote host for checking connection status. If the remote IP address does not respond to Ping, the device will execute a
Reset Management command automatically in order to reconnect the communication.
Watchdog will execute 4 attempts (60 minutes) after first try. The attempts counter is
showed on system web page.
This option could be useful for testing un-wired connections (3G modem).
A test ping is able to be manually executed in order to check the connection status.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
27
R&SMLx Management Module
Functional description
Email System notifications
5.12 Email System notifications
Management has a SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) client embedded, so it is possible to send system/modules information by email.
For getting this, an email sender account is necessary. The SMTP server information
necessary is:
• server(:port)
• user
• password
• identification options (StartTLS and/or TLS)
Recipient emails
Up to 4 recipient emails can be configured. The destination email addresses are the only
necessary information.
The trigger for sending an email could be (an email will be sent):
• Always. After Interval time.
• IP change. After Interval time, if the GPRS/3G modem IP has been changed.
• Event. After Interval time, if the log has a new event.
• Alarm. At least one monitored module has one or more activated alarm.
The data sending in the email could be:
• Modem. Summary modem information.
• System. Summary system information.
• Modules. Summary information from the modules.
• Log. alarms log entries from last Interval time.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
28
R&SMLx Management Module
Management of a MLx System via Web Interface
6 Management of a MLx System via Web
Interface
Check the "Operation" chapter in system Manual for more information.
i
• For the web account admin, it is possible to reset the password to default
value (admin) via External programmer (see chapter 7 of this manual).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
29
R&SMLx Management Module
Local control
7 Local control
Following is detailed the menus structure corresponding to the External Programmer
interface (see External Programmer instrument manual for more details).
7.1 Menu structure
The menus in this module follow the tree structure shown below:
R&S-MLx
Control
Unit
v: 02.002.1
MENU
1.LOG
2.SYSTEM
3.MODULES
4.RELAYS
5.BATTERY
6.USB
7.RECEIVER
..
FILE
LOG-TOTAL
LOG-DATE
..
COMMANDS
DATE-TIME
NAME
LANGUAGE
ETHERNET
WEBSERVER
..
001TX :C14x
002REM:C21v
050GPS:
v
..
CONFIG FILE
RESTART
REBOOT
DEFAULT
..
Delete
alarm log?
...No
ART04 26/143
16/03/2011
ON: 11:16:11
OFF:11:16:12
..
USB LOCAL
LOCAL USB
..
STATUS
ACTIVATE
..
Battery OK
..
CONFIG
STATUS
..
CONFIG
STATUS
RESET
..
UPGRADE
071UN1:TX v
..
Reset
modules?
...No
..
Temp: 31.0º
Time: 18:56
16/04/2011
..
Select
the date:
02/01/2000
ART04 26/143
003 16/03/11
ON: 11:16:11
OFF:11:16:12
..
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
..
STATUS
RESET HW
LOAD CONFIG
..
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
1
2
3
INPUT
INPUT
4
5
..
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
..
001TX :C14x
002REM:C21v
050GPS:
v
..
>Languages
french
english
spanish
071UN1:TX v
..USB MUX
>usba
file1
backup
..
IP
MASK
GATEWAY
DHCP
..
IP:
192.168.
002.150
..
INDIVIDUAL
BROADCAST
..
INPUT 1
Pulse:
--:--:--
..
Name:
TREDESS000
..
MANAGEMENT
MODULES
..
Enable
the battery?
...No
Output:
-
..
LOG
..
Inputs:
01= 02= 03=
04= 05=
..
LOG
BACKUP
STATUS
..
CONFIG
STATUS
..
001TX :C14x
002REM:C21v
050GPS:
v
..
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
1
2
3
071UN1:TX v
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
4
5
Legend
Short press square
..
Mask:
255.255.
255.000
..
Gateway:
000.000.
000.000
..
DHCP:
..
OUTPUT 1
Pulse:
--:--:--
Long press square
Short press circle
Long press circle
Press up
Press down
Stand-by: =
State:
=
..
Outputs:
01= 02= 03=
04= 05=
OFF
..Restore
the admin
password?
...No
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
30
R&SMLx Management Module
Local control
Menu structure
When connecting the external programmer to the module, first of all the firmware version
of the External Programmer is displayed for a few seconds. After this, a welcome screen
showing the unit type and firmware version is displayed:
R&S-MLx
Control
Unit
v: 02.002.1
Start menu allows selecting one of the main menus Log, System, Modules, Relays,
Battery, USB and Receiver:
MENU
1.LOG
2.SYSTEM
3.MODULES
4.RELAYS
5.BATTERY
6.USB
7.RECEIVER
7.1.1 Log Menu
..
FILE
LOG-TOTAL
LOG-DATE
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: File, Log-Total or Log-Date.
7.1.1.1 Log > File Menu
..
Delete
alarm log?
...No
This menu lets you delete all entries in the Alarm Log. To proceed just select Yes and
press for more than three seconds the key.
7.1.1.2 Log > Log-Total Menu
ART04 26/143
003 16/03/11
ON: 11:16:11
OFF:11:16:12
This menu displays all alarm log entries. In the first line shows the code of the alarm,
the number of current entry and the total number of entries in the log. The second line
displays the telecontrol adress and the date, the third the time of the activation and the
forth the time of desactivation.
To view the log selecting the entry with the △ ▽ keys. Use the key to exit the menu.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
31
R&SMLx Management Module
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.1.3 Log > Log-Date Menu
..
Select
the date:
02/01/2000
This menu lets you filter log entries by date.
To view the log selecting the date with the △ ▽ keys and select the key.
7.1.2 System Menu
..
COMMANDS
DATE-TIME
NAME
LANGUAGE
ETHERNET
WEBSERVER
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Commands, Date-Time,
Name, Language, Ethernet or Webserver.
7.1.2.1 System > Commands Menu
..
CONFIG FILE
RESTART
REBOOT
DEFAULT
This menu allows to execute one of the commands from section 5.2 listed below:
Text
CONFIG FILE
RESTART
REBOOT
DEFAULT
Command
Generate new configuration file
Restart application software
Reset Management
Reset (Default values)
In order to execute a command seleccting with the △ ▽ and keys. Then confirm the
next screen just select Yes and press for more than three seconds the key.
7.1.2.2 System > Date-Time Menu
..
Temp: 31.0º
Time: 18:56
16/04/2011
This menu allows to check the temperature at the Management board and to set the time
and date of the Management.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
32
R&SMLx Management Module
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.2.3 System > Name Menu
..
Name:
TREDESS000
This menu lets you change the name of the system. To change it just put the cursor on
the desired character and change it with the keys decrease and increase.
7.1.2.4 System > Language Menu
..
>Languages
french
english
spanish
This menu lets you execute the Language command in order to change language of
Management and the rest of the modules. The available languages are French (french),
English (english) or Spanish (spanish).
7.1.2.5 System > Ethernet Menu
..
IP
MASK
GATEWAY
DHCP
This menu allows to configure the ethernet interface contains the following submenus:
IP, Mask, Gateway:
..
IP:
192.168.
002.150
..
Mask:
255.255.
255.000
..
Gateway:
000.000.
000.000
and DHCP:
..
DHCP:
OFF
7.1.2.6 System > Webserver Menu
..Restore
the admin
password?
...No
This menu allows to reset the password to default value (admin) for the web account
admin.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
33
R&SMLx Management Module
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.3 Modules Menu
..
STATUS
RESET HW
LOAD CONFIG
This menu has the following two submenus: Status, Reset HW and Load configuration.
7.1.3.1 Modules > Status Menu
..
001TX :C14x
002REM:C21v
050GPS:
v
071UN1:TX v
This menu allows to check the status of all modules in the system.
Each line (001TX :C21x) correspond to one module:
Control address
Type
001...254
TX : Transmitter
REM : Gap Filler
REG : Retransmitter
Channel
status
x : Any active alarm
v : No active alarm
? : No communication
GPS : GPS switcher
UN1:TX : N+1 unit for Transmitters
UN1:REM : N+1 unit for Gapfillers
7.1.3.2 Modules > Reset HW Menu
..
Reset
modules?
...No
This menu allows to execute the command Hardware Reset to all modules.
7.1.3.3 Modules > Load configuration Menu
..
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
This menu allows to execute the command Load configuration. There are two options:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
34
R&SMLx Management Module
Local control
Menu structure
Internal:
..
001TX :C14x
002REM:C21v
050GPS:
v
071UN1:TX v
In order to execute the command seleccting the desire module with the △ ▽ and keys.
Then confirm the next screen just select Yes and press for more than three seconds the
key.
External:
..USB MUX
>usba
file1
backup
i
A USB memory within the Management configuration file must be connected
into USB port before selecting this menu.
With the △ ▽ and keys selecting the Management configuration file (usually named
backup) in the desired USB folder. In case of a correct Management configuration file
detected a new screen like internal previous menu will be shown. The process follows as
previous menu.
7.1.4 Relays Menu
..
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
This menu allows to manage the relays inputs and outputs.
7.1.4.1 Relays > Inputs Menu
..
CONFIG
STATUS
This menu allows to set the relays inputs parameters and check the relays inputs status:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
35
R&SMLx Management Module
Local control
Menu structure
Relays > Inputs > Config Menu
..
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
1
2
3
INPUT
INPUT
4
5
..
INPUT 1
Pulse:
--:--:-Output:
-
»
With the △ ▽ and keys selecting the desired input. This screen allows to set the input
pulse in hh : mm : ss (−− : −− : −− in case of acting by level) and the output to act
from 1 to 6.
Relays > Inputs > Status Menu
..
Inputs:
01= 02= 03=
04= 05=
This menu allows visualizing the inputs status (= open input, 6= closed input).
7.1.4.2 Relays > Outputs Menu
..
CONFIG
STATUS
This menu allows to set the relays outputs parameters and check the relays outputs
status:
Relays > Outputs > Config Menu
..
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
1
2
3
..
OUTPUT 1
Pulse:
--:--:--
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
4
5
Stand-by: =
State:
=
»
With the △ ▽ and keys selecting the desired output. This screen allows to set the
output pulse in hh : mm : ss (−− : −− : −− in case of acting by level), the stand-by
status (= open, 6= closed) and the output actual status.
Relays > Outputs > Status Menu
..
Outputs:
01= 02= 03=
04= 05=
This menu allows visualizing the outputs status (= open output, 6= closed output).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
36
R&SMLx Management Module
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.5 Battery Menu
..
STATUS
ACTIVATE
This menu has the following two submenus: Status and Activate.
7.1.5.1 Battery > Status Menu
..
Battery OK
This menu allows to check the status battery. Possible status:
• Battery OK
• Charging
• Disconnected
• The battery is disabled
• Battery - powered
In case of Battery - powered screen is like this:
..Battery
- powered
14:32
Shut down?
This menu allows to check the counter til the shut down or execute the shut down seleccting with the △ ▽ keys Shut down? and then pressing key.
7.1.5.2 Battery > Activate Menu
..
Enable
the battery?
...No
This menu allows to enable the battery.
7.1.6 USB Menu
..
USB LOCAL
LOCAL USB
This menu, which allows to manage the USB port, has the following two submenus: USB
to Local and Local to USB.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
37
R&SMLx Management Module
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.6.1 USB > USB to Local Menu
..
UPGRADE
..
MANAGEMENT
MODULES
»
This menu allows to upgrade Management or the modules firmware.
In case of modules upgrading submenu two option are possible:
..
INDIVIDUAL
BROADCAST
7.1.6.2 USB > Local to USB Menu
..
LOG
BACKUP
STATUS
This menu allows to export the alarm log, the management configuration file or the status
file to a external memory stick.
7.1.7 Receiver Menu
..
CONFIG
STATUS
RESET
This menu allows to manage the receiver to monitoring the RF signals.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
38
R&SMLx Management Module
Troubleshooting
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED status
LED status
Off
Green
Green
Orange
Green
Orange
Red
Off
Green
Red
Orange
Red blinking
Green blinking
Off
Green
Orange
Red
Off
Green blinking
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Description
PWR LED (Power supply)
No power supply
No active alarms
ALARM LED (communication alarm)
No communication alarms in the system
Any communication alarm in the system (see section 8.2)
DVB-T RX LED (DVB-T receiver)
OK or not configured
Warning (see section 8.2)
Fault (see section 8.2)
BATT LED (Battery)
No battery driver enabled
Charged battery
Not detected or discharged battery. Check the battery connections.
Charging or detecting battery
System battery-powered nearly discharged battery. Recover
the system power supply.
System battery-powered charged battery. Recover the system power supply.
MODEM LED (Modem)
No modem supplied
OK or not configured
Initializing
Error (see section 8.2)
ETHERNET LED (Ethernet)
No ethernet cable detected. Check the Ethernet cabling.
Ethernet data transfer
39
R&SMLx Management Module
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
RS485 communication problems.
ALARM LED: Red
Check all modules in order
to avoid repeated control addresses.
Remove all RS485 jack 2.5mm
cabling from subrack connections.
RS485 communication
problems with the subrack modules?
NO
Check RS485 bus external cabling
YES
Remove all the modules from the subrack.
Insert the modules one by one into the subrack.
RS485 communication
problems with all modules?
YES
The back panel or Management is damaged
NO
The module with communication problem is
damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
40
R&SMLx Management Module
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
DVB-T monitoring fault or warning.
DVB-T RX LED: Red or orange
The
Status
LED
of
Transmitter/Gap
Filler/Retransmitter in
green?
NO
Check Transmitter/Gap
Filler/Retransmitter
troubleshooting
YES
Check the monitoring cabling.
Remote communication problems.
MODEM LED: Red
NO
via modem?
Check the Ethernet cabling.
YES
Reconfigure the modem parameters.
No response or Communication error message at modem status?
NO
Check the Antenna
connection or SIM card.
YES
The Managemet module is damaged.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
41
R&S R MLx
GPS Unit
Instrument Manual
The Instrument Manual describes the following R&S R MLx GPS Unit models and options:
• MLx-B500 MLx GPS Basic Unit
• MLx-B510 MLx GPS Receiver Module
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&SMLx.
R&SMLx GPS Unit
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Overview
3
2 Putting into operation
2.1 GPS antenna installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
3 Technical specifications
8
4
7
4 Physical description
4.1 GPS System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
5 Functional description
5.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
24
7 Local control
7.1 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.1 Alarms > Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu .
7.1.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu . . .
7.1.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
7.1.2 Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 GPS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3.1 GPS > GPSi Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3.2 GPS > GPSi > Satellites Menu . . . . . . . .
7.1.3.3 GPS > GPSi > Position Menu . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3.4 GPS > GPSi > Date Menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4.1 System > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . .
7.1.4.2 System > Language Menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4.3 System > Version Menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4.4 System > Serial number Menu . . . . . . . .
7.2 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
13
18
19
21
25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
29
30
30
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
33
1
R&SMLx GPS Unit
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via alarm status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
34
34
35
2
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Overview
1 Overview
GPS System consists of a GPS Basic Unit and one or two GPS Receiver Modules.
The GPS System generates all reference synchronization signals (10MHz and 1PPS)
needed by the transmitter modules of the system.
GPS Basic Unit is responsible for managing the switching of the synchronization signals
(10MHz and 1PPS) from one of the redundant GPS receiver modules or the external input. This unit is also responsible for distributing the synchronization signals.
The internal control system of the device enables both internal configuration and measures. The equipment can be managed locally and remotely by connecting the Management Module. The equipment can also be managed locally by connecting External
Programmer.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
3
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Putting into operation
2 Putting into operation
2.1 GPS antenna installation
GPS antenna post mount kit
The post mounting kit allows you to mount the GPS antenna onto a vertical or horizontal
post.
The steps needed to assemble the kit are as follows:
1. Clamp the GPS antenna (2) on the post bracket (1).
2. Attach the GPS antenna (2) to the post bracket (1) with the four screws (3).
3. Insert the cable socket (4) into the antenna socket.
4. Insert the plastic cable tie (5).
5. Wind the heat shrink sleeve around the connector adapter.
6. Rotate the post clamp (6) to obtain vertical and horizontal mounting.
7. Attach the post bracket (1) to the post with the post clamp (6), use the two screws
(7), nuts and lock washers.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
4
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Putting into operation
GPS antenna installation
GPS Antenna Installation
This procedure describes the main steps of a successful GPS antenna installation:
• Where to install the antenna?
• How to evaluate the signal attenuation due to cables between the antenna and the
GPS Timing Receiver?
• How to choose cable type?
Where to Install the GPS Antenna?
The antenna must be located in place with direct view of GPS satellites. Usually the best
place is on the roof with no important masks due to other buildings for instance. It is important to avoid proximity with high power transmitter which could radiate energy at GPS
L1 frequency (1 575.42 ± 1.023 MHz). Usually the exact coordinates of GPS antenna
is unknown and the GPS Timing Receiver will determinate this location automatically. In
that nominal case a proper sky visibility is required: a vertical observation cone in sky
open view of a semi-angle higher or equal to 65◦ - optimum at 85◦ - is recommended.
See figure below.
How to Evaluate the Signal Attenuation?
Cables are required to connect antenna to GPS Timing Receiver. Two types of cables
are mostly used. The cable attenuation is proportional to length. Typical attenuations at
1575 MHz are:
Cable type
Attenuation
RG58
0.9 dB/m
RG213
0.35 dB/m
Once the cable path is defined between antenna and GPS Timing Receiver, estimate the
attenuation based on cable lengths. Typical attenuation based on standard cable lengths
(including 0.5 dB for connectors):
Cable type
10m
25m
50m
100m
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
RG58 attenuation
9.5dB
23dB
No cable
No cable
RG213 attenuation
4dB
9.5dB
18 dB
35.5 dB
5
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Putting into operation
GPS antenna installation
Furthermore, it is strongly recommended protecting the GPS Timing Receiver with lightning protection. This protection must be installed at the cable entrance into the building
with a proper earth/ground connection The Lightning Protection attenuation is typically 1
dB.
How to Choose Cable Type?
To ensure correct GPS signal reception, the overall system of antenna / cable / protection
(and line amplifier / splitter if used) requires a relative gain which must be higher than
15dB and preferably less than 30 dB to avoid signal saturation.
The gain at the receiver is the sum of:
• Antenna gain (G1)
• Line amplifier gain if used (G2)
• Lightening protection loss (G3)
• Cable losses (G4)
• N-N adapter loss if used (G5 = - 0.5 dB).
Then global gain of installation must be
15 dB <=G1 + G2 + G3 + G4 + G5 <=30 dB
The recommended maximum bent radius is 100 mm (RG213) and 20 mm (RG58).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
6
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Putting into operation
Putting into operation
2.2 Putting into operation
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment. For a further measurement examples and background information, please
refer to next chapters.
1. After GPS antenna installation (see the section 2.1), connect the Anntena to the
connector at the front pannel of the GPS receiver module x (with x = 1 or 2).
2. Log on to the Management Module via web browser (see System Manual for more
detailed information).
3. Go to Configuration > Modules menu and select the GPS Basic Unit.
4. After waiting GPS start-up time, check that GPS Receiver Module x status is locked
(parameter Status GPS Receiver Module x is locked).
i
• Cold start-up time < 20 minutes.
• Hot start-up time < 5 minutes.
5. Check the output (parameter Active Output).
6. Check that no alarms in GPS Receiver Module x.
7. Check that frontal STATUS LED and GPS Receiver Module x STATUS LED keeps
green.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
7
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Technical specifications
3 Technical specifications
GPS Receiver Module:
Frequency Output (10 MHz):
Accuracy: with GPS
< ±1 × 10−12
(average over 24 hours when GPS locked)
Accuracy: without GPS
Medium Term Stability:
< ± 2 Hz
< ±2 × 10−10 / day
(Without input reference, constant temperature, after 2 weeks of continuous operation
locked on input source)
Short time stability (Allan Variance):
@1s:
@10s & 100s:
Temperature Stability (peak to peak):
Phase noise (typical, static conditions):
@10 Hz:
@100 Hz:
@1 KHz:
@10 KHz:
@10 KHz:
Harmonic distortion:
Signal:
1 × 10−11
3 ×10−11
1 × 10−9 from 0o C to 60o C (S/N ≥
101888)
1 × 10−9 from -5o C to 70o C (S/N ≤
101887)
-120 dBc/Hz
-135 dBc/Hz
-145 dBc/Hz
-150 dBc/Hz (S/N ≥ 101888)
-145 dBc/Hz (S/N ≤ 101887)
-30 dBc / -35 dBc typ (S/N ≥ 101888)
-40 dBc (S/N ≤ 101887)
Sine Wave / 50Ω
Time Output (1PPS):
Accuracy to UTC (GPS locked):
Holdover Mode after 4 hours:
Holdover Mode after 1 day:
± 25 ns (1σ )
0.8 µ s
12 µ s
(at constant temperature, after 24 hours of
GPS lock)
Signal:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
TTL / 50Ω
8
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Technical specifications
Operating Mode:
Cold start-up time:
Hot start-up time:
Permanent self-test of main functions:
< 20 minutes
< 5 minutes
yes
Interfaces:
Antena Input Connector:
Antena Input Impedance:
Output 10MHz/1PPS & data:
BNC female
50Ω
DIN 41612 32pins 2A male
Antenna:
Frequency range:
Gain:
Noise figure:
Out Band Rejection @ 1575.42 ± 50
MHz:
Power supply:
Operating Temperature:
Relative humidity:
Connector:
Impedance:
i
1575.42 MHz ± 1.023 MHz
35 dB typical
< 2.2 dB (1.8dB typical)
60 dB typical
5V / 27 mA
-40o C to 85o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
N female
50Ω
Antennas should be placed in a free sky vision location and in a 360o angle, with
no obstacles around.
GPS Basic Unit:
Frequency (10 MHz) inputs:
Frequency (10 MHz) outputs:
External Input (10 MHz) connector:
External Input (10 MHz) impedance:
Output (10 MHz) connector:
Output (10 MHz) inpedance:
Output (10 MHz) level
(from GPS receiver):
10 MHz Insertion losses:
Time (1 pps) inputs:
Time (1 pps) outputs:
External Input (1 pps) connector:
External Input (1 pps) impedance:
Output (1 pps) connector:
Output (1 pps) impedance:
Output (1 pps) signal:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
3 redundant (2 from GPS + 1 external)
8
BNC female
50Ω
BNC female
50Ω
2.5 dBm±1.5dB (S/N ≥ 101888)
-2.5 dBm±1.5dB (S/N ≤ 101887)
<4dB
3 redundant (2 from GPS + 1 external)
8
BNC female
50Ω
BNC female
50Ω
TTL
9
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Technical specifications
Power supply:
DC Input voltage:
DC Input voltage connector:
DC voltage reset connector:
27 ± 0.3 VDC
2 x SMD power jack male (2.1mm ID,
5.5mm OD)
2 x SMD jack female (2.5mm)
DC Power Consumption:
GPS Switcher without GPS receivers:
GPS Switcher with 2 GPS receivers
(at 25o C):
GPS Switcher with 2 GPS receivers
(during warm-up time):
3W
9W (S/N ≥ 101888)
15W (S/N ≤ 101887)
12W (S/N ≥ 101888)
20W (S/N ≤ 101887)
Temperature:
Operating temperature:
Relative humidity:
0 to 45o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
Dimensions:
GPS Switcher (WxHxD):
GPS receiver (WxHxD):
Antenna GPS (External diameter):
Antenna GPS (Height without connector):
483 x43x166 mm
483 x43x166 mm
90 mm
98.4 mm
Weight:
GPS Switcher:
GPS receiver:
Antenna GPS:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
2,8 Kg
0,6 Kg
0,3 Kg
10
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Technical specifications
Remote control and monitoring:
Connecting the system to the remote control and monitoring module (Management)
allows remote communication to the control centre. This communication can be made
using different interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, mobile communications, relays).
Local and remote settings:
Settings
• Switching Mode.
• Drift.
• Hysteresis.
• External Input Enable.
• Mute.
• Control address.
• Date and hour.
• Language.
• Hardware reset of GPS board.
Measurements
• Output selected.
• GPS status.
• GPS Holdover countdown.
• GPS board model.
• Operating mode GPS board.
• Number of satellites.
• Satellite status.
• SNR.
• Latitude, Longitude and Longitude.
• GPS date.
• 5V GPS line voltage (V).
• 12V line voltage (V).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
11
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Technical specifications
Alarms:
• AG101 - Communication GPS1.
• AG102 - EBO HW error GPS1.
• AG103 - Receptor error GPS1.
• AG104 - Phase-frequency GPS1.
• AG105 - Antenna GPS1.
• AG106 - Unlocked GPS1.
• AG107 - SFN failure GPS1.
• AG201 - Communication GPS2.
• AG202 - EBO HW error GPS2.
• AG203 - Receptor error GPS2.
• AG204 - Phase-frequency GPS2.
• AG205 - Antenna GPS2.
• AG206 - Unlocked GPS2.
• AG207 - SFN failure GPS2.
• AHW01 - Alimentation fault.
• AHW02 - HW error.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
12
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Physical description
4 Physical description
4.1 GPS System
GPS BASIC UNIT
ANTENNA
GPS 1
GPS 2
Figure 4.1: GPS System: GPS Basic Unit and two GPS receiver modules.
Figure 4.2 details frontal connectors module. Figure 4.3 details rear connectors module.
LED
LED status
Off
Orange
Red
Green
Off
Orange/Green blinking
Orange
Red
Green
Description
Power LED
No power supply
Any active alarm
No output signals
No active alarms
GPS 1 / GPS 2 LED
No power supply / GPS Not detected
Detecting GPS hardware
GPS locked or in holdover mode but any active alarm
GPS unlocked or GPS hardware failure
GPS locked and no active alarms
Table 4.1: Description of LED status.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
13
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Physical description
Figure 4.2: Description of frontal panel.
GPS System
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
14
R&SMLx GPS Unit
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Telecontrol connector
(Jack 2.5mm Female)
1 PPs External Input (BNC female)
Reset connector
(Jack 2.5mm Female)
10 MHz External Input (BNC female)
1PPs Output (BNC female)
10 MHz Output (BNC female)
Power Supply connector
+27 VDC (Jack Male)
Figure 4.3: Description of rear panel.
Physical description
GPS System
15
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Functional description
5 Functional description
Internal composition of GPS System is outlined in the block diagram of Figure 5.1.
10MHz 1pps
EXTERNAL
10MHz 1pps
GPS Switcher board
Distribution stage
Power supply
board
uC
10MHz 1pps
GPS1Receiver Module
ANTENNA GPS1
10MHz 1pps
GPS2Receiver Module
ANTENNA GPS2
Figure 5.1: Simplified block diagram of the GPS System.
Main stages at the GPS System are:
Power supply
All necessary internal voltages to operate the equipment are generated through converters DC/DC in the power supply stage from the 27VDC input voltage.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
16
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Functional description
The internal voltages are 5VDC for the GPS boards and 12VDC . All of them are monitoring by the microcontroller.
Those voltages can be reset from an external pin.
GPS Basic Unit
GPS Switcher board is responsible for managing the switching of the synchronization
signals (10MHz and 1PPS) from one of the three possible inputs: GPS receiver 1, GPS
receiver 2 or the external input.
The external input can be disabled.
This unit is also responsible for distributing 10MHz and 1PPS synchronization signals
into 8 outputs.
GPS Switcher board allowing hot swapping connection of GPS receiver boards without
interrupting the operation.
GPS Switcher board manages the status and configuration of the GPS receivers. Each
GPS receiver board is automatically detected for the GPS Switcher board.
GPS Receiver module
The locking process is about 20 minutes in cold start-up (<5 minutes in hot start-up) and
permanent self-test of main functions are performed.
The GPS board also reports the status of 8 satellites. The information in these 8 satellites
is: the identification number of the satellite, if the satellite is synchronized or not, and the
SNR of the received signal from this satellite.
The GPS board also offers a serie of alarms about its operation and status.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
17
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Functional description
Settings
5.1 Settings
The equipment has a number of adjustable parameters detailed below and summarized
in Table 5.1. These parameters are accessible both locally and remotely.
Switching Mode
Determines switching mode. The possible values are:
• Automatic. Switching is automatically determined by the input ready. Ready conditions (with the same priority) are: GPS locked or GPS in Holdover. In case of no
one GPS ready, external input is selected.
• AutoSync. Switching is automatically determined by the input ready. Ready conditions (with different priority) are: GPS locked (higher priority) or GPS in Holdover.
In case of GPS1 Holdover and GPS2 locked, the output will be switched to GPS2.
In case of no one GPS ready, external input is selected.
• Manual from GPS1. Switching is manually set from GPS 1.
• Manual from GPS2. Switching is manually set from GPS 2.
• Manual from external input. Switching is manually set from external input.
Drift
This parameter allows configuring the drift in µs in the GPS receivers boards.
Hysteresis
This parameter allows configuring the Hysteresis in mitutes and seconds. Hysteresis is
the time between the causing event and the switching action.
External Input Enable
This parameter allows enabling or disabling the 10MHz and 1PPS external inputs.
Mute
This parameter allows to enable or disable output signals if GPS signals are not ready.
Control address
This is a local parameter that allows you to change the telecontrol address of the module used by the Management module. See chapter 7 for more information about this
parameter.
Date and hour
Those parameters are only configured by Management module.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
18
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Functional description
Measurements
Language
Selects the menu language of external programmer. Selectable languages are English,
Spanish or French.
Hardware reset of GPS board
This parameter allows performing a hardware reset of the GPS receiver board. This reset
can be perform to GPS1 receiver and GPS2 receiver separately.
Parameter
Switching Mode
Drift
Hysteresis
External Input Enable
Mute
Control address
Date and hour
Language
Hardware reset of GPS
board
Range
Automatic / GPS1 / GPS2 / External input / AutoSync
0 to 255 µ s
0s to 5999 s
Enabled / Disabled
Enabled / Disabled
0 to 254
English, Spanish or French
Table 5.1: Settings.
5.2 Measurements
The measurements offered by the equipment are detailed in Table 5.2. These measurements are accessible either locally and remotely.
Active Output
It shows the input selected in the switching process (GPS1, GPS2 or External) or muted
when no synchronization signals are present at the output.
GPS status
It shows the status of the GPS. Possible statuses:
• Initilizing. Initializing process, after plug in the GPS board into GPS basic unit. It
is about 60 seconds.
• Not detected. GPS board not detected.
• Not configured. GPS Detected but without communication with GPS switcher.
• Unlocked. GPS unlocked.
• Locked. GPS locked.
• Holdover. GPS in holdover mode.
• Damaged. GPS hardware error detected.
• SFN failure. GPS 1 receiver board activates the SFN failure alarm from its self-test.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
19
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Functional description
Measurements
GPS Holdover countdown
Is a countdown which indicate the time to the end of the GPS holdover. There are two
counters.
GPS board model
It shows the model of the GPS board.
This measurement is only available for GPS receivers (MLx-B510) with S/N ≤ 101887.
Operating mode GPS board
The GPS board has a receiver with multiple operating modes (1,2,3,4,6 or 7). These
modes refer to the GPS internal information, as to the number of satellites that are required at all times for proper synchronization of 10MHz and 1PPS signals.
This measurement is only available for GPS receivers (MLx-B510) with S/N ≤ 101887.
No of satellites
The GPS board reports the status of 8 satellites.
Satellite status
Indicates if a satellite is locked or not.
SNR
Shows the SNR of the received signal from the satellites.
Latitude, Longitude and Altitude
Latitude, Longitude and Altitude from the GPS locked.
GPS date
Date from the GPS locked.
5V and 12V lines voltage
The GPS switcher is able to monitor the exact continuous voltages at the power supply
stage. There are two 5V lines for both GPS boards.
The value of these voltages determines the alarm AHW01 - Alimentation fault.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
20
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Functional description
Alarms
Parameter
Active Output
GPS status
GPS Holdover countdown
GPS board model
Operating mode GPSi board
No of satellites
Satellite status
SNR
Latitude, Longitude and Longitude
GPSi date
5V GPS line voltage
12V line voltage
Usual Range
5V ± 0.1V
12V ± 0.3V
Table 5.2: Measurements.
5.3 Alarms
The device incorporates an alarm history log where last alarm changes are stored. This
log is erased any time the module is reset. Each alarm is able to be activated or disactivated to be stored in the log.
Each alarm can be enable or disable. It is possible to configure an hysteresis time
in seconds individually for each alarm in order to allow an independent detection of the
device alarms. The hysteresis time is the minimum time that must remain active (or deactive) an alarm to be considered as valid.
Specific alarms are summarized in Table 5.3:
AG101 - Communication GPS1
There is no comunicaction between GPS Switcher microcontroller and GPS 1 receiver
board.
AG102 - EBO HW error GPS1
A hardware error in GPS 1 receiver board.
AG103 - Receptor error GPS1
Synchronization failed in GPS 1 receiver board.
AG104 - Phase-frequency GPS1
A phase or frequency synchronization fail in GPS 1 receiver board.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
21
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Functional description
Alarms
AG105 - Antenna GPS1
Indicates that the antenna is shorted or not connected in GPS 1 receiver.
AG106 - Unlocked GPS1
GPS 1 receiver is unlocked.
AG107 - SFN Failure GPS1
GPS 1 receiver board activates the SFN failure alarm from its self-test.
AG201 - Communication GPS2
There is no comunicaction between GPS Switcher microcontroller and GPS 2 receiver
board.
AG202 - EBO HW error GPS2
A hardware error in GPS 2 receiver board.
AG203 - Receptor error GPS2
Synchronization failed in GPS 2 receiver board.
AG204 - Phase-frequency GPS2
A phase or frequency synchronization fail in GPS 2 receiver board.
AG205 - Antenna GPS2
Indicates that the antenna is shorted or not connected in GPS 2 receiver.
AG206 - Unlocked GPS2
GPS 2 receiver is unlocked.
AG207 - SFN Failure GPS2
GPS 2 receiver board activates the SFN failure alarm from its self-test.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
22
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Functional description
Alarms
AHW01 - Alimentation fault
It is activated when any of the DC voltages in the power supply stage is out of this usual
range or when exist a general failure at the power supply.
AHW02 - HW error
It is activated when an internal hardware failure is detected.
Table 5.3 shows the external programmer LED status based on the active alarm.
code
AG101
AG102
AG103
AG104
AG105
AG106
AG107
AG201
AG202
AG203
AG204
AG205
AG206
AG207
AHW01
AHW02
Alarm
Communication GPS1
EBO HW error GPS1
Receptor error GPS1
Phase-frequency GPS1
Antenna GPS1
Unlocked GPS1
SFN Failure GPS1
Communication GPS2
EBO HW error GPS2
Receptor error GPS2
Phase-frequency GPS2
Antenna GPS2
Unlocked GPS2
SFN Failure GPS2
Alimentation fault
HW error
External programmer LED
A
A
A
A
A
A
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
Table 5.3: LED Behavior-based on alarms.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
23
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Remote Control and Monitoring
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
The remote control and monitoring system is based on the use of the Management
module, which communicates with all the modules of the system via a RS485 bus in
back pannel unit.
The Management Module monitors the measures and alarms of all the system’s modules, allowing to change their settings.
Each module is assigned with a different remote control address that identifies it within
the shared communication bus.
The system enables remote management and communication with a remote monitoring
center. This communication can be of various types and using various interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, GSM/GPRS/UMTS).
For more details, please refer to the chapter "Operation" in System Manual.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
24
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Local control
7 Local control
Following is detailed the menus structure corresponding to the External Programmer
interface (see External Programmer instrument manual for more details).
7.1 Menu structure
The menus in this module follow the tree structure shown below:
Splitter
10MHz/1PPS
1.03.00001
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.OUTPUT
3.GPS
4.SYSTEM
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
..
ph-fre GPS2
Lock GPS2
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
..
GPS1:Locked
GPS2:
NO
..
Mode: Auto
Output:Gps1
Drift: 24us
Hol1:--h--m
Hol2:--h--m
Hyst: 0m40s
Ext_en: ON
Mute:
OFF
..
SATELLITES
POSITION
DATE
LOG
02/04
AG101
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
SATELITE1/8
Locked 8 m00
Num: 08
L
SNR:
045
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
..
Lat:42.84ºN
Lon: 8.46ºW
alt:
252m
..
AG101:
AG102:
AG103:
AG104:
AG105:
AG106:
AG107:
AG201:
AG202:
AG203:
AG204:
AG205:
AG206:
AG207:
AHW01:
AHW02:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
..
AG101:
AG102:
AG103:
AG104:
AG105:
AG106:
AG107:
AG201:
AG202:
AG203:
AG204:
AG205:
AG206:
AG207:
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
..
AG101:
AG102:
AG103:
AG104:
AG105:
AG106:
AG107:
AG201:
AG202:
AG203:
AG204:
AG205:
AG206:
AG207:
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
..
22/06/2011
08:04:05
..
CTRLadd:050
01:19:19
00/00/0000
5V 1:5.050V
5V 2:5.350V
12V: 12.32V
Language
selection
--------English
..
Splitter
10MHz/1PPS
Ver:
1.03
Des: 00001
Boot: 1.03
vGPS1: 1.00
vGPS2: 1.00
..
Serial Num
050712452001
Legend
Short press square
Long press square
Short press circle
Long press circle
Press up
Press down
25
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Local control
Menu structure
When connecting the external programmer to the module, first of all the firmware version
of the External Programmer is displayed for a few seconds. After this, a welcome screen
showing the unit type and firmware version is displayed:
Splitter
10MHz/1PPS
1.03.00001
Start menu allows selecting one of the six main menus, Alarms, Output, GPS and System:
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.OUTPUT
3.GPS
4.SYSTEM
7.1.1 Alarms Menu
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Status, Log or Configuration.
7.1.1.1 Alarms > Status Menu
..
ph-fre GPS2
Lock GPS2
This menu shows the active alarms on the equipment. The list of possible alarms is
shown in the following table:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
26
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Local control
Menu structure
Text alarm
Comm GPS1
EBOHW GPS1
Recept GPS1
ph-fre GPS1
Antenna GPS1
Lock GPS1
SFN GPS1
Comm GPS2
EBOHW GPS2
Recept GPS2
ph-fre GPS2
Antenna GPS2
Lock GPS2
SFN GPS2
Power failure
HW error
Alarm description
AG101 - Communication GPS1
AG102 - EBO HW error GPS1
AG103 - Receptor error GPS1
AG104 - Phase-frequency GPS1
AG105 - Antenna GPS1
AG106 - Unlocked GPS1
AG107 - SFN failure GPS1
AG201 - Communication GPS2
AG202 - EBO HW error GPS2
AG203 - Receptor error GPS2
AG204 - Phase-frequency GPS2
AG205 - Antenna GPS2
AG206 - Unlocked GPS2
AG207 - SFN failure GPS2
AHW01 - Alimentation fault
AHW02 - HW error
Remarks
7.1.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu
LOG
02/04
AG101
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
This menu shows a log of the alarms on the equipment.
7.1.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Hysteresis, Enable or Log
ON/OFF.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
27
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu
..
AG101:
AG102:
AG103:
AG104:
AG105:
AG106:
AG107:
AG201:
AG202:
AG203:
AG204:
AG205:
AG206:
AG207:
AHW01:
AHW02:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
This menu allows setting the alarms hysteresis.
7.1.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu
..
AG101:
AG102:
AG103:
AG104:
AG105:
AG106:
AG107:
AG201:
AG202:
AG203:
AG204:
AG205:
AG206:
AG207:
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows enabling or disabling alarms.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
28
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
..
AG101:
AG102:
AG103:
AG104:
AG105:
AG106:
AG107:
AG201:
AG202:
AG203:
AG204:
AG205:
AG206:
AG207:
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows configuring which alarms are to be shown in the log.
7.1.2 Output Menu
..
Mode: Auto
Output:Gps1
Drift: 24us
Hol1:--h--m
Hol2:--h--m
Hyst: 0m40s
Ext_en: ON
Mute:
OFF
Text
Mode
Parameter
Switching mode
Output
Input selected
Drift
Hol1
Hol2
Hyst
Ext_en
Mute
Drift
GPS1 Holdover countdown
GPS2 Holdover countdown
Switching Hysteresis time
External input enable
Mute enable
Normal range
Auto / Gps1 / Gps2
/ Ext / AutSyn
Gps1 / Gps2 / Ext
Remarks
No when output is
muted
in µs
Initital --h--m
Initital --h--m
in --h--m
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
7.1.3 GPS Menu
This menu allows checking GPS status.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
29
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Local control
Menu structure
..
GPS1:Locked
GPS2:
NO
Text
Parameter
GPS 1 status
GPS 2 status
GPS 1
GPS 2
Remarks
Possible statuses:
• Init... Initilizing.
• NO. GPS board not detected.
• NoConf. GPS Detected but without communication.
• Unlock. GPS unlocked.
• Locked. GPS locked.
• Holdov. GPS in holdover mode.
• HW_err. GPS hardware error detected.
• SFNerr. GPS SFN failure detected.
7.1.3.1 GPS > GPSi Menu
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Satellites, Position or Date.
..
SATELLITES
POSITION
DATE
7.1.3.2 GPS > GPSi > Satellites Menu
It allows visualizing GPS receiver satellites status.
SATELITE1/8
Locked 8 m07
Num: 08
L
SNR:
045
Text
SATELITEx/8
Locked N
m0X
Num
SNR
Parameter
Satellite selected
No Satellites locked
GPS satellites mode
Satellite identifier
status
Satellite SNR
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
and
Normal range
Remarks
m01 to m07
only GPS (MLxB510) with S/N ≤
101887.
L = locked, U = unlocked
30
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Local control
Menu structure
7.1.3.3 GPS > GPSi > Position Menu
..
Lat:42.84ºN
Lon: 8.46ºW
alt:
252m
This menu allows visualizing the GPS coordinates once is locked and stable.
Parameter
lat
lon
alt
Description
Latitude
Longitude
Altitude
Remarks
7.1.3.4 GPS > GPSi > Date Menu
..
22/06/2011
08:04:05
This menu allows visualizing the GPS date and hour.
Parameter
dd/mm/AAA
hh:mm:ss
Description
Date
Hour
Remarks
7.1.4 System Menu
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Configuration, Language,
Version or Serial number.
7.1.4.1 System > Configuration Menu
..
CTRLadd:050
01:19:19
00/00/0000
5V 1:5.050V
5V 2:5.350V
12V 12.32V
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
31
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Local control
Menu structure
Text
CTRLadd
00:00:00
00/00/00000
5V 1
5V 2
12V
Parameter
Control address*
Internal time
Internal date
GPS1 board 5V line voltage
GPS2 board 5V line voltage
GPS switcher 12V line voltage
Normal range
Remarks
1 to 254
hh:mm:ss
dd/mm/YYYY
*Control address
Allows you to change the telecontrol address of the module used by the Management
module. This address can be between 0 and 254.
7.1.4.2 System > Language Menu
Language
selection
--------English
This menu allows you to select the menu language for the external programmer. The
available languages are Spanish (Español) , English (English) or French (Français).
7.1.4.3 System > Version Menu
..
Splitter
10MHz/1PPS
Ver:
1.03
Des: 00001
Boot: 1.03
vGPS1: 1.00
vGPS2: 1.00
Text
Vers
Des
Boot
vGPS1
Parameter
Microcontroller version
Microcontroller developement version
Boot version
FPGA firmware version of GPS receiver 1
vGPS2
FPGA firmware version of GPS receiver 2
Remarks
0.00 for GPS (MLxB510) with S/N ≤
101887.
0.00 (MLx-B510) with
S/N ≤ 101887.
7.1.4.4 System > Serial number Menu
..
Serial Num
050712452001
This menu shows the internal serial number of the equipment.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
32
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Local control
Putting into operation
7.2 Putting into operation
Sample application
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment.
• Connect the Anntena to the connector at the front pannel of the GPS receiver
module.
• Connect the External programmer to the RJ45 connector at the front pannel of
the device.
• Select the menu GPS and check that GPS status is locked.
..
GPS1:Locked
GPS2:
NO
i
Cold start-up time < 20 minutes.
Hot start-up time < 5 minutes.
• Check the output (parameter Output).
..
Mode: Auto
Output:Gps1
Drift: 24us
Hol1:--h--m
Hol2:--h--m
Hyst: 0m40s
Ext_en: ON
Mute:
OFF
• Check that no alarms in menu Alarms > Status.
..
There is
no alarm
• Check that frontal LED status and GPS receiver LED keeps green.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
33
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Troubleshooting
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED status
Basic Unit
LED status
OFF
Red
Orange
Green
-
GPS1/2 LED
status
-
Description
No power supply
No synchronyzed signals at the output
Any active alarm (check diagnosis via alarm status)
Green
GPS 1/2 locked
Red
GPS 1/2 unlocked or hardware failure (check diagnosis via alarm status)
Orange
GPS 1/2 locked or in holdover mode, but any active
alarm (check diagnosis via alarm status)
Orange/Green Detecting GPS 1/2 hardware
blinking
OFF
No power supply / GPS 1/2 Not detected
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
34
R&SMLx GPS Unit
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via alarm status
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via alarm status
Code
AG101
Alarm
Communication
GPS1
AG102 EBO HW error GPS1
AG103 Receptor error GPS1
AG104 Phase-frequency
GPS1
AG105 Antenna GPS1
AG106 Unlocked GPS1
AG107 SFN Failure GPS1
AG201 Communication
GPS2
AG202 EBO HW error GPS2
AG203 Receptor error GPS2
AG204 Phase-frequency
GPS2
AG205 Antenna GPS2
AG206 Unlocked GPS2
AG207 SFN Failure GPS2
AHW01 Alimentation fault
AHW02 HW error
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Description
The GPS receiver 1 or The GPS Basic Unit is
damaged
The GPS receiver 1 is damaged
The GPS receiver 1 is damaged
Check satellites reception from GPS 1
Check the cabling and antenna from GPS 1
Check satellites reception from GPS 1
The SFN autotest from GPS 1 is failed
The GPS receiver 2 or The GPS Basic Unit is
damaged
The GPS receiver 2 is damaged
The GPS receiver 2 is damaged
Check satellites reception from GPS 2
Check the cabling and antenna from GPS 2
Check satellites reception from GPS 2
The SFN autotest from GPS 2 is failed
The GPS Basic Unit is damaged
The GPS Basic Unit is damaged
35
R&S R MLx
RF Splitter
Instrument Manual
The Instrument Manual describes the following R&S R MLx RF Splitter models and options:
• MLx-B750 MLx RF Splitter
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&SMLx.
R&SMLx RF Splitter
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Overview
2
2 Technical specifications
3
3 Physical description
3.1 MLx RF Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
5
1
R&SMLx RF Splitter
Overview
1 Overview
MLx RF Splitter provides the necessary RF outputs in order to feed up to 8 modules
from a single receiving antenna. The MLx RF Splitter splits the signal into 8 vias from
the input and amplifies it slightly before the outputs.
This module provides two power supply connectors of 27VDC .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
2
R&SMLx RF Splitter
Technical specifications
2 Technical specifications
Frequency range:
Number of inputs:
Input connectors:
Input impedance:
Number of outputs:
Output connectors:
Output impedance:
Gain (per output):
Band oscillation:
Attenuation @ 100 MHz:
Attenuation @ 950 MHz:
Noise figure:
IP3 output:
Input return losses:
Output return losses:
Outputs isolation:
AC Input voltage (AC Power Supply Unit):
DC power supply voltage connector:
DC power supply voltage :
DC Power Consumption:
Operating temperature:
Relative humidity:
Dimensions (WxHxD):
Weight:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
470 MHz to 862 MHz
1
BNC female
50 Ω
8
BNC female
50 Ω
8 ± 1 dB
< 1.5 dB
> 65 dB
> 20 dB
< 5 dB
+20 dBm
> 15 dB
> 18 dB
> 25 dB
220VAC ± 15%
2 x SMD power jack male (2.1mm ID,
5.5mm OD)
+27 VDC
1.7W
0 to 45o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
480x45x94 mm
1.3 Kg
3
R&SMLx RF Splitter
Technical specifications
Response curves:
Figure 2.1: Response curves S11 and S21 (from 100MHz to 1GHz).
Figure 2.2: Response curves S21 and S22 (detail).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
4
R&SMLx RF Splitter
Physical description
3 Physical description
3.1 MLx RF Splitter
Figure 3.1 details front connectors of the module. Figure 3.2 details rear connectors of
the module.
Figure 3.1: Front connectors description of the MLx RF Splitter.
RF Input (BNC female)
Power supply connectors
+27Vcc (Jack male)
27 V
27 V
Figure 3.2: Rear connectors description of the MLx RF Splitter.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
5
R&S R MLx
N+1 Switch Unit
Instrument Manual
The Instrument Manual describes the following R&S R MLx N+1 Switch Unit models and options:
• MLX-B711 MLx 1+1 Switch Transmitter
• MLX-B712 MLx 2+1 Switch Transmitter
• MLX-B713 MLx 3+1 Switch Transmitter
• MLX-B714 MLx 4+1 Switch Transmitter
• MLX-B715 MLx 5+1 Switch Transmitter
• MLX-B716 MLx 6+1 Switch Transmitter
• MLX-B721 MLx 1+1 Switch GapFiller
• MLX-B722 MLx 2+1 Switch GapFiller
• MLX-B723 MLx 3+1 Switch GapFiller
• MLX-B724 MLx 4+1 Switch GapFiller
• MLX-B725 MLx 5+1 Switch GapFiller
• MLX-B726 MLx 6+1 Switch GapFiller
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&SMLx.
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Overview
2
2 Putting into operation
3
3 Technical specifications
5
4 Physical description
7
5 Functional Description
5.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
18
7 Local control
7.1 Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Alarms > Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu .
7.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu . . .
7.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
7.2 Status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Configure menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 Configure > Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2 Configure > Verifications menu . . . . . . . .
7.3.3 Configure > Return menu . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.4 Configure > Priority menu . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.5 Configure > Relays menu . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.6 Configure > Advanced menu . . . . . . . . .
7.4 System menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 System > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 System > Language Menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.3 System > Version Menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.4 System > Serial number Menu . . . . . . . .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
16
16
17
19
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
24
24
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
1
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Overview
1 Overview
MLX N+1 Switch Unit can build systems of N multiplex (N up to 6) with one redundant
multiplex in stand-by status.
The operation of the N+1 unit is controlled from the Managment module of the system.
The system will switch to the reserve module when a malfunction in one of the main multiplex is detected.
The internal control system of the device enables both internal configuration and measures. The equipment can be managed locally and remotely by connecting the Management Module. The equipment can also be managed locally by connecting the External
Programmer.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
2
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Putting into operation
2 Putting into operation
Preliminary considerations
In case of not pre-configured N+1 system, before starting is necessary to ensure that
local configuration of the N+1 Switch unit is adequate to prevent the Management automatically performs actions on services in the booth.
To do so, once you finish making all needed connections, connect the External Programmer into the RJ45 connector on the front of the N+1 Switch unit labeled as PRGM.
Then proceed to feed the system by turning on all power supplies. With the external
programmer connected to the N+1 Switch unit access the menu Configure > Mode
..
Local
and verify that it is in local mode, ie, shown in the display Local mode. Otherwise it
is necessary to pass to local mode by pressing the
and selecting with △ and ▽ the
option Local. Then save the new changes by holding few seconds.
Once checked that the N+1 Switch unit is in local mode is necessary to check that the
central control module, Management, has incorporated into its configuration file every
control address of all system modules and the N+1 Switch unit itself. Otherwise it would
be necessary to run the command GENERATE NEW CONFIGURATION FILE in the
Management (more details of this command on specific documentation of management).
Application example
Instructions in this example serve as a first approximation to the system. For a more
detailed configuration is necessary to refer to next chapters.
• Connect the External Programmer into the RJ45 connector on the front of the N+1
Switch unit labeled as PRGM.
• Go to menu Configure > Advanced:
..
Tx.Rsv: OFF
Antenna:1&2
Add.Rsv:001
R1: Add:002
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
..
Tx.Rsv: OFF
Add.Rsv:001
R1: Add:002
3
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Putting into operation
• Select which control address will work as reserve. With the keys △ ▽ place over
the parameter Add Rsve, enter to edit mode by pressing the
and modify its value
using the △ ▽ to find the desired control address.
• Then select which control addresses are wired to each relay of the N+1 Switch unit.
With the keys △ ▽ place over the parameter R., enter to edit mode by pressing
the
and modify its value using the △ ▽ for each relay. Once placed in a relay,
go into its edition by pressing
and modify the value of the parameter Add. using
the △ ▽ to find the desired control address or -- if the relay is switched off.
• Save the new changes by holding few seconds until the confirmation message
on the screen appears.
• Go to menu Configure > Mode:
..
Remote
Automatic
• Select the automatic remote mode. Press
and select Remote using △ and ▽
keys. Then press
again and select Automatic using △ and ▽.
• Save the new changes by holding few seconds until the confirmation message
on the screen.
• Remove the External Programmer from the N+1 Switch and execute in the Management the GENERATE NEW CONFIGURATION FILE (more details of this command on specific documentation of management).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
4
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Technical specifications
3 Technical specifications
RF input demux (Gapfiller / Retransmitter)
Number of inputs:
Input connector:
Input impedance:
Number of outputs:
Output connector:
Output impedance:
Gain (Outputs 1 to 7):
Gain (Output 8):
2
BNC female
50Ω
8
BNC female
50Ω
5dB (2dB in case of 2 inputs selected)
1dB (-2dB in case of 2 inputs selected)
ASI input (Transmitter)
Number of inputs:
Input connector:
Input impedance:
Number of outputs:
Output connector:
Output impedance:
Input-Output insertion loss:
Matrix of inputs:
Relay type:
Relay insertion loss:
7 (6 + 1 external)
BNC female
75Ω
7 (6 + 1 reserve)
BNC female
75Ω
3dB
6 relays
Latch
<0.2dB
Switching RF output
Relay type:
Insertion loss:
Return loss:
Output isolation:
Maximum power (@1GHz):
Maximum Number of relays:
Connector:
Impedance:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Latch
<0.2dB
>20dB
70dB
100W
6
SMA female
50Ω
5
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Technical specifications
Power supply:
DC Input voltage:
DC Input voltage connector:
DC voltage reset connector:
27 ± 0.3 VDC
2 x SMD power jack male (2.1mm ID,
5.5mm OD)
2 x SMD jack female (2.5mm)
DC Power Consumption:
N+1 Switch Unit for Gapfillers (repose):
N+1 Switch Unit for Gapfillers (peak):
N+1 Switch Unit for Transmitters (repose):
N+1 Switch Unit for Transmitters (peak):
2.7W
6.8W during 100ms
2.7W
6.8W during 100ms
Temperature:
Operating temperature:
Relative humidity:
0 to 45o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
Dimensions:
N+1 Switch Unit for Gapfillers (WxHxD):
N+1 Switch Unit for Transmitters (WxHxD):
483 x43x166 mm
483 x43x166 mm
Weight:
6+1 Switch Unit for Gapfillers:
6+1 Switch Unit for Transmitters:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
2 Kg
2 Kg
6
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Physical description
4 Physical description
Figure 4.3 details frontal connectors and Figure 4.4 details rear connectors of the N+1
Switch Gap Filler unit. Figure 4.1 details frontal connectors and Figure 4.2 details rear
connectors of the N+1 Switch Transmitter unit.
Status LED
LED status
Off
Green
Orange
Description
No power supply
No active alarms
Active alarm
Table 4.1: Description of LED status.
RF Switches LED’s
LED Relay # status
Off
Green
Green blinking
Description
Relay # in standby (A-module connected to RF out)
Relay # switched (B-module connected to RF out)
Testing B-module with input #
Table 4.2: Description of relays LED status.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
7
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
ASI INPUT to
connect another
N+1 Switch unit
( BNC Female)
ASI OUTPUT
( BNC Female)
TO CONNECT ANOTHER
N+1 SWITCH UNIT
TRANSMITTER B
TRANSMITTER A1
TRANSMITTER A2
TRANSMITTER A3
TRANSMITTER A4 TRANSMITTER A5
TRANSMITTER A6
75
Satus LED
External programmer
Connector (RJ45)
Relays switches Status LED
Figure 4.1: Description of frontal panel N+1 Switch TX unit.
Physical description
8
RF Load
( SMA Female)
[MUX6]
[MUX5]
[MUX4]
[MUX3]
[MUX2]
Power Supply connector
+27 VDC (Jack Male)
[MUX1]
MUX6
MUX4
MUX5
Telecontrol connector
(Jack 2.5mm Female)
RF Input from Transmitter
modules A1...A6
( SMA Female)
RF Output to antenna
( SMA Female)
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Input from
transmitter B
( SMA female)
LOAD
Reset connector
(Jack 2.5mm Female)
MUX2
MUX3
MUX1
ASI Input
(BNC Female)
Figure 4.2: Description of rear panel N+1 Switch TX unit.
Physical description
9
GAPFILLER B
RESERVE
Satus LED
GAP
FILLER A1
GAP
FILLER A2
GAP
FILLER A3
GAP
FILLER A4
GAP
FILLER A5
GAP
FILLER A6
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
RF OUTPUT
( BNC Female)
External programmer
Connector (RJ45)
RF switches Status LED
Figure 4.3: Description of frontal panel N+1 Switch Gap Filler unit.
Physical description
10
LOAD
RF Load
( SMA Female)
[MUX6]
[MUX5]
[MUX4]
[MUX3]
[MUX2]
Power Supply connector
+27 VDC (Jack Male)
[MUX1]
Telecontrol connector
(Jack 2.5mm Female)
RF Input from Gap filler
modules A1...A6
( SMA Female)
Conector to
another N+1
switch unit
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Input
from Gap filler
module B
( SMA female)
RF Output to antenna
( SMA Female)
Antenna 2
RF Input
(BNC Female)
Antenna 1
RF Input
(BNC Female)
Reset connector
(Jack 2.5mm Female)
Figure 4.4: Description of rear panel N+1 Switch Gap Filler unit.
Physical description
11
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Functional Description
5 Functional Description
MLx N+1 Switch unit can build systems of N multiplex (N up to six) plus one redundant
multiplex in stand-by status for any of the N multiplex. The internal operation of the N+1
Switch unit is based on a relay system for routing the output signal as detailed in the block
diagrams of Figure 5.2 and Figure 5.1.
RF OUTPUT SIGNAL
MUX 1
MUX 2
MUX 3
MUX 4
MUX 5
MUX 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
OUTPUT
MATRIX
MANAGEMENT
LOAD
CH B
RF IN
uControl
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
INPUT MATRIX
3dB
SPLITTER
3dB
SPLITTER
3dB
SPLITTER
3dB
SPLITTER
3dB
SPLITTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
3dB
SPLITTER
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS B OUT
TS LINK IN
TS INPUT SIGNAL
Figure 5.1: Block diagram of the internal operation of the N+1 Switch TX unit.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
12
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Functional Description
ANT INPUT SIGNAL
#2
#1
MANAGEMENT
RF OUTPUT SIGNAL
ANT 1/2
LINK OUT
MUX 1
MUX 2
MUX 3
MUX 4
MUX 5
MUX 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
uControl
MIXER
SPLITTER
LOAD
B
A1
A2
CH B
RF IN
A3 A4 A5 A6
RF OUT
Figure 5.2: Block diagram of the internal operation of the N+1 Switch Gap Filler unit.
All necessary internal voltages to operate the equipment are generated through converters DC/DC in the power supply stage from the 27VDC input voltage. The internal
voltages are 3.3VDC , 5VDC and 12.5VDC . All of them are monitored by the microcontroller. Those voltages can be reset from an external pin.
The N+1 Switch unit has three operating modes listed in Table 5.1. In these modes
local is referred to external programmer operation and remote is referred to Management
operation.
The switching operation, either automatic or manual, is controlled by the Management
module of the remote control and monitoring system.
Mode
Remote automatic
Remote manual
Local
Description
Allows remote switching. Switching is automatic when a fault
is detected.
Allows remote switching. Switching must be done manually.
Allows only local switching. Switching must be done manually.
Table 5.1: Operating modes of the N+1 Switch unit.
From now is taken into account that the N+1 Switch unit is set to automatic remote mode.
i
For the correct performance of the N+1 system, it is necessary to configure the
control address of the reserve multiplex and the control addresses assigned to the
6 switches in the N+1 Switch unit device. Those parameters are only configurable
locally via External Programmer. The list of all the configurable parameters on
the N+1 Switch unit devices are listed on the table 5.3.
The system will switch to the reserve multiplex when a malfunction in any of the main
multiplex is detected.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
13
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Functional Description
The standby status of the RF module connected to the load (at first this will be the reserve
RF module, but in case the reserve RF module is already substituting to one of the main
RF modules, it will be this one) is configured by default to OFF.
Possible causes for switching are some of the defined alarms for TRedess equipment
and whose details are available on the corresponding technical manuals. Table 5.2 lists
the alarms that can cause switching.
Transmitter (DVB-T2)
Fault alarm
Warning alarm
ASI 1 error
ASI 2 error
MIP error
FPGA communication
No IF DVB-T signal
MPEG overflow
MPEG 1 error
MPEG 2 error
10MHz error
1PPS error
FPGA oscillator
TS error (DVB-T2)
T2MI error (DVB-T2)
SFN error (DVB-T2)
Output oscillator
Input oscillator
Reflected power
Temperature
Output power
Transistors current
Power 3dB
Alimentation fault
HW error
Communication error
Channel unlocked
CBER critical threshold
VBER critical threshold
CBER non-critical threshold
VBER non-critical threshold
Retransmitter
Fault alarm
Warning alarm
Gap-filler
Fault alarm
Warning alarm
Input level
FPGA communication
No IF DVB-T signal
MPEG overflow
MPEG error
Output oscillator
Input oscillator
Reflected power
Temperature
Output power
Transistors current
Power 3dB
Alimentation fault
HW error
Communication error
Channel unlocked
CBER critical threshold
VBER critical threshold
CBER non-critical threshold
VBER non-critical threshold
Output oscillator
Input oscillator
Reflected power
Temperature
Output power
Transistors current
Power 3dB
Alimentation fault
HW error
Communication error
Channel unlocked
CBER critical threshold
VBER critical threshold
CBER non-critical threshold
VBER non-critical threshold
Table 5.2: List of alarms that can cause a multiplex switching.
Verification
The verification process does not affect to the service in any case, and it is only done
in case it is necessary to perform a test of a module connected to the load to confirm
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
14
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Functional Description
the clearance of the alarm that has produced the switching to the reserve channel. This
verification test is also performed over the reserve module if this is the one presenting the
fault. Once it has been verified that the fault has dissapeared, the alarms of the verified
module are cleared and this module stays again avaliable for the automatic switchings
that could potentially happen.
The durarion of the verification process is configurable. The time in between the fault happens in a RF module and the beginning of the verification test is configurable between the
different following options: (a) a configurable time, (b) a determined hour during the day
or (c) in case of a fault in another RF module with enabled switchings and independently
of the priority. In case of having enabled the automatic verification process, it will be done
based on the selected configuration (a) or (b), except in the case of (c) happens before
them, case in which the verification test will be done inmediatelly. The maximum number
of times this verification process will be performed after a fault and also the cadence of
those retries are configurable.
The verification tests will be stopped when the RF modules become OK or when the
máximum number of retries is over. The cadence of verification retries can be:
• Simple: A retry is performed based on the time selected in option (a) , where the
time between the fault in a RF module and the verification test is configured.
• Double: The first retry is attempted at the time set based on option (a), whereas
the second retry is attempted at a double of that time, the third at the double of
the previous one and so on, until the number of programmed retries is over. (For
example, 3 retries with option (a) set to 15 min => 1st retry at 15 minutes after the
fault; if the transmitter stays faulty, the 2nd retry is performed 30 minutes after the
first unsuccessful retry; 3rd retry at 60 minutes of the previous retry and so on...)
• Triple: The same as the Double case, but applying triple instead of double.
i
Once the cause of the fault has been validated, the N+1 Switch unit will perform
the switching to the reserve module in case it has already been verified. In the
special case of alarm due to a fault in the input signal, although the reserve module
is already verified and OK, an extra time of verification is added (also configurable)
to avoid unnecessary switchings if the whole input signal is down so affecting to
all modules in the system.
Restoration
The automatic restoration will only be performed after the verification that the fault that
caused the switching is not present and only when a second RF module (with the automatic switchings activated) presents a fault so it needs to make use of the reserve
module. In case the automatic restoration is not active, the system will only return from
the reserve channel to the main channel, after the execution in the N+1 Switch unit of the
command to restore the service from reserve to main (possible to be done both in LOCAL
and REMOTE modes). The maximum number of automatic restorations in a transmitter
module is also configurable. The time window in which the restorations can be performed
is of 1 day non configurable.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
15
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Functional Description
Settings
Priorities
Moreover, the system allows, if desired, to assign different switching priorities to the
diferent 6 multiplex of the system with values between 1 (higher priority) and 6 (lower priority). Also a priority 0 can be assigned, meaning that the multiplex with priority 0 does
not switch to the reserve module under any circumstance.
5.1 Settings
Equipment has a number of adjustable parameters detailed below and summarized in
Table 5.3. These parameters are accessible both locally and remotely.
Parameter
Operating mode
Antenna (Only for Gapfillers / Retransmitters)
Reserve address
Relay 1..6 address
Tx Reserve
Forced Mute RF R1..R6
Automatic verification
Automatic verification duration
Time between fault and verification
Automatic verification retries
Time
No input signal (Test)
Automatic restoration
Maximum (per day)
Activation of the priorities of switching
Priority of a multiplex switching (only with priorities selected)
Switching status of a multiplex
Control address
Date and hour
Language
Range
Remote automatic / Remote manual /
Local
Antenna 1 / Antennas 1 and 2
Control address #
Control address # or disconnected
Enabled/Disabled
Active / Deactive
Enabled/Disabled
0 to 99 minutes and 59 segundes
(a) Configurable from 0 to 100 minutes; (b) Configurable at a fix time; (c)
In case of a fault in another transmitter
independently on the priority
0 to 99
Simple / Double / Triple
0 to 99 minutes and 59 segundes
Enabled/Disabled
0 to 99
Active / Deactive
0, 1, ..., 6
Unswitched / Test / Switched
0 to 254
Spanish, English or French
Table 5.3: Settings.
5.2 Measurements
Equipment has a number of measurements summarized in Table 5.4. These parameters
are accessible both locally and remotely.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
16
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Functional Description
Alarms
Parameter
Usual Range
3.3V line voltage
5V line voltage
12.5V line voltage
3.3V ± 0.2V
5V ± 0.2V
12.5V ± 0.5V
Table 5.4: Measurements.
5.3 Alarms
The specific alarms of N+1 system are detailed in Table 5.5.
Code
AHW01
AHW02
Name
Power failure
HW error
Description
Internal DC voltages failure.
Internal hardware failure.
Table 5.5: Alarms.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
17
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Remote Control and Monitoring
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
The remote control and monitoring system is based on the use of the Management
module, which communicates with all the modules of the system via a RS485 bus in
back pannel unit.
The Management Module monitors the measures and alarms of all the system’s modules, allowing to change their settings.
Each module is assigned with a different remote control address that identifies it within
the shared communication bus.
The system enables remote management and communication with a remote monitoring
center. This communication can be of various types and using various interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, GSM/GPRS/UMTS).
For more details, please refer to the chapter "Operation" in System Manual.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
18
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Local control
7 Local control
Following is detailed the menus structure corresponding to the External Programmer
interface (see External Programmer instrument manual for more details).
Menu structure
The menus in this module follow the tree structure shown below:
N+1 Switch Transmitters:
UCA N+1
Transmitte.
1.01
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.STATUS
3.CONFIGUR.
4.SYSTEM
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
..
MODE
RETURN
PRIORITY
RELAYS
ADVANCED
STATE
1:- 2:- 3:4:C 5:- 6:Selec. 4
..
Power fail
HW error
..
Remote
Automatic
LOG
02/04
ARE01
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
..
AutoVer: ON
Dur:01m 00s
Mode A: ON
Int:05m 00s
Mode B: OFF
Time: 07:00
Mode C: ON
Retries: 5
Time:Double
T_I:00m 30s
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
..
AHW01: 001s
AHW02: 000s
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
..
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
Legend
..
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
..
AutoRet: ON
Maximum: 5
..
Activated
R:1 Prio:1
Short press square
..
CTRLadd:005
01:19:19
00/00/0000
3V3: 3.244V
5V: 5.102V
12V5:12.55V
Language
selection
--------English
..
UCA N+1
Transmitte.
Vers: 1.01
Des: 00003
Boot: 1.03
..
Serial Num
050712452001
Long press square
Short press circle
Long press circle
Press up
Press down
..
R1:
R2: Commut.
R3:
R4:
R5:
R6:
..
Tx.Rsv: OFF
Add.Rsv:001
R1: Add:002
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
19
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Local control
N+1 Switch Gapfillers / Retransmitters:
UCA N+1
Gapfillers
1.01
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.STATUS
3.CONFIGUR.
4.SYSTEM
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
..
MODE
VERIFICAT
RETURN
PRIORITY
RELAYS
ADVANCED
STATE
1:- 2:- 3:4:C 5:- 6:Selec. 4
..
Power fail
HW error
..
Remote
Automatic
LOG
02/04
ARE01
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
..
AutoVer: ON
Dur:01m 00s
Mode A: ON
Int:05m 00s
Mode B: OFF
Time: 07:00
Mode C: ON
Retries: 5
Time:Double
T_I:00m 30s
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
..
AHW01: 001s
AHW02: 000s
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
..
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
Legend
Short press square
Long press square
..
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
..
AutoRet: ON
Maximum: 5
..
Activated
R:1 Prio:1
..
CTRLadd:005
01:19:19
00/00/0000
3V3: 3.244V
5V: 5.102V
12V5:12.55V
Language
selection
--------English
..
UCA N+1
Gapfillers
Vers: 1.01
Des: 00001
Boot: 1.02
..
Serial Num
050712452001
Short press circle
Long press circle
Press up
Press down
..
R1:
R2: Commut.
R3:
R4:
R5:
R6:
-
..
Tx.Rsv: OFF
Antenna:1&2
Add.Rsv:001
R1: Add:002
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
20
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Local control
Alarms Menu
When connecting the external programmer to the module, first of all the firmware version
of the External Programmer is displayed for a few seconds. After this, a welcome screen
showing the unit type and firmware version is displayed:
UCA N+1
Gapfillers
1.01
UCA N+1
Transmitte.
1.01
Start menu allows selecting one of main menus, Alarms, Status, Configuration and
System:
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.STATUS
3.CONFIGUR.
4.SYSTEM
7.1 Alarms Menu
..
STATUS
LOG
CONFIG
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Status, Log or Configuration.
7.1.1 Alarms > Status Menu
..
Power fail
HW error
This menu shows the active alarms on the equipment. The list of possible alarms is
shown in the following table:
Text alarm
Power fail
HW error
Alarm description
AHW01 - Power failure
AHW02 - HW error
Remarks
7.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu
LOG
02/04
ARE01
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
This menu shows a log of the alarms on the equipment.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
21
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Local control
Status menu
7.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu
..
HYSTERESYS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Hysteresis, Enable or Log
ON/OFF.
7.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu
..
AHW01: 001s
AHW02: 000s
This menu allows setting the alarms hysteresis.
7.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu
..
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
This menu allows enabling or disabling alarms.
7.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
..
AHW01:
AHW02:
ON
ON
This menu allows configuring which alarms are to be shown in the log.
7.2 Status menu
STATUS
1:- 2:- 3:4:C 5:- 6:Selec. 4
This menu indicates the status of each of the six relays in N+1 Switch unit. Possible
statuses are listed on Table 7.1.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
22
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Local control
Configure menu
Symbol
m :-
Text
Status
Unswitched
m :T
m :C
Test m
Selec.m
Test
Switched
Description
Stable. Without taking any action.
Checking alarms of relay m
Switches the relay m with the redundant one.
Table 7.1: Status of relays in N+1 Switch unit.
7.3 Configure menu
..
MODE
VERIFICAT
RETURN
PRIORITY
RELAYS
ADVANCED
This menu lets you select one of these submenus: Mode, Verifications, Return, Priority, Relays and Advanced.
7.3.1 Configure > Mode menu
..
Remote
Automatic
This menu allows to select the N+1 Switch unit operating mode from table 5.1. The first
line of the menu allows to select between Remote and Local. If Remote is selected, a
second line allows to select Auto or Manual.
7.3.2 Configure > Verifications menu
..
AutoVer: ON
Dur:01m 00s
Mode A: ON
Int:05m 00s
Mode B: OFF
Time: 07:00
Mode C: ON
Retries: 5
Time:Double
T_I:00m 30s
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
23
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Local control
Configure menu
Parameter
AutoVer
Dur
Mode A
Description
Automatic verifications enabling
Durarion of the verification process
Retries
Time
Time between fault and verification. Option A,
Time Interval enabling
Time between fault and verification. Option A,
Time Interval
Time between fault and verification. Option B,
at fix time enabling
Time between fault and verification. Option B,
at fix time
Time between fault and verification. Option C,
fault in another transmitter enabling
maximum number of retries
Time between fault and verification repetition
T_I
Durarion of the No input signal test
Int
Mode B
Time
Mode C
Range
ON / OFF
00m 02s to
99m 59s
ON / OFF
00m 01s to
99m 59s
ON / OFF
00:00
to
23:59
ON / OFF
0 to 99
Simple /
Double /
Triple
00m 00s to
99m 59s
7.3.3 Configure > Return menu
..
AutoRet: ON
Maximum: 5
Parameter
AutoRet
Maximum
Description
Auto restorations
Maximum number of restorations per day
Range
ON / OFF
0 to 99
7.3.4 Configure > Priority menu
..
Activated
R:1 Prio:1
This menu enables or disables switching priorities. If activated it will be necessary to
assign a priority to each control address.
Parameter
R.
Prio.
Description
Priority activation
Relay
Priority
Remarks
Activated / Deactiv.
01, 02,..., 06
0, 1, 2,..., 6 (1 maximum, 6 minimum. 0
non switching under any circumstances)
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
24
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Local control
System menu
7.3.5 Configure > Relays menu
..
R1:
R2: Commut.
R3:
R4:
R5:
R6:
-
This menu lets you manually configure the switching states of the N+1 Switch unit. Only
in local mode.
7.3.6 Configure > Advanced menu
..
Tx.Rsv: OFF
Antenna:1&2
Add.Rsv:001
R1: Add:002
..
Tx.Rsv: OFF
Add.Rsv:001
R1: Add:002
This menu allows to set the control address of the multiplex system to be used as a
reserve and the delay between the output switching and the selection of the input signal:
Parameter
Tx.Rsv
Antenna
Add Rsv.
R.# Add.##
Description
Reserve repose status
Antenna input selection
Address control of
reserve multiplex
Address control to
relay
Remarks
ON / OFF
1, 1&2 (Only for Gapfillers / Retransmitters)
00, 01, 02,... (Add.000 = reserve unallocated)
R.1 to R.6 Add.001 to Add.254( Add.000 in
case of disconnected)
7.4 System menu
..
MODE
VERIFICAT
RETURN
PRIORITY
RELAYS
ADVANCED
This menu lets you select one of these submenus: Configuration, Language, Version
and Serial number.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
25
R&SMLx N+1 Switch Unit
Local control
System menu
7.4.1 System > Configuration Menu
..
CTRLadd:005
01:19:19
00/00/0000
3V3: 3.244V
5V: 5.102V
12V5:12.55V
Text
CTRLadd
00:00:00
00/00/00000
3V3
5V
12V5
Parameter
Control address
Internal time
Internal date
3.3V voltage
5V voltage
12.5V voltage
Normal range
Remarks
1 to 254
hh:mm:ss
dd/mm/YYYY
7.4.2 System > Language Menu
Language
selection
--------English
This menu allows you to select the menu language for the external programmer. The
available languages are Spanish (Español) , English (English) or French (Français).
7.4.3 System > Version Menu
..
UCA N+1
Gapfillers
Vers: 1.01
Des: 00001
Boot: 1.02
Text
Vers
Des
Boot
..
UCA N+1
Transmitte.
Vers: 1.01
Des: 00003
Boot: 1.03
Parameter
Microcontroller version
Microcontroller developement version
Boot version
Remarks
7.4.4 System > Serial number Menu
..
Serial Num
050712452001
This menu shows the internal serial number of the equipment.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
26
R&S R MLx
DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Instrument Manual
The Instrument Manual describes the following R&S R MLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver models and options:
• MLX-B550 DVB-S/S2 Rx w/o Decrypt.
• MLX-K55 SAT-RX / IP-ASI OUTPUT KEY.
• MLX-K56 SAT-RX INPUT KEY.
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&SMLx.
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Overview
3
2 Putting into operation
4
3 Technical specifications
5
4 Physical description
7
5 Functional Description
5.1 RF inputs software activation .
5.2 ASI outputs software activation
5.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Measurements . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
7 Local control
7.1 Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Alarms > Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu .
7.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu . . .
7.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
7.2 Inputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Inputs > Redundancy menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 Inputs > RF input 1 menu . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 Inputs > RF input 2 menu . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.4 Inputs > RF input 3 menu . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.5 Inputs > RF input 4 menu . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Outputs menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 Outputs > Output ASI1 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2 Outputs > Output ASI2 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.3.3 Outputs > Output ASI3 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.3.4 Outputs > Output ASI4 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.3.5 Outputs > Output ASI5 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.3.6 Outputs > Output ASI6 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.3.7 Outputs > Output ASI7 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.4 System menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 System > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 System > Language Menu . . . . . . . . . .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
11
11
12
16
19
20
21
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
25
26
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
29
1
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
7.4.3 System > Version Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.4 System > Serial number Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED and alarm status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
31
32
2
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Overview
1 Overview
MLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver provides a complete satellite reception for a Compact Series
system.
This unit, composed by four tuners implemented in a multi-switch platform, is DVB-S and
DVB-S2, Single and Multistream compatible.
The satellite inputs support loop-through, so that a single satellite reception can provide
the information for all the tuners.
The internal control system of the device enables both internal configuration and measures. The equipment can be managed locally and remotely by connecting the Management Module. The equipment can also be managed locally by connecting the External
Programmer.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
3
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Putting into operation
2 Putting into operation
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment. For further measurement examples and background information, please refer
to next chapters.
• Log on to the Management Module via web browser.
• Go to Configuration > Modules menu and select the module.
• Configure the RF inputs 1 to 4 (parameters Status, Frequency, LNB OL, DVB
Mode, Satellite, PLS and Symbol Rate).
• Configure the ASI Outputs 1 to 7 (parameter Status) and route each output from
an input (parameter RF/ISI).
• Go to Status menu and select the module.
• Check if the enabled inputs are locked (parameter RF input-x) and the data rate
of the enabled outputs (parameter ASI output-x) .
• Check that there are no alarms.
• Check that frontal ALARM LED and INPUT LED keep green.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
4
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Technical specifications
3 Technical specifications
Satellite Receiver
LNB control voltage:
RF input frequency:
Number of inputs:
Number of loop-through outputs:
Loop-through outputs insertion loss:
Input connector:
Input impedance:
Return losses:
RF input sensitivity:
Roll-off:
Off, +13 VDC, +17VDC, 22KHz (Overload protection)
950 to 2150 MHz
4
4
<5dB
F female
75Ω
>11,5dB
-75dBm to -10 dBm
0.2, 0.25, 0.35
DVB-S Demodulation
Constellation:
Symbol rate:
FEC:
QPSK
1 to 45 MSymbols/s
Automatic, all modes availables according to DVB-S
standard Viterbi and Reed-Solomon dual decoder
DVB-S2 Demodulation
Modes:
Constellation:
Symbol rate:
FEC:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
CCM, VCM and ACM, Multi Stream and Single Stream,
Normal and Short FEC frames
QPSK, 8PSK, 16APSK and 32APSK
2 to 45 MSymbols/s
Automatic, all modes availables according to DVB-S2
standard LDPC + BCH dual decoder
5
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Technical specifications
ASI Outputs
Number of outputs:
Output connector:
Output impedance:
Transport stream formats:
Max Transport stream bit rate:
Return losses:
7
BNC female
75Ω
According to EN 50083-9. 188 bytes structure,
byte or packet mode.
120Mbps
>15dB @ 270MHz
Power supply:
DC Input voltage:
DC Input voltage connector:
DC voltage reset connector:
DC Power Consumption:
27 ± 0.3 VDC
2 x SMD power jack male (2.1mm ID, 5.5mm OD)
2 x SMD jack female (2.5mm)
10W (with 1 LNB connected)
27W (Maximum, with 4 LNB connected)
4.1W (standby)
Temperature:
Operating temperature:
Relative humidity:
0 to 45o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
Dimensions & Weight:
Dimensions (WxHxD):
Weight:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
483 x43x150 mm
1.2 Kg
6
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Physical description
4 Physical description
Figure 4.1 details frontal connectors and Figure 4.2 details rear connectors.
Alarm status LED
LED status
Off
Green
Orange
Red
Red blinking
Description
No power supply or bootloader
No active alarms
Temperature alarm or HW error
Error at any of the enabled outputs
Error at all of the enabled outputs
Table 4.1: Description of alarm LED status.
Input status LED
LED status
Off
Green
Orange
Red
Red blinking
Description
All RF inputs disabled
No active alarms at all of the enabled RF inputs
Alarm (quality or LNB overload) at any of the enabled RF
inputs
Unlock alarm at any of the enabled RF inputs
Unlock alarm at all of the enabled RF inputs
Table 4.2: Description of input LED status.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
7
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
External Programmer
( RJ45)
MLx DVB-S/S2 RECEIVER
TS 1 OUT
Alarm Status LED
TS 2 OUT
TS 3 OUT
TS 4 OUT
TS 5 OUT
TS 6 OUT
TS 7 OUT
Input Status LED
8
Physical description
Figure 4.1: Description of frontal panel of DVB-S/S2 Receiver.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
ASI OUTPUT
( BNC Female)
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
RF 4
RF OUT
RF 4
RF IN
RF OUT
RF 2
RF IN
RF OUT
Power Supply Connector
+27VDC (Jack Male)
RF 1
RF IN
RF OUT
RF IN
Reset Connector
(Jack 2,5 mm Female)
Telecontrol Connector
(Jack 2,5 mm Female)
DVB-S/S2 loop-through Output Connector
(F Female)
9
Physical description
Figure 4.2: Description of rear panel of DVB-S/S2 Receiver.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
DVB-S/S2 Input Connector
(F Female)
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Functional Description
5 Functional Description
DVB-S/S2 Receiver provides a complete satellite reception for a transmitter system. The
internal operation of the unit is detailed in the block diagrams of Figure 5.1.
Figure 5.1: Block diagram of the internal operation of the DVB-S/S2 Receiver.
All necessary internal voltages to operate the equipment are generated through converters DC/DC in the power supply stage from the 27VDC input voltage. The power supply
of the unit can be reset from an external pin.
The DVB-S/S2 Receiver features four RF signal inputs and seven transport stream outputs. There are also four RF loop-through connectors, one for each RF input. These
loop-through connectors provide more flexibility to the unit because any of the RF inputs
can be fed just by using one satellite antenna. Moreover, each RF input has its own LNB
control block, being possible to supply and configure up to four different LNB’s.
Internal software processing is able to provide an automatic redundant functionallity for
the RF inputs. In case of an unlock error in a RF input, this one can be automatically
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
10
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Functional Description
RF inputs software activation
redundant by another RF input.
Regarding the functional blocks, the DVB-S/S2 Receiver is mainly composed by two demodulators (compatible with DVB-S and DVB-S2), four tuners and a FPGA. On the one
hand, the demodulators can work in dual mode, which means that can demodulate two
RF inputs coming from tuners at the same time. On the other hand, the FPGA is not only
in charge of configuring and monitoring both the demodulators and the tuners, but also
of generating up to seven different transport stream outputs.
5.1 RF inputs software activation
The hardware is ready to support up to four RF inputs, but none is implemented by default. Activate RF inputs is a software option.
To activate the RF inputs (up to 4) is necessary to activate a software option in the module
through an activation key, a string of 8-digit alpha-numeric type:
D4A67C59
i
This code is only valid for the module and for the number of input(s) for
which it was generated and is not valid for another different module or for
more inputs. Once activated, is not able to be desactivated by user.
5.2 ASI outputs software activation
The hardware is ready to support up to seven ASI outputs streams, but none is implemented by default. Activate ASI outputs streams is a software option.
To activate the ASI outputs (up to 7) is necessary to activate a software option in the
module through an activation key, a string of 8-digit alpha-numeric type:
B1AF5C59
i
This code is only valid for the module and for the number of output(s) for
which it was generated and is not valid for another different module or for
more outputs. Once activated, is not able to be desactivated by user.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
11
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Functional Description
Settings
5.3 Settings
Equipment has a number of adjustable parameters detailed below and summarized in
Table 5.1. These parameters are accessible both locally and remotely.
Parameter
RF input x (x = 1..4) status
LNB x (x = 1..4) enabling
Frequency LNB x (x = 1..4)
Polarization input x (x = 1..4)
LO Frequency LNB x (x = 1..4) (for low band
in dual mode)
Dual LNB x (x = 1..4) enabling
High band LO Frequency LNB x (x = 1..4) (only
in dual mode)
Band Frequency input x (x = 1..4)
DVB Mode input x (x = 1..4)
Satellite position input x (x = 1..4)
PLS input x (x = 1..4)
Symbol Rate input x (x = 1..4)
ASI output y (y = 1..7) status
RF input from ASI output y (y = 1..7) is routed
ISI of RF input x (x = 1..4) from ASI output y
(y = 1..7) is routed
Mode of ASI output y (y = 1..7)
Redundancy of RF input x (x = 1..4)
Hysteresis for RF redundancy
Control address
RF inputs activated
ASI outputs activated
Date and hour
Language
Range
Enabled or disabled
On / Off
in MHz
Horizontal or vertical
in MHz
On / Off
in MHz
950MHz to 2150MHz
DVB-S, DVB-S2 or auto
A, B, C or D
0 to 262143. Only for DVB-S2.
Auto or manual (1000 to 45000 KS/s)
Enabled or disabled
RF1 to RF4
0..255
Byte or packet
RF input z (z = 1..4; z 6= x)
00:00 min to 99:59 min:seg
0 to 254
activated (1..4) or not activated
activated (1..7) or not activated
Spanish, English or French
Table 5.1: Settings.
RF input x (x = 1..4) status
Allows enabling or disabling the RF input x, with x from 1 to 4.
If two inputs have to be enabled, it is recommended that you use inputs 1 and 3 (or
2 and 4) in order to optimize the performance because of the limitations of the dual
demodulators.
i
For each input, this parameter (and the following ones related to that input) is
only available when the corresponding software option activation is done.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
12
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Functional Description
Settings
LNB x (x = 1..4) enabling
Allows enabling or disabling the LNB control for inputs from 1 to 4.
Frequency LNB x (x = 1..4)
Allows setting the downlink frequency in MHz for inputs from 1 to 4.
For Ku-band, Downlink Frequency = LO Frequency + band Frequency. The possible
range is from 10700MHz to 12750MHz.
Polarization input x (x = 1..4)
Allows setting which polarization is passed on through the LNB (controlled by the voltage
of the LNB’s power supply: 13V for vertical and 18V for horizontal) of inputs from 1 to 4.
LO Frequency LNB x (x = 1..4)
Allows setting the satellite antenna LNB local oscillator (LO) frequency in MHz for inputs
from 1 to 4. In case of LNB dual mode this parameter sets the low band LO frequency.
Dual LNB x (x = 1..4) enabling
Allows enabling or disabling the dual mode of the LNB input from 1 to 4.
High band LO Frequency LNB x (x = 1..4)
Allows setting the satellite antenna LNB local oscillator (LO) frequency in MHz for High
band for inputs from 1 to 4. Only in case of LNB dual mode.
Frequency LNB x (x = 1..4)
If the LNB is disabled, it is possible to set the frequency band in MHz. The possible range
is from 950MHz to 2150MHz.
DVB Mode input x (x = 1..4)
Allows selecting the desired DVB standard for inputs from 1 to 4. The possible values
are: manual DVB-S, manual DVB-S2 or automatic detection.
Satellite position input x (x = 1..4)
For each input from 1 to 4, this parameter allows selecting the satellite position: A, B, C
or D.
PLS input x (x = 1..4)
For each input from 1 to 4, this parameter allows setting the PLS (Physical Layer Scrambling) value from 0 to 262143. Only in DVB-S2 mode.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
13
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Functional Description
Settings
Symbol Rate input x (x = 1..4)
For each input from 1 to 4, the symbol rate in KS/s for the input signal can be set manually
or automatically detected. In case of a manual configuration, the symbol rate must match
the symbol rate of the transmitted signal. The possible range is from 1000 to 450000
KS/s, depending on the DVB Mode.
ASI output y (y = 1..7) status
Allows enabling or disabling the ASI output y, with y from 1 to 7.
i
For each output, this parameter (and the following ones related to that output) is
only available when the corresponding software option activation is done.
RF input from ASI output y (y = 1..7) is routed
Allows setting the RF input stream (Input Source from 1 to 4) for the selected output from
1 to 7.
ISI of RF input x (x = 1..4) from ASI output y (y = 1..7) is routed
Allows setting the ISI (Input Stream Identifier) from RF input stream (selected before) for
the selected output from 1 to 7. This identifier can be set manually or can be selected
from the detected ISI list in the input stream. Only available in DVB-S2 mode.
Mode of ASI output y (y = 1..7)
For each output from 1 to 7, this parameter allows selecting the ASI mode: byte or packet.
Redundancy of RF input x (x = 1..4)
For each input from 1 to 4, this parameter allows selecting one alternative input stream.
This alternative input stream will be automatically selected in case of an error detected
in main stream as a redundant input. System will not return to main stream in case of
recovering.
Each RF input only can be involved in one redundant combination. So it is not possible
to set a chain of redundancy.
Hysteresis for RF redundancy
For each redundancy combination, this parameter allows setting the hysteresis time of
the switching. The possible range is from 00:00 min to 99:59 min:seg.
Control address
This is a local parameter that allows changing the remote control address of the module used by the Management module. See chapter 7 for more information about this
parameter.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
14
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Functional Description
Settings
RF inputs activated
This is a local parameter that allows you to check how many inputs that are activated.
See chapter 7 for more information about this parameter.
ASI outputs activated
This is a local parameter that allows you to check how many outputs are activated. See
chapter 7 for more information about this parameter.
Date and hour
Those parameters are only configured by Management module.
Language
Selects the menu language of external programmer. Selectable languages are English,
Spanish or French.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
15
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Functional Description
Measurements
5.4 Measurements
Equipment has a number of measurements summarized in Table 5.2. These parameters
are accessible both locally and remotely.
Parameter
Lock status RF input x (x = 1..4)
ISIs from RF input x (x = 1..4)
IQ Mode input x (x = 1..4)
Roll-Off from RF input x (x = 1..4)
Pilots from RF input x (x = 1..4)
Frame Length from RF input x (x = 1..4)
Modulation from RF input x (x = 1..4)
FEC from RF input x (x = 1..4)
CBER (DVB-S) from RF input x (x = 1..4)
VBER (DVB-S) from RF input x (x = 1..4)
LDPCBER (DVB-S2) from RF input x (x = 1..4)
PER (DVB-S2) from RF input x (x = 1..4)
C/N from RF input x (x = 1..4)
LinkMargin (DVB-S2) from RF input x (x =
1..4)
Power from RF input x (x = 1..4)
Data rate from ASI output y (y = 1..7)
Temperature
Usual Range
Lock or unlock
Up to 16 (from 0 to 255)
Normal or inverted
0.2, 0.25 or 0.35
Yes or no
Short or long
QPSK, 8PSK, 16APSK and
32APSK
All modes availables according to
DVB-S and DVB-S2 standards
in dB
in dB
in dBm
in Mbps
in o C
Table 5.2: Measurements.
Lock status RF input x (x = 1..4)
For each RF input indicates the signal locking status: Lock or unlock.
ISIs from RF input x (x = 1..4)
For each RF input shows a list of the ISI’s (Input Stream Identifiers) detected at the input
stream.
IQ Mode input x (x = 1..4)
For each RF input indicates the IQ (Input Signal Inversion) Mode (normal or inverted)
detected at the input stream.
Roll-Off from RF input x (x = 1..4)
For each RF input indicates the Roll-Off factor (0.2, 0.25 or 0.35) detected at the input
stream.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
16
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Functional Description
Measurements
Pilots from RF input x (x = 1..4)
For each RF input indicates whether a Pilot is present. The Pilot is set at the modulator
for input signal synchronization purposes.
Frame Length from RF input x (x = 1..4)
For each RF input indicates whether the frame length is short or long.
Modulation from RF input x (x = 1..4)
For each RF input indicates the Modulation type detected at the input stream. Possible
values are QPSK, 8PSK, 16APSK and 32APSK.
FEC from RF input x (x = 1..4)
Indicates the current FEC (Forward Error Correction) rate for the selected input. Possible
values are all modes availables according to DVB-S and DVB-S2 standards.
CBER from RF input x (x = 1..4)
Indicates the current CBER (pre-Viterbi BER) for each input.
This measurement is only available in DVB-S mode.
This value determines the activation of the Quality RF Alarm.
VBER from RF input x (x = 1..4)
Indicates the current VBER (post-Viterbi BER) for each input.
This measurement is only available in DVB-S mode.
This value determines the activation of the Quality RF Alarm.
LDPCBER from RF input x (x = 1..4)
Indicates the current LDPCBER (BER before LDPC) for each input.
This measurement is only available in DVB-S2 mode.
This value determines the activation of the Quality RF Alarm.
PER from RF input x (x = 1..4)
Indicates the current PER (TS Packet Error Rate) for each input.
This measurement is only available in DVB-S2 mode.
This value determines the activation of the Quality RF Alarm.
C/N from RF input x (x = 1..4)
Indicates the current Carrier-to-Noise rate (in dB) for each input.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
17
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Functional Description
Measurements
LinkMargin from RF input x (x = 1..4)
Indicates the current Link Margin (in dB) for each input. The Link Margin is the actual
distance that C/N is from the noise threshold. This measurement is only available in
DVB-S2 mode.
Power from RF input x (x = 1..4)
Indicates the current signal level (in dBm) for each input.
Data rate from ASI output y (y = 1..7)
Indicates the output rate (in Mbps) for each ASI input.
Temperature
Indicates the temperature (in o C) measured at internal board. This value determines the
activation of the Temperature Alarm.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
18
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Functional Description
Alarms
5.5 Alarms
The specific alarms of the module are detailed in Table 5.3.
Code
AI101
AI201
AI301
AI401
AI102
AI202
AI302
AI402
AI103
AI203
AI303
AI403
AO101
AO201
AO301
AO401
AO501
AO601
AO701
ART03
AHW02
Name
Unlock RF1
Unlock RF2
Unlock RF3
Unlock RF4
LNB1 Overload
LNB2 Overload
LNB3 Overload
LNB4 Overload
Quality RF1
Quality RF2
Quality RF3
Quality RF4
ASI1 Output
ASI2 Output
ASI3 Output
ASI4 Output
ASI5 Output
ASI6 Output
ASI7 Output
Temperature
HW error
Description
RF input 1 unlocked.
RF input 2 unlocked.
RF input 3 unlocked.
RF input 4 unlocked.
LNB 1 overload.
LNB 2 overload.
LNB 3 overload.
LNB 4 overload.
Poor quality signal(1) at RF input
Poor quality signal(1) at RF input
Poor quality signal(1) at RF input
Poor quality signal(1) at RF input
ASI 1 output error.
ASI 2 output error.
ASI 3 output error.
ASI 4 output error.
ASI 5 output error.
ASI 6 output error.
ASI 7 output error.
Internal overtemperature(2) .
Internal hardware failure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Table 5.3: Alarms.
(1)
Poor quality signal thresholds:
Measurement
CBER (DVB-S)
VBER (DVB-S)
LDPCBER (DVB-S2)
PER (DVB-S2)
(2)
Threshold
2.0e−2
1.0e−4
2.0e−2
1.0e−4
The Temperature measured reaches 65o C.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
19
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Remote Control and Monitoring
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
The remote control and monitoring system is based on the use of the Management
module, which communicates with all the modules of the system via a RS485 bus in
back pannel unit.
The Management Module monitors the measures and alarms of all the system’s modules, allowing to change their settings.
Each module is assigned with a different remote control address that identifies it within
the shared communication bus.
The system enables remote management and communication with a remote monitoring
center. This communication can be of various types and using various interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, GSM/GPRS/UMTS).
For more details, please refer to the chapter "Operation" in System Manual.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
20
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Local control
7 Local control
Following is detailed the menus structure corresponding to the External Programmer
interface (see External Programmer manual for more details).
Menu structure
The menus in this module follow the tree structure shown below:
DVB-S2/ASI
Converter
1.01
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.INPUTS
3.OUTPUTS
4.SYSTEM
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
..
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
..
REDUNDANCY
RF INPUT 1
RF INPUT 2
RF INPUT 3
RF INPUT 4
..
Unlock RF1
ASI1 Output
..
RF1:Red.RF3
RF2:
RF3:
Aux
RF4:
Hyst: 0m10s
LOG
02/04
ART03
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
..
ART03:
AI101:
AI201:
AI301:
AI401:
AI102:
AI202:
AI302:
AI402:
AI103:
AI203:
AI303:
AI403:
AO101:
AO201:
AO301:
AO401:
AO501:
AO601:
AO701:
AHW02:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
000s
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
..
ART03:
AI101:
AI201:
AI301:
AI401:
AI102:
AI202:
AI302:
AI402:
AI103:
AI203:
AI303:
AI403:
AO101:
AO201:
AO301:
AO401:
AO501:
AO601:
AO701:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
..
ART03:
AI101:
AI201:
AI301:
AI401:
AI102:
AI202:
AI302:
AI402:
AI103:
AI203:
AI303:
AI403:
AO101:
AO201:
AO301:
AO401:
AO501:
AO601:
AO701:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
ASI1
ASI2
ASI3
ASI4
ASI5
ASI6
ASI7
..
RFs:
4
ASIs:
7
CTRLadd:041
Tem:+34.0ºC
01:19:19
00/00/0000
..
ENABLED: ON
RF1 ISI:002
Routed: RF1
19.900 Mbps
MODE: BYTE
..
ENABLED: ON
LNB:
ON
F:11012.0 V
FR:L 1262.0
Locked: OK
CONFIG. LNB
MODE: AUTO
STD: DVB-S2
SR M: AUTO
SR: 30000KS
SAT:
B
PLS: 131070
IQ: Normal
RL-OFF:0.20
Pilots: YES
Frame: LONG
ISIS
MOD:
8PSK
FEC:
3/5
LDPC:6.1e-4
PER: 6.1e-4
C/N: 13.9dB
LKM: 8.4dB
P: -47.4dBm
Language
selection
--------English
..
DVB-S2/ASI
Converter
Vers: 1.00
Des: 00001
..
MODE: DUAL
OL Lo: 9750
OL Hi:10600
..
Serial Num
050712452001
ISIs
1/1
2, 3, 11
Legend
Short press square
Long press square
Short press circle
Long press circle
Press up
Press down
21
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Local control
Alarms Menu
When connecting the external programmer to the module, first of all the firmware version
of the External Programmer is displayed for a few seconds. After this, a welcome screen
showing the unit type and firmware version is displayed:
DVB-S2/ASI
Converter
1.01
Start menu allows selecting one of main menus, Alarms, Inputs, Outputs and System:
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.INPUTS
3.OUTPUTS
4.SYSTEM
7.1 Alarms Menu
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Status, Log or Configuration.
7.1.1 Alarms > Status Menu
..
Unlock RF1
ASI1 Output
This menu shows the active alarms on the equipment. The list of possible alarms is
shown in the following table:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
22
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Local control
Alarms Menu
Text alarm
Unlock RF1
Unlock RF2
Unlock RF3
Unlock RF4
Overlo.LNB1
Overlo.LNB2
Overlo.LNB3
Overlo.LNB4
Quality RF1
Quality RF2
Quality RF3
Quality RF4
ASI1 Output
ASI2 Output
ASI3 Output
ASI4 Output
ASI5 Output
ASI6 Output
ASI7 Output
Temperature
HW error
Alarm description
AI101 RF1 input unlock
AI201 RF2 input unlock
AI301 RF3 input unlock
AI401 RF4 input unlock
AI102 LNB 1 overload
AI202 LNB 2 overload
AI302 LNB 3 overload
AI402 LNB 4 overload
AI103 Quality RF1 input
AI203 Quality RF2 input
AI303 Quality RF3 input
AI403 Quality RF4 input
AO101 ASI 1 output error
AO201 ASI 2 output error
AO301 ASI 3 output error
AO401 ASI 4 output error
AO501 ASI 5 output error
AO601 ASI 6 output error
AO701 ASI 7 output error
ART03 Temperature
AHW02 HW error
Remarks
7.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu
LOG
02/04
ART03
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
This menu shows a log of the alarms on the equipment.
7.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Hysteresis, Enable or Log
ON/OFF.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
23
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Local control
Alarms Menu
7.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu
..
ART03:
AI101:
AI201:
AI301:
AI401:
AI102:
AI202:
AI302:
AI402:
AI103:
AI203:
AI303:
AI403:
AO101:
AO201:
AO301:
AO401:
AO501:
AO601:
AO701:
AHW02:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
000s
This menu allows setting the alarms hysteresis.
7.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu
..
ART03:
AI101:
AI201:
AI301:
AI401:
AI102:
AI202:
AI302:
AI402:
AI103:
AI203:
AI303:
AI403:
AO101:
AO201:
AO301:
AO401:
AO501:
AO601:
AO701:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows enabling or disabling alarms.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
24
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Local control
Inputs Menu
7.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
..
ART03:
AI101:
AI201:
AI301:
AI401:
AI102:
AI202:
AI302:
AI402:
AI103:
AI203:
AI303:
AI403:
AO101:
AO201:
AO301:
AO401:
AO501:
AO601:
AO701:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows configuring which alarms are to be shown in the log.
7.2 Inputs Menu
..
REDUNDANCY
RF INPUT 1
RF INPUT 2
RF INPUT 3
RF INPUT 4
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Redundancy, RF input 1,
RF input 2, RF input 3 or RF input 4.
7.2.1 Inputs > Redundancy menu
..
RF1:Red.RF3
RF2:
RF3:
Aux
RF4:
Hyst: 0m10s
This menu lets you configure the input redundancy parameters.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
25
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Local control
Inputs Menu
Parameter
RF1
Description
Redundant input for RF1
RF2
Redundant input for RF2
RF3
Redundant input for RF3
RF4
Redundant input for RF4
Hyst
Hysteresis for switching between redundant inputs
Range
Red.RF2, Red.RF3, Red.RF4,
Aux(=is a redundant input),
-(=Without redundancy)
Red.RF1, Red.RF3, Red.RF4,
Aux(=is a redundant input),
-(=Without redundancy)
Red.RF1, Red.RF2, Red.RF4,
Aux(=is a redundant input),
-(=Without redundancy)
Red.RF1, Red.RF2, Red.RF3,
Aux(=is a redundant input),
-(=Without redundancy)
00m 00s to 99m 59s
7.2.2 Inputs > RF input 1 menu
..
ENABLED: ON
LNB:
ON
F:11012.0 V
FR:L 1262.0
Locked: OK
CONFIG. LNB
MODE: AUTO
STD: DVB-S2
SR M: AUTO
SR: 30000KS
SAT:
B
PLS: 131070
IQ: Normal
RL-OFF:0.20
Pilots: YES
Frame: LONG
ISIS
MOD:
8PSK
FEC:
3/5
LDPC:6.1e-4
PER: 6.1e-4
C/N: 13.9dB
LKM: 8.4dB
P: -47.4dBm
This menu lets you configure the RF1 input parameters.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
26
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Local control
Inputs Menu
Parameter
ENABLED
LNB
F
FR
Locked
CONFIG.
LNB
MODE
STD
SR M
SR
SAT
PLS
IQ
RL-OFF
Pilots
Frame
ISIS
MOD
FEC
CBER
VBER
LDPC
PER
C/N
LKM
P
Description
RF 1 enabling
LNB 1 enabling
LNB frequency (vertical or horizontal)
Frequency
Locked or unlocked
Enter to LNB parameters submenu*
DVB Standard configuration
DVB Standard (only in mode
auto)
Simbol rate auto or manual
Simbol rate
Satellite position
Physical Layer Scrambling
IQ mode
Roll-Off
Pilots
Frame Length
Enter to ISIs submenu**
Modulation read
FEC read
CBER (DVB-S)
VBER (DVB-S)
LDPC BER (DVB-S2)
PER (DVB-S2)
C/N
LKM (DVB-S2)
Power
Range
ON to OFF
ON to OFF
[MHz] V(=vertical) / H (=horizontal)
L(=low) / H(=high) [MHz]
OK (=locked) / - (=unlocked)
Press square key to enter
DVB-S / DVB-S2 / AUTO
DVB-S / DVB-S2
AUTO / MANUAL
[KS/s] 1000 to 45000
A/B/C/D
0 to 262143
Normal / Inverted
0.20 / 0.25 / 0.35
YES / NO
SHORT / LONG
Press square key to enter
QPSK / 8PSK / 16APSK / 32APSK
[dB]
[dB]
[dBm]
*LNB parameters submenu:
..
MODE: DUAL
OL Lo: 9750
OL Hi:10600
Parameter
Range
MODE
Description
LNB Mode dual or single
LO [Lo in dual
LO frequency (for Low band in dual mode)
[MHz]
LO frequency for high band (only in dual
mode)
[MHz]
DUAL
SINGLE
/
mode]
LO Hi
**ISIs submenu:
ISIs
1/1
2, 3, 11
This menu shows the ISIs detected at the input.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
27
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Local control
Outputs menu
7.2.3 Inputs > RF input 2 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for RF input 1.
7.2.4 Inputs > RF input 3 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for RF input 1.
7.2.5 Inputs > RF input 4 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for RF input 1.
7.3 Outputs menu
..
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
ASI1
ASI2
ASI3
ASI4
ASI5
ASI6
ASI7
This menu lets you select one of these submenus: Output ASI1, Output ASI2, Output
ASI3, Output ASI4, Output ASI5, Output ASI6 and Output ASI7.
7.3.1 Outputs > Output ASI1 menu
..
ENABLED: ON
RF1 ISI:002
Routed: RF1
19.900 Mbps
MODE: BYTE
Parameter
ENABLED
RFx ISI
Routed
Mbps
MODE
Description
ASI 1 enabling
RF and ISI routed
RF routed
Data rate
ASI mode, byte or packet
Range
ON to OFF
RFx (x=1..4) and ISI 0 to 255
RF1 to RF4
[Mbps]
BYTE to PKT
7.3.2 Outputs > Output ASI2 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for output ASI1.
7.3.3 Outputs > Output ASI3 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for output ASI1.
7.3.4 Outputs > Output ASI4 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for output ASI1.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
28
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Local control
System menu
7.3.5 Outputs > Output ASI5 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for output ASI1.
7.3.6 Outputs > Output ASI6 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for output ASI1.
7.3.7 Outputs > Output ASI7 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for output ASI1.
7.4 System menu
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
This menu lets you select one of these submenus: Configuration, Language, Version
and Serial number.
7.4.1 System > Configuration Menu
..
RFs:
4
ASIs:
7
CTRLadd:041
Tem:+34.0ºC
01:19:19
00/00/0000
Text
RFs
ASIs
CTRLadd
Tem
00:00:00
00/00/00000
Parameter
RF inputs activated*
ASI outputs activated*
Control address
Internal Temperature
Internal time
Internal date
Normal range
0 to 4
0 to 7
1 to 254
[o C]
hh:mm:ss
dd/mm/YYYY
* In case of less than 4 inputs (or 7 outputs) activated this parameter also allows you to
enter the RF inputs (or ASI outputs) activation codes by pressing the circle key.
7.4.2 System > Language Menu
Language
selection
--------English
This menu allows selecting the menu language for the external programmer. The available languages are Spanish (Español) , English (English) or French (Français).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
29
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Local control
System menu
7.4.3 System > Version Menu
..
DVB-S2/ASI
Converter
Vers: 1.00
Des: 00001
Text
Vers
Des
Parameter
Microcontroller version
Microcontroller developement version
Remarks
7.4.4 System > Serial number Menu
..
Serial Num
050712452001
This menu shows the internal serial number of the equipment.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
30
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Troubleshooting
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED and alarm status
Alarm LED
OFF
OFF
Input LED
OFF
Green
-
OFF
Green
Green
Orange
-
Red
-
Red blinking
-
-
Orange
-
Red
-
Red blinking
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Description
No power supply
DVB-S/S2 Receiver is at bootloader rutine. Execute a software reset.
All RF inputs disabled. Enable the desired RF
inputs.
All the enabled RF inputs locked and no alarmas at all the enabled outputs.
Alarm temperature or HW error. In case of
Alarm temperature check the ambient conditions. In case of HW error the DVB-S/S2 Receiver is damaged.
Error at any of the enabled outputs (see section 8.2).
Error at all of the enabled outputs (see section
8.2).
Alarm quality or LNB overload at any of the
enabled RF inputs (see section 8.2).
Unlock alarm at any of the enabled RF inputs.
(see section 8.2).
Unlock alarm at all of the enabled RF inputs.
(see section 8.2).
31
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
Service failure
The Status LED of
DVB-S2/ASI and Power
Supply Unit are ON?
YES
Go to "No ASI output"
flowchart.
NO
Check the Power Supply
Unit troubleshooting.
NO
Remove the power supply cable
from the DVB-S/S2 Receiver.
The Status LED of
Power Supply Unit is
ON?
YES
The DVB-S/S2 Receiver is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
32
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
No
ASI
output.
Alarm LED: Red
(blinking)
YES
HW error alarm is set?
The DVB-S/S2 Receiver is
damaged
NO
The ASI output is enabled?
NO
Enable the ASI output
YES
ASI Output alarm is
set?
YES
Go to "RF input errors"
flowchart for the RF routed.
NO
The DVB-S/S2 Receiver is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
33
R&SMLx DVB-S/S2 Receiver
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
RF input errors. Input LED 6= Green
The RF input is enabled?
NO
Enable the RF input
YES
LNB overload alarm is
set?
YES
Check the LNB/RF cabling/installation.
YES
Check the LNB/RF parameters, cabling/installation
and antenna orientation.
YES
Check the LNB/RF cabling/installation and antenna orientation.
NO
RF unlock alarm is set?
NO
RF quality alarm is set?
NO
The DVB-S/S2 Receiver is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
34
R&S R MLx
IP-ASI Converter
Instrument Manual
The Instrument Manual describes the following R&S R MLx IP-ASI Converter models and options:
• MLx-B562 MLx IP-ASI-Converter.
• MLX-K55 SAT-RX / IP-ASI OUTPUT KEY.
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&SMLx.
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Overview
3
2 Putting into operation
4
3 Technical specifications
5
4 Physical description
7
5 Functional Description
5.1 ASI outputs software activation
5.2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Measurements . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
7 Local control
7.1 Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Alarms > Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu .
7.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu . . .
7.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
7.2 Inputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Inputs > Ethernet menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 Inputs > Socket IP-1 menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 Inputs > Socket IP-2 menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.4 Inputs > Socket IP-3 menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.5 Inputs > Socket IP-4 menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.6 Inputs > Socket IP-5 menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.7 Inputs > Socket IP-6 menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.8 Inputs > Socket IP-7 menu . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Outputs menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 Outputs > Output ASI1 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2 Outputs > Output ASI2 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.3.3 Outputs > Output ASI3 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.3.4 Outputs > Output ASI4 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.3.5 Outputs > Output ASI5 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.3.6 Outputs > Output ASI6 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.3.7 Outputs > Output ASI7 menu . . . . . . . . .
7.4 System menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
11
12
16
17
18
19
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
23
25
26
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
28
1
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
.
.
.
.
28
28
28
29
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
System > Configuration Menu
System > Language Menu . .
System > Version Menu . . . .
System > Serial number Menu
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
31
2
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Overview
1 Overview
The MLx IP-ASI Converter is based on an embedded Gigabit Ethernet switch with two
GbE ports. This unit can generate up to seven Transport Streams, using single or multiple IP addresses.
The internal control system of the device enables both internal configuration and measures. The equipment can be managed locally and remotely by connecting the Management Module. The equipment can also be managed locally by connecting the External
Programmer.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
3
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Putting into operation
2 Putting into operation
Follow the instructions described in this chapter to perform your first operation with the
equipment. For a further measurement examples and background information, please
refer to next chapters.
• Log on to the Management Module via web browser.
• Go to Configuration > Modules menu and select the module.
• Set the IP address of the Host (parameters Unicast IP).
• Configure the IP Sockets 1 to 7 (parameters Status, Multicast IP (if needed)
and Port).
• Configure the ASI Outputs 1 to 7 (parameter Status) and route each output from
a socket (parameter IP Socket).
• Go to Status menu and select the module.
• Check the data rate of the enabled inputs (parameter IP Socket-x) and the enabled outputs (parameter ASI output-x) .
• Check that there are no alarms.
• Check that frontal ALARM LED and INPUT LED keep green.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
4
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Technical specifications
3 Technical specifications
GbE Port
Physical Layer:
Data Rate:
Number of inputs:
Input connector:
Port capabilities:
IEEE 802.3af
10/100/1000 base-T
2 (1 also working as loop-through output)
RJ45
Switch GbE
Transport Stream
TS per IP:
Encapsulation:
Up to 7
UDP / RTP
Network protocols
IP-address assignment :
Number of IP addresses:
Multicast:
Protocols:
DHCP or static
1 (up to 7 multicast)
IGMP v2/v3
IPv4, VLAN, SMTPE 2022-1, SMTPE
2022-2, RFC 3550, RFC 2250, RFC
2733
ASI Outputs
Number of outputs:
Output connector:
Output impedance:
Data Rate:
Return losses:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
7
BNC female
75Ω
120Mbps
>15dB @ 270MHz
5
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Technical specifications
Power supply:
DC Input voltage:
DC Input voltage connector:
DC voltage reset connector:
DC Power Consumption:
27 ± 0.3 VDC
2 x SMD power jack male (2.1mm ID,
5.5mm OD)
2 x SMD jack female (2.5mm)
3.6W
Temperature:
Operating temperature:
Relative humidity:
0 to 45o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
Dimensions & Weight:
Dimensions (WxHxD):
Weight:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
483 x43x140 mm
1 Kg
6
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Physical description
4 Physical description
Figure 4.1 details frontal connectors and Figure 4.2 details rear connectors.
Alarm status LED
LED status
Off
Green
Orange
Red
Red blinking
Description
No power supply or bootloader
No active alarms
Temperature alarm or HW error
Error at any of the enabled outputs
Error at all of the enabled outputs
Table 4.1: Description of alarm LED status.
Input status LED
LED status
Off
Green
Red
Red blinking
Description
All input sockets disabled
No active alarms at input sockets
Alarm at any of the enabled input sockets
Alarm at all of the enabled input sockets
Table 4.2: Description of input LED status.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
7
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
External Programmer
( RJ45)
MLx IP -ASI CONVERTER
TS 1 OUT
Alarm Status LED
TS 2 OUT
TS 3 OUT
TS 4 OUT
TS 5 OUT
TS 6 OUT
TS 7 OUT
Input Status LED
8
Physical description
Figure 4.1: Description of frontal panel of the unit.
ASI OUTPUT
( BNC Female)
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Figure 4.2: Description of rear panel of the unit.
TSoIP inputs(1 also as loop-through output)
(RJ45)
IP 2
Power Supply Connector
+27VDC (Jack Male)
IP 1
Reset Connector
(Jack 2,5 mm Female)
Telecontrol Connector
(Jack 2,5 mm Female)
Physical description
9
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Functional Description
5 Functional Description
IP-ASI Converter provides a complete TSoIP reception for a transmitter system. The
internal operation of the unit is detailed in the blocks diagram of Figure 5.1.
Figure 5.1: Block diagram of the internal operation of the IP-ASI Converter.
All necessary internal voltages to operate the equipment are generated through converters DC/DC in the power supply stage from the 27VDC input voltage. The power supply
of the unit can be reset from an external pin.
The IP-ASI Converter features two Ethernet inputs and seven transport stream outputs
and is mainly composed by a GbE switch and a TSoIP processor. The GbE switch can
handle two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet inputs. Each one of the seven transport stream
output can be routed to any of the Ethernet inputs via seven IP sockets, being also possible to route every output to the same Ethernet input.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
10
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Functional Description
ASI outputs software activation
The bitrate limit of a single transport stream is 120Mbps. However, it also depends on the
Ethernet link speed and the number of IP sockets established over an Ethernet interface.
Network jitter can be absorbed by buffering at the receiver. The system have been designed to be possible modifying the size of this buffer, as networks can have either significantly better or worse jitter performance.
5.1 ASI outputs software activation
The hardware is ready to support up to seven ASI outputs streams, but none is implemented by default. Activate ASI outputs streams is a software option.
To activate the ASI outputs (up to 7) is necessary to activate a software option in the
module through an activation key, a string of 8-digit alpha-numeric type:
B1AF5C59
i
This code is only valid for the module and for the number of output(s) for
which it was generated and is not valid for another different module or for
more outputs. Once activated, is not able to be desactivated by user.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
11
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Functional Description
Settings
5.2 Settings
Equipment has a number of adjustable parameters detailed below and summarized in
Table 5.1. These parameters are accessible both locally and remotely.
Parameter
Ethernet port MAC address
DHCP
Ethernet port IP address (Unicast)
Ethernet port Subnet Mask
Ethernet port Gateway
VLAN status
VLAN Identifier
IGMP version
Socket x (x = 1..7) status
Socket x (x = 1..7) reception mode
Socket x (x = 1..7) multicast IP address
Socket x (x = 1..7) multicast source IP address
(IGMP v3)
Socket x (x = 1..7) Port
Socket x (x = 1..7) Protocol
Socket x (x = 1..7) ASI Mode
Socket x (x = 1..7) Buffer duration
ASI outputs activated
ASI output y (y = 1..7) status
Socket from ASI output y (y = 1..7) is routed
Control address
Date and hour
Language
Range
Enabled or disabled
Enabled or disabled
0..255
Version 2 or version 3
Enabled or disabled
Unicast or multicast
UDP or RTP
Byte or packet
0 to 999 ms
Active (1..7) or not active
Enabled or disabled
Socket-1 to Socket-7
0 to 254
Spanish, English or French
Table 5.1: Settings.
Ethernet port MAC address
Allows checking the Ethernet port MAC address.
DHCP
Allows enabling or disable the DHCP client.
Ethernet port IP address (Unicast)
Allows setting the IP address of the Ethernet port. This is also the IP address for Unicast
services.
Ethernet port Subnet Mask
Allows setting the Subnet Mask of the Ethernet port.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
12
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Functional Description
Settings
Ethernet port Gateway
Allows setting the Gateway of the Ethernet port.
VLAN status
Allows enabling or disable the VLAN.
VLAN Identifier
Allows setting the VLAN identifier from 0 to 255.
IGMP version
Allows selecting the version (version 2 or version 3) of the IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) for Multicast services.
Socket x (x = 1..7) status
Allows enabling or disable the input Socket x, with x from 1 to 7.
i
The number of available sockets depends on the number of ASI outputs activated.
This parameter (and the following ones related to that socket) is only available
when the corresponding ASI output software option is activated.
Socket x (x = 1..7) reception mode
For each socket, this parameter allows selecting the reception mode (Unicast or Multicast).
Socket x (x = 1..7) multicast IP address
For each socket, this parameter allows setting the IP address for Multicast services.
Socket x (x = 1..7) multicast source IP address (IGMP v3)
For each socket, this parameter allows setting the source IP address for multicast services.
IGMP version 3 adds support for source filtering; that is, the ability for a system to report
interest in receiving packets only from specific source addresses sent to a particular multicast address. This facility eases the allocation of IPv4 multicast addresses.
Use value 0.0.0.0 to avoid source filtering, it means to accept packets from all addresses.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
13
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Functional Description
Settings
Socket x (x = 1..7) Port
For each socket, this parameter allows setting the IP Socket port.
i
RFC 3550 indicates that RTP should use an even UDP port number, with the
corresponding RTCP stream using the next higher (odd) port number.
Socket x (x = 1..7) Protocol
For each socket, this parameter allows selecting the protocol for the encapsulation of the
incoming transport stream. The possible values are: RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol)
or UDP (User Datagram Protocol).
Socket x (x = 1..7) ASI Mode
For each ASI output from 1 to 7 (each ASI output is directly related to a IP Socket), this
parameter allows selecting the ASI mode: byte or packet.
Socket x (x = 1..7) Buffer duration
For each ASI output from 1 to 7 (each ASI output is directly related to a IP Socket), this
parameter allows setting the buffer duration in order to absorbe the network jitter and the
FEC process.
ASI outputs activated
This is a local parameter that allows checking how many outputs are active. See chapter
7 for more information about this parameter.
ASI output y (y = 1..7) status
Allows enabling or disable the ASI output y, with y from 1 to 7.
i
For each output, this parameter (and the following ones related to that output) is
only available when the corresponding software option is activated.
Socket from ASI output y (y = 1..7) is routed
Allows setting the IP socket (Input Source from 1 to 7) for the selected output from 1 to 7.
Control address
This is a local parameter that allows changing the remote control address of the module used by the Management module. See chapter 7 for more information about this
parameter.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
14
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Functional Description
Settings
Date and hour
Those parameters are only configured by Management module.
Language
Selects the menu language of external programmer. Selectable languages are English,
Spanish or French.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
15
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Functional Description
Measurements
5.3 Measurements
Equipment has a number of measurements summarized in Table 5.2. These parameters
are accessible both locally and remotely.
Parameter
Usual Range
Ethernet port 1 status
Ethernet port 2 status
Data rate from Socket x (x = 1..7)
Latency from Socket x (x = 1..7)
Data rate from ASI output y (y = 1..7)
Temperature
10, 100 or 1000 Mbps. Half-Duplex
or Full-Duplex
10, 100 or 1000 Mbps. Half-Duplex
or Full-Duplex
[Mbps]
[ms]
[Mbps]
[o C]
Table 5.2: Measurements.
Ethernet port 1 status
Indicates the rate (in Mbps) of the Ethernet network connected to port 1. This parameter
also indicates whether the network is Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.
Ethernet port 2 status
Indicates the rate (in Mbps) of the Ethernet network connected to port 2. This parameter
also indicates whether the network is Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.
Data rate from Socket x (x = 1..7)
Indicates the data rate (in Mbps) for each IP Socket input stream.
Latency from Socket x (x = 1..7)
Indicates the latency (in ms) for each IP Socket.
This is the latency that will be incurred by the FEC process and jitter buffer (both are
determined by the buffer duration parameter). This parameter does not include additional
latencies caused by the MPEG decoding process, and the transmission of the IP network.
Data rate from ASI output y (y = 1..7)
Indicates the output rate (in Mbps) for each ASI input.
Temperature
Indicates the temperature (in o C) measured at internal board. This value determines the
activation of the Temperature Alarm.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
16
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Functional Description
Alarms
Code
AIP01
AIP02
AIP03
AIP04
AIP05
AIP06
AIP07
AO101
AO201
AO301
AO401
AO501
AO601
AO701
ART03
AHW02
Name
IP socket error
IP socket error
IP socket error
IP socket error
IP socket error
IP socket error
IP socket error
ASI1 Output
ASI2 Output
ASI3 Output
ASI4 Output
ASI5 Output
ASI6 Output
ASI7 Output
Temperature
HW error
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
IP socket 1 error.
IP socket 2 error.
IP socket 3 error.
IP socket 4 error.
IP socket 5 error.
IP socket 6 error.
IP socket 7 error.
ASI 1 output error.
ASI 2 output error.
ASI 3 output error.
ASI 4 output error.
ASI 5 output error.
ASI 6 output error.
ASI 7 output error.
Internal overtemperature(1) .
Internal hardware failure.
Table 5.3: Alarms.
5.4 Alarms
The specific alarms of the module are detailed in Table 5.3.
(1)
The Temperature measured reaches 65o C.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
17
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Remote Control and Monitoring
6 Remote Control and Monitoring
The remote control and monitoring system is based on the use of the Management
module, which communicates with all the modules of the system via a RS485 bus in
back pannel unit.
The Management Module monitors the measures and alarms of all the system’s modules, allowing to change their settings.
Each module is assigned with a different remote control address that identifies it within
the shared communication bus.
The system enables remote management and communication with a remote monitoring
center. This communication can be of various types and using various interfaces (Ethernet, SNMP, GSM/GPRS/UMTS).
For more details, please refer to the chapter "Operation" in System Manual.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
18
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Local control
7 Local control
Following is detailed the menus structure corresponding to the External Programmer
interface (see External Programmer manual for more details).
Menu structure
The menus in this module follow the tree structure shown below:
IP-ASI
Converter
1.01
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.INPUTS
3.OUTPUTS
4.SYSTEM
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
..
ETHERNET
SOCKET IP-1
SOCKET IP-2
SOCKET IP-3
SOCKET IP-4
SOCKET IP-5
SOCKET IP-6
SOCKET IP-7
..
IP1 error
ASI1 Output
..
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
..
IP1:1000-FD
IP2:
IGMP:
v3
LOG
02/04
ART03
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
..
AS:
7
CTRLadd:061
Tem:+34.0ºC
01:19:19
00/00/0000
..
ENABLED: ON
IP:
1
19.900 Mbps
DHCP:
OFF
UNICAST IP
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
VLAN:
OFF
VLANID:
1
MAC
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
ASI1
ASI2
ASI3
ASI4
ASI5
ASI6
ASI7
..
IP_H:
IP:
IP:
IP_L:
10
0
0
11
Language
selection
--------English
..
MASK_H: 255
MASK:
255
MASK:
255
MASK_L:
0
..
IP/ASI
Converter
Vers: 1.00
Des: 00001
..
GATEW_H: 10
GATEW:
0
GATEW:
0
GATEW_L: 11
..
ART03:
AIP01:
AIP02:
AIP03:
AIP04:
AIP05:
AIP06:
AIP07:
AO101:
AO201:
AO301:
AO401:
AO501:
AO601:
AO701:
AHW02:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
000s
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
..
ART03:
AIP01:
AIP02:
AIP03:
AIP04:
AIP05:
AIP06:
AIP07:
AO101:
AO201:
AO301:
AO401:
AO501:
AO601:
AO701:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
..
ART03:
AIP01:
AIP02:
AIP03:
AIP04:
AIP05:
AIP06:
AIP07:
AO101:
AO201:
AO301:
AO401:
AO501:
AO601:
AO701:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
..
Serial Num
050712452001
..
MAC:00:34:56
78:9A:BC
..
ENABLED: ON
Mod: MCast
MCast IP
Src MCastIP
Port: 1234
Protoc: UDP
Buff: 160ms
Lat: 162ms
MODE: BYTE
19.900 Mbps
..
IP_H:
IP:
IP:
IP_L:
10
0
0
11
Legend
Short press square
Long press square
Short press circle
..
IP_H:
IP:
IP:
IP_L:
Long press circle
10
0
0
11
Press up
Press down
19
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Local control
Alarms Menu
When connecting the external programmer to the module, first of all the firmware version
of the External Programmer is displayed for a few seconds. After this, a welcome screen
showing the unit type and firmware version is displayed:
IP-ASI
Converter
1.01
Start menu allows selecting one of main menus, Alarms, Inputs, Outputs and System:
MENU
1.ALARMS
2.INPUTS
3.OUTPUTS
4.SYSTEM
7.1 Alarms Menu
..
STATE
LOG
CONFIG
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Status, Log or Configuration.
7.1.1 Alarms > Status Menu
..
IP1 error
ASI1 Output
This menu shows the active alarms on the equipment. The list of possible alarms is
shown in the following table:
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
20
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Local control
Alarms Menu
Text alarm
IP1 error
IP2 error
IP3 error
IP4 error
IP5 error
IP6 error
IP7 error
ASI1 Output
ASI2 Output
ASI3 Output
ASI4 Output
ASI5 Output
ASI6 Output
ASI7 Output
Temperature
HW error
Alarm description
AOP01 Input socket 1 error
AOP02 Input socket 2 error
AOP03 Input socket 3 error
AOP04 Input socket 4 error
AOP05 Input socket 5 error
AOP06 Input socket 6 error
AOP07 Input socket 7 error
AO101 ASI 1 output error
AO201 ASI 2 output error
AO301 ASI 3 output error
AO401 ASI 4 output error
AO501 ASI 5 output error
AO601 ASI 6 output error
AO701 ASI 7 output error
ART03 Temperature
AHW02 HW error
Remarks
7.1.2 Alarms > Log Menu
LOG
02/04
ART03
ON
00/00/0000
00:16:53
This menu shows a log of the alarms on the equipment.
7.1.3 Alarms > Configuration Menu
..
HYSTRESIS
ENABLE
LOG ON/OFF
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Hysteresis, Enable or Log
ON/OFF.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
21
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Local control
Alarms Menu
7.1.4 Alarms > Configuration > Hysteresis Menu
..
ART03:
AIP01:
AIP02:
AIP03:
AIP04:
AIP05:
AIP06:
AIP07:
AO101:
AO201:
AO301:
AO401:
AO501:
AO601:
AO701:
AHW02:
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
001s
000s
This menu allows setting the alarms hysteresis.
7.1.5 Alarms > Configuration > Enable Menu
..
ART03:
AIP01:
AIP02:
AIP03:
AIP04:
AIP05:
AIP06:
AIP07:
AO101:
AO201:
AO301:
AO401:
AO501:
AO601:
AO701:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows enabling or disabling alarms.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
22
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Local control
Inputs Menu
7.1.6 Alarms > Configuration > Log ON/OFF Menu
..
ART03:
AIP01:
AIP02:
AIP03:
AIP04:
AIP05:
AIP06:
AIP07:
AO101:
AO201:
AO301:
AO401:
AO501:
AO601:
AO701:
AHW02:
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
This menu allows configuring which alarms are to be shown in the log.
7.2 Inputs Menu
..
ETHERNET
SOCKET IP-1
SOCKET IP-2
SOCKET IP-3
SOCKET IP-4
SOCKET IP-5
SOCKET IP-6
SOCKET IP-7
This menu allows selecting one of the followings submenus: Ethernet, Socket IP-1,
Socket IP-2, Socket IP-3, Socket IP-4, Socket IP-5, Socket IP-6 or Socket IP-7.
7.2.1 Inputs > Ethernet menu
..
IP1:1000-FD
IP2:
IGMP:
v3
DHCP:
OFF
UNICAST IP
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
VLAN:
OFF
VLANID:
1
MAC
This menu lets you configure the ethernet parameters.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
23
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Local control
Inputs Menu
Parameter
(1)
IP1
Description
Ethernet port 1 status
IP2
Ethernet port 2 status
IGMP
DHCP
UNICAST
IP
SUBNET
MASK
GATEWAY
VLAN
VLANID
MAC
Version
DHCP
Enter to unicast IP submenu(1)
Enter
to
Subnet
Mask
submenu(2)
Enter to Gateway submenu(3)
VLAN status
VLAN Identifier
Enter to MAC submenu(4)
Press square key to enter
Press square key to enter
ON / OFF
0 to 4094
Press square key to enter
Unicast IP submenu:
..
IP_H:
IP:
IP:
IP_L:
Parameter
IP_H
IP
IP
IP_L
(2)
Range
10-HD (=10Mbps Half-Duplex)
100-HD (=100Mbps Half-Duplex)
1000-HD (=1000Mbps HalfDuplex)
10-FD (=10Mbps Full-Duplex)
100-FD (=100Mbps Full-Duplex)
1000-FD (=1000Mbps FullDuplex)
10-HD (=10Mbps Half-Duplex)
100-HD (=100Mbps Half-Duplex)
1000-HD (=1000Mbps HalfDuplex)
10-FD (=10Mbps Full-Duplex)
100-FD (=100Mbps Full-Duplex)
1000-FD (=1000Mbps FullDuplex)
v2 / v3
ON / OFF
Press square key to enter
10
0
0
11
Description
The highest order octet of IP
The second octet of IP
The third octet of IP
The lowest order octet of IP
Range
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
Subnet Mask submenu:
..
MASK_H: 255
MASK:
255
MASK:
255
MASK_L:
0
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
24
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Local control
Inputs Menu
Parameter
MASK_H
MASK
MASK
MASK_L
(3)
Description
The highest order octet of Mask
The second octet of Mask
The third octet of Mask
The lowest order octet of Mask
Range
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
Gateway submenu:
..
GATEW_H: 10
GATEW:
0
GATEW:
0
GATEW_L: 11
Parameter
GATEW_H
GATEW
GATEW
GATEW_L
(4)
Description
The highest order octet of Gateway
The second octet of Gateway
The third octet of Gateway
The lowest order octet of Gateway
Range
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
MAC submenu:
..
MAC:00:34:56
78:9A:BC
Parameter
MAC
Description
Ethernet port MAC address
Range
7.2.2 Inputs > Socket IP-1 menu
..
ENABLED: ON
Mod: MCast
MCast IP
Src MCastIP
Port: 1234
Protoc: UDP
Buff: 160ms
Lat: 162ms
MODE: BYTE
19.900 Mbps
This menu lets you configure the Socket IP-1 parameters.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
25
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Local control
Inputs Menu
Parameter
ENABLED
Mod
MCast IP
Src MCastIP
Port
Protoc
Buff
Lat
MODE
XX.XXX Mbps
(1)
Description
Socket 1 status
Socket 1 reception mode
Enter to Multicast IP of Socket
1 submenu(1)
Enter to Source Multicast IP
of Socket 1 submenu(1) (only
IGMPv3)
Socket 1 port
Socket 1 Protocol
Socket 1 buffer duration
Socket 1 latency
Socket 1 ASI Mode
Socket 1 ASI Rate
Range
ON / OFF
Unicast / MCast
Press square key to enter
Press square key to enter
0 to 65535
UDP / RTP
ms
ms
BYTE / PKT
Multicast (and source) IP submenu:
..
IP_H:
IP:
IP:
IP_L:
Parameter
IP_H
IP
IP
IP_L
10
0
0
11
Description
The highest order octet of IP
The second octet of IP
The third octet of IP
The lowest order octet of IP
Range
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
7.2.3 Inputs > Socket IP-2 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for Socket IP-1.
7.2.4 Inputs > Socket IP-3 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for Socket IP-1.
7.2.5 Inputs > Socket IP-4 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for Socket IP-1.
7.2.6 Inputs > Socket IP-5 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for Socket IP-1.
7.2.7 Inputs > Socket IP-6 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for Socket IP-1.
7.2.8 Inputs > Socket IP-7 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for Socket IP-1.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
26
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Local control
Outputs menu
7.3 Outputs menu
..
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
ASI1
ASI2
ASI3
ASI4
ASI5
ASI6
ASI7
This menu lets you select one of these submenus: Output ASI1, Output ASI2, Output
ASI3, Output ASI4, Output ASI5, Output ASI6 and Output ASI7.
7.3.1 Outputs > Output ASI1 menu
..
ENABLED: ON
IP:
1
19.900 Mbps
Parameter
ENABLED
IP
XX.XXX MBps
Description
ASI 1 enabling
Socket IP routed
ASI data rate
Range
ON to OFF
1 to 7
7.3.2 Outputs > Output ASI2 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for output ASI1.
7.3.3 Outputs > Output ASI3 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for output ASI1.
7.3.4 Outputs > Output ASI4 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for output ASI1.
7.3.5 Outputs > Output ASI5 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for output ASI1.
7.3.6 Outputs > Output ASI6 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for output ASI1.
7.3.7 Outputs > Output ASI7 menu
This menu is similar to previous menu for output ASI1.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
27
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Local control
System menu
7.4 System menu
..
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
VERSION
SERIAL NUM
This menu lets you select one of these submenus: Configuration, Language, Version
and Serial number.
7.4.1 System > Configuration Menu
..
AS:
7
CTRLadd:061
Tem:+34.0ºC
01:19:19
00/00/0000
Text
AS
CTRLadd
Tem
00:00:00
00/00/00000
Parameter
ASI outputs activated*
Control address
Internal Temperature
Internal time
Internal date
Normal range
1 to 7
1 to 254
[o C]
hh:mm:ss
dd/mm/YYYY
* In case of less than 7 outputs activated this parameter also allows entering the ASI
outputs activation code by pressing the circle key.
7.4.2 System > Language Menu
Language
selection
--------English
This menu allows selecting the menu language for the external programmer. The available languages are Spanish (Español) , English (English) or French (Français).
7.4.3 System > Version Menu
..
IP/ASI
Converter
Vers: 1.00
Des: 00001
Text
Vers
Des
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Parameter
Microcontroller version
Microcontroller developement version
Remarks
28
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Local control
System menu
7.4.4 System > Serial number Menu
..
Serial Num
050712452001
This menu shows the internal serial number of the equipment.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
29
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Troubleshooting
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED status
Alarm LED
OFF
OFF
Input LED
OFF
Green
-
OFF
Green
Green
Orange
-
Red
-
Red blinking
-
-
Red
-
Red blinking
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Description
No power supply
IP-ASI Converter is at bootloader rutine. Execute a software reset.
All input sockets disabled. Enable the desired
input sockets.
No alarmas at all the enabled input sockets
and at all the enabled outputs.
Alarm temperature or HW error. In case of
Alarm temperature check the ambient conditions. In case of HW error the IP-ASI Converter is damaged.
Error at any of the enabled outputs (see section 8.2).
Error at all of the enabled outputs (see section
8.2).
Alarm at any of the enabled input sockets. (see
section 8.2).
Alarm at all of the enabled input sockets. (see
section 8.2).
30
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
8.2 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
Service failure
The Status LED of
IP/ASI
and
Power
Supply Unit are ON?
YES
Go to "No ASI output"
flowchart.
NO
Check the Power Supply
Unit troubleshooting.
NO
Remove the power supply cable
from the IP-ASI Converter.
The Status LED of
Power Supply Unit is
ON?
YES
The IP-ASI Converter is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
31
R&SMLx IP-ASI Converter
Troubleshooting
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart
No
ASI
output.
Alarm LED: Red
(blinking)
YES
HW error alarm is set?
The IP-ASI Converter is
damaged
NO
The ASI output is enabled?
NO
Enable the ASI output
YES
ASI Output alarm is
set?
YES
Go to "Input socket errors"
flowchart for the socket
routed.
NO
The IP-ASI Converter is damaged
Input socket errors.
Input LED 6= Green
The input socket is enabled?
NO
Enable the input socket
YES
YES
Input alarm is set?
Check the Input socket
parameters
and
cabling/installation.
NO
The IP-ASI Converter is damaged
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
32
R&S R MLx
External Programmer
Instrument Manual
The Instrument Manual describes the following R&S R MLx External Programmer models and options:
• MLx-B014 MLx External Programmer
c 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
R&S R is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:
R&S R MLx is abbreviated as R&SMLx.
R&SMLx External Programmer
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Overview
2
2 Technical specifications
3
3 Physical description
4
4 Functional description
4.1 Mandatory use for External Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
7
1
R&SMLx External Programmer
Overview
1 Overview
MLx External programmer is a serial device that connects to any module of a MLx system and represents the local interface with the user.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
2
R&SMLx External Programmer
Technical specifications
2 Technical specifications
Serial port and power supply connector*:
Screen:
DC power supply voltage :
DC Power Consumption:
Operating temperature:
Relative humidity:
Dimensions (WxHxD):
Weight:
i
RJ45
LCD display 4x12 characters
5VDC
0.35W
0 to 45o C
<95% @40o C, non condensing
50x150x30 mm
0.2 Kg
*Pinout is detailed in functional description.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
3
R&SMLx External Programmer
Physical description
3 Physical description
The main elements of the External programmer (showed in the figure 3.1) are:
• LCD display 4x12 characters.
• 4 buttons.
• 3 LEDs.
• RJ45 connector for serial communication with the module.
Figure 3.1: External Programmer
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
4
R&SMLx External Programmer
Functional description
4 Functional description
Local control is done via a serial device that connects to the module and represents the
local interface with the user. This device is called External programmer and allows
viewing and setting parameters of the equipment.
The main elements of the External programmer (detailed in physical description) are:
• LCD display 4x12 characters.
• 4 buttons.
• 3 LEDs.
• RJ45 connector for serial communication with the module.
External programmer is connected to the RJ45 connector (labeled PRGM) in the front
panel of the module (pinout detailed in figure 4.1). It is supply by +5VDC from the module
itself and the menu structure to be displayed on the LCD is downloaded through a serial
communication with the module. The four command buttons allow navigation and action
on the menus.
PIN
DESC.
1
TX.
2
RX.
3
GND
8
5Vdc
8
1
Figure 4.1: Pinout RJ45 connector.
!
CAUTION
RJ45 connector is just used for serial communication with the External Programmer.
Avoid connecting any Ethernet cable.
When connecting the External programmer, a home screen is diplayed for a few seconds
showing the firmware version of the external programmer, then the home screen of the
module is displayed.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
5
R&SMLx External Programmer
Functional description
PCT firmware
version
-----------V:5.03
Description of the information in the display
The information displayed on the screen is divided into four lines. Usually the first line
allow returning the previos menu, while the other three lines show the parameters and
values from the menu or submenu.
..
Channel: 50
Offset: +1
Fre:706.166
Go to previous menu
Parameter: value
Following chart shows the symbols for indicating the possible statuses of any parameter
at the screen. These symbols appear at the left column of the screen when a parameter
is selected and indicate its meaning:
Symbol
•
→
←֓
Meaning
Editable parameter
Non editable parameter or enter in submenu
Go to previous menu
LEDs
MLx external programmer consists of three LED indicators labeled A, B and C (Fig. 3.1).
The meaning of those LEDs depends on the module to which is connected. These LEDs
remain OFF during normal operation of the module and, generally, relate their green
lights with some alarm condition. When connecting, the External programmer starts a
scanning process and all the LEDs are lighting while the home screen in the external
programmer is shown and the downloads of the module menus is done.
Menus navigation
The navigation and control over the menus is done via the four buttons on the external
programmer (Figure 3.1). The functionality of each key depends on which menu the
external programmer is, but in general, the functionality of the buttons is as shown in the
table below.
Key
△▽
Funcionality
Enter / Exit a sub-menu. Long press to save changes.
Edit parameter selection. Long press to go to main menu.
Increase or decrease the value of a selected parameter.
Navigation screen scroll.
If any parameter is changed, the new configuration needs to be saved. Saving the
new value is done by a long press of the key from any menu/submenu. While saving
one of the two messages of Figure 4.2 will be displayed (depending on the module) and
it will return to the root menu. Any change that takes place without saving it will be
subsequently canceled after 30 seconds.
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
6
R&SMLx External Programmer
Functional description
Mandatory use for External Programmer
Saving
parameters &
restarting
...
Applying
changes
........
(a)
(b)
Figure 4.2: Screens to save changes.
4.1 Mandatory use for External Programmer
External Programmer has a mandatory use for setting the following parameters:
• Control addresses (see chapter "Local Control" in Instrument Manual of Transmitter, Retransmitter, Gap Filler, Management module, GPS Unit and N+1 Switch).
• Power reference (see chapter "Local Control" in Instrument Manual of Transmitter,
Retransmitter and Gap Filler).
• IP address of Ethernet interface at Management module (see chapter "Local Control" in Instrument Manual of Management module).
• Relay assignation to A-modules and B-module in N+1 Switch Units (see chapter
"Local Control" in Instrument Manual of N+1 Switch).
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
7
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Spare part lists
Transmitter DVB-T / Gap Filler / Retransmitter DVB-T
Material number
2501.0101.11
2501.0101.15
2501.0101.19
2501.0101.21
2501.0101.25
2501.0101.29
2501.0201.11
2501.0201.15
2501.0201.19
2501.0201.21
2501.0201.25
2501.0201.29
2501.0301.11
2501.0301.15
2501.0301.19
Type
MLX-B111
MLX-B115
MLX-B119
MLX-B121
MLX-B125
MLX-B129
MLX-B211
MLX-B215
MLX-B219
MLX-B221
MLX-B225
MLX-B229
MLX-B311
MLX-B315
MLX-B319
Description
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
Transmitter 1W DVB-T
Transmitter 5W DVB-T
Transmitter 10W DVB-T
Transmitter 1W DVB-T2
Transmitter 5W DVB-T2
Transmitter 10W DVB-T2
GapFiller 1W Std. EC
GapFiller 5W Std. EC
GapFiller 10W Std. EC
GapFiller 1W Enh. EC
GapFiller 5W Enh. EC
GapFiller 10W Enh. EC
Retransmitter 1W DVB-T
Retransmitter 5W DVB-T
Retransmitter 10W DVB-T
Additional modules
Material number
2501.0018.02
2501.0024.00
2501.0030.00
2501.0047.00
2501.0060.00
2501.0501.00
2501.0518.00
2501.0553.10
2501.0560.02
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Type
MLX-B010
MLX-B011
MLX-B012
MLX-B013
MLX-B015
MLX-B500
MLX-B510
MLX-B550
MLX-B562
Description
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
Power Supply 500W
Management module
Management module with UMTS
Battery for Management module
Basic Unit
GPS Basic Unit
GPS Receiver Module
DVB-S/S2 Rx w/o Decrypt
IP-ASI Converter
1
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Switching Units
Material number
2501.0701.11
2501.0701.12
2501.0701.13
2501.0701.14
2501.0701.15
2501.0701.16
2501.0701.21
2501.0701.22
2501.0701.23
2501.0701.24
2501.0701.25
2501.0701.26
2501.0718.00
Type
MLX-B711
MLX-B712
MLX-B713
MLX-B714
MLX-B715
MLX-B716
MLX-B721
MLX-B722
MLX-B723
MLX-B724
MLX-B725
MLX-B726
MLX-B721
Description
Type
ERST.2
MLX-B099
Description
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
1+1 Switch
2+1 Switch
3+1 Switch
4+1 Switch
5+1 Switch
6+1 Switch
1+1 Switch
2+1 Switch
3+1 Switch
4+1 Switch
5+1 Switch
6+1 Switch
RF Splitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
GapFiller
GapFiller
GapFiller
GapFiller
GapFiller
GapFiller
Logistics
Material number
2501.0082.32
2501.0099.32
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
MLx System Manual CD
MLx System Manual Printed
2
R&SMLx Multichannel Low-Power Transmitter
Aditional spare parts / Spare part kits
Material number
2501.0053.00
2501.0830.02
2501.0830.03
2501.0830.72
2501.0524.00
2501.0724.00
2501.0818.90
2501.0818.91
2501.0818.92
2501.0818.93
2501.0818.94
2501.0818.95
2501.0853.90
2501.0860.90
2501.0876.90
2501.0882.90
System Manual 2501.0099.32 - 09
Type
MLX-B014
ERST.2
ERST.2
ERST.2
MLX-B520
MLX-B751
ERST.2
ERST.2
ERST.2
ERST.2
ERST.2
ERST.2
ERST.2
ERST.2
ERST.2
ERST.2
Description
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
MLx
External Programmer
I/O PLUG FOR MANAGEMENT
UMTS-Antenna
DUMMY LOAD 20W
10MHz/1pps cable 60cm
RF cable 9cm
CABLE SPARE PART KIT
POWER CABLE KIT
AUX EQUIPM. CABLE KIT
N+1 ASI CABLE KIT
N+1 RF CABLE KIT
SAT-RX CABLE KIT
FAN SPARE PART KIT
BLANK PANEL SPARE PART KIT
MOUNTING SPARE PART KIT
GPS ANTENNA KIT
3